|
OBM: What it is and How to Use it in Human Services Organizations |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Regency VI |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: John Austin, Ph.D. |
JOHN AUSTIN (Western Michigan University) |
Description: Summary: This workshop will guide participants through various concepts of performance improvement of individuals and groups in any organization, but especially in human services organizations. The strategies presented will assist attendees in identifying a performance problem, developing measures to collect data on it, diagnosing the problem, developing solutions for the problem, and developing a means for maintaining those solutions. This workshop is appropriate for those who conduct human performance improvement activities in organizational settings, as well owners/operators of small companies or administrators/managers/supervisors in human services or other organizations. Participants should come prepared with an actual performance problem from their organization that they would like to work through during the session. |
Learning Objectives: By the end of the workshop participants should (be able to): 1. Identify the mission of your organization, department and job 2. Identify a pinpoint to focus improvements on 3. Develop a measurement system to measure the pinpoint 4. Diagnose the problem 5. Develop a solution and implementation plan for the problem 6. Develop a plan to maintain the solution 7. Know a collection of strategies that they can use to improve human performance |
Activities: Participants should come to the workshop with ideas in mind for performances they would like to improve. The attendees will identifying a performance problem, develop measures to collect data on it, diagnose the problem, develop solutions for the problem, and develop a means for maintaining those solutions. |
Audience: This workshop is appropriate for those who conduct human performance improvement activities in organizational settings, as well owners/operators of small companies or administrators/managers/supervisors in human services or other organizations. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Human Performance Engineering to Achieve Desired Results |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Techwood |
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Guy S. Bruce, Ed.D. |
GUY S. BRUCE (Appealing Solutions, LLC) |
Description: This workshop is designed to teach a practical and efficient approach to improve any type of human performance. The method is called Human Performance Engineering, (HPE) because like other types of engineering, it is an application of scientific principles to solve human problems. HPE is the application of behavior analysis to solve human performance problems so that individuals and organizations can achieve desired results. The process is called PARSE, an acronym which stands for 1) Pinpoint performance problems worth solving, 2) Analyze their causes, 3) Recommend the best solutions, 4) Solve the problems by designing and implementing the best solutions, and 5) Evaluate effectiveness, efficiency and return on investment of the solutions that you implemented. The PARSE process is cybernetic or self-correcting, because human performance engineers use data on the effectiveness, efficiency, and return on investment of their solutions to redesign their solutions until they have achieved their desired results at an acceptable cost. The skills you acquire in this workshop will allow you to solve performance problems at the individual, process or organizational level. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop the participant will be able to perform the following skills: 1) After collecting information about a client�s desired results and the performance necessary to achieve those results, the designer will pinpoint the client�s performance problems by a) defining the client�s desired results and performance and b) evaluating current results and performance to decide whether the problem is worth solving. 2) Given information about the causes of a client�s performance problems, the designer will analyze those problems, classifying them as �can-do,� �know-how,� and/or �want-to� problems and identifying their causes as defective resources, training, and/or reinforcement contingencies. 3) Given an evaluation of the client�s current performance problems and an analysis of their causes, the designer will list possible solutions, considering the estimated value, cost and compliance of each solution with ethical standards, and recommend those solutions with the best return on investment. 4) Given a list of recommended solutions to a performance problem which may include resources, training, and performance management, the designer will solve the problem by designing and implementing the solutions. 5) After collecting measures of improvement in performance and results, the time and costs to produce the improvement, the designer will evaluate solution effectiveness, efficiency, and return on investment, and recommend design changes needed to produce further improvements. |
Activities: 1) Fluency practice. Participants will gain fluency in component skills of human performance engineering by practicing with flashcards, measuring and graphing their own learning efficiencies. 2) Practice solving human performance problems. Participants will practice solving human performance problems with case studies provided by the instructor. 3) Engineer solutions to human performance problems. Each participant will pinpoint a human performance problem, analyze its causes, recommend the best solutions, solve the problem, and evaluate the effectiveness, efficiency, and return on investment of the solutions. 4) Discuss performance engineering projects. Participants will discuss their performance-engineering projects, presenting their work to the instructor and fellow students and helping their fellow students solve project-related problems. |
Audience: This workshop will be of interest to anyone responsible for solving human performance problems, whether these exist at the individual, process, or organizational levels. For example, it can be used by process engineers, trainers, and managers to improve individual, process, and organizational performance or it can be used by individuals to improve their own performance. It is designed to solve can-do, know-how, and want-to problems, by incorporating solutions from a behavior-analytic approach to the fields of process improvement, instructional design and performance management. For example, HPE can be used to evaluate and improve the design of information, procedures, and tools, or the design of training or educational programs, or the design of performance management procedures. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Functional Analysis and Treatment of "Psychotic" Topographies |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Inman |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Javier Virues Ortega, Ph.D. |
TOMAS JESUS CARRASCO-GIMENEZ (Universidad de Granada), JAVIER VIRUES ORTEGA (Instituto de Salud Carlos III & Universidad de Granada) |
Description: Functional analysis is a developing subject within ABA. Nevertheless, research on functional analysis methodology has been restricted to a few topographies. This workshop aims to review the literature on functional analysis of psychotic topographies from an applied behavioral-analytical standpoint. According to this framework, "psychotic" behaviors (e.g., delusions and hallucinations), can be partially explained as functional behaviors. In addition to the evidence currently available we will present a more comprehensive operant-based framework on psychotic topographies learning and development. Contingencies surrounding the onset of "psychotic disorders" will be analysed in terms of the particular behaviors and operant classes that are acquired. The workshop will be based on (a) the existing literature on functional analysis, (b) a theoretical analysis of psychotic topographies, and (c) a extensive series of case studies from the primary instructor clinical practice. We will describe the most common controlling contingencies and establishing operations for psychotic topographies. This information might work as clinical guidelines for performing functional analyses and designing functionally-based intervention programs for patients with "schizophrenia" and other forms of "psychotic" behaviors. |
Learning Objectives: At the end of the workshop, the participants will be able to: 1. Formulate functional hypotheses explaining "psychotic" behaviors given a detailed clinical history. 2. Design a operant-based intervention driven by a pre-treatment functional analysis. 3. Identify the most common contingencies affecting patients with psychotic behaviors both early and late in their behavioral history. 4. Identify the most common establishing operations affecting patients with psychotic behaviors both early and late in their behavioral history. 5. Describe the shortcomings of functional analysis methodology implementation with patients with psychotic behaviors. |
Activities: The workshop is interactive and participation is encouraged. Participants will be instructed on the use of theoretical and descriptive analyses of psychotic behaviors through a number of case studies. In addition, participants will take part in a series of exercises and structured role-play sessions. At the end of the workshop participants will conduct a hypothetic functional analysis of a case study and will design an operant-based intervention. All participants will be provided with a compact disc that contains the PowerPoint presentation of the workshop and additional materials to conduct FA of psychotic behaviors. |
Audience: This workshop is intended for all professionals involved in the treatment of patients with "psychotic" behaviors, behavior analysts working at mental health units, faculty members, researchers, graduate students, managers, social workers, and mental health administrators. It would be particularly applicable to individuals interested on functional analysis methodology. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Promoting the Generalization and Maintenance of Skills in Learners with Autism and Related Disorders |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
University |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: David A. Celiberti, Ph.D. |
DAVID A. CELIBERTI (Private Practice) |
Description: Educators and other services providers of learners with autism and related disorders are often faced with situations in which skills do not generalize or maintain over time. Many providers fail to recognize the steps they should be taking to promote generalization and maintenance or teach in ways that actually inhibit generalization; nonetheless, the field of applied behavior analysis offers both a framework and a number of methods that can be implemented to circumvent these challenges. During this workshop, the various forms of generalization (stimulus, response, and temporal generalization) will be described along with specific methods that may increase the likelihood that generalization and maintenance can be observed. Efforts to address generalization and maintenance need to be individualized fore ach learner, tailored to the target skill, and planned for in a systematic manner. More specifically, methods will be presented that can be incorporated at three broad phases in the teaching process, during treatment planning and prior to the initial teaching of a target skill, during the process of teaching hte particular target skill, and after the target skill is mastered. A framework for determining how best to maintain target skills after they are mastered will also be offered |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this workshop, participants will be able to: 1) differentiate the various types of generalization; 2) recognize common obstacles and teaching approaches that impede generalization and maintenance; 3) design and implement a variety of strategies to promote generalization; 4) design and implement a variety of strategies to promote maintenance; 5) recognize learner and task characteristics that will inform when such strategies could be implemented; and 6) evaluate the effectiveness of efforts to promote generalization and maintenance. |
Activities: Although workshop is primarily didactic, participants will be given many opportunities to engage in discussion and will participate in tasks that will concretize and synthesize the didactic information and increase the likelihood of later implementation. Videotape vignettes of a variety of teaching interactions will be provided to illustrate an array of generalization and maintenance strategies. Data collection tools and tracking forms relevant to generalization and maintenance will also be shared along with a bibliography of articles related to generalization. Examples will be provided throughout the presentation and adapted to the interests and needs of the participants. |
Audience: This workshop will benefit professionals from a variety of disciplines, as well as parents who are significantly involved in the educational programming of learners with autism and related disorders. Participants should be familiar with behavior analytic teaching procedures, such as discrete trial instruction. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Activity Schedules: Beyond Independent Activities |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Greenbriar |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: David M. Corcoran, M.S. |
DAVID M. CORCORAN (BEACON Services), JOSEPH M. VEDORA (BEACON Services) |
Description: Activity schedules have been employed with individuals with autism to promote independence and increase on-task behavior. The purpose of this workshop is to train participants in the use of various forms of visual activity schedules. There will be an overview on how to design schedules and teach students to use a basic activity schedule consisting of close ended activities. Variations in procedures, format and materials will be explored. Next, participants will learn how to expand upon basic activity schedule repertoires to: increase social and play skills, food acceptance, self-help skills, community behavior, choice; facilitate transitions and accept unexpected changes in routines. Lastly participants will receive instruction on the use of computerized activity schedules, including the use of video modeling. |
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to: 1.Describe and set up basic activity schedules. 2.Identify settings and occasions to use them and learners to use them with. 3.Describe various forms and modalities of activity schedules and match them to individuals� learning styles. 4.Troubleshoot and describe modifications enhancing usefulness of activity schedules. 5.Expand upon basic activity schedules. |
Activities: 1. Review of Activity Schedule instructional methodology 2. Review of Activity Schedule data collection and error analysis/correction procedures 3. Hands on practice in the establishment and generalized use of activity schedules. 4. Review video taped exemplars of activity schedules |
Audience: Teacher and parents working with children and adults with disabilities |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Childhood Psychiatric Disorders & Mental Issues: Functional Assessment & Behavioral Intervention |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Lenox |
Area: DEV; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Jeannie A. Golden, Ph.D. |
JEANNIE A. GOLDEN (East Carolina University), LYNN A. OLSON PAGE (Regent University) |
Description: Children with developmental disabilities, children with medical issues, and children in the child welfare system often develop several of the symptoms of various childhood psychiatric disorders, such as: attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, oppositional defiant disorder, conduct disorder, bipolar disorder and reactive attachment disorder. These symptoms can develop as the result of factors such as: separation from parents during painful and/or prolonged treatment in a hospital setting, residential placement with limited staff and/or frequent turn-over, early abuse/neglect, multiple placements and multiple caregivers. Differential diagnosis becomes a critical issue in providing appropriate treatment and services for these children and their families. However, these children are often diagnosed based on behavior exhibited in hospital settings or during office visits and based on personality assessment instruments with questionable reliability and validity for children. Additionally, the treatment focus follows the medical model with the assumption that behavioral symptoms are the result of underlying psychopathology. Behavior analysts are in a unique position to provide more comprehensive diagnosis that includes observations of behavior in a variety of settings to determine the effect of various stimulus conditions and setting events, functional assessments to determine the causes and maintainers of various behavioral symptoms, and careful analysis of learning histories to determine the efficacy of various reinforcers and punishers. Behavior analysts are also able to provide assessment-driven treatment approaches, to design therapeutic environments that support the learning of appropriate replacement behaviors and to facilitate typical development rather than psychopathology. |
Learning Objectives: The participant will be able to: 1. explain the differences between the medical and behavioral approaches to the etiology, diagnosis, prognosis and treatment of psychopathology and medical issues in children 2. name some of the symptoms used in the differential diagnoses of attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, bipolar disorder and reactive attachment disorder 3. describe the unique learning histories of children with psychiatric disorders and medical issues and how feelings serve as establishing operations in these children 4. tell why children with this learning history often are diagnosed with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, oppositional-defiant disorder, and conduct disorder in different developmental stages of their lives 5. identify how the behavioral model compliments consultation models in the tertiary hospital setting and identify several strengths of using functional behavioral assessment in a hospital setting 6. name some of the antecedents, behaviors and consequences that are unique in children with psychiatric diagnoses and medical issues 7. describe how to provide assessment-driven treatment and target specific behaviors that are unique in children with psychiatric diagnoses and medical issues |
Activities: Participants will listen to didactic information and real-life case histories in homes, schools and hospital settings, take notes, ask questions, view a power point presentation, present their own cases for feedback, and participate in role-play situations. |
Audience: Participants would include board certified behavior analysts, psychologists, counselors, nurses, health care provides, social workers and/or teachers who serve children with developmental disabilities or children who typically-developing who have been given psychiatric diagnoses. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Teaching Reading with Morningside Generative Instruction |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Montreal |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Kent Johnson, Ph.D. |
KENT JOHNSON (Morningside Academy), KRISTINE F. MELROE (Morningside Academy), LIBBY M. STREET (Central Washington University), ELIZABETH HAUGHTON (Haughton Learning Center), MARIANNE DELGADO (Morningside Academy), JOANNE K. ROBBINS (Morningside Academy) |
Description: In the last 20 years we have seen the rise of functional assessment in the clinical thinking and procedures of educators, both within and outside of behavior analysis. This increasing focus upon the complex context in which we analyze and teach behavior requires many of us to become knowledgeable about school curriculum. Much of the disruptive behavior in schools that we are asked to change occurs as a function of poor curriculum and instruction. Many behavior analysts are now including academic components in treatment plans for non-school clients. In our experience working with over 95 schools and agencies, we have much more credibility, value, and influence when we propose to work not only on conduct, classroom management, disruptive behavior and discipline, but also with specific academic curriculum and instructional methods. A good place to start this work is the curricula of foundation skills, because deficits in areas such as reading, writing, and math are very much in the media and in public discussion. Foundation skills are also very amenable to behavior analysis and modification. It is important that we are thorough in our analysis and treatment of foundation skills, not just superficially acquainted with reading or math. Nor should we uncritically accept materials and methods that are being used in the school settings in which we work. Even in clinical settings we may introduce an academic foundation skills program as a powerful component of our treatment plan. This workshop will provide a thorough introduction to the area of reading. Mastery of the presentations and materials contained in this workshop will put you well on the road to becoming a reading expert. As workshop participants you will receive a minimal amount of materials to allow you to participate in practice exercises. We encourage you to purchase Morningsides Generative Reading Instruction three-ring binder available in the ABA Bookstore for $75. It includes all the materials we will present in our slide shows, as well as articles and sample teaching materials that will allow you to implement immediately upon your return home. Please purchase Generative Reading Instruction in the ABA Bookstore before you attend this workshop. For those who find this impossible, a few books may be available at the workshop. |
Learning Objectives: � Learn to describe the most important components of effective reading instruction. � Learn to describe Morningside methods of teaching key components of reading instruction. � Learn to describe Morningside methods of practicing key components of reading instruction. � Learn to describe Morningside methods of applying key components of reading instruction to everyday life. � Practice Morningside methods of teaching several components of reading instruction. � Experience our methods of feedback and coaching as you practice. � Learn how to use our criteria to evaluate commercially available reading programs and instructional materials that are immediately available to you. � Make a plan to integrate reading instruction into your classroom, syllabus, or clinical program. |
Activities: You will learn about the key components of a total reading program, including prerequisites to reading (language, phonemic awareness, phonological coding, and rapid automatic naming skills); phonics and decoding skills; vocabulary and background knowledge; comprehension skills & strategies; application of comprehension skills and strategies during reading; techniques for self-monitoring during reading; and learning skills such as rapid interaction with a teacher and peer, reasoning and problem solving repertoires, and participating in classroom discussions. We will present the basic principles for teaching each component, then show and model each component with commercially available reading curricula. You will practice some of these components in smaller breakout groups. We will give you feedback and coaching while you practice our methods. In this manner you will experience our methods of providing in-classroom coaching of teachers or clinicians who are implementing our reading programs. You will also be able to evaluate any reading program with our criteria. |
Audience: Any teachers, clinicians, tutors, college professors, administrators, and organizational behavior managers who want to learn how to incorporate reading performance in their teaching and intervention plans. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Surfing the Third Wave: Functional Analytic Psychotherapy |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Auburn |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Robert J. Kohlenberg, Ph.D. |
ROBERT J. KOHLENBERG (University of Washington), REO NEWRING (University of Washington), CHRISTEINE M. TERRY (University of Washington), MARY D. PLUMMER (University of Washington), GARETH I. HOLMAN (University of Washington) |
Description: The focus of this workshop is learning to develop intense therapeutic relationships with outpatient psychotherapy clients. This workshop is for behavior analysts who want to apply functional analytic principles to outpatient mental health treatment and for practicing clinicians who want to incorporate functional analysis in their work. We will explain how a functional analysis in psychotherapy leads to a focus on the client-therapist relationship, and overview the basic principles of Functional Analytic Psychotherapy (FAP). Clinicians who are new to functional analysis or FAP are welcome and we also aim to present topics that go beyond the basics. Strategies and techniques for using the client-therapist relationship as a therapeutic tool will be introduced and practiced. The presenters will address challenges and concerns about focusing on the client-therapist relationship. Experiential learning, didactics, and case materials will be used to illustrate the principles of FAP. Participants will have opportunities to discuss ways of tailoring FAP to their needs and integrating this approach with other treatments. Finally, time permitting, we will address issues in training and supervising therapists. |
Learning Objectives: This workshop will contain an overview of the basic principles of Functional Analytic Psychotherapy and introduce strategies and techniques to apply these principles. Objective 1: To become familiar with the notion of in-vivo work. Objective 2: To understand how the identification, evocation, and modification (i.e., natural reinforcement) of in-vivo behavior can improve clinical outcomes. Objective 3: To learn the tools and techniques suggested in FAP. Objective 4: To practice strategies and discuss how these principles can be applied with participants� clients. Objective 5: To learn to use a functional analysis to assess and interpret client behavior and develop treatment plans. Objective 6: To experience the intensity of an in-vivo interaction within the constraints of the workshop. Objective 7: To introduce considerations for supervision and discuss difficulties in training therapists and applying the suggested strategies. By the end of the workshop, attendees should be able to use a number of FAP strategies, including case conceptualizing, identifying and evoking clinically relevant behaviors, assessing the effects of interventions, and focusing on the therapeutic relationship. |
Activities: This workshop is a combination of didactic presentation, videotaped clinical case material, and a variety of exercises and activities. Participants will be encouraged to discuss ways to tailor FAP principles to their own clients. Attendees will have the opportunity to practice with materials frequently used in or adapted for FAP. In addition, materials will be provided to help participants apply the workshop strategies to their own practice. FAP is unique in that the treatment is tailored to the needs, history, and abilities of each client; the workshop presenters will use FAP strategies and techniques to tailor the workshop to the needs, history, and abilities of the attendees. |
Audience: The workshop is aimed at several audiences. One is the behavior analyst who is interested in an introduction to therapy techniques and a behavior analytic interpretation of the therapeutic process. Because FAP is built on behavior analytic principles, anyone who understands BA can learn to focus on and improve their therapeutic relationships. Another is the therapist who is interested in applying functional analysis in his/her approach to treatment. Any therapist who is interested in increasing the intensity and/or salience of the therapeutic relationship, regardless of the type of interventions used, is invited to attend. Although the focus of the workshop will be on working with adult, outpatients with generally intact cognitive functioning, we welcome discussion of how these methods may apply to other populations. Because clinical material is being presented, the workshop is open only to faculty, graduate students, or professionals. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Direct Instruction: Overview of Instructional Curriculum and Implementation with Non-Traditional Populations |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Baker |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Robert K. Ross, M.S. |
WENDY L. KOZMA (BEACON Services), ANN FILER (BEACON Services), ROBERT K. ROSS (BEACON Services) |
Description: This presentation will provide a review of outcome data related to the implementation of two (DI) curriculum components; Language for Learning and Reading Mastery in a population of children with a diagnosis of Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD). The relevance for use with individuals with developmental disabilities will be demonstrated. Modifications of instruction and strategies to support the implementation of DI with children with ASD will be discussed and highlighted via videotape. The methods and structure of DI incorporate behavioral principles into instruction, including prompt fading, use of multiple exemplars and frequent measurement of efficacy. The instructors will provide in depth review of the types of instructional modifications required to implement DI with atypical learners. These modifications will include the use of token systems, visual schedules, additional visual prompts, presenting tasks in isolation and pre-teaching. These modifications although not specified in traditional DI scripts and trainings will be reviewed. |
Learning Objectives: 1.Demonstrate beginning knowledge of Direct Instruction, as a teaching process with specific techniques and strategies. 2.Be able to implement at least three or more Direct Instruction instructional practices. 3.Demonstrate beginning knowledge of Direct Instruction, as a curriculum designed to teach reading decoding, comprehension, and language development skills. 4.Describe the data supporting successful implementation of Direct Instruction programs with children with a diagnosis of Autism Spectrum Disorder. 5.List at least five modifications effective in the implementation of Direct Instruction programs with children with a diagnosis of Autism Spectrum Disorder. |
Activities: Didactic lecture, Video tape review, Interactive question and answer activities, Small group hands on practice |
Audience: Those new to Direct instruction or those who wish to apply it to non-traditional populations such as those individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders and Developmental Disabilities. |
Content Area: Methodology |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Intensive Early Intervention: A Comprehensive Staff Training and Management System for Behavior Therapists |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Hong Kong |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Eric V. Larsson, Ph.D. |
ERIC V. LARSSON (Lovaas Institute Midwest), KARA L. RIEDESEL (Lovaas Institute Midwest) |
Description: In order to deliver effective early intervention services to a child with autism, the staff must possess a complete set of behavior analysis skills. The demands for sophisticated staff skills are extreme, requiring extensive individualization of each child's program. The purpose of this workshop is to identify the comprehensive variety of the required skills and present specific training programs which have been developed and validated to establish these skills and to manage the staff's behavior so that they are used consistently throughout the child's life. A particular challenge is to train staff to use independent clinical judgment and make the dynamic programming decisions on a daily basis that support optimal rates of child behavior development. In addition, the team leaders must possess the skills to organize and maintain consistent staff programming as the child's behavior rapidly develops. The skills necessary in the third year of programming are much more complex and varied than are those in the first year of programming. Dynamic self-feedback systems give the staff daily, weekly, and six-month feedback on the success of their treatment decisions, enabling the most cost-effective therapy for achieving the best outcomes. This workshop will present the competencies needed for effective child behavior therapy, and the methods used to train staff. The workshop will make extensive use of videos of actual staff training activities. The workshop will also present a data-collection system for staff management at the child and programmatic levels. |
Learning Objectives: 1) identify a comprehensive array of staff competencies 2) identify effective methods for teaching these competencies 3) identify a system of management to integrate consistent staff behavior across a group of teams 4) identify an evaluation system for staff training 5) identify a system of dynamically self-adjusting staff training 6) identify essential competencies for behavior therapists 7) identify essential competencies for clinical supervisors |
Activities: Participants will participate in didactic presentations, discussions, and problem-solving sessions. Video models of actual staff training activities will be used extensively. Participants will obtain specific program materials provided by the instructor. |
Audience: The workshop is designed for parents, lead therapists, line therapists, consultants, and students. Participants should have a basic understanding of behavioral terms used in intensive early intervention. At least one-month's experience with intensive early intervention is preferable. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Using Cognitive-Behavioral Strategies to Increase Social Skills in Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Vancouver |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Mary Ellen McDonald, Ph.D. |
MARY ELLEN MCDONALD (Eden II Programs/The Genesis School), SHARON A. REEVE (Caldwell College) |
Description: Individuals with autism exhibit many deficits in the area of socialization. It is often thought that behavior analysts are well equipped to decrease problematic behavior but are less equipped to teach adaptive behavior. Behavior analysts actually can teach social skills to individuals with autism and have many skills that will assist them in this endeavor. This workshop will focus on the role of stimulus control in the development of social skills. A blueprint for developing skills will be reviewed and specific teaching strategies based in applied behavior analysis will be discussed. Specific strategies will include the use of modeling, behavioral rehearsal, video modeling and video rehearsal, cognitive picture rehearsal and conducting ABC analyses on student's social behavior. |
Learning Objectives: At completion of the workshop participants will have learned: 1. The role of stimulus control in social skill development. 2. How to use a blueprint to design a social skill development program. 3. How to operationalize social concepts such as "friendship" 4. How behavioral rehearsal can be used effectively with individuals with autism. 5. How cognitive picture rehearsal can be used to increase appropriate social behavior. 6. How to use self-monitoring techniques with individuals with autism to promote independence in their social skills. 7. How to teach a particular social skill using behavioral principles (e.g, task analysis, etc). |
Activities: Participants will watch video clips depicting a variety of behavioral strategies that can be used to teach social skills. Specific activities will include creating drawings to be used for cognitive picture rehearsal, developing a story about a particular social situation and operationalizing and task analyzing specific social skills. |
Audience: Psychologists, special educators, consultants, social workers, speech pathologists, parents |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Training Generative Verbal Behavior in Early Intensive Behavioral Intervention |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: John D. McElwee, M.S. |
JOHN D. MCELWEE (Step By Step Academy), IAN T. STEWART (National University of Ireland, Galway) |
Description: Early Intensive Behavioral Intervention (EIBI) is an effective behavior analysis based approach to remediation of deficits for Autistic Spectrum Disorder (ASD) where communication is the core deficit. Although evidence based outcomes support EIBI, one persistent difficulty in the case of some clients has been the inability to train generativity i.e., the capacity to understand and produce novel or untrained verbal responses. One possible solution to this problem may be provided by Relational Frame Theory (RFT), a modern behaviour analytic approach to human language and cognition. RFT extends Skinners analysis of verbal behavior by conceptualizing language as generalized relational responding, thus providing new directions for behavioral research and intervention. The purpose of this workshop is to demonstrate how insights and procedures generated by the RFT approach might be applied in the EIBI domain. The first part of the workshop will involve a brief review of the core concepts of RFT. Prospective audience members should consult the tutorial on RFT provided at the following URL: http://www.relationalframetheory.com/tutorial/index.html. Core terms and concepts will also be provided in a handout. The workshop will first explain the history that gives rise to the core generalized operants which RFT sees as being essential to the development of language. It will explain how the analysis of verbal behavior in terms of what is known as relational framing can explain the extraordinary generativity characterizing language and will outline findings from RFT-based work that has used laboratory generated relational framing to model a diversity of linguistic and higher cognitive skills, with particular emphasis on those most obviously relevant to EIBI, such as derived naming, hierarchical relational responding and perspective taking. The second part of the workshop, which will involve greater participation by the audience than the first, will examine how RFT may be combined with EIBI to provide a comprehensive framework for teaching relational framing. It will examine existing EIBI curricula and show how Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills (ABLLS) might be reinterpreted and extended using Relational Frame Theory, putting particular emphasis on the importance of the RFT-based concepts of multiple exemplar training, contextual control and derived relational performance outcomes. A curricular sequence and an assessment of generative skills beginning with basic conditional discriminations and progressing through various stages of non-arbitrary and arbitrary relational responding will then be provided. Starting with simple non-arbitrary auditory and visual identity matching, the framework will progressively target auditory-to-visual matching-to-sample, mutually entailed sound-object / object-sound relations, contextually controlled (SAME versus DIFFERENT) non-arbitrary visual and auditory matching, flexibility of contextual control and combinatorial entailment. Methods of assessment presented will include a revised version of the Assessment of Basic Learning Abilities (ABLA). In addition, a customised computer program training and testing progressive stages of contextually controlled relational responding will also be available to members of the audience on a CD. |
Learning Objectives: � Be able to understand how RFT approaches language � Be able to understand key theoretical concepts of RFT such as mutual and combinatorial entailment and transformation of function � Be familiar with several of the areas of the RFT empirical research programs that are relevant to Early Intensive Behavioral Intervention � Understand and use techniques designed to train relational framing from a basic level � Be knowledgeable of how existing EIBI curricula and core training protocols such as the ABLLS might be reinterpreted and extended using Relational Frame Theory � Be familiar with methods of assessment of generativity such as the revised ABLA � Be able to implement a Relational Frame based training protocol, using a CD-ROM based computer program that will be provided to all members of the audience |
Activities: � Didactic Instruction � Small Group Work � Brief Exercises � Handouts � CD |
Audience: The audience will be therapists with expertise in the analysis of verbal behavior and the implementation of EIBI programs that are interested in applying principles of Relational Frame Theory in the EIBI domain. Prospective audience members should consult the tutorial on RFT provided at the following URL: http://www.relationalframetheory.com/tutorial/index.html |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Advanced |
|
|
Teaching Sign Language to Hearing Children and Adults with Down Syndrome, Autism, and Other Developmental Disabilities |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Regency VII |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Patrick E. McGreevy, Ph.D. |
PATRICK E. MCGREEVY (Patrick McGreevy, Ph.D., P.A. and Associates), TROY A. FRY (Patrick McGreevy, Ph.D., P.A. and Associates), COLLEEN CORNWALL (Patrick McGreevy, Ph.D., P.A. and Associates) |
Description: Many children and adults with Down Syndrome, Autism, and other developmental disabilities, do not communicate using spoken words. At the present time, the most popular alternative communication response forms include selecting pictures or words manually or with electronic devices. This workshop, which is based on B.F. Skinners analysis of verbal behavior and the work of Michael, Sundberg, Partington, and many others, provides participants with a new look at the advantages and disadvantages of sign language, demonstrations of many learners using signs, and practice teaching learners sign mands, tacts, and intraverbals. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this workshop, each participant will be able to: (1) describe the importance of the echoic repertoire, (2) describe when an alternative communication response form � signing, pictures, or augmentative devices � is necessary, (3) describe the advantages and disadvantages of various alternative communication response forms, (4) describe and implement effective procedures for teaching sign mands (5) transfer sign mands to tacts and intraverbals, (6) collect data while teaching sign mands, tacts, and intraverbals, and (7) adjust teaching procedures when common problems occur in teaching sign mands, tacts, and intraverbals. |
Activities: This workshop will provide: (1) written descriptions, (2) videotape demonstrations, (3) live demonstrations, and (4) practice activities. |
Audience: The target audience for this introductory workshop includes teachers, behavior analysts, speech-language pathologists, and others who work with children and adults with developmental disabilities. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
A Curriculum for Intensive, Early Intervention Program for Children with Autism: The First Three Phases |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Regency V |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Barbara A. Metzger, Ph.D. |
BARBARA A. METZGER (Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools), ANGELA L. POLETTI (Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools) |
Description: The first three phases of a curriculum for teaching young children with autism will be presented. The curriculum is presented in a flow chart format that specifies the sequence of teaching programs as well as grouping the programs by level of difficulty into three phases. The curriculum has a heavy emphasis on teaching early language and play skills. The curriculum also covers imitation, school readiness and self-help skills. Teaching methodologies and strategies, problem solving, and video clips for beginning programs and advanced programs will be presented. Systems for maintenance and generalization will be presented. Each participant will be given a copy of the curriculum flow chart as well as the corresponding "consultant" notes. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Read the curriculum flow chart to determine the sequence of skills. 2. Identify the programs of the first three phases of the curriculum. 3. Identify the goal of each program. 4. Identify potential mistakes of each program. 5. Identify teaching tips for each program. 6. Demonstrate the steps of discrimination training. 7. Demonstrate the left to right visual work system. 8. Identify the types of generalization. 9. Read the maintenance system flow chart. 10. Identify play activities to incorporate into your teaching. |
Activities: 1. Watch video clips of specific programs and specific teaching methods/strategies 2. Lecture 3. Question and answer 4. In vivo practice of teaching methodologies/strategies |
Audience: Parents and professionals who want to learn about the curriculum and methodologies to teach a young child with autism. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
A Review of Skinner's Analysis of Verbal Behavior: Theoretical and Applied Implications |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Fairlie |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Caio F. Miguel, Ph.D. |
CAIO F. MIGUEL (New England Center for Children) |
Description: In his book Verbal Behavior, Skinner described language acquisition using well-known principles of learning. He described a way of categorizing language based on the environment functions, rather than underlying cognitive structures and processes. Skinners environmental account of language acquisition has been useful for research and application, especially when teaching children with autism, whose verbal repertoires are usually deficient. In this workshop participants will be introduced to the behavior analytic model of language development by learning how to identify language units/verbal operants based on their environmental functions. Both selection-based and topography based verbal behavior will be considered. The implications of Skinners analysis for teaching language to individuals with disabilities will be discussed. Participants will also review the empirical evidence for a VB analysis of language and identify topics for future research. |
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to describe the behavior analytic model of language development Participants will identify and classify language units/verbal operants Participants will distinguish selection based vs topography based VB Participants will be able to identify areas for future research in the analysis of VB Participants will be able to list some of the implications of Skinner�s analysis to teach language Participants will be able to define and give examples of secondary and higher order verbal operants such as the autoclitic and the naming repertoire. |
Activities: Attendees will participate in didactic presentations, discussions and exercises. |
Audience: Those interested in a conceptual understanding of Skinners analysis of VB as it pertains to teaching language to individuals with disabilities. |
Content Area: Theory |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Sleep Issues in Autism Spectrum Children |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Dunwoody |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Robert W. Montgomery, Ph.D. |
ROBERT W. MONTGOMERY (Reinforcement Unlimited) |
Description: Pediatric sleeplessness and sleep disruptions are among the most common concerns of all parents. Sleep concerns are also among the most common of concerns expressed by parents of ASD Children to their pediatricians. Excessive sleepiness in a child is a symptom that is often under recognized and misinterpreted, but when left untreated can exacerbate or lead to serious behavioral, academic, developmental, and medical consequences. Pediatric sleeplessness is widely prevalent and often behaviorally based. Research supports that pediatric sleeplessness can be treated effectively with nonpharmacologic interventions. This workshop reviews the nature of sleep and sleep disruption (including common pediatric sleep disorders), and introduces the participant to behavioral treatment strategies (e.g., extinction, parent education, positive routines, sleep hygiene). Finally, behavioral issues and research on sleep for children in the autism spectrum are integrated throughout the presentation. |
Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will be able to identify 3 major forms of sleep disturbance. 2) Participants will be able to identify the major reasons for a medical referral relating to sleep disturbance. 3) Participants will be able to explain the implications of various medication classes on sleep. 4) Participants will be able to explain the research support of the use of melatonin for pediatric sleeplessness. 5) Participants will be able to identify the 5 stages of sleep. 6) Participants will be able to implement a BEARS screening assessment of sleep disturbance. 7) Participants will be able to distinguish between Extinction and Graduated Extinction as they relate in the literature to sleep hygiene and sleep disturbance. |
Activities: Workshop participants will participate in didactic presentation, case-examples, individual completion of a sleep hygiene assessment, and question and answer session. |
Audience: Those who work with children and adolescents in the Autism Spectrum. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Functional Analysis in School Settings |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Cairo |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Bryan J. Davey, Ph.D. |
MICHAEL M. MUELLER (Southern Behavioral Group, Inc.), DANA TRAHANT (Southern Behavioral Group, Inc.), AJAMU NKOSI (Southern Behavioral Group, Inc.), BRYAN J. DAVEY (Southern Behavioral Group, Inc.) |
Description: The full day workshop will highlight the application of Functional Behavior assessment (FBA) methodology in a variety of school settings. Functional analysis, one component of a comprehensive FBA, has been demonstrated as an effective assessment procedure used to determine the reinforcer for severe problem behavior. Iwata, Dorsey, Slifer, Bauman, and Richman (1982) described for the first time what have become typical conditions used in functional analyses. Given the dynamic and often changing environment of school settings, procedures can, and should, be modified to fit those instances when the referral environment differs from typical functional analysis conditions. The workshop will begin with a review of current literature on functional behavioral assessments that include functional analyses conducted in public schools with school age children presenting with a variety of developmental disorders. Population characteristics, educational placement, functional behavior assessment methodologies and outcomes, and treatment selection and outcomes will be presented and discussed. The review will be followed by the presentation of the May South assessment model, which includes indirect, direct, and experimental measures. However, the discussion will focus on contextual factors that must be addressed prior to and during assessment in school settings. Some of those changes include adjustments made to typical functional analysis conditions, shortening or lengthening the duration of functional analysis conditions, including atypical reinforcers in test conditions, testing abnormal school behaviors, and using other professionals as therapists. To illustrate these points, the workshop will include multiple data sets depicting traditional and innovative functional analyses in school settings for a variety of problem behaviors. All data sets, sometimes after extended analysis, identify reinforcers for severe behavior in school settings and all interventions were based on those results. Instructors will lead an audience in a discussion on creating easy to use, nonaversive, effective, and acceptable interventions. A synthesis of the presentations and general comments regarding the current state of analysis and treatment of problem behavior in schools settings will conclude the workshop. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Understand the continuum of services involved in comprehensive Functional Behavior Assessment (FBA). 2. Conduct a comprehensive FBA, including indirect, direct and experimental analyses. 3. Derive hypotheses from indirect and direct assessments that suggest test conditions for a functional analysis (FA). 4. Setup a school based FA. 5. Conduct a FA that is responsive to school contextual factors. 6. Understand how and when to use dynamic or innovative test conditions. 7. Interpret FA outcomes for subsequent or intervention planning |
Activities: Participants will be provided concise instructions, copious handouts, and several models, followed by multiple case examples presented by instructors. These presentations will be followed by a question and answer period to ensure skill acquisition. Finally, participants will complete a comprehensive case example that provides opportunities for participants to solve challenges inherent in functional analysis conducted in school settings. The comprehensive case example will consolidate and increase fluency of the skills described and taught during the instructional phase of the workshop. Additionally, participants will be encouraged to present questions in regard to previous functional analysis experiences. |
Audience: Practitioners, students, researchers, educational service providers, and others interested in functional analysis methodology and function based interventions. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Teaching Others to Teach Children with Autism: What to Teach and How to Teach It |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
International Ballroom North |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Colin Peeler, Ph.D. |
COLIN PEELER (Behavior Solutions, Inc.) |
Description: Increases in the prevalence of autism, a growing body of literature supporting ABA, and recognition among the government that ABA is the best treatment for autism have all led to a demand for ABA services greater than the current supply of qualified providers. Unfortunately, because of this the quality and/or quantity of services these children receive is typically below the best practice standard and as such their gains are not maximized. However, it is possible through better training and supervision (i.e., better consultation) that behavior analysts and other trained autism therapists (including parents) can teach almost anyone how to provide intensive behavior therapy thereby improving the quality and quantity of providers available. The presenter will discuss the difference between best practice standards as defined by the literature and actual practice as it is affected by training and funding issues. A large portion of the workshop will focus on the 3 key skills all therapists should know (therapy skills, training skills, consultation skills) and how to assess and train them. Lastly, the presenter will discuss how to efficiently supervise an in home program given a limited amount of time to do so. |
Learning Objectives: - Describe findings from the literature on IBT as a treatment for Autism - Identify critical components of an IBT program that are associated with improved outcomes - Describe funding/training issues and how they impact one�s ability to implement the most effective IBT program - Describe the sequence of training events to maximize the effectiveness of a new therapist working with a child with autism - Describe the 10 Basic Therapist Skills for working with a child with autism and correctly score them from videotapes - Learn basic consultation skills each therapist should know that will improve the consistency and efficacy of the therapy across therapists - Describe how to supervise and manage a team of therapists within current funding issues |
Activities: Video examples will be used throughout and participants will learn how to score therapist skills from the video examples. |
Audience: Behavior Analysts, autism therapists and consultants, parents looking to set up and manage an in home program, those who want to learn the basics of intensive behavior therapy or those who are responsible for training these skills to others. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
The Smart and Sensitive Parenting Program (SSPP): Teaching Parents How to Effectively Deal with Their Children's Behavioral Difficulties |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: DDA; Domain: Basic Research |
CE Instructor: Amos E. Rolider, Ph.D. |
AMOS E. ROLIDER (Emek Yezreel College, Israel), ROBYN M. CATAGNUS (Clarity Behavioral Consulting) |
Description: In this workshop, a parent consultation model entitled The Smart and Sensitive Parenting Program (SSPP) will be presented. This model emphasizes teaching parents to rearrange significant context variables and to discover the antecedents and functions of their childrens most burdensome behaviors. Parents subsequently learn to identify the function of their own responses to their childrens inappropriate behaviors and are trained to select and apply simple and effective interventions based on the discovery of antecedents and maintaining consequences. |
Learning Objectives: The following will be discussed learned and demonstrated: 1. Identifying behaviors and typical parental responses associated with: a. The termination of a preferred activity of reinforcer. b. Refusal or inability to provide a preferred activity or reinforcer. c. Demand situations d. Transition from preferred activity to non-preferred activity e. Elicited emotional outbursts 2. The importance of preparing an established weekly schedule and set of expectations, and the role of: a. The weekly family meeting b. The daily family meeting 3. Preparing children for antecedents in the form of difficult situations. 4. Selecting an appropriate response based on the function of the inappropriate behavior. 5. Selecting an appropriate motivational program based on DRO/DRA. |
Activities: We will practice using the model to deal with children's most common inappropriate behaviors: a. Bickering and refusal b. Tantrums and aggression c. Over-dependence d. School-related problems e. Other problems at the participants' requests |
Audience: Practitioners who work with or are interested in working with parents of children who exhibit a variety of behavioral issues |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Using Skinner's Analysis of Verbal Behavior for Language Assessment and Intervention for Children with Autism |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Courtland |
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research |
CE Instructor: Mark L. Sundberg, Ph.D. |
MARK L. SUNDBERG (Sundberg and Associates) |
Description: B.F. Skinner's (1957) analysis of verbal behavior has provided professionals and parents with a conceptual roadmap for analyzing and treating language disorders. This workshop will begin with a brief overview of B. F. Skinner's analysis of verbal behavior, followed by a presentation of the most recent applications of the analysis to language assessment and intervention. The major focus will be on the use of a verbal behavior analysis to examine a number of common language barriers that often impede language acquisition. Participants will learn intervention strategies that may help to remove those barriers. In addition, this workshop will present the most recent task analysis of the verbal operants, and strategies for teaching each of them. |
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to use a behavioral approach to language assessment (e.g., mands, tacts, and intraverbals). Participants will be able to explain how a behavioral analysis of language is different from a cognitive analysis of language Participants will be able to describe how to teach manding Participants will be able to describe how to teach intraverbal behavior Participants will be able to describe the common elements of matching-to-sample, receptive discriminations, and RFFC Participants will be able to explain how to use the concepts from the book Verbal Behavior to analyze language deficits Participants will be able to explain how to use concepts from the book Verbal Behavior to analyze language curricula |
Activities: Attendees will participate in didactic presentations, discussions, and exercises in the analysis of verbal behavior. A 250 page handout will be provided to each participant. |
Audience: Participants should have a strong working knowledge of behavior analysis and some interest in the application of behavior analysis to language assessment and intervention. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Supporting Students with Autism Spectrum Disorders in Public School Settings |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Manila |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Maria Garrett, M.S. |
NICOLE WEIDENBAUM (Nassau-Suffolk Services for Autism), MARIA GARRETT (Nassau-Suffolk Services for Autism), JENNIFER MARY KADEN (Nassau-Suffolk Services for Autism), MICHELE MELVIN (Nassau-Suffolk Services for Autism), KATHLEEN MANNION (Nassau-Suffolk Services for Autism) |
Description: The transition to, and success in, public school often present significant challenges to learners with Autism Spectrum Disorders and to their support staff. For support staff, the issue is further complicated by the need to design individualized interventions and supports necessitated by the complex learning, social, and behavior demands of a public school environment. This workshop will focus on assisting students with ASD to navigate the complexities public school settings including academic challenges, developing friendships, teasing and bullying, along with recommendations for assessment and modifications and promoting independence and social skills. |
Learning Objectives: 1) create measurable and functional objectives for students with autism 2) conduct functional behavior assessments 3) design data collection systems for use in public school classrooms 4) design behavior intervention plans 5) modify curriculum 6) promote social skills in inclusion environments 7) conduct peer training 8) create strategies for positive team interactions including family participation 9) better understand a parent's perspective |
Activities: Participants will be involved in didactic presentation as well as small group discussion, role plays, and trouble-shooting sessions. Participants will also be involved in data collection and curriculum modification exercises, as well as the design of behavior plans and writing of measurable objectives. |
Audience: This workshop is designed for individuals who are involved with individuals with autism in public school settings including psychologists, behavior analysts, special educators, speech pathologists, parents, and school administrators. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
OBM PART I: Using Organizational Behavior Management Approaches in Human Services Programs |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Spring |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Michael Weinberg, Ph.D. |
MICHAEL WEINBERG (B. F. Skinner Institute; Orlando Behavior Health, LLC), JOSEPH D. CAUTILLI (Children Crisis Treatment Center/Temple University) |
Description: This workshop will provide a theoretical framework for utilizing behavior analysis principles of organizational behavior management, combining it with methods from CQI and statistical process control, as applied to human services provider organizations (Hantula, 1995; Babcock, Fleming & Oliver, 1999). Organizational management and human resources (HR) applications are a growing area for behavior analysts, who have the unique skills and experience to utilize principles of behavior analysis to improve processes and functions in human services organizations. One particular area of interest for behavioral practitioners will be organizational behavior management (OBM). OBM conceptualizes and empirically solves organizational problems. This workshop will provide participants with the concepts and knowledge to increase their potential for professional behavioral consultation to human services organizations. Operation issues tend to plague many mental health and service industry professions. It is our experience that organizational behavior management has much to offer traditional operations in job design, analysis, and HR management. In addition, OBM readily lends itself to improve the quality of treatment services in human service organizations that provide services to people with mental retardation, developmental disabilities, autism, and emotional/behavioral disorders. This presentation will focus on applying the basics of OBM to the development of successful service operations, and provide data from a demonstration research project conducted in a residential treatment facility serving these populations. Management involves the acquisition and use of resources. OBM redefines management from control of the person to control of the context/environment in which the person works. It has developed powerful techniques for a range of management areas, and can be used to improve the integrity and quality of treatment approaches being used in a human service organization. (Cautilli & Clarke, BAT, 2000, Weinberg et. al., BAT, 2001; Daniels, 1989). |
Learning Objectives: At the completion of the workshop, participants will be able to: 1) Develop management by team objective programs. 2) Analyze performance problems from a traditional operations perspective. 3) Identify ways that OBM can enhance this approach. 4) Understand operations and HR approaches to enhance employee performance, and to achieve a company's strategic goals. 5) Use OBM in operations to enhance treatment integrity. 6) Use statistical process control to determine when to intervene (P-Chart) 7) Set up functionally based programs with the supervision of all staff as the cornerstone. 8) Set up benchmarks and define outcomes for successful interventions. 9) Understand the essential skills of an effective manager. 10) Understand key skills to devise performance objectives linked to evaluation, mission of the organization, and performance-contingent salary increases. 11) Identify basic principles of the 6-Sigma approach. |
Activities: Participants will work in breakout groups to: o Devise performance objectives for professionals and staff linked to the organization�s mission; o Consider human resource and management issues in their organization and devise potential solutions using OBM methods; o Arrange for use of assessment methods covered in the workshop to address employee performance issues in human services settings |
Audience: Behavior analysts, human resources professionals, program directors or administrators of human services organizations, OBM professionals, and students in OBM track programs. |
Content Area: Methodology |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Radical Behaviourism and the Counseling Process: Constructional Bones, Solution-Focused Flesh |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Vinings |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Johnny Williams, Ph.D. |
JOHNNY WILLIAMS (University of Waterloo) |
Description: This workshop has been created to reflect the emergence of methods that are consistent with a goal-directed, competency-oriented approach to counseling/psychotherapy. Elements of a radical behavioral viewpoint will be related to practices, strategies, and concepts involved in helping others. The aim is to help provide attendees who are interested in or familiar with radical behaviorism with the ability to begin using this perspective when working with clients. It will also be of interest to those with a counseling background who wish to know how counseling approaches are related to a radical behavioral perspective. The workshop will consist of five components: a review of pertinent features of a radical behavioral perspective, the relationship to counseling/psychotherapeutic practices and strategies, a description of the basic components of a constructional approach, illustrations of these components, and exercises to facilitate acquisition of this perspective and these skills (with take-home material to facilitate continued practice). |
Learning Objectives: 1. Basic aspects of a radical behavioral analysis and their relationship to counseling approaches. 2. The importance and usefulness of maintaining a radical behavioral semantic framework and eschewing creeping/tempting mentalistic cognitivism. 3. The importance of working within a goal-directed framework as opposed to a traditional categorical diagnostic system. 4. The basic outlook and repertoire of constructional/solution-focused skills. 5. How these skills reflect a different perspective on client situations than do other approaches. 6. The skills in use and as they have been used in client situations. 7. Trial and practice of constructional skills so participants can begin developing a constructional repertoire. 8. The timing and use of skills in client situations. |
Activities: Teaching activities include: presentation of conceptual and practical material, self-testing of the acquisition of this material, video illustration of the skills and their application, practice in using basic constructional skills via exercises and role play, and discussion of participants� application questions. |
Audience: Practitioners, prospective practitioners, and others who see the world from a radical behavioral viewpoint and wish to expand their counseling repertoire with practices consistent with this perspective. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Supplemental Measurement in Behavior Analysis: Strategies to Improve Accountability and Evaluate the Achievement of Ultimate Outcomes for Children and Their Families |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–5:00 PM |
Singapore |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Jonathan A. Worcester, Ph.D. |
JONATHAN A. WORCESTER (New Tampa Behavioral Health, LLC) |
Description: While precise and empirical measurement of the implementation of the independent variable and its corresponding target and replacement behaviors is and will always remain a hallmark of behavior analysis, experts have long discussed the role of social importance and subjective criteria within the field (Baer, Wolf, & Risley, 1968; Wolery, 1994; Wolf, 1978). As the field of behavior analysis continues to expand, so does the need to demonstrate the relevance of its application. Consequently, the purpose of this workshop will be to operationally define and discuss types of objective and subjective supplemental measures available to behavior analysts providing services to children and families (e.g., social validation, parent satisfaction, quality of life, procedural fidelity, positive/negative adult statements). Participants in this workshop will: 1) obtain an exposure to some of the available objective and subjective measures used to document the social importance of behavior change within the context of the child and familys natural environment; 2) review illustrative case examples and their corresponding methods of measurement; and 3) discuss the inclusion of supplemental measures relative to functional assessments and the implementation of functional assessment-based intervention plans. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to: 1. Describe the role of �social importance� and subjective criteria within the field. 2. Identify types of objective and subjective supplemental measures behavior analysts can use to demonstrate accountability and support progress toward ultimate outcomes. 3. Define social validation, procedural fidelity, contextual fit, and quality of life. 4. Identify strategies and tools for measuring social validation, procedural fidelity, contextual fit, parent satisfaction, and quality of life. 5. Discuss ways by which supplemental measures may be used within functional assessments and/or their corresponding behavior intervention plans. 6. Discuss the specific strengths and limitations associated with individual supplemental measures. 7. Describe how the inclusion of supplemental measures may be used to enhance the quality of behavior analytic service delivery. |
Activities: Participation in this workshop will entail the following: 1. Lecture 2. Discussion/question & answer 3. Brief quiz at end of session to assess acquisition of learning objectives. |
Audience: Professionals and students currently engaged in clinical applications of applied behavior analysis with children and families. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Consulting the Behavioral Way: The Pyramid Approach to Shaping Performance in Autism Educational Services |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–1:00 PM |
Roswell |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Beth Sulzer-Azaroff, Ph.D. |
ANDY BONDY (Pyramid Educational Consultants), BETH SULZER-AZAROFF (Browns Group Naples) |
Description: This workshop focuses on how be an effective consultant to programs for children with autism and related disabilities. We will address how to use behavioral strategies to shape the performance of people providing services within school, community, and home-based settings. Critical topics will include identifying key antecedents to both the behavior of the consultant and of those being advised. Important behavioral targets for various people responsible for serving children will be noted. Finally, we review reinforcement strategies designed to help maintain the performance of service providers. We also plan to discuss our views on appropriate ethical conduct for consultants. Each of these elements is based upon our work, The Pyramid Approach to Education in Autism (Bondy & Sulzer-Azaroff, 2002). |
Learning Objectives: At the completion of the workshop, participants will be able to provide written examples of: 1) Appropriate antecedents associated with the performance of the service provider as well as the consultant. 2) Critical target behaviors of the service provider, support personnel, as well as the consultant. 3) Strategies for identifying and using powerful reinforcers for service providers and support personnel. 4) Ethical issues associated with providing behaviorally-based consultation. |
Activities: Participants will receive a copy of The Pyramid Approach to Education as well as other supportive material. We will review the basic structure for this approach to organizing educational factors for children with autism and related disabilities. We summarize the rationale for introducing the Pyramid elements in a sequential fashion. Participants will go over forms designed to help implement the model as well as help service providers plan to use central principles of applied behavior analysis. Participants will have an opportunity to begin to plan how to use the structure in their current consultancies. Forms are provided that are designed to help service providers plan their day around functional activities while embedding functional communication goals. Participants will begin to identify critical reinforcers associated with the service providers they consult, including key personnel with regard to the service provider. |
Audience: Consultants, supervisors, or advisors to staff working with children with autism or related disabilities, or individuals about to embark on such activities. Participants should be well versed in the fundamentals of applied behavior analysis. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Creating Academic Programs for Children with Autism and Other Disabilities Using Microsoft PowerPoint |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–1:00 PM |
Harris |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: William A. Flood, M.A. |
WILLIAM A. FLOOD (May South, Inc.), STEPHEN T. NORTH (May South, Inc.), PAUL W. HEERING (R Plus, LLC) |
Description: When creating academic programs (school or home-based) for children with Autism and other developmental disabilities, it is challenging to develop programs that are reinforcing to each child. In an effort to find higher reinforcing activities, a greater number of classrooms are using computers for either teaching academic skills or as pure reinforcing activities. Recent advances in technology have allowed for the creation of extremely innovative electronic educational software that many children find reinforcing. Unfortunately, many of these programs are designed for typically developing children and do not use the principles and procedures of applied behavior analysis. This workshop will teach you how to create low-cost academic programs on the computer program Microsoft PowerPoint with the intention of teaching and/or generalizing skills. The workshop will give a basic overview of how to use the program Microsoft PowerPoint. You will learn how to integrate behavioral principles and procedures into the computer program to ensure the most effective teaching. Finally, the instructor will display examples of academic programs created and successfully implemented with children with autism. Participants are encouraged to bring their personal laptops and develop academic programs alongside the instructor. |
Learning Objectives: At the end of the workshop, participants will be able to: � Operate the basic functions of the computer program Microsoft PowerPoint. � Identify common mistakes from traditional multimedia teaching programs. � Create basic academic programs in PowerPoint. � Integrate behavior principles (e.g., prompting, prompt fading, reinforcement, extinction, etc.) into their academic programs. � Recognize various academic programs (e.g., match-to-sample, receptive object identification, reading comprehension) that can easily be taught with PowerPoint. |
Activities: The workshop will begin with a brief lecture about the computer program Microsoft PowerPoint. The remainder of the workshop will consist of interactive hands-on teaching in which the participants are systematically guided through the creation of academic programs in PowerPoint. The participants are strongly encouraged to use their personal laptop computers and create academic programs concurrently with the instructor. |
Audience: Teachers, parents, behavior analysts, or anyone in charge of creating curriculum for children with disabilities/autism. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Helping Parents of Children with Autism or Developmental Delays: An Acceptance and Commitment Training Approach |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–1:00 PM |
Edgewood |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Daniel J. Moran, Ph.D. |
DANIEL J. MORAN (MidAmerican Psychological Institute), JOHN TANNER BLACKLEDGE (University of Nevada, Reno), PATRICIA BACH (Illinois Institute of Technology) |
Description: The parents of developmentally disabled children experience high levels of chronic stress (DeMyer, 1979; Holroyd, Brown, Wikler, & Simmon, 1975), and have high rates of depressive and anxiety disorders (Breslau & Davis, 1986). While most researchers understand that such concerns are largely secondary or reactive to the stress and special non-normative adaptations these children require (Konstantareas, 1990, p. 60), the fact remains that high levels of distress in these contexts both decrease quality of life and impose significant barriers to the parents successful & consistent implementation of behavioral treatment programs. It thus appears prudent for ABA consultants to also be prepared to help the parents of the referred client. This workshop will help ABA consultants be aware of signs of significant parental psychological distress, and help them make appropriate referrals. In addition, this workshop will also discuss an Acceptance and Commitment Training approach to helping these parents with their distress and challenges. Results, for example, from Using Acceptance and Commitment Training in the Support of Parents of Children Diagnosed with Autism (Blackledge & Hayes, in press) showed that general distress (as measured by the Brief Symptom Inventorys G) and depression levels (BDI-II) decreased significantly after group ACT training, and that these changes were maintained 3 months after the treatment was delivered, and that these changes were mediated by ACTs core processes. The workshop will focus on the ACT consistent assessment and the pertinent ACTraining exercises and interventions that can be helpful to distressed parents. The workshop will cover values assessment, barriers to values-based behavior and relevant mindfulness exercises. A significant portion of the workshop will focus on applying ACT interventions. |
Learning Objectives: 1) Attendees will become more aware of how parental distress interferes with the successful implementation of behavioral programs. 2) Attendees will learn to recognize and functionally analyze problematic behavior on the part of the caregiver. 3) Attendees will be introduced to the ACT approach to addressing problematic experiential avoidance exhibited by distressed caregivers. 4) Attendees will understand the reasons for and usefulness of values assessment in helping parents improve their functioning when helping their children, and also to improve their own quality of life. 5) Attendees will be introduced to acceptance and defusion exercises (e.g., mindfulness exercises) applicable to the distress they and parents of their child clients experience in the process of working with developmentally disabled children and adults. |
Activities: A significant portion of this workshop will focus on the application of ACT exercises and interventions. We will discuss the major areas in the ACT model for behavioral flexibility and how it relates to being a parent with a child with disabilities. The participants can choose to engage in exercises in developing their own value system, and then learn what barriers impede value-guided behaviors. The workshop will also be guided by a slide show and slide show handouts will be distributed. |
Audience: This workshop is for behavior analysts who work with children with developmental disabilities or autism-spectrum disorders. This will also be worthwhile for parents of children with disabilities. The presenters plan a comfortable pace to introducing ACTraining and this workshop will be useful to anyone interested in the Acceptance and Commitment Therapy approach. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Overview of Standard Celeration Charting |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–1:00 PM |
Marietta |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Michael Fabrizio, M.A. |
MICHAEL FABRIZIO (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), CLAY M. STARLIN (University of Oregon), ABIGAIL B. CALKIN (Calkin Consulting Center), HENRY S. PENNYPACKER (University of Florida), JESUS ROSALES-RUIZ (University of North Texas) |
Description: This workshop will teach participants to read and chart human performance on the Standard Celeration Chart (SCC). Participants will learn: important features of the chart, the rationale for monitoring performance frequencies, standard SCC conventions, how to chart performance across varying lengths of counting time, and how to analyze performance on the chart to assist in making data-based decisions. The presenters will draw from long and varied histories of success using the SCC in a range of setting to illustrate key concept taught in the workshop. Examples from the areas of university teaching, intervention with children with autism, educational intervention with students with learning disabilities, general public school education, and the monitoring of private events will be used. All participants will receive a copy of all materials used in the workshop including a CD-ROM containing additional copies of the presentation materials, forms, example videos, and an animation-based tutorial. |
Learning Objectives: At the end of the workshop, participants will be able to: � Read human performance data charted on all versions of the SCC. � Chart human performance data charted on all versions of the SCC. � Describe data on the SCC in terms of its frequency (level), celeration (trend), and bounce (variability). � Describe performance management systems helpful in maintaining consistent use of the SCC in clinical and educational settings. |
Activities: Applying principles derived from behavior analysis of well-designed instruction, our world-class group of workshop presenters will use a range of activities to ensure participants learn the key skills targeted in the objectives. Participants will engage in choral responding and paced practice, timed practice on key concepts and skills, and both small and large group discussion. |
Audience: Anyone seeking an introduction (or refresher!) to Standard Celeration Charting, including those persons interested in using the SCC to improve their own teaching or clinical practice, as well as individuals planning to take the BACB examination. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Using Skinner's Verbal Behavior to Analyze Pure and Impure Verbal Operants to Improve Communication-Training Interventions |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
10:00 AM–1:00 PM |
Kennesaw |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Andy Bondy, Ph.D. |
ANDY BONDY (Pyramid Educational Consultants), LORI FROST (Pyramid Educational Consultants) |
Description: This workshop focuses on how to use Skinners Verbal Behavior to analyze common communications objectives and intervention plans for individuals with disabilities. We will briefly review Skinners core verbal operants (i.e., mand, tact, intraverbal, etc.) but will add strategies to identify multiple controlled verbal operants (which are more common than pure verbal operants). We will review common language goals and objectives from representative IEPs and other formats. We will review videotaped examples of language training sequences and practice identifying the multiple controlled verbal operants that are in use (as opposed to the intended operants). Examples will vary across modalities, as verbal behavior does not pertain to any one or preferred expressive modality. We will also review an understanding of autoclitics and how they are acquired and modified over time can improve training strategies with individuals with various disabilities. |
Learning Objectives: At the completion of the workshop, participants will be able to: 1) Distinguish between pure and impure verbal operants. 2) Identify compound verbal operants. 3) Analyze videotape examples of compound verbal operants. 4) Define and identify common autoclitic operants (both vocal and non-vocal). 5) Suggest strategies to promote the development and understanding of autoclitics. 6) Rewrite common IEP objectives in terms of Verbal Operants |
Activities: Participants will review Skinner�s fundamental verbal operants and review examples across several modalities. We will then describe impure verbal operants and suggest a way of using an ABC analysis to identify sources of multiple control over such operants. Participants will review written examples of impure operants and then review videotape examples of them. Participants will review and suggest modifications to sample IEP objectives (and are encouraged to bring their own), including identifying pure and impure operants as well as potential teaching strategies. We will then discuss autoclitics and the many functions that Skinner identified associated with them. We will review several key factors associated with easy versus difficult acquisition of such verbal operants as well as discuss how Skinner�s views can impact on our understanding of various disabilities, including autism. |
Audience: Teachers, speech/language pathologists, psychologists, and behavior analysts. Participants should be well versed in the fundamentals of applied behavior analysis as well as be familiar with Skinners fundamental operants described in Verbal Behavior. Participants should be ready to share examples of language targets with which they are familiar. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Providing Feedback on the Intensive Teaching of Verbal Operants through a Transcription Code |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
2:00 PM–5:00 PM |
Marietta |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Michael Miklos, Ph.D. |
MICHAEL MIKLOS (Pennsylvania Training and Technical Assistance Network), WILLIAM A. GALBRAITH (Pennsylvania Training and Technical Assistance Network) |
Description: This three hour workshop will guide participants through the process of observing and recording the instructional behavior of teachers during intensive teaching of the primary verbal operants for children with autism. The conceptional origins and basic instructional procedures for using a mixed and varied approach to teaching the verbal operants will be briefly reviewed . Focus will be on a method of transcribing teacher behaviors using a formalized code. The transciption code to be presented is flexible and allows consultants to deliver competency based performance feedback to instructors. Participants will learn to code rate of instructional presentation (trials per minute), the frequency of type of verbal operant trial presented; ratio of reinforcement delivery;and fidelity with error correction and prompting procedures. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will identify components of instruction using a mixed and varied approach to teaching the verbal operants to children with autism. 2.Participants will read transcription protocols and describe the quality of instruction represented by the protocol. 3. Participants will practice using the observational code to transcribe both demonstrations of instruction and videotaped instructional samples 4. Participants will practice scoring transcription protocols and analyzing the protocols 5. Participants will identify steps in providing systematic feedback using the transcription protocol. |
Activities: Participants will be provided opportunities to practice coding videotaped segments of instruction as well as instructional demonstrations. Practice in reading and interpreting transcription protocols will be provided. |
Audience: Consultants and teachers providing intensive behavioral interventions which incorporate Skinner's analysis of verbal behavior for students with autism. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Treating Clients with Maladaptive Habits, Tics, Tourette's Syndrome, and Stuttering Using the Habit Reversal and Regulated Breathing Treatment Program |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
2:00 PM–5:00 PM |
Roswell |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: R. Gregory Nunn, Ph.D. |
R. GREGORY NUNN (National University) |
Description: Maladaptive and undesirable habits, tics, Tourettes Syndrome (TS), and stuttering are extremely common problems which can seriously affect the personal relationships and self-esteem of individuals who suffer from them. Because these problems can cause acute psychological distress, many different types of treatments for them have been developed. Habit Reversal is a behavioral treatment approach which has proven to be an effective, General treatment for habits and tics including TS (Azrin & Nunn, 1973; Azrin & Nunn, 1977; Nunn, 1978; Azrin, Nunn & Frantz, 1980; Azrin & Peterson, 1988a; Finney, Rapoff, Hall, & Christopherson, 1983; Franco, 1981; Zikis, 1983: Miltenberger, 2001). In this Workshop we will discuss the identification, nature, and treatment of children, adolescents, and adults with these type of problems. Specifically we will cover the diagnosis and treatment of individuals using the Habit Reversal and Regulated Breathing Treatment Procedures of Azrin and Nunn as well as treatment variations that have evolved from their original work. Case studies are included where possible and workshop participants are strongly encouraged to provide input. |
Learning Objectives: Identify and diagnose maladaptive habits, tics, TS, and stuttering with children and adults. Understand the theoretical rationales that have spawned the many treatments for these types of problems. Describe the Habit Reversal and Regulated Breathing Treatment Procedures. Identify the common pitfalls of treatment and ways of overcoming them. |
Activities: Case studies are included where possible and workshop participants are strongly encouraged to provide input. |
Audience: All practitioners, educators, and other professionals working with children, adolescents, or adults presenting with these types of problems. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Legal & Ethical Issues for Behavior Analysts Serving People with Mental Retardation and Related Disabilities |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
2:00 PM–5:00 PM |
Edgewood |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: R. M. (Duke) Schell, Ph.D. |
R. M. (DUKE) SCHELL (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center) |
Description: This workshop will focus on legal issues related to the use of behavior analysis techniques and procedures with people with mental retardation and related developmental disabilities. It will also describe legal issues from the field of mental health that have had an impact on behavior analytic approaches. Legal issues will be discussed across the varied settings from which they are drawn including schools, mental retardation and mental health facilities, and community settings. |
Learning Objectives: On completion of the workshop the participants will be able to: 1. Describe legal issues (topical areas and specific court cases) that have influenced the general use of behavior analysis techniques and procedures. 2. Describe and discuss the effects of legal issues and precedents on the everyday practice of behavior analysis with consumers (i.e., people directly receiving behavior analytic services). 3. Describe and discuss the effects of legal issues and precedents on the perception of behavior analysis techniques and procedures on the public as consumer. 4. Describe and discuss legal issues in the context of ethics for psychologists and the responsible code of conduct for certified behavior analysts. |
Activities: A brief review of historical and more current legal information will be followed by casebook-style discussions based on experiences of the presenter as well as composite examples that raise legal and ethical issues. Cases will be discussed in small-groups and then presented to the entire audience. Participants are encouraged to bring their own experiences with legal issues and anonymous case examples for discussion with the group. |
Audience: People involved in the development and supervision of behavioral assessment and treatment procedures and applied research with people with mental retardation and related disabilities. People who manage the provision of behavior analytic services in applied settings are also encouraged to attend. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Data Collection and Analysis Using Computer Technology: Hands-on Discrete and Sequential Applications of the BEST System |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
2:00 PM–5:00 PM |
Harris |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Thomas L. Sharpe, Jr., Ed.D. |
THOMAS L. SHARPE, JR. (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), DANIEL W. BALDERSON (Weber State University), MATTHEW R. MARTIN (Illinois State University), JOHN KOPERWAS (n/a) |
Description: The workshop will provide hands on application of a sophisticated software package designed to collect and analyze discrete and time-based behavioral data. The program is particularly useful to advanced graduate students and behavioral psychologists interested in analyzing complex configurations of behaviors which are emitted at high rates, oftentimes overlap in time, and which are context dependent. Discussion includes an introduction to (a) recommended procedures when collecting time-based data in the live setting and from videotape records, and (b) computer generated discrete and sequential descriptions, graphic and statistical analyses, and reliability comparisons of discrete and sequential data. Participants will be provided with a complimentary copy of the complete software package on CD ROM, and a .pdf file summary copy of a compatible research methods text published by Sage Publications as a function of workshop participation. ***While some computer hardware will be provided, it is recommended that workshop participants bring their own IBM compatible laptop hardware to facilitate hands-on workshop interactions. |
Learning Objectives: Workshop participants will exit with software-based data collection and analysis competencies, including the ability to (a) construct and apply systemic observation systems, (b) generate a time-based behavioral record using an inclusive overlapping category system, (c) perform traditional and sequential analyses using multiple measurement methodologies and interpret Z score transformations, (d) create and edit graphic data representations and apply relevant visual and statistical analyses, (e) conduct reliability and treatment fidelity analyses, and (f) apply a variety of data record edit and merge functions when operating with complex multiple event category systems. Learning Objective 1: The participants will be able to discuss in conceptual and applied ways the principles and practice of discrete and sequential behavior analysis methods. Learning Objective 2: The participants will be able to apply a range of computer-based data collection, reliability, and measurement techniques to their particular behavior analysis interests. Learning Objective 3: The participants will be able to understand and apply a range of computer-based descriptive and statistical data analysis techniques in relation to discrete and sequential measurement sets. Learning Objective 4: The participants will be able to construct a variety of behavior graphs and apply appropriate analysis techniques to the graph types covered. |
Activities: Activities include (a) review of traditional behavior analysis recording methods, (b) introduction to, and hands on application of, a computer-based package designed to enhance behavior analyses of complex interactive settings, and (c) detailed hands-on demonstration of data collection features, discrete and sequential analysis capabilities, within and across data-file graphic representations, and a variety of reliability, treatment fidelity, and data manipulation and editing functions. |
Audience: Advanced graduate students and behavior analysts working in experimental and applied settings who are interested in research and development related to the interactive nature of behavior in situations where study of multiple behaviors and events, multiple participants, and changing setting variables are present. Those working in educational and social science settings and who are challenged with how to describe and analyze highly interactive behavioral transactions should find the workshop experience and complimentary software particularly appealing to a wide range of research and assessment applications. |
Content Area: Methodology |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Successful Behavioral Consultation in Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASDs): Parent and Professional Perspectives |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Regency V |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Jane M. Barbin, Ph.D. |
JANE M. BARBIN (Behavioral Directions, LLC), LINDA S. MEYER (Linda S. Meyer Consulting, LLC), SUZANNE LETSO (Connecticut Center for Child Development), ERIK A. MAYVILLE (Institute for Educational Planning), LISA HEILBRONNER (Parent) |
Description: Extensive research supports the effectiveness of a behavioral approach for individuals with ASD and their families. Behavioral consultation, that is professional consultative guidance in educational, vocational, residential, and family systems based on ABA principles, is often the avenue in which families, agencies, and learners access behavioral intervention. Consultation often involves sharing of information on instructional strategies, skill acquisition, behavior reduction, curricula, motivational systems, and organizational systems and occurs in home, school, community, and other settings. An effective behavioral consultant must understand and become proficient in the contingencies which establish effectiveness for consumers. In addition to assuring the consultant has adequate credentials, parents and agency staff must explore that sufficient resources are available and that empirically-supported interventions are utilized. Response data from parents and professionals (consultants, home-based instructional staff, and vocational, residential school staff) will be presented to clarify essential factors for best outcome in the consultation relationship. This workshop will explore the importance of making data-based decisions and the importance of ongoing training with effective feedback. Other related success elements will be discussed (e.g., generalization, immediacy of change). Parent and professional similarities and differences will be reviewed as they relate to building better collaboration and coordination between team members. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to: 1. Identify three key factors related to successful behavioral consultation. 2. Understand important credentialing requirements for professionals which sets up successful consultation. 3. Identify strategies for increasing communication and collaboration within the treatment team, including use of consultation contracting. 4. Demonstrate an increased appreciation for the impact of family (e.g., sibling, marital) and agency (e.g., resources, treatment philosophy) issues which impinge on service delivery. |
Activities: Classroom presentation and discussion will be provided. Participants will also engage in a brief problem-solving session in which participants will break into groups to discuss how the presented information can be directly applied to their own consultation activity. Each participant will receive an information folder containing samples and supportive reading materials for exploration. |
Audience: Behavior analysts, psychologists, related service providers, and other consultants who provide behavioral consultation services; agency staff or caregivers who deliver or receive consultation services; parents or caregivers of individuals with autism and professionals who support them. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Assessing the Quality of Special Education Classrooms and Services |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Auburn |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Lisa N. Britton, Ph.D. |
LISA N. BRITTON (Spectrum Center), AMY CRYE (Spectrum Center), WHITNEY S. O'KEEFE (Spectrum Center) |
Description: The purpose of this workshop is to provide the participants with some tools that will allow them to assess a classroom to evaluate the quality of the program. In particular, we will provide training in the following areas: Classroom Climate Data: Participants will learn how to use a partial interval recording system to collect data on instructions, praise statements, and negative statements delivered by classroom staff and compare these data to classroom expectations. Communication Data: Participants will learn how to use a partial interval recording system to assess the use of Augmentative and Alternative Communication devices and how classroom staff promote communication within the classroom setting. Participants will also learn how to compare these data to classroom expectations. Functional Assessment (FA) and Behavior Intervention Plan (BIP) Checklist: Participants will learn to assess the quality of an FA and BIP based on the criteria discussed through the workshop. There will be an emphasis on assessing the thoroughness of the FA in determining the function of the behavior as well as ensuring that the BIP is based on the function of the behavior. Individualized Education Plan (IEP) Checklist: Participants will learn to assess the quality of IEP goals based on the criteria discussed through the workshop. There will be an emphasis on ensuring that the baseline levels have quantitative values. In addition, there will be a focus on ensuring that the IEP goals are specific and measurable. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will learn how to use a partial interval recording system to collect data on instructions, praise statements, and negative statements delivered by classroom staff and compare these data to classroom expectations. 2. Participants will learn how to use a partial interval recording system to assess the use of Augmentative and Alternative Communication devices and how classroom staff promote communication within the classroom setting. 3. Participants will learn to assess the quality of an FA and BIP based on the criteria discussed through the workshop. 4. Participants will learn to assess the quality of IEP goals based on the criteria discussed through the workshop. |
Activities: A didactic lecture will be provided on each of the topics listed. After each section, the participants will have an opportunity to practice the skills discussed. The following practice activities will occur: 1. Participants will practice collecting partial interval recording on staff interactions with students. 2. Participants will practice collecting partial interval recording on staff promoting communication skills with students. 3. Participants will practice assessing the quality of an FA and BIP. 4. Participants will practicing assessing the quality of IEP goals. |
Audience: Consultants in schools, Special Education Teachers, School Psychologists, and other professionals working in an education setting |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Ensuring Procedural Integrity of Clinical Programming in Applied Settings |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Lenox |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Frank L. Bird, M.Ed. |
DANIEL COHEN-ALMEIDA (Melmark New England), FRANK L. BIRD (Melmark New England), RITA M. GARDNER (Melmark New England), HELENA L. MAGUIRE (Melmark New England) |
Description: The clinical effectiveness of a behavior support plan relies not only on the technological sophistication of the written plan, but also on the ability of direct service staff to accurately and consistently implement the behavior support plan. This workshop will present the staff training and performance monitoring systems for clinical programming that have evolved over the past 8 years at Melmark New England: a private, not for profit, community based organization serving children and adolescents with autism spectrum disorders, with acquired brain injury, with neurological diseases and disorders, dual diagnosis, and severe challenging behaviors. Following a review of the OBM literature on effective systems development, workshop participants will review sample training schedules, training protocols, performance monitoring tools, as well as procedures for training supervisors to implement these systems. The goal of workshop will be to provide participants with systems to ensure competent and accurate implementation of clinical programs from a direct service staff persons 1st day on the job. |
Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will identify the components of an effective staff training program 2) Participants will develop training schedules and select training protocols for sample clients. 3) Participants will accurately score sample performance monitoring tools after viewing video samples of work performance. 4) Participants will identify the components of training systems necessary for supervisory staff. |
Activities: Short Lecture, Case Studies, Guided Practice with feedback |
Audience: Professional staff responsible for the training and/or supervision of direct service staff. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Treatment of Chronic Pain with Acceptance and Commitment Therapy |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Roswell |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: JoAnne Dahl, Ph.D. |
JOANNE DAHL (University of Uppsala, Sweden) |
Description: This is an experiential workshop that focuses on the theory, research and practice of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT), a third wave behavior therapy approach to the analysis and treatment of individuals who are trapped in chronic pain/stress symptoms and subsequent avoidance behaviors. A powerful model of intervention for treatment of chronic pain that can be used for individuals or groups will be presented. Hands on exercises will be demonstrated and practiced. Topics covered will include: Basic analysis and ACT principles of treatment for chronic pain Conceptualization on new ways of approaching the problem The hexaflex Dramatization of the complex process of establishing chronic pain life patterns. Role play of the first session: values life compass, creative helplessness. Exercises in pairs: life compass, creative hopelessness, commitment. Group exercises: o Being present in the here and now: mindfulness exercise, the observer self o showing the ACT principles Values: Funeral exercise o Defusion: Bus metaphor o Defusion: Chess board o Defusion: Joe the Bum o Commitment: taking valued steps |
Learning Objectives: 1) The main objective of this workshop is to illustrate the use of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) in the field of chronic pain/stress as an effective alternative to the traditional medical model approach to chronic illness. 2) To practise functional conceptualization of chronic pain using the ACT model 3) To practice the components of ACT: values, defusion, exposure, mindfullness and comittment in the application of chronic pain. 4) To experience through experiential exercises how to do and use ACT skills in the form of dramatisation of ACT components for use in groups of clients with chronic pain. |
Activities: Workshop activities will include: role play, experiential exercises, written exercises, group activities in the form of dramatisation of metaphors. Theortical model for ACT in the treatment of chronic pain will be presented in the form of a lecture. |
Audience: Anyone working with clients with chronic pain |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Using Excel Spreadsheets and Graphs for Visual Display of Individual Behavior and Academic Performances in Applied Settings |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Inman |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Bryan J. Davey, Ph.D. |
BRYAN J. DAVEY (Southern Behavioral Group, Inc.), DONALD M. STENHOFF (University of Kentucky) |
Description: Visual display of data in single-subject research is imperative when communicating quantitative relationships and behavior patterns to consumers and fellow practitioners. Excel is an application which allows practitioners and consumers to create spreadsheets and graphical displays. Excel graphs convey effect across various single-subject designs (e.g., multiple-baseline, alternating treatment, reversal, cumulative record). These designs allow practitioners to display assessment (i.e., functional analyses, structural analyses) and intervention (i.e., various forms of differential reinforcement, discrete trial programs) outcomes. While Excel can be difficult to navigate and master, this workshop will provide participants with hands on training promoting effective use. Workshop mini lessons include how to setup spreadsheets and input data sets, chart wizard navigation, graph construction including all data or select data sets within a spreadsheet, manipulation of graph components (e.g., axes, data labels, phase change lines, raised zero), and updating data sets and graphs when data are available. Instructors will provide several models, followed by opportunities for participants to practice skills with timely feedback. Throughout the workshop instructors will explain and demonstrate the subtle nuances of Excel. These tips allow for easier Excel navigation and enhance graphical presentations. Additionally, workshop instructors will provide an Excel CD tutorial that will continue to guide participants in future Excel projects. Participants are required to bring a laptop with the Excel application and strongly encouraged to bring their own data sets to graph during the workshop. |
Learning Objectives: At the completion of this workshop participants will be able to: 1. Setup measurement specific spreadsheets, input data sets, and manipulate data sets within an Excel spreadsheet 2. Create graphs for alternating treatment, reversal, multiple-baseline designs, and cumulative records 3. Use the chart wizard, construct graphs of all data or select data sets within a spreadsheet, and update databases and graphs as data collection continues 4. Manipulate graph components (e.g., axes, gridlines, backgrounds, data points, data paths, secondary axis), and use drawing tools to insert additional components (e.g., arrows, data labels, phase change lines, text boxes) |
Activities: Participants will be provided concise instruction and several models with instructor support to ensure skill acquisition. Finally, participants will complete a comprehensive case example which provides opportunities for participants to solve challenges inherent in the Excel application. The comprehensive case example will consolidate and increase fluency of the skills taught during the instructional phase of the workshop. Additionally, participants will be encouraged to bring questions with regard to previous Excel experiences. |
Audience: Practitioners, students, researchers, educational service providers, and others interested in visual display of data in single-subject research and program progress. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Applications of OBM Strategies in Service Settings for Individuals with Autism: Promoting Quality Outcomes |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Learning Center |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Daphna El-Roy, Ph.D. |
DAPHNA EL-ROY (Eden II Programs), EILEEN HOPKINS (Eden II Programs), JOANNE GERENSER (Eden II Programs) |
Description: The incidence with autism has grown considerably in the past ten years. In order to meet the needs of this growing population, there has been a corresponding growth in the development of programs serving individuals with autism. While these programs are essential to meet the needs of the autism community, issues of attracting, training, and retaining a qualified workforce becomes very difficult. In addition to the competition among autism service providers, these agencies must also compete with the employment opportunities that are less stressful and less demanding than working with individuals with autism. There have been a large number of articles and books published on the effectiveness of using the principles of applied behavior analysis to change behavior. The use of applied behavior analysis has been widely supported for the treatment and education of children with autism. Despite the widespread use of behavior teaching techniques in special education, few providers apply these same principles to address staff behavior change and organizational change. Organizational behavior management (OBM) is the application of behavior analysis to organizational improvement (Abernathy & Harshbarger, 2002). The field of organizational behavior management provides us with an empirically validated, data based framework to impact employee performance, professional development as well as overall organizational health. The purpose of this workshop is to provide an overview of organizational behavior management techniques to address common issues within the field of human services and more specifically to programs serving individuals with autism and other developmental disabilities. Topics to be addressed include issues of staff retention and turnover, staff development, and issues of quality assurance and improvement. Data will be presented on different organizational interventions along with details on these specific interventions. |
Learning Objectives: ? Understand basic principles of OBM as applied to autism service settings ? Apply a variety of assessment techniques to identify program strengths, weaknesses and areas in need of improvement ? Become familiar with components of a quality improvement plan and strategies for implementation ? Become familiar with data collection procedures and strategies for evaluation the efficacy of quality improvement strategies and plans |
Activities: Activities include didactic instruction and small group work. Participants will be given sample plans and assessment tools |
Audience: Program administrators, clinical supervisors and other related professionals |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Combining Direct Instruction and Precision Teaching for Children with Autism |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Greenbriar |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Michael Fabrizio, M.A. |
MICHAEL FABRIZIO (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), KRISTA ZAMBOLIN (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), KELLY J. FERRIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), AMY KING (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), KATHLEEN S. LAINO (University of North Texas) |
Description: This workshop will present participants with skills that are often very helpful in combining direct instruction curricula and precision teaching in intervention programs for children with autism and related disabilities. The workshop will focus on (a) selecting appropriate direct instruction programs given various learner characteristics, (b) measuring student progress through DI curricula and using those data to make ongoing instructional decisions, (c) precision teaching sections or key skills from the major DI curricula that tend to be difficult for children with autism, (d) modifying error correction procedures to help promote appropriate stimulus control and true learning, (e) accelerating students progress through DI curricula. We will focus on these skills across the curriculum areas of language, reading, mathematics, and writing. Participants will receive printed and digital copies of all materials presented including an enhanced CD-ROM that contains supplemental instructional and practice activities as well as recommended readings related to the workshops topic. |
Learning Objectives: By the end of the workshop, participants will be able to discriminate between developmental and corrective Direct Instruction curricula By the end of the workshop, participants will be able to select an appropriate DI curriculum given various learner characteristics from the curricular areas of language, reading, mathematics, and writing By the end of the workshop, participants will be able to describe how to measure student progress through DI curricula and make various instructional decisions based on that measurement By the end of the workshop, participants will be able to list skills that tend to be problematic for learners with autism from the major DI curricula in the areas of language, reading, mathematics, and writing By the end of the workshop, participants will be able to describe modifications that should occur to prescribed error corrects to facilitate appropriate stimulus control By the end of the workshop, participants will be able to describe ways to accelerate students� rates of progress through DI curricula. |
Activities: This workshop will employ a blend of lecture, discrimination practice, and coached small group activities to facilitate participants� skill acquisition as it relates to the above objectives. |
Audience: This workshop is appropriate for clinicians, parents, and teachers who are currently employing or wish to employ direct instruction curricula in the intervention programs of children with autism and related disabilities. Some familiarity with the tenets and procedures associated with precision teaching would be helpful. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
The Real Function of Play: Transitioning from Contrived to Natural Antecedents and Consequences When Targeting Play, Language, and Social Development in Children with Autism |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Singapore |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Kristie M. Frissen-Thompson, Ph.D. |
KRISTIE M. FRISSEN-THOMPSON (ABC of North Carolina), ALLETA JOHNSON (ABC of North Carolina) |
Description: By definition, play is described as intrinsically motivated, freely chosen, and process-oriented over product-oriented, non-literal, and enjoyable. Incorporating play skills for a child with autism is important for many reasons. First, developmentally appropriate social interaction a primary impairment in autism. Second, play is a fundamental means by which children typically interact with others. In typical development, the reinforcer for playing with others is the interaction itself (i.e., reciprocity), rather than an unrelated, tangible reinforcer. Children at the one-word stage use language to communicate social functions such as regulating others behavior, establishing joint attention, and social interaction. As more advanced language develops, children must have social motivation to use it (e.g., through commenting, narratives, conversation, referencing, etc.) Children with autism often have delays in pragmatic development (i.e., use of language in a social contexts) which may be related to an overall deficit in development of social motivation. By teaching play, language, and social development by looking at function, we ensure that our learners are able to respond to natural antecedent and consequent conditions. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to: 1. Identify natural and unnatural antecedents and consequences for play, language, and social behaviors. 2. Identify ways to transition from the use of contrived to more natural antecedents and consequences. 3. Write developmentally appropriate play language targets based on identification of a child�s level of social motivation. 4. Define and identify the components of proximity play. 5. Identify the sequence of teaching components and determine the child's ability to move forward within the teaching sequence. |
Activities: We will review the literature on play, language, and social skills development and will show videotaped vignettes of play and language development in neurotypical peers, of transitioning from contrived to natural antecedents and consequences, and of targeting natural play language in children with autism. |
Audience: The workshop is designed for individuals currently implementing programs to teach play skills to children with autism using ABA-based teaching technologies. Participants should have some knowledge of applied behavior analysis. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Consultative Speech and Language Services for Children with Autism and Severe Developmental Disabilities |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Vinings |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Laura M. Hutt, M.S. |
LAURA M. HUTT (New England Center for Children), BETH O. BELLONE (New England Center for Children) |
Description: Children with autism and severe developmental disabilities present with critical needs in communication and difficulties acquiring, maintaining and generalizing skills. Consistent and extensive instruction is required to insure that learning and subsequent performance increase. Direct pull-out speech and language treatment may not adequately address the communication deficits of children with autism. The American Speech Language and Hearing Associations (ASHA) 1993 position statement endorses the consultative model as an effective way to provide services. In a consultative model, children receive several hours each day of direct instruction from their teacher targeting their individual communication needs. Data collected from the ASHA National Outcomes Measurement study indicate that children of many ages made more and better progress when they received treatment delivered in this manner. At New England Center for Children, this model includes presenting 1) learning opportunities, 2) prompting accurate performance for both teachers and students, 3) reinforcement of correct performances, and 4) systematically fading prompts. Training teachers to provide instruction in speech and language ensures more learning opportunities in the settings that the target skills must be used. Participants will learn to present the benefits of the model to school administrators and parents, provide trainings for teachers, and observe and evaluate program effectiveness. |
Learning Objectives: 1. identify drawbacks of the traditional pull-out speech and language services for children with autism 2. identify benefits of the consultative/collaborative model of speech and language services 3. present benefits of the consultative/collaborative model to families, teachers, and school administrators 4. develop caseload management systems within the framework of the consultative/collaborative model 5. train teachers to use speech and language curriculum, collect and summarize data, and present student progress |
Activities: Case studies with video and/or written examples: Participants will identify classroom and individual goals, environmental factors, and training issues. Motivating operations, antecedents, target behavior, and reinforcement will be identified for the student and for the trainer. Analysis of consumer, service, and organizational factors will be conducted and participants will make decisions on implementing this type of service plan. |
Audience: Behavior analysts working in school systems, school personnel, speech and language pathologists, direct care staff, teaching aides |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Intensive Early Intervention: Advanced Social Language and Social Skills Programming |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Regency VI |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Eric V. Larsson, Ph.D. |
ERIC V. LARSSON (Lovaas Institute Midwest), KARA L. RIEDESEL (Lovaas Institute Midwest), CHARRYSE M. FOUQUETTE (LIFE-Midwest/St. Cloud State University) |
Description: In intensive early intervention with young children with autism, a great number of language skills are developed. This workshop will outline how to develop the skills within a coherent conceptual framework, enabling productive treatment planning and program evaluation. The framework will be a matrix of social language skills which follows a sequence of generative language development. Most importantly, not only is the matrix of skills organized across generalization modalities, syntax forms, and conditional discriminations; but it is also clinically focused on the functional social relationships which interfere with natural development. After basic receptive and expressive skills are developed, the matrix naturally flows into auditory comprehension and production skills. The organization of the language curriculum is used to control the pace of development related social skills in a systematic manner. Due to the functional social impairments often displayed by children with autism, a lack of cooperative play skills, and therefore mutual friendships, are not developed without specialized intervention. The purpose of this workshop will also be to focus on the developmental progression of play, effective behavioral techniques and procedures to develop creative and spontaneous play skills, problem-solving strategies to enhance the acquisition of play skills, and generalization of play skills from highly structured environments to naturalized environments. Complex social contingencies will be addressed to ensure that the child is not only acquiring social skills, but is using those skills functionally throughout the child's 24-hour and 7-day life. |
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to: 1, Plan a child�s language curriculum as part of a coherent whole. 2, Implement programs that promote creative language production and auditory comprehension through generative language learning. 3, Program genuinely functional social language skills. 4, Program the development of play skills that include: independent play, parallel play, associative play, cooperative play, imaginative play, social congruent play, and social language play. 5, Identify behavioral techniques and procedures to teach play skills. 6, Identify generalization procedures to promote naturalized play skills. |
Activities: Participants will observe videos of social language programs, and participate in didactic presentations, problem-solving discussions, and interactive exercises. Participants will obtain specific program sheets provided by the instructors. |
Audience: Parents, lead therapists, line therapists, consultants, and students. Participants should have a basic understanding of behavioral terms used in intensive early intervention. At least one-month's experience with intensive early intervention is preferable. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Teaching Reading and Writing to Children with Autism |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Manila |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Mark Adams, Ph.D. |
PATRICIA R. MASSOTH (BEST Consulting, Inc.), MARK ADAMS (BEST Consulting, Inc.) |
Description: Children receiving intensive 1:1 discrete trial training often show deficits in developing vocal speech, while receptive language skills are strong. In addition, there is beginning to be support shown for developing alternative means of vocal speech (e.g., writing or typing or word exchange) as a substitute for vocal, expressive speech. The purpose of this workshop is to provide training of expressive object labeling and other expressive language skills using writing, typing, and word exchange as a substitute for vocal speech response requirements. It is proposed that strengthening the "equivalence" properties of hearing vocal speech, seeing objects and constructing their corresponding written or typed responses through the use of a Reading and Writing Program based on the publication The Reading and Writing Program, (Watthen-Lovaas & Lovaas, 1998), will facilitate the use of language, regardless of the formal characteristics of the expressive response. Workshop participants will receive hands-on practice using a Reading and Writing board and corresponding materials. Additionally, they will leave with a Reading and Writing board, and receive a comprehensive manual outlining progressions and various methods of implementing a Reading and Writing Program based on case examples. |
Learning Objectives: This workshop will demonstrate: - steps to teach children with Autism to read and write. - steps to teach advanced alternative means of vocal speech such as writing, spelling, and typing. - how to teach each progression of a Reading and writing program. - Helpful procedures to teach advanced receptive and expressive skills. - how to make a Reading and writing board and related materials. - how to develop lessons using procedures of the Reading and writing program. |
Activities: Workshop activities will include modeling of procedures as well as video examples. Participants will practice teaching skills to incorporate procedures discussed during the workshop. |
Audience: The target audience for this workshop are parents and professionals who deliver behavioral services to children with autism. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Pay Attention! Strategies for Active Engagement of Preschoolers with Autism in Home/Community Classroom Environments |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Piedmont |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Justin A. DiDomenico, M.Ed. |
KATHLEEN MCCABE-ODRI (Advance, Inc./Partners in Learning, Inc.), LAURA KENNEALLY (Advance, Inc.), JUSTIN A. DIDOMENICO (Advance, Inc.), LORI A. LORENZETTI (Advance, Inc.), JENNIFER CORNELY (Advance, Inc.), NICOLE M. SWANFELD (Partners in Learning, Inc.) |
Description: Attending and active engagement are critical components of learning. Preschoolers with autism often experience severe challenges in both attending to relevant environmental cues and sustaining attention for the duration of activities. Active engagement is vital for children to benefit from the experiences occurring in typical settings such as the home or a community preschool classroom. The attending challenges experienced by young children with autism require systematic intervention strategies specifically adapted to each environment in order to assist the child in developing improved attending skills. This workshop will address the challenges associated with engaging young children with autism in activities occurring in the natural environment, focusing on strategies and adaptations that improve the attending abilties of preschoolers with autism. We will discuss the importance of active engagement in inclusive settings, as well as meaningful participation in family activities in both the home and community environment. Examples of effective programming used by professionals and families for each environment will be presented. DVDs with sample strategies will be given to each participant. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participants will be able to: (1) define active engagement/attending of preschoolers per environment (2) measure engagement/attending via objective data collection procedures (3) develop strategies to address attending/engagement deficits in classroom settings (4) develop strategies to address attending/engagement deficits in home/community settings |
Activities: Using lecture, video demonstrations, handouts and small group activities, participants will learn strategies to improve engagement and objectively measure progress of students. |
Audience: This workshop is designed for teachers, paraprofessionals, parents, and behavior consultants for preschoolers with autism. The emphasis is on designing and implementing strategies to improve engagement in a variety of typical environments. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
A Picture is Worth a Thousand Words: Research-Based Instructional Supports for Children with Autism |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
International Ballroom North |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Pat Mirenda, Ph.D. |
PAT MIRENDA (University of British Columbia), BRENDA FOSSETT (University of British Columbia) |
Description: Instructional techniques incorporating pictures and/or videotapes can be quite effective for teaching a wide range of skills to children with autism. This workshop will provide participants with research-based guidelines for using four visual support techniques. Single-subject studies examining each of the techniques will be used to illustrate key principles and components. Visual schedules use pictures to depict sequences of activities or task steps and thus enable individuals to predict future events in order to reduce problem behavior and/or increase independence. Contingency maps depict environment-behavior relationships by using pictures to represent : (a) the common antecedent that precedes both problem and alterative behaviors, (b) the topography of both problem and alternative behaviors, (c) the functional reinforcer(s) that will be provided contingent on alternative behavior, and (d) the previously-available functional reinforcer(s) that will no longer be provided contingent on problem behavior. Picture-to-text matching instruction is used to teach sight words to individuals with autism who are unable to speak and for whom the use of pictures may interfere with sight word learning when used within a paired associate learning paradigm. Finally, video modeling can be used to teach social interaction and other skills to children with autism in peer play situations. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, participants will be able to: 1. Summarize ABA research on the use of visual schedules, including the components that appear to be essential for success; 2. Describe the four key elements of contingency maps and guidelines for creating and implementing them; 3. Describe the differences between paired associate and picture-to-text matching paradigms for sight word instruction and provide examples of how to implement the latter; 4. Design a basic video modeling intervention using multiple vignettes to teach social language skills to children with autism in peer play contexts |
Activities: Activities will include opportunities for participants to view research-based case studies (some with videotaped examples) and to engage in activities related to the objectives. For example, participants will be asked to plan a contingency map for a hypothetical child, design a picture-to-text matching activity for a student in a regular classroom, and plan a video modeling intervention to teach social language skills. |
Audience: The target audience includes teachers, speech-language pathologists, and behavior analysts at a post-masters level who work with children with autism spectrum disorders who have difficulty using and/or understanding spoken language. The children may be in home-based ABA programs or inclusive classrooms in public schools. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Linking Assessment to Practice: How to Analyze Assessment Scores to Design Effective Educational Programming for Learners with Autism |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Spring |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Alison L. Moors, M.A. |
ALISON L. MOORS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), HOLLY ALMON (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), KELLY J. FERRIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), SARA J. PAHL (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Description: When working with children with autism, clinicians and parents are faced with varied and countless reports of assessment protocols from the initial diagnosis and throughout the student's educational career. This workshop is specifically designed to target service providers and parents working with kids with autism who want to gain a better understanding of academic/achievement testing and how the results can aide in future educational programming. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to: 1. Define types of assessments commonly used in educational programming. 2. Define parts of assessment score reports when shown examples 3. List examples of criterion and normed referenced assessments conducive to educational planning \4. Create example educational plans using sample assessment data |
Activities: While some lecture will be used, emphasis will be placed on audience participation through discussion as well as participants performing the objectives or components of this workshop. |
Audience: This is an introductory level workshop designed for clinicians, parents, teachers or anyone else responsible for designing educational programming for students with autism. Applied knowledge of behavior analytic teaching techniques and subsequent terminology is required. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Case Conceptualization in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Fairlie |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Daniel J. Moran, Ph.D. |
DANIEL J. MORAN (MidAmerican Psychological Institute), PATRICIA BACH (Illinois Institute of Technology) |
Description: This workshop will provide a step-by-step framework for functionally conceptualizing client behavior problems, and will discuss selection and application of specific ACT interventions. The workshop will also help attendees develop their own ACT consistent interventions, exercises, and metaphors. Process and outcome measures will be discussed, as well as the utilization of the Action and Acceptance Questionnaire-2 as an adjunct measure of clinically-relevant behavior change. The workshop will also discuss first order and second order therapeutic approaches, and help the attendees discriminate when to use the appropriate therapeutic intervention. This workshop will be based on content from the forthcoming publication Case Conceptualization in Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, (Moran and Bach, in preparation, New Harbinger). |
Learning Objectives: Workshop participants will become familiar with the six core ACT principles of defusion, self-as-context, acceptance, values, committed action, and contacting the present moment, which will be described from a strict behavior analytic perspective Workshop participants will be able to conceptualize clinically relevant behaviors as functional response classes, and discriminate when they are amenable to an ACT approach. Workshop participants will be able to select ACT interventions appropriate for addressing specific core principles. Workshop participants will learn how to apply specific ACT interventions based on the case formulation Workshop participants will learn to use ACT case conceptualization to facilitate creating one�s own ACT consistent metaphors, exercises, and interventions for application in the context of a client�s unique history and presenting complaints. Workshop participants will learn methods of assessing effectiveness of interventions |
Activities: The workshop will use a case-based approach beginning with instructor supplied cases and later using participants� clinical cases for practice in ACT case formulation, selecting interventions, and assessing the effectiveness of interventions, and outcomes. There will be a 60 minute slide presentation, demonstrations, large group exercises and case-based practice. Participants will be provided with handouts to use with their clients for assessment and homework assignments to augment in session interventions. Worksheets will also be distributed for the participants to use to facilitate ACT case formulation. |
Audience: This workshop is suitable to clinicians with little exposure to ACT who would like to learn how to apply ACT broadly. It is also suitable for participants who have attended ACT experiential workshops and would like to improve their skill in functional contextual case formulation and deciding when to apply specific ACT interventions. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Teaching a Behavioral Child Development Course with Interteaching and Student Response Systems (Clickers) |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Edgewood |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Gary D. Novak, Ph.D. |
GARY D. NOVAK (California State University, Stanislaus), MARTHA PELAEZ (Florida International University) |
Description: Very few behavior analysts teach courses in child development. As a result, this important area is dominated by nonbehavioral viewpoints. This workshop will give you the knowledge and skills needed to be prepared to teach a course in child and adolescent development from a behavioral perspective. The workshop leaders will present the basic concepts of their behavioral-systems approach to child and adolescent development that are detailed in their textbook. Through the use of Student Response Systems (clickers), participants will learn how to develop an interactive classroom format in which peers, the instructor, and the student share an active teaching role. Objectives, outlines and other materials will be provided. |
Learning Objectives: At the completion of the workshop, participants will be able to: Explain the basic principles of a behavioral systems approach to child development. Write questions to be used in cllicker-based interteaching sessions Take a chapter and write learning objectives for a unit of a child development course. Identify the pedagogical approach they will take in teaching a course. Know the basics for teaching a course in behavioral development. |
Activities: Participants will be given a set of chapter objectives related as models. They will be asked to write their own set of objectives for one chapter. Participants will create sample questions based on the objectives they create. Participants will learn how to use clickers to effectively engage students. Participants will discuss the type of pedagogy that would work best for their individual teaching situations. |
Audience: Graduate students, full-time and part-time faculty interested in learning about developmental theory and its applications; those teaching a course in child development at the undergraduate or graduate level. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Creative Problem Solving Skill Acquisition and Behavior Reduction for Individuals with Autism in an ABA Center-Based Program |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Harris |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Judith L. Palazzo, M.Ed. |
JUDITH L. PALAZZO (Connecticut Center for Child Development, Inc.), ELIZABETH CRANMER (Connecticut Center for Child Development, Inc.), APRIL G. GILMORE (Connecticut Center for Child Development, Inc.), AIMEE H. HARAY (University of North Texas), KRISTINE L. MARINO (Connecticut Center for Child Development, Inc.), STEPHANIE POCIUS (University of North Texas), TANIA A. VIDOSEVIC (University of North Texas) |
Description: This workshop will illustrate the problem-solving model used at the Connecticut Center for Child Development and provide examples of creative problem solving strategies addressing issues for individuals with autism across different age groups. Specific problems will be presented along with the rationale for intervention, description of intervention, data collected on the intervention, summary of progress, and implications for the individual with autism. Participants will have opportunities to identify individual concerns and design potential interventions with assistance. |
Learning Objectives: -Participants will learn the steps in an effective problem-solving model. -Participants will learn creative problem-solving strategies for skill acquisition objectives. -Participants will learn creative problem-solving strategies for behavior reduction objectives and tolerance of non-preferred situations. -Participants will identify individual problems and design potential solutions using the steps in the problem-solving process illustrated. |
Activities: Discussion about steps in the problem-solving model. Data-based presentations of creative problem-solving strategies. Video clips of creative problem-solving strategies. Design of potential problem-solving strategies to address participants' individual concerns. |
Audience: Teachers, Behavior Analysts, ABA Providers, Related Service Providers, parents |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Developing Effective Language-Based ABA Classrooms within Public School Systems |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Hong Kong |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: James W. Partington, Ph.D. |
JAMES W. PARTINGTON (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), PAMELA G. OSNES (Behavior Analysts, Inc.) |
Description: Research has clearly established the effectiveness of intensive behavioral intervention with children with autism. A great proportion of these services have been provided to children in 1 to 1 training sessions outside of a public school classroom. However, it is possible and desirable to incorporate these effective educational services within public school classroom environments. This workshop will review critical components for establishing and providing effective language-based behavioral interventions within classrooms of the public school systems. A review of issues related to, and specific recommendations for staff training, classroom structure and schedule, curriculum development, small-group (1 to 2+) instructional strategies, skill acquisition tracking, and behavioral consultation will be provided. |
Learning Objectives: Participants will be able to: 1. Identify critical teaching skills that must be demonstrated by teachers and instructional assistants in a language-based, ABA classroom. 2. Specify components of a classroom schedule that will allow for high frequency of learner responding to high-priority learning tasks. 3. Identify how to assess learner skills and construct an IEP to ensure the development of language and other important learner skills. 4. Identify methods for implementing behavioral language training strategies in a small group format. 5. Specify critical components of a classroom-wide, data collection system and a system for monitoring student progress. 6. Identify how the critical elements of discrete trail instruction can be implemented within the child�s typical daily events. |
Activities: Participants will receive information regarding critical teaching skills that must be demonstrated by teachers and instructional assistants in a language-based, ABA classroom, specific components of a classroom schedule that will allow for high frequency of learner responding to high-priority learning tasks, development of appropriate IEP objectives, methods for implementing behavioral language training strategies in a small group format, critical components of a classroom-wide, data collection system and a system for monitoring student progress. |
Audience: This workshop is highly recommended for behavio analysts, educators, administrators and consultants who wish to help public schools develop effective, data-based classroom services. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
A Software System for Shaping Reliable Behavioral Tacting and Intervention Skills During Staff or Student Training |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Vancouver |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Roger D. Ray, Ph.D. |
ROGER D. RAY ((AI)2, Inc.; Rollins College), JESSICA M. RAY (Rollins College) |
Description: Reliable identification of client behaviors requiring different intervention strategies (reinforcement, extinction, time out, etc.) is a prerequisite to offering consistent services by various staff members. Thus training staff to observe and tact client behaviors is a fundamental starting point across many types facilities and client services. But there is rarely an efficient means for such training, much less measuring how reliable behavioral tacting and interventions might be. This workshop is designed to give participants experience with a new software training system that shapes observational, tacting, and intervention-decision making skills. This software tool is also useful in teaching researcher observation and recording skills and for calibrating inter-observer reliability in research settings. With the aid of this software system, participants will take an active role in constructing alternative training coding schemes for tacting video-based client behaivors. Participants will learn how to load such coding schemes into the software system; will engage in coding a brief video so the file may be used as an expert reference for automated training feedback; and will learn how to access the detailed statistical analysis of behavioral sequences observed in the session. Further, inter-observer reliability scores, as measured by simple percent agreement as well as Cohens Kappa, will be demonstrated. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to: � Use software-based shaping procedures to shape observational and intervention-identification skills in someone else. � Apply behavioral principles to teach observational techniques in staff training situations � Build a simple behavioral tacting scheme to use within the software system. � Link any external digital video file to the software for customizing the training environment. � Use alternative levels of successive approximation to shape expert intervention-identifications of a selected video. � Explain unconditional and conditional behavioral probabilities and their meaning to others. � Code and save a sample training file as well as measure the inter-observer reliability between this file and the expert reference file. |
Activities: Activities will include an interactive review of observational foundations including methods of sequential analysis; introduction to and detailed use of new software which uses shaping principles to teach observation and tacting skills; hands-on experience in creating coding schemes, actually coding behavior via a video, and analyzing session data. |
Audience: Teachers and trainers who have a need for teaching others how to reliably identify and describe behaviors in need of intervention across various settings. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Graphing with Microsoft Excel |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Techwood |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Sarah E. Roberts, M.S. |
SARAH E. ROBERTS (Behavioral Dimensions), EMILY R. MONN (St. Cloud State University), ERIC RUDRUD (St. Cloud State University), KIMBERLY A. SCHULZE (St. Cloud State University) |
Description: Participants will be provided with systematic instruction on graphing single-subject research designs using Microsoft Excel. Single-subject designs covered include: ABAB, Multiple Baseline, Alternating Treatments, and Cumulative Records. Participants will also learn to graph session-by-session learner acquisition data. Participants will be provided with a CD providing detailed text instructions, a streaming video with demonstrations, and templates for learner acquisition data. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Enter data on Excel spreadsheet for appropriate single-subject research design. 2. Graph data for single-subject design. 3. Edit graph content (titles, axis, background, condition, trend lines). 4. Graph learner acquisition data. |
Activities: Participants will be provided with step-by-step instruction and practice in graphing single-case designs using Microsoft Excel. We encourage participants to bring laptop computers to practice entering data and graphing results. |
Audience: Practitioners and researchers who need to graph data in an efficient manner. Faculty and graduate students who teach behavior analysis. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
The AAMR Positive Behavior Support Training Curriculum: Overview and Practical Methods for Successful Implementation |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Marietta |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: David A. Rotholz, Ph.D. |
DAVID A. ROTHOLZ (University of South Carolina), DENNIS H. REID (Carolina Behavior Analysis and Support Center) |
Description: This workshop will be provided by the senior editor and senior author of AAMR Positive Behavior Support Training Curriculum. The presenters will provide information from the source on the evidence base underlying the curriculum contents, the validation process for components of the curriculum, what the curriculum includes and how to prepare and plan for its successful implementation. Participants will have the opportunity to get answers to questions about implementing this best-selling training curriculum at their own agencies. The AAMR Positive Behavior Support Training Curriculum is a trainer-ready resource for providing competency-based training on positive behavior support to staff who supervise direct care professionals. Designed specifically for staff working with adults & adolescents who have developmental disabilities, this curriculum provides skill training for those who implement and supervise the implementation of supports. The curriculum is focused on implementation of positive behavioral supports, not the design of such supports. By including key skills such as teaching methods, providing appropriate social interactions, and observing and providing feedback to staff, in addition to the basics such as the effective use of reinforcement, appropriate data collection (see aamr.org for further information on the curriculum contents), this curriculum can help an agency train its staff in key areas that can directly benefit those to whom it provides support. A more comprehensive description and discussion of the curriculum and its statewide implementation can be found in a recent article in the Journal of Positive Behavior Interventions (2003, volume 5, pp. 35 46). A description of how this fits into a statewide systems change effort in positive behavior support can be found in Mental Retardation, (2003, 41,{5}, 354 364). This 3-hour workshop provides an overview of the curriculum content, a description of the competency-based aspect of the training, a detailed discussion on the role of the trainer and how best to use the modules, plus information on related practical issues associated with successful implementation of the training curriculum. Information will also be provided on the 800+ supervisors who have participated in this competency-based training (in small groups) in a 5-day format in one state over the past 6 years. A description of a model for training new trainers of the direct support edition of the curriculum will also be provided. Ample time for questions and answers from participants will be provided to enable proactive problem solving for implementation of the curriculum. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Understand how the use of this training curriculum functions as a key component of improving quality of behavior supports provided to adults & adolescents with mental retardation/developmental disabilities. 2. Know the key content areas for training direct support staff supervisors that affect the quality of behavior supports provided. 3. Use strategies for successfully implementing competency-based training on key skill areas necessary for implementing effective positive behavior supports. 4. Use key strategies for organizing the training with this curriculum based on 6 years of statewide training experience. |
Activities: 1. Provide information on development of the PBS training curriculum, why specific skills were included and how this relates to improving services. 2. Provide information on results of training on a statewide basis. 3. Provide information on content of curriculum, how it is organized, how it is "trainer-ready" to facilitate easy use. 4. Demonstration of how a training module would be presented (e.g., module 8 on choice; demonstration of providing a 2-item choice). 5. Participants practice giving choice (as per curriculum), then demonstration of an in-class skills check on giving a 2-item choice. 6. Review of how feedback was provided during the demonstration skills-check with elaboration on the feedback component. 7. Discussion of practical issues that effective use of the curriculum requires. 8. Discussion of trainer preparation issues. 9. Questions & answers with participants on curriculum content, process for training, related practical issues and whatever else they bring up related to use of the AAMR Curriculum on Positive Behavior Support. |
Audience: Professionals interested or involved in staff training at programs serving adults and/or adolescents with mental retardation and other developmental disabilities. Professionals interested in providing training to staff that will increase skills in teaching, providing choices (including to those with severe disabilities & limited communication skills), preventing problem behavior, and addressing problem behavior. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Designer Education: Creating Educationally-Appropriate Schools for Children and Adolescents with Brain Injuries |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Dunwoody |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Dennis C. Russo, Ph.D. |
DENNIS C. RUSSO (The May Institute) |
Description: Educational systems seem ill-suited to the needs of the recovering child with Acquired Brain Injury. Focused on group-based, verbal instruction; rife with multi-step tasks, heavily focused on sequences and organizational requirements, and requiring sustained attention; and crowded with numerous pupils, the educational environment is a setting likely to bring out the worst in many of these children. This presentation will focus on the development of brain injury intelligent behavioral interventions and environments. This presentation will address outcomes of neurological trauma, development of IEPs, staff training, use of behavioral procedures, academic schedules, and other variables which affect success in school for the child with ABI. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will gain knowledge of the outcomes of neurotrauma or disease and how they impact child behavior. 2. Participants will identify aspects of behavioral treatment which are effective with children and adolescents with ABI. 3. Participants will learn of factors in the educational environment which may produce negative educational outcomes in children. 4. Participants will learn specific methodologies for the design of instructional programs for children with ABI. |
Activities: Didactic instruction, case studies, in-vivo practice in writing objectives. |
Audience: Behavioral and educational professionals who work in special needs schools, human services, or healthcare. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Overcoming Problems in Intensive Behavioral Treatment: Strategies Used and Developed Over Ten Years' Time |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Cairo |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Glen O. Sallows, Ph.D. |
GLEN O. SALLOWS (Minnesota Early Autism Project, Inc.), MICHELLE SHERMAN (Minnesota Early Autism Project, Inc.), LISA BARSNESS (Minnesota Early Autism Project, Inc.) |
Description: Being skilled in delivering an ABA based treatment intervention begins with understanding principles of learning, knowledge of behavioral teaching strategies and access to a curriculum of skills. However, this is not enough to be able to carry out treatment proficiently, or to individualize treatment for individual children or to deal effectively with even the common problems that arise. This workshop will cover many common problems and strategies for addressing them that were used in a successful replication of the UCLA model of Intensive Behavioral Treatment. Common problems include resistance and oppositional behavior, rigid beliefs or actions (e.g., winning or loosing, having to be first), aggression, inattention, slow learning, failure to generalize skills to the natural environment, parental problems (e.g., not following recommendations, lack of involvement), sibling problems (e.g., conflictual relationship or avoidance), school problems on the bus, in the classroom (non-compliance, inattention, not completing work), and on the playground (e.g., not knowing how to join a group, being teased or bullied), poor social conversation skills (staying on topic, initiating/changing a topic, reading others social cues), understanding others perceptions (e.g., perceiving accidental, unintended, or chance outcomes as deliberate slights). Strategies used to address these issues will be demonstrated using vignettes and video clips, and include Interactive Play (involves carefully reading the childs behavior and play), to build a positive relationship, recognizing signs that the program demands are too difficult and knowing how to modify them, eliciting the childs reasoning, Video Modeling and other visual strategies, Role Playing, use of motivational systems such as Tokens/Points/Response-Cost, use of Social Stories, Foreshadowing, and rules, school observations/working with teachers, gradual exposure and assigning a task to reduce anxiety in new situations, Skill Streaming Groups, Error Correction, and providing replacement language. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will become familiar with common problems of children as they progress in treatment. 2. Participants will learn strategies for building a positive relationship. 3. Participants will learn how to recognize the signs that program goals are too difficult and how to modify the program. 4. Participants will learn strategies for increasing motivation and decreasing inattention. 5. Participants will learn strategies for dealing with behavior problems and a viariety of social difficulties. |
Activities: We will use lecture, video clips, demonstration, and vignettes. |
Audience: Clinicians and professionals providing treatment for children with autism, and school personnel. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Advanced |
|
|
Program Formulation for Nave Learners: Four Key Questions to Answer |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Courtland |
Area: DEV; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Richard E. Laitinen, Ph.D. |
VICCI TUCCI (Tucci Learning Solutions, Inc.), RICHARD E. LAITINEN (Tucci Learning Solutions, Inc.), DANIEL E. HURSH (West Virginia University) |
Description: This workshop will provide attendees with a basis for formulating programming for nave Learners. Such programming requires determining (1) what repertoires are to be developed, (2) are there adequate stimuli available to affect change, (3) what contingencies will be designed given type of programming required, and (4) how can parts of the instructional conditions be arranged and re-arranged given required contingencies or programming? Application of these four formulation questions to classroom programming will be reviewed and discussed. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Each participant will complete worksheet to answer each of the Four Key questions in application to an individual case of his or her choice. 2. Each participants will complete Placement test for a Learner of his/her choice. 3. Each participant will follow and apply the decision path for determining which supplemental contingencies should be used to promote individual Learner performance. 4. Each participant will conduct an environmental assessment to identify the place and occurence of specific instructional conditions within a teaching/learning environment. 5. Each participant will complete a worksheet to identify current arrangements and potential re-arrangements of instructional conditions. |
Activities: 1. PowerPoint overview of each component of programming steps (1-4). 2. Review and illustration of presented assessment and placement procedures. 3. Review and illustration of presented contingency selection and application procedures. 4. Review and illustration of typical classroom instructional conditions. 5. Review and illustration of the construction, arrangement and re-arrangement of instructional conditions to promote improved and enhanced Learner performance. |
Audience: BCABAs, BCBAs, and service providers such as teachers, home program therapists and program supervisors working with young children expressing challenging learning and behavioral concerns. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Teaching Behavior Chains to Children with Autism Using Task Analysis: Research to Practice |
Friday, May 26, 2006 |
6:00 PM–9:00 PM |
Montreal |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Julie S. Weiss, M.S. |
JULIE S. WEISS (New England Center for Children), STACIE L. FITCH (New England Center for Children), SORREL RYAN (New England Center for Children), PAMELA M. OLSEN (New England Center for Children), MYRNA E. LIBBY (New England Center for Children) |
Description: Behavior chains consist of a sequence of related responses and each response or step in the chain results in a change in the environment, which reinforces the response that precedes it and becomes the discriminative stimulus for the next response in a chain. Typically, acquisition trials are organized by breaking the chain into teachable units, thus task analyzing the chain. This workshop will begin by reviewing current research in the area of teaching behavior chain including prompting procedures, how to teach untrained steps and determining the optimal number of teachers for implementing the curriculum. This workshop will also address critical components of task analysis to facilitate design of effective curriculum. The workshop will provide an overview of methods to teach a behavior chain including forward, backward and total task presentation. Participants will learn factors to facilitate acquisition when using task analytic programming. Participants will be instructed on how to implement teaching procedures. Emphasis will be placed on teaching criteria and prompting, as well as how to address untrained steps in the chain. Participants will be taught how to summarize and analyze the task analysis data. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of this workshop, trainees will be able to: a. Describe past and current research in the area of task analysis b. Specify factors for facilitating acquisition in task analytic programming c. Specify components for designing effective task analyses d. Implement forward, backward and total task chaining procedures e. Develop task analytic curriculum f. Specify appropriate prompting strategies g. Determine how to teach untrained steps in the chain h. Analyze and summarize data from task analysis sessions i. Evaluate the efficacy of the teaching procedure |
Activities: Through the use of didactic presentations, handouts, video taped examples, and competency based practice, participants will learn to develop and implement a behavior chain. Participants will learn factors to facilitate acquisition when using task analytic programming. Participants will practice how to implement teaching procedures. Emphasis will be placed on teaching criteria and prompting, as well as how to address untrained steps in the chain. Participants will learn data summary and how to analyze task analysis data. |
Audience: The workshop is designed for teachers and clinicians currently implementing skill acquisition programs to teach behavior chains to children with autism and developmental disabilities. Participants should have some knowledge of applied behavior analysis. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Ethics for Behavior Analysts |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Lenox |
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Jon S. Bailey, Ph.D. |
JON S. BAILEY (Behavior Management Consultants, Inc./Florida State University/Florida Association of Behavior Analysis), MARY R. BURCH (Instructional Strategies Unlimited) |
Description: This workshop will provide participants with a basic foundation in ethics for behavior analysts. Topics will include nine core ethical principles, how to write an ethical behavior plan, and what makes behavior analysts unique with regard to ethics. The BACB Guidelines will be covered in detail. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Briefly describe three key issues in the early history of �behavior modification� that caused serious ethical problems for the field; 2. Articulate at least six of the nine core values of the scientist/practitioner behavior analysts who is striving for responsible conduct; 3. Outline at least five features of the practice of behavior analysis that makes it unique in the human services; 4. Give at least five examples of common, everyday situations that can compromise the ethics of a behavior analyst and they will be able to describe how to handle each situation. |
Activities: The workshop will involve PowerPoint presentations, active learning activities such as, "Ethics games people play" and analyzing ethics scenarios. |
Audience: Board Certified Behavior Analysts who are currently practicing. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Running Your Home-Based ABA Program: A Parent-Professional Perspective |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
International Ballroom North |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Sharon E. Baxter, M.A. |
SHARON E. BAXTER (ABLE Clinic), MICHELLE KARREN (St. Cloud State University), TYLA M. FREWING (University of Victoria) |
Description: This workshop will use a behavioral perspective to examine the challenges of creating and maintaining an effective ABA home program. This workshop will provide a comprehensive overview of these issues from three perspectives: an ABA trained parent who also works in the field, a practicing Behavioral Consultant and a behavioral tutor. The goal of the workshop is to discuss how those perspectives can work together both in theory and in practice. Participants will learn how the principles of applied behaviour analysis can be applied to hiring, training and the ongoing supervision of staff, and how these principles can be integrated into the structure of family life. This workshop will outline the importance of a team approach between the behavioral consultant, parent and therapists/tutors to run a maximally effective home-based ABA program. |
Learning Objectives: o Describe the implications of parent training and involvement in a home program o List the necessary training components of a successful ABA home program o Identify the risks and challenges of a home program that does not incorporate a partnership approach o Describe of how the rules of behavior govern both family and staff approaches o Be able to apply these principles to practical �real life� home programming issues o Set up practical contingencies within the home to make programs effective o Describe the importance of practical, relevant behavior plan design and how parents must actively participate in both the training and implementation of behavior plans o List at least three common pitfalls that parents run into and potential real life solutions for each o Discuss what a consultant needs from a family for program success and ways to ensure these needs are met o List what a therapist/tutor needs from a family and how both parties can actively participate to make this relationship work. o Identify at least three ways you can provide your tutors with positive reinforcement. o Identify at least three examples of boundaries that should be upheld between parents and tutors. o Describe strategies that can be used to improve the way a team works and operates |
Activities: Active group discussions as well as seminar type learning, with real life problem solving within the workshop; examples of successful programs and the approaches used, video presentation of successful strategies in action. |
Audience: Behavior Analysts, parents who have or are setting up and managing a home program, Graduate students training to provide home programming consulting, Autism therapists/tutors, direct care staff, teachers and school personnel |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Inner Behavior: Changing Thoughts, Feelings, and Urges |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
University |
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Abigail B. Calkin, Ph.D. |
ABIGAIL B. CALKIN (Calkin Consulting Center), EMMA F. COBANE (TreeHouse School) |
Description: This workshop views thoughts, feelings, and urges as inner behaviors that can be observed, counted, and changed. It reviews the history of private events and inner behavior, including sharing some charts of people who have counted inner behaviors in the past 35 years. The workshop also teaches how to use the Standard Celeration Chart to count and change any inner behavior. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Learn the background and become familiar with the research on observing and changing inner behavior. 2. Define and identify thoughts, feelings, and urges. 3. Practice writing positive thoughts, feelings, and/or urges at 30-35 per minute and saying them at 50-75 per minute. 4. Count and record some specific inner behaviors for the duration of the workshop. 5. Discuss and develop a plan to change inner behaviors of self or clients. |
Activities: The primary focus is on the practice of identification, listing, counting, recording, and changing inner behavior. There is a minimal amount of lecture on the literature and successes of the technique. |
Audience: Psychologists, clinical behavior analysts, parents, teachers of regular or special education children including those with behavior disorders. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Using Video Modeling to Teach Play to Young Children with Autism |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Marietta |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Shelly R. Cota, M.S. |
SHELLY R. COTA (New England Center for Children), REBECCA P. F. MACDONALD (New England Center for Children), THERESA M. CLEVENGER (New England Center for Children), SALLY N. ROBERTS (New England Center for Children) |
Description: Play is an important part of a typical childs development and contributes to the acquisition of language and social interaction skills. Children with autism often do not develop play skills. Video modeling has been demonstrated to be an effective procedure to teach a variety of skills. We will review several studies that we have conducted demonstrating the effectiveness of video modeling teaching procedures to teach independent pretend play to children with autism, as well as to teach cooperative play between children with autism and typically developing peers. In addition, we will present data from our most recent work, teaching children to generate novel play using video modeling. Video modeling is now an integral part of our preschool social skills and play curriculum. In this workshop, we will review how to develop scripts using commercially available play sets, create video modeling tapes, and provide video instruction to children with autism. We will also discuss the advantages of this teaching procedure and the technical issues encountered when implementing the procedures. We will also discuss the implications for this technology as an easy and effective strategy for teachers and parents to use to teach play and other skills. |
Learning Objectives: 1. The participant will be able to define video modeling as a teaching procedure and describe its advantages. 2. The participant will be able to describe how to teach simple imitative, toy play, pretend play and reciprocal play with a peer using video modeling procedures. 3. The participant will be able to describe strategies to generate novel play using video modeling procedures. 4. The participant will be able to describe how to create new individualized play scripts using a variety of commercially available toys. |
Activities: The participants will work in small groups to plan and create video modeling play scripts. The participants will first complete planning forms. The participants will consider certain child characteristics such as age, interests/preferences, language skills, fine motor skills, and potentially interfering behaviors to aid them in planning individualized play scripts. The participants will then generate the play actions and verbal statements that make up the play scripts. Finally, the participants will create and act out a video modeling play script using commercially available toys. |
Audience: The workshop is designed for educators and consultants currently implementing programs to teach appropriate play skills to children with autism using behaviorally based teaching technologies. Participants should have some knowledge of applied behavior analysis. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Beyond Typical Programming: Advanced Topics in Behavior Analytic Interventions for Children with Autism |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Auburn |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Michael Fabrizio, M.A. |
MICHAEL FABRIZIO (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), KELLY J. FERRIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), KRISTA ZAMBOLIN (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), SHELLEY MCINNIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Description: This workshop will present attendees with a range of topics often encountered when delivering behavior analytic intervention to children and adolescents with autism and related disorders. Topics presented will include the non-linear/constructional management of misbehavior, the measurement of client assent and the use of assent data to inform instructional decision making, and the integration of augmentative/adaptive communication devices into instructional programming. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to: 1) Define child assent and describe ways of measuring assent. 2) Describe the types of intervention decisions that can be made through analysis of assent data. 3) Describe ways in which curricular sequences can be modified to incorporate augmentative or adaptive communication systems. 4) Analyze instructional sequences for possible stimulus control problems that may arise if a child responds using an augmentative or adaptive communication system and describe plans for correcting such. |
Activities: Throughout the workshop, participants will practice discriminating between appropriate and inappropriate instances of all of the concepts presented as well as practice applying skills relate to each learning objective given case study data. Participants will receive printed and digital copies of all materials presented in the workshop, along with a supplemental and expanded CD-ROM containing additional training and expansion materials as well as recommended readings. |
Audience: This workshop is appropriate for clinicians, parents, and teachers who are responsible for supervising behavior analytic intervention programs for children with autism and related disabilities. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Transition Planning for Adult Placement |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Singapore |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Tracey G. Galiatsatos, M.S. |
TRACEY G. GALIATSATOS (New England Center for Children), STACY E. EDINBURG (New England Center for Children), KAREN L. ALITZ-POLGA (New England Center for Children), KIMBERLY KEOGH (New England Center for Children) |
Description: There are many factors that influence a successful transition of individuals to adult placement. Adults are expected to hold a job, be active members of their community, and take responsibility for their own medical and financial needs. Many individuals that we serve may not be prepared for this level of independence. Through the use of case studies, this workshop will assist the clinician or parent to identify and prioritize critical skills necessary to facilitate the most successful transition to adult placement settings. General skill areas include behavior, self-preservation, self-care, community integration, vocational and academic. Particular emphasis will be given to IEP planning for clinical, vocational, educational and domestic objectives for individuals ages 16 and older. In addition to the IEP planning, this workshop will review the transition planning process including legal (e.g., guardianship), medical (e.g., insurance), and financial (e.g., SSI) considerations to address when preparing individuals for placement to adult service settings. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Identify critical clinical issues to consider for IEP planning in preparation for transition to adult placement. 2. Identify critical vocational, educational and domestic skills to facilitate transition to adult placement. 3. Create an individualized transition plan. 4. Access resources/agencies available pre/post transition. |
Activities: Instructors will utilize handouts, lecture, checklists and case studies. Workshop participants will go through the process of identifying critical clinical issues to consider during the transition planning process. Case studies will be used to demonstrate the planning process for individuals of different ages with a variety of skills. |
Audience: This workshop is targeted for clinicians, administrators, parents, educators and therapists who work with individuals over the age of 16. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Developing Language-Based Learning Objectives and Curricula Using the ABLLS Assessment |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Harris |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Daniel Cohen-Almeida, M.A. |
CHRISTINE D. HAGENLOCHER (Newton Public Schools), JAMES T. ELLIS (Melmark New England), DANIEL COHEN-ALMEIDA (Melmark New England) |
Description: The Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills (ABLLS) is an objective guide for the assessment of young children with autism. This workshop will review the ABLLS assessment; specifically the Requesting, Labeling, and Intraverbal sections. Participants will develop IEP objectives from sample ABLLS assessment results, and will also develop curricula for these skill areas. Participants will receive a CD of sample curricula from each of these 3 skill areas |
Learning Objectives: Participants will: 1) Review the ABLLS assessment: specifically the Requesting, Labeling, and Intraverbal sections. 2) Develop IEP objectives from sample assessment data. 3) Review the components of effective language curricula. 4) Develop sample language curricula. |
Activities: Brief Lecture, Case Study, Video Review |
Audience: Behavior Analysts and Special Educators responsible for the assessment of language skills and the development of language curricula. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Conducting Data-Based Classroom Observations and Evaluations |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Greenbriar |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Suzanne Letso, M.A. |
SUZANNE LETSO (Connecticut Center for Child Development), ERIK A. MAYVILLE (Institute for Educational Planning) |
Description: Today, a host of programs and services for students with autism are available throughout the country in both public and private settings. The more challenging question now is to determine whether or not any particular program is actually based on the educational principals of applied behavior analysis, or not. Secondarily, parents and professionals often need to assess whether these services and learning environments are appropriate to meet the specific needs of a given child. This workshop will provide information and resources to assist in the process of program evaluations to facilitate educational placement decisions. An overview of the observation and evaluation process will be described, and rationale for self-evaluation, as well as collaboration with independent evaluators will be discussed. Determination of observation and evaluation parameters, utilization of norm references tests, determination of curriculum and key programmatic components, environmental considerations, and staff competencies will be discussed. Methods of collecting data and writing observation and evaluations to support the decision making process will be described, and samples provided. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Determine factors that affect the purpose of an observation or evaluation, and how these processes can assist IEP development. 2. Define program parameters which are observable, measurable, and relevant to the environment and an individual student. 3. Describe a basic overview of the observation and evaluation processes including the rationale for internal evaluation, parent evaluation, and independent evaluation. 4. Identify assessment tools to determine a particular student�s readiness for active participation in different learning environments. 5. Identify clinical and administrative program criteria including credentials of staff, staffing ratios, training, supervision, and access to peers and the community. 6. Create a customized check-list of critical features in relation to a student�s individual educational needs. 7. Customize data collection systems and guidelines for writing observation and evaluation summaries including data summaries. |
Activities: Didactic lecture, group discussion, video tape review, and guided notes will be utilized. Handouts will include identification of additional resources, sample data collection systems, sample report summaries, and sample IEP objectives. |
Audience: Behavior Analysts, school Administrators, Psychologists, or other educational service providers working in applied settings with individuals with autism or related disorders. Participants should have a basic understanding of the signs and symptoms of autism spectrum disorders, applied behavior analysis, and autism intervention and education strategies. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
EIBSC: Early Intervention Behaviorally Scripted Curriculum |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Manila |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Rosa C. Martinez, Ph.D. |
ROSA C. MARTINEZ (Children's Center for Early Learning) |
Description: This workshop is designed to introduce a behaviorally scripted curriculum to teachers, therapists, clinical staff members and administrators of early intervention programs for children aged 0-3 on the autism spectrum. The curriculum is criterion referenced and includes an assessment of developmental milestones from 0-42 months of age. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Define Autism Spectrum Disorder 2. Assess a child in a natural learning environment 3. Identify skill and deficit areas based on each child's individual assessment to target developmentally appropriate instruction 4. Individualize a curricular program based on individual child deficits and use a behavioral template to develop further programming |
Activities: 1- Powerpoint presentation on Autism Spectrum Disorder 2- Overview of EIBSC: Early Intervention Behaviorally Scripted Curriculum 3- Write Sample Individualized Programs using behavioral template |
Audience: Participants of this workshop should have general knowledge of applied behavior analysis regarding discrete trial therapy, learn units and natural teaching environments. The target audience is homebased or centerbased providers of ABA for children on the autism spectrum. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
S.T.E.P.S.: Systematic Training and Evaluation of Practitioner's Skills: A Model for Training Applied and Theoretical Competencies |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Hong Kong |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Justin A. DiDomenico, M.Ed. |
KATHLEEN MCCABE-ODRI (Advance, Inc./Partners in Learning, Inc.), LAURA KENNEALLY (Advance, Inc.), JUSTIN A. DIDOMENICO (Advance, Inc.), KIM M. GOERGEN (Partners in Learning, Inc.), LORI A. LORENZETTI (Advance, Inc.) |
Description: Workshop Description: Developing competencies in Applied Behavior Analysis requires a mastery of both theory and application. Successful Behavior Analysts require both an in depth knowledge of theory and the ability to apply the skills in clinical and school settings. This workshop is designed for trainers to teach the competencies of ABA to teachers, paraprofessionals and other clinical staff to master both theory and demonstrate core clinical skills required to enact IEP goals. Participants will be able to identify core competencies in theory and train staff to display these skills to mastery in applied settings using a systematic, data-based approach. Trainers will receive a manual and DVD with video models and training modules. |
Learning Objectives: Participants will learn: 1) the key components of theory required to train teachers and paraprofessionals. This includes paper and pencil mastery exams. 2) how to teach and measure clinical skills in applied settings. 3) how to develop skills to measure the staff�s skill acquisition of clinical skills using treatment integrity protocols. 4) how to create a program to motivate and monitor the staff�s skill acquisition. 5) how to create and design individual core competencies skills profiles for each staff member tailored to their skill level of both mastery of theory and application. |
Activities: Using lecture, video demonstrations, handouts and discussion, participants will learn the key training protocols for staff to effectively implement ABA based IEP goals. |
Audience: This workshop is designed for Behavior Analysts who train teachers and paraprofessionals who work with children with autism. This will help teach the staff to understand and demonstrate the core competencies of Applied Behavior Analysis in order to be effective practitioners. Knowledge of ABA and autism helpful. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Developing Fluent Language Skills for Children with Autism Part III: Pragmatic Language Skills |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Courtland |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Alison L. Moors, M.A. |
ALISON L. MOORS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), KRISTIN N. SCHIRMER (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), SARA J. PAHL (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Description: This workshop will focus on using the techniques of fluency-based instruction to teach pragmatic language skills to children with autism. Once children have gained facility with basic, intermediate, and advanced language skills, such as asking and answering informational questions, they still have much to learn to acquire verbal repertoires of sufficient extensity to allow them to maximally benefit from classroom instruction and social interactions with others. We will focus on pragmatic language skills as they relate to attending and responding to vocal and non-vocal cues of others, following conversational rules, predicting social cause and effect, usage of idiomatic/metaphorical language, and increasing overall flexibility and scope of language. We will present skill descriptions, scope and sequence charts showing component/composite relationships between skills, suggested skill frequency aims, descriptions of the critical and variable attributes relevant to the instructional stimuli used for each skill, and methods for empirically validating critical instructional outcomes such as skill retention, endurance, stability, and application. Throughout the workshop, we will use actual student performance data and videotaped examples to illustrate each of the key skills discussed. |
Learning Objectives: � List and describe important pragmatic language skills across multiple verbal behavior repertoires. � Describe the relationship between those skills and other curriculum areas such as reading comprehension and social language development. � Generate teaching examples that account for all skill critical and variable stimulus features � Generate sample scope and sequence teaching outlines for various skills across multiple verbal behavior repertoires |
Activities: Throughout the workshop, participants will discuss the material with the presenters, practice developing scope and sequence teaching outlines, practice generating teaching examples of their own, and develop plans for teaching verbal responses within a fluency-based instruction arrangement. |
Audience: Anyone interested in teaching advanced/pragmatic language skills for children with autism, and/or whose students have difficulty with appropriate social use of language. It will be particularly helpful for persons designing or supervising language intervention programs for children with autism in home or school settings. Please note: a basic understanding of fluency-based instructional practices is recommended. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
RFT 101: An Introduction to Relational Frame Theory |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Piedmont |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Daniel J. Moran, Ph.D. |
DANIEL J. MORAN (MidAmerican Psychological Institute), PATRICIA BACH (Illinois Institute of Technology) |
Description: Arbitrarily applied what? Derived relational who? If you started learning about Relational Frame Theory (RFT), and then stopped when you read: Crel {ArxB and BrxC}, or have just been interested in learning the basics of RFT, this is the introductory workshop for you. This workshop will outline and explain the basic concepts of RFT and help the audience members understand an expanded functional approach to verbal behavior. We will discuss, from a behavior analytic point of view, how people can listen with understanding and speak with meaning. The workshop will simplify functional contextualism principles and discuss the basic RFT research methods and results in a manner that will help people who are new to RFT to begin applying the concepts to their own behavior analytic endeavors. We plan to make clear the core assumptions of functional contextual behavior analysis and how they apply to discussing language and cognition. We aim to not let your eyes glaze over as we discuss transformation of stimulus functions, generalized operants, and the different types of derived relating. Most importantly, we plan to help everyone have an enjoyable time while framing events relationally about RFT. |
Learning Objectives: 1) Workshop attendees will be able to list and describe six basic principles of functional contextualism, and also contrast those principles from mainstream psychology principles. 2) Attendees will be able to compare and contrast conditioned discrimination and derived relational responding, in research contexts and in daily use. 3) Attendees will be able to define arbitrary applicable relational responding, along with mutual entailment and combinatorial entailment. 4) Attendees will be able to define �relational frame� in behavior analytic terms, and give 6 examples of relational frames. 5) Attendees will be able to describe transformation of stimulus functions regarding relational frames. 6) Attendees will be able to explain an expanded view of �verbal behavior� using RFT principles. 7) Attendees will generate examples of how to apply RFT principles to their own research or application questions. |
Activities: The workshop will be guided by an animated slide show and will be punctuated with audience participation, and small group participation. Slide show handouts will be distributed as well as files for RFT SAFMEDS cards. |
Audience: This workshop is for behavior analysts with limited exposure to Relational Frame Theory. Because we will focus on the fundamentals of RFT, all specializations in behavior analysis will be discussed (AUT, OBM, CBA, etc.), and practitioners interested in teaching verbal skills to individuals will certainly find this workshop valuable. |
Content Area: Theory |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Implementing System Changes to Meet Current Standards of Practice in Behavior Analysis |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Techwood |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Gary M. Pace, Ph.D. |
GARY M. PACE (The May Institute), MEREDITH L. COCHRAN (The May Institute), AVA E. KLEINMANN (The May Institute), SARA MCCOLLUM (The May Center for Child Development) |
Description: Standards for designing and implementing program-wide behavior systems are an area of increasing importance in the field. This workshop will highlight several systems-wide protocols developed for settings where the individuals served present with challenging behaviors. First, guidelines for writing focused and consumer friendly behavior support plans will be presented. This structured procedure will highlight best practices in the field particularly with regards to the implementation of program-wide policies. Second, a procedure for collecting program-wide staff integrity data will be presented. Both individual and group data will be presented to illustrate the proximate clinical utility of this procedure, as well as longer term implications for standards of staff training. Third, two approaches to collecting 24-hour reliability/ interobserver agreement (IOA) data will be presented as applied in two different settings. Methods and outcome data will be presented for the collection of these data for both maladaptive behaviors and skill acquisition. It is the goal of this workshop that attendees will be able to apply the protocols to their own settings to both improve the overall quality of service delivery and introduce methods of accountability for systems-wide goals. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to: � write more focused and consumer-friendly behavior support plans � monitor staff integrity for the implementation of these plans � collect reliability (IOA) data on a variety of behaviors throughout the treatment day |
Activities: Participants will listen to PowerPoint presentations on each of the three educational objectives. Presentations will be interactive such that questions and discussion will be encouraged throughout the workshop. Participants will also practice skills such as writing behavior goals and completing sample integrity and IOA forms. |
Audience: This workshop is geared towards behavior analysts that want to establish or enhance systems in their programs to write effective behavior support plans, improve the integrity of plan implementation, and collect continuous IOA data. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Training for Functional Independence: Creative Use of Visual and Auditory Supports to Achieve Functional Independence in Learners with Autism |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Inman |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Judith L. Palazzo, M.Ed. |
JUDITH L. PALAZZO (Connecticut Center for Child Development, Inc.), MEGAN MCCARRON (Connecticut Center for Child Development, Inc.), JILL E. CASTELLANI (Connecticut Center for Child Development, Inc.) |
Description: This workshop will illustrate basic considerations to identify target objectives and design procedures to teach functional independent skills to learners with autism. The evolution of procedures will be highlighted and examples of such objectives will be outlined across learners at different functioning levels. Samples of visual and auditory supports will be presented and participants will have an opportunity to identify target skill areas and design potential teaching procedures with assistance. |
Learning Objectives: - Participants will learn basic considerations for identifying and designing procedures to teach functional independent skills to learners with autism. - Participants will learn strategies for using visual supports to promote functional independence in learners with autism. - Participants will learn strategies for using auditory supports to promote functional independence in learners with autism. - Participants will identify and design potential procedures for teaching functional independent skills to learners with autism. |
Activities: - Discussion of basic considerations for identifying and designing procedures for teaching functional independent skills - Presentation of examples of specific teaching procedures and the use of visual and auditory supports - Video clips of teaching procedures - Group development of potential teaching procedures |
Audience: Teachers, Behavior Analysts, ABA Providers, related Service Providers, Parents |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Using Skinner's Analysis of Verbal Behavior to Teach Language Skills During Daily Activities to Children with Autism or Other Developmental Delays |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Regency V |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: James W. Partington, Ph.D. |
JAMES W. PARTINGTON (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), PAMELA G. OSNES (Behavior Analysts, Inc.) |
Description: This workshop is designed to provide the attendees information as to how language skills (based on B. F. Skinners analysis of verbal behavior) can be taught to children in the context of ongoing, daily activities. Participants will review videotapes of such training and practice identifying specific verbal operants and other basic learner skills that could be taught during typical daily activities in the home environment. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will be able to identify how basic language skills can be taught to young children with autism in the context of on-going daily activities. 2. Participants will be able to identify examples of B. F. Skinner�s verbal operants that are included in the teaching procedures. 3. Participants will be able to describe several examples as to how parent's can maintain the motivation of young children during the language instruction. 4. Participants will be able to identify how teaching a child to mand for reinforcers results in the development of several other important learner skills. 5. Participants will be able to identify how to sequence daily events such that the child's participation in targeted language activities results in reinforcers that are typically delivered non-contingently. |
Activities: A brief review of Skinner's analysis of verbal behavior will be provided. Participants will review videotapes of language training procedures conducted in children's homes and practice identifying specific verbal operants (mands, tacts, echoics, intraverbals) and other basic learner skills that could be taught during typical daily activities in the home environment. |
Audience: This workshop would be appropriate for behavior analysts, teachers, speech and language pathologists, or other individuals who are responsible for implementing, developing, or monitoring educational programs for children with autism or other developmental disabilities. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Improving Classroom Behavior Support Practices through Applied Behavior Analysis Interventions |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Baker |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Robert F. Putnam, Ph.D. |
ROBERT F. PUTNAM (The May Institute), MARCIE W. HANDLER (The May Institute), CHRISTINE DAVIS (The May Institute) |
Description: This workshop will provide behavior analysts with an evidence-based approach to designing effective classroom interventions. It includes the use of functional assessment as a method to systematically evaluate the classroom environment in order to design, implement and evaluate effective classroom-wide behavioral support practices. Once the environment is assessed, the model incorporates both indirect (i.e., lecture, written training materials) and direct (i.e., modeling, performance feedback) instruction. Finally, participants will learn how teachers participate in a data-based decision making process in order to establish more effective practices, procedures, and interactions with students. Data will be presented supporting the need for a comprehensive training method that includes both indirect and direct instruction for teachers to adequately implement classroom-wide behavior support practices. |
Learning Objectives: Learning Objective 1: Participants will learn how to apply functional assessment strategies to the selection and implementation of effective classroom-wide practices. Learning Objective 2: Participants will learn evidence-based methods used to train teachers in classroom-wide behavior support practices. Learning Objective 3: Participants will learn a data-based decision process used with teachers to modify classroom behavior support practices. Learning Objective 4: Participants will learn instructional and behavior support practices that establish more effective interactions between teachers and students. |
Activities: Participants will have an opportunity to engage in discussions with other behavior analysts, analyze sample data, draw conclusions about relevant classroom-wide interventions, and role play the direct instruction (e.g., performance feedback) provided to teachers. |
Audience: Behavior analysts who provide training and consultation to school teachers or paraprofessionals. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Preference-Based Teaching: Procedures for Helping People with Developmental Disabilities Enjoy Learning without Problem Behavior |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Spring |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Dennis H. Reid, Ph.D. |
DENNIS H. REID (Carolina Behavior Analysis and Support Center), CAROLYN W. GREEN (J. Iverson Riddle Developmental Center) |
Description: This workshop will describe a preference-based teaching approach for helping people with developmental disabilities enjoy learning functional skills without problem behavior during teaching sessions. The focus is on how to make teaching programs highly preferred (as indicated, for example, through indices of happiness and absence of indices of unhappiness). A program approach will be described and demonstrated that: (a) enhances the preferred nature of teaching programs to increase learner enjoyment in participating in the programs, and (b) removes the motivation for problem behavior that often occurs in attempts to escape or avoid the programs. Specific strategies to be described include how a teacher or instructor can build rapport with a learner and establish his/her attention as a reinforcer, using preferred events as antecedents and consequences to teaching sessions, interspersing preferred events within instructional trials, incorporating efficient choice opportunities within the teaching process, and timing the scheduling of teaching sessions to promote learner enjoyment. Summaries of recent behavior analytic investigations will also be provided to demonstrate the evidence base of preference-based teaching. |
Learning Objectives: a. At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to describe how to include a preferred event before, during and after a teaching session to enhance the preferred features of the session for a learner with disabilities. b. At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to describe how to use establishing operations to maximize the preferred nature of at least one aspect of a teaching session. c. At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to describe how at least one learner choice can be embedded within a teaching session to enhance the preferred nature of the session for a learner. d. At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to describe three things a teacher can do to establish his/her attention as a preferred event for a learner. |
Activities: Activities of participants will include: (1) listening to instructor lecture/presentations, (2) viewing overhead presentation of key points, (3) completing pencil and paper activities relating to scenarios depicting applications of key points, (4) viewing role-play demonstrations of target procedures by instructors, (5) practicing target procedures in role-play situations with performance feedback by instructors (provided until individual participants demonstrate competency in accordance with performance checklists employed by instructors) , and (6) opportunities to ask questions of instructors and receive instructor answers. |
Audience: The target audience includes anyone who implements skill-acquisition teaching programs with people who have developmental disabilities including autism. Examples of target audience participants include teachers, teacher assistants, residential direct support and supervisory staff, vocational support staff (e.g., job coaches), behavior analysts, behavior specialists and technicians, and parents. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Treatment Procedures and Staff Training in Intensive Behavioral Treatment: 49% Average Scores after Four Years |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Learning Center |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Glen O. Sallows, Ph.D. |
GLEN O. SALLOWS (Wisconsin Early Autism Project), TAMLYNN DIANNE GRAUPNER (Wisconsin Early Autism Project) |
Description: This workshop will present methods used to carry out a successful replication of the UCLS Intensive Behavioral Treatment Project using current procedures. We will begin with a review of the progress during the four year effort for 35 children with autism, where 17 of 35 (49%), achieved scores in the average range in IQ, language, social, academic, and adaptive areas, and succeeded in regular classrooms with a regular curriculum. Several measures were used to assess the presence of residual symptoms, and these results will be described. We also developed outcome prediction models that were 91% accurate with this group. We will describe staff selection, training, supervision, and scheduling. We will demonstrate treatment procedures using video clips. A partial list includes behavioral teaching, incidental teaching, programs for building generative language, building social skills through interactive play and play dates, video modeling and role playing, increasing parental involvement, transition to school, use of shadows and psychiatric services. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Participants will understand optimum staffing and staff training, supervision practices. 2. Participants will understand a wide range of current treatment procedures used to successfully treat young children with autism. 3. Participants will learn predictive variables useful in determining which children will do well in treatment. 4. Participants will learn the extent of residual symptoms in children who achieve average post-treatment scores, and strategies for treating them. |
Activities: Presenters will use lecture, video clips, handouts, and demonstrations. |
Audience: Providers and administrators of intensive behavioral treatment programs, clinicians and staff who work with children diagnosed with autism, and school professionals. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Using Behavior Systems Technology in Teacher Education Programming: Principles, Practice, and Hands-on Applications |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Roswell |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Thomas L. Sharpe, Jr., Ed.D. |
THOMAS L. SHARPE, JR. (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), DANIEL W. BALDERSON (Weber State University), MATTHEW R. MARTIN (Illinois State University) |
Description: This workshop will provide introduction to, and hands on application of, a data supported protocol for the (a) comprehensive description, (b) discrete and sequential analysis, and (c) feedback and goal-setting activities necessary to effective teacher training in postsecondary classroom and on-site K-12 deliberate practice environments. Workshop activities include (a) introduction to the importance of a behavior systems approach to teacher training, (b) hands-on observation system construction, and (c) simulated data collection and analysis activities designed for instructional purposes. Additionally, detailed explanation and hands-on interaction with protocols designed for a range of logically sequenced training activities are provided, including (a) classroom video observations, (b) on-site data-based assessment and immediate feedback and goal-setting, and (c) research and development into effective educational practice. Workshop participants will leave with a conceptual and applied familiarity with behavior systems educational protocols designed for effective professional training practice. Participants will be provided with a complimentary copy of the complete software tools and methods procedures on CD ROM, and MSWORD files of all necessary illustration materials in relation to the educational protocols discussed as a function of workshop participation. ***While some computer hardware will be provided, it is recommended that workshop participants bring their own IBM compatible laptop hardware to facilitate hands-on workshop interactions. |
Learning Objectives: Workshop participants will exit with technologically-based instructional skills in the area of applied behavioral teacher training. Skills include the ability to (a) design observation systems that match with training objectives, (b) construct video-based observational learning laboratory experiences in relation to training objectives, (c) implement on-site data-based feedback and goal-setting experiences to determine if training objectives have been met, and (d) develop a set of applied research activities to document the relative effectiveness of professional training activities. Learning Objective 1: Participants will be able to discuss in conceptual and applied ways the principles and practice of applied behavior systems analysis in relation to professional teacher training. Learning Objective 2: Participants will be able to construct observation systems relevant to their particular professional teacher training objectives. Learning Objective 3: Participants will be able to design and implement video-based observational learning activities in relation to educational objectives for professionals in training. Learning Objective 4: Participants will be able to understand and apply a range of computer-based data collection and analysis techniques in relation to recommended data-based on-site feedback and goal setting instructional protocols. Learning Objective 5: Participants will be able to develop an applied research agenda in relation to professional training objectives to determine the relative effectiveness of instructional efforts. |
Activities: Activities include: 1. Review of applied behavior systems analysis in relation to professional training activities. 2. Hands on application of observation system construction designed as compatible with professional training objectives. 3. Hands-on application of observational laboratory development in relation to the classroom instruction of relevant behavior analytic professional training objectives. 4. Hands-on application of data-based on-site feedback and goal-setting protocols in relationship to deliberate practice activities of professional trainees. 5. Introduction and review of recommended research activity development in relation to determining the relative effectiveness of recommended professional training activities. |
Audience: Advanced graduate students and behavior analysts working in the area of professional teacher education in specific, and in the area of postsecondary training for professional competencies in general. Those working in postsecondary educational settings where focus is on the education, on-site training, and assessment of professional practice competencies, and who are challenged with how to teach, describe, and analyze highly interactive behavioral transactions should find the workshop experience and complimentary materials particularly appealing to a wide range of professional training, assessment, and applied research applications. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
A Formal Sequential Program for Shaping Applied Skills in Personnel Programs Serving Children with Special Needs |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Montreal |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Beth Sulzer-Azaroff, Ph.D. |
BETH SULZER-AZAROFF (Browns Group Naples), KATHLEEN DYER (River Street Autism Program) |
Description: The pool of personnel skilled in the applied practice of behavior analysis in programs for children with special needs is limited. Even those capable of "talking the talk" of ABA may have insufficiently mastered the capability of "walking the walk." In this workshop, we will present a program that college, university, and program-based trainers of behavior analysis in organizations serving children with special needs will be able to use to guide trainees step by step along the path toward increasing competence. Attendees will receive a copy of a teaching manual to take to their home locations. |
Learning Objectives: By the end of this workshop participants should be able to: 1. Say why guided and reinforced practice is essential to preparing skillful personnel within applied settings 2. Identify instructional objectives of relevance to the personnel they hope to train 3. Sketch out a plan for designing and implementing that training 4. List a set of methods for assessing the effectiveness of their procedures |
Activities: 1. Overview of objectives 2. Case examples 3. Audience contributions of case examples 4. Step by step sequence of weekly assignments designed to support trainee progress 5. Participant plans to introduce the sequence at their respective programs 6. Evaluation of learning and satisfaction |
Audience: Behavior analysts concerned with promoting skills of personnel employed within their organizations or those training, coordinating and/or supervising students in practicum or internship sites |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Enhancing Behavior Analytic Practices with Feminist Principles |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Kennesaw |
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Maria R. Ruiz, Ph.D. |
CHRISTEINE M. TERRY (University of Washington), MARIA R. RUIZ (Rollins College) |
Description: Though rarely seen as compatible behavior analysis and feminist theory, broadly defined, share some interesting conceptual and practical perspectives. For example, the feminist critique of traditional psychological science in many respects parallels the behavioral critique. Feminist psychology and behavior analysis also share some important assumptions about scientific knowledge and the process of knowledge making. Feminist psychologists have tackled many interesting domains in their research, but their research methodologies have often been limiting. This workshop will explore what a merger of feminist research interests and behavior analytic practices might look like. Specifically, we will consider how feminist enhanced behavior analysis might lead to stronger pedagogical and clinical practices. |
Learning Objectives: 1--participants will describe 4 points of conceptual convergence between behavior analysis and feminist psychology 2-- participants will describe 4 key points in the feminist critique of traditional psychological science 3--participants will identify 4 ways in which the teaching of behavior analysis might be enhanced by feminist practice 4--participants will identify 4 approaches to enhancing behaviorally oriented clinical practice (eg. Functional Analytic Psychotherapy) with feminist principles |
Activities: Lecture material will be presented with Powerpoint --Videos --Small group activities --Experiential exercises |
Audience: Introductory level |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
Formulating Programs for Nave Learners: Worksheets for Designing Contingencies |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Dunwoody |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Richard E. Laitinen, Ph.D. |
VICCI TUCCI (Tucci Learning Solutions, Inc.), RICHARD E. LAITINEN (Tucci Learning Solutions, Inc.), DANIEL E. HURSH (West Virginia University) |
Description: The design and implementation of effective contingencies to solve problems of social importance is the sine qua non of behavior analysis. This workshop will provide assistance to educators and parents to make conspicuous the contingencies operating in a given situation. Participants will learn to formulate and deliver supplementary reinforcement contingencies as prescribed by best-practice recommendations. Each participant will receive a copy of a Contingency Management binder that compiles many of the contingencies known to reflect 'best practice' for achieving ethical change in problematic behavior. For service providers already familiar with the principles and operations of behavior analysis the worksheets contained within this binder will serve as a convenient means of standardizing communication and documentation of procedures. For those less familiar with Applied Behavior Analysis the booklet will provide an overview of the critical concepts, principles and operations that the ethical utilization of each of the contingencies contained therein. Each contingency description is designed so that that page can be copied and completed for an individual learner or client. Each participant will be required to select and complete a contingency worksheet for a Learner of his or her choice. |
Learning Objectives: Participants will learn to utilize the procedures and materials contained within the CLM "Designing Contingencies" binder to identify, individualize, and formulate contingencies to establish, strengthen or extend educational and behavioral targets for naive Learners. This binder compiles many of the contingencies known to reflect 'best practice' for achieving ethical change in problematic behavior. |
Activities: 1.Overview and introduction to the "Designing Contingencies" Binder. 2. Review and practice utilizing the decision process for selecting contingencies. 3. Practice in completing and individualizing selected contingencies for at least three Learners of concern to the participant. |
Audience: BCABAs, BCBAs, and service providers (teachers, home program therapists and program supervisors) working with young children with challenging learning and behavioral concerns. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
The ABC's of Consulting in School Districts |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Vinings |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Kristen M. Villone, Ph.D. |
KRISTEN M. VILLONE (Melmark) |
Description: One of the biggest challenges behavior analysts face when consulting in school districts is balancing the role of "invited guest" with the role of "professional with expertise." Consultants working in school districts may also be challenged more by the behavior of the service providers than that of the identified student(s). The experiences of a veteran consultant (with 17 years consulting experience) will offer unique perspectives on strategies and approaches they have found invaluable. |
Learning Objectives: -Describe common types of services most often requested by school districts -Identify/address the primary "client" and/or presenting problem(s) -Understand the importance of body language, staff perceptions, documentation, and communication during class |
Activities: Participants will receive handouts to aid reviewing the workshop�s learning objectives during the first part of the workshop. The second part of the workshop will consist of a problem-solving discussion of different types of obstacles, scenarios and case examples the presenters have experienced. As time permits, audience members will be encouraged to present their own obstacles/issues for problem-solving. |
Audience: Anyone interested in consulting in school districts, especially relatively new consultants who have ABA experience teaching children with developmental disabilities and training staff in clinical settings. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
TeachTown: Incorporating ABA Best-Practices into Computer-Assisted Treatment for Children with Autism |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Regency VII |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Christina Whalen, Ph.D. |
CHRISTINA WHALEN (TeachTown), BRAD MCGUIRE (TeachTown), MANYA C. R. VAUPEL (TeachTown) |
Description: The use of computers with children with autism is becoming increasingly prevalent yet this technology still seems relatively untapped with its potential. In this workshop, all of the essential elements of ABA for children with autism will be discussed including Sd's, prompting, discrimination, acquisition, reinforcement, generalization, data-collection, information sharing, and research. These topics will be discussed in terms of how to incorporate the best-practices of ABA into computer technology. One example of a program that attempts to incorporate all of these essential elements, the TeachTown program, will be presented and attendees will receive free demo copies of the software. It is suggested that attendees bring laptop computers for a more hands-on experience. |
Learning Objectives: 1) What are ABA best-practices and how will we know when we are doing it? 2) How can we use computers to improve existing ABA practices? 3) How can we better manage data from ABA programs? 4) How important is generalization? What is the best approach for incorporating generalization into treatment? How can we measure generalization in ABA programs? 5) What research has been done on using computers with children with autism and what research still needs to be done? 6) What is the TeachTown program? How does this program incorporate ABA best-practices? |
Activities: Review of ABA therapies available for children with autism; review of "best-practices" in ABA therapy; review of studies using computers for children with autism; discussion of advantages & disadvantages of using computers for children with autism; review and hands-on demonstration of TeachTown program along with discussion of "best-practices" in ABA; discussion of generalization and ideas for incorporating generalization into computer-assisted programs. |
Audience: Parents, teachers, professionals, and researchers specializing in autism, language delays, or other special needs. Basic understanding of ABA and ABA principles (e.g. reinforcement, prompting, discrimination, etc.) - these terms will be reviewed briefly but workshop is ideal for those with basic understanding of these principles. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Intermediate |
|
|
Community-Based Behavior Service for Adults with Developmental Disabilities: Assessment, Treatment, and Evaluation |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Fairlie |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Liming Zhou, Ph.D. |
LIMING ZHOU (Midsouth Behavior Clinic) |
Description: This workshop provides a technical roadmap for behavior analysts on how to serve adults with developmental disabilities/mental retardation who live in the community settings (group home, family home and other supported living arrangement). The workshop focuses on practical questions such as how to conduct appropriate functional assessment based on individual needs, how to develop reinforcement-based treatment procedures based on functional assessment, how to prevent and intervene SIB, aggression, destruction and other challenging behaviors, how to develop adaptive replacement behavior, how to build supportive environment through staff training and agency/parents consultation, and finally, how to evaluate effectiveness of treatment program. While studying the above questions, the instructor will first briefly review selected ABA literature, and then guide audience to learn and practice behavior analysis and behavior therapy techniques that are proven to be effective. |
Learning Objectives: 1. Understand and conduct basic functional assessment to assess target behaviors based on individual's needs. 2. Understand and develop basic reinforcement-based prevention and intervention procedures to treat behavior problems. 3. Understand and build supportive environment through training and consultation. 4. Understand and evaluate effectiveness of treatment program |
Activities: Didactic lecture includes literature review, technical analysis, data analysis, and case study. Group discussion will be utilized. Handout will cover sample of functional assessment tools, sample of reinforcement-based procedures with data sheet, sample of case study with data analyses, and a list of selected key references. Participants will have structured opportunities of asking questions and sharing practical experiences. |
Audience: Behavior analysts, behavior analyst associates, behavior specialists, graduate students and college students in ABA program, direct care professional supervisors, managers, program coordinators, case managers and administrators of private and government agencies serving adults with developmental disabilities, and parents of individuals with developmental disabilities. Participants should have basic knowledge of applied behavior analysis. |
Content Area: Practice |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
AimChart: Standard Celeration Charting on the Web at www.aimchart.com |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
8:00 AM–11:00 AM |
Vancouver |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Charles T. Merbitz, Ph.D. |
CHARLES T. MERBITZ (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), BEN MERBITZ (aimchart.com) |
Description: Aimchart (www.aimchart.com) is a web based tool for Standard Celeration Charting. The basic service is free to use over the internet; advanced services provide better management and sharing of data across institutions with complex needs. Aimchart guides any user to properly drag and drop data on the screen for instant uploading to the central database and immediate display on a proper standard Chart, complete with automatic Celeration. This data is stored by Aimchart and can be shared by the user with other stakeholders such as parent, team members, administrators and referring sources. An authorized user can immediately see the newest, completely current data from anywhere in the world 24/7. Aimchart supports phases, aimstars, and extremely precise printing. You can instantly, easily stack and restack data from an unlimited number of combinations of learners, pinpoints, and times. Workshop attendees will learn and practice with Aimcharts easy-to-use tools to set-up, collect, save, and analyze data and Charts and control access for groups and individuals. Future developments will be discussed. Participants receive an Aimchart institutional account (minimum value, $100). Attendees please bring a laptop with wifi or Ethernet and Flash 7, and contact Ben Merbitz (ben-aba@xig.net) to discuss equipment. |
Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the workshop, the participant will be able to: 1. Set up AimChart accounts for students, clients, teachers, and schools 2. Define behaviors to count and set goals for acceleration, deceleration, both (for comfort pairs), or neither. 3. Access the site as a student or other user and enter data 4. View the same data on Daily, Weekly or Monthly Charts 5. Set and remove phase lines & celeration lines, AimStars, and notes. 6. Select combinations of Charts (across persons and pinpoints) to view as overlays 7. Set the system to center on any Sunday for both data entry and display 8. Set controls on access to the information in the AimChart database. 9. Export AimChart data to Excel. 10. List at least: - one way to maintain confidentiality - one minimum system requirement for AimChart |
Activities: This workshop will be begin with a brief introduction of Standard Celeration Charting. Then participants will be guided through the use of Aimchart, including the creation of an Aimchart account; setting up groups, learners and actions; entering and editing data, markers, notes and aimstars; viewing different combinations of Charts; exporting data; and controlling access to their data. Future Aimchart developments will also be discussed, and feedback and requests will be gathered from participants for inclusion in newer versions of Aimchart. Substantial time will be spent allowing participants to practice using Aimchart and helping them with any questions they have. Workshop attendees are strongly encouraged to bring or arrange for a laptop so they can actually practice these techniques. Participant computers should have a working internet (WiFi or ethernet) connection and Macromedia Flash Player 7. (We recommend Firefox on Windows, OS X and Linux. We also support IE on Windows) A very limited number of computers will be available for rental ($25) during the workshop. Please arrange this well before the conference with Ben Merbitz (ben-aba@xig.net) |
Audience: Interested professionals may include BCBAs, academic behavior analysts, teachers, and administrators; AimChart supports data collection across agencies, consulting practices, schools, classroom, and other organization where it is desirable for key people to have 24/7 access to learning and performance data for clients and students. Parents, students, and other persons may set up AimChart accounts as individuals simply for convenient Charts, or for easier data analysis. We prefer that participants understand the basics of Precision Teaching and use of the Internet. |
Content Area: Methodology |
Instruction Level: Basic |
|
|
OBM 2006: A View From the Field |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–1:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom I |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Leslie Wilk Braksick, Ph.D. |
Chair: Timothy D. Ludwig (Appalachian State University) |
LESLIE WILK BRAKSICK (The Continuous Learning Group, Inc.) |
Dr. Leslie Braksick is noted for energy, honesty, and an intense commitment to results. She has earned the trust of AT&T, Bayer Corporation, Chevron Corporation, Ingersoll-Rand, Bell Atlantic, H.J. Heinz, and many other companies. Dr. Braksick’s power-packed, practical teaching, her personal ease, and her down-to-earth style make her the speaker of choice for anyone seeking the Holy Grail of strategy execution. Her key message—“success is driven by human behavior and the consequences that shape it”—resonates with today’s grand-slam execution challenges, like M&A, corporate creep, supply chain management, technology implementation, attracting and retaining top talent, succession, and knowledge management. In addition to speaking at conferences for Inc. Magazine, The Conference Board, and the International Society for Performance Improvement, Dr. Braksick is in great demand for strategic internal meetings. Executives of Fortune 100 companies turn to her for a message that is totally customized to advance their cause, delivered with passion, and grounded in real-world results. High demand to spread the word prompted her first book, Unlock Behavior, Unleash Profits (McGraw-Hill, 2000). Her provocative ideas have appeared in numerous popular business publications and refereed journals. |
Abstract: In this address, Dr. Leslie Braksick will offer her perspective on the State of Organizational Behavior Management (OBM) from the consultant and clients point of view. As a behavioral leadership coach to Fortune 100 executives and as the Co-Founder and Chairman of the largest behaviorally-based consulting firm, Braksick has an important perspective on the world of work and the opportunities and challenges for OBM practitioners. Braksick will discuss current and emerging trends in business and the role of behavior analysis in those trends. She will highlight client examples where Fortune 100 companies are, today, relying on behavior analysis as their strategic weapon for high performance and competitive differentiation. She will also draw attention to clients who say they are focusing on behavior but, in reality, use programs that have no scientific underpinning. The voice of the client will be seen and heard using video technology. Finally, Braksick will offer her perspective on areas of needed study by OBM researchers as well as how the OBM network might better market their behavioral solutions. |
|
|
|
|
Using Grounded Reflection to Reflect on the Constructivist Perspective |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–1:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: TBA; Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Vivian Fueyo, Ph.D. |
Chair: Pamela G. Osnes (Behavior Analysts, Inc.) |
VIVIAN FUEYO (University of South Florida, St. Petersburg) |
Dr. Vivian Fueyo received her Doctorate in Developmental and Child Psychology at the University of Kansas and joined the faculty at USF St. Petersburg in 2003 as founding Dean of the College of Education. Prior to serving as Dean of the College of Education at USF-St. Petersburg, Dr. Fueyo was a faculty member in the College of Education at Florida State |
Abstract: Reflection, based on grounded theory and supported by research and the scientific method, is much more behavioral than constructivist. Despite this assertion, current priorities in teacher education posit that behavioral approaches are inadequate for defining the social and cognitive mediation necessary for teaching and learning in todays classrooms. Frequently, constructivist principles are advocated instead. In the second edition of The Handbook of Research on Teacher Education (Sikula, 1996), Constructivist Perspectives is one of eight subsections under Contemporary Conceptions of Learning to Teach. The others are Critical Perspectives, Teacher Reasoning, Pedagogical Content Knowledge, Multicultural Teacher Education, Global Teacher Education, Human Development, and Cognitive Instruction. Behaviorism and Behavior Analysis comprises a separate, stand alone section of this same book. It is telling that constructivist perspectives is listed as one among many in the handbook, while an entire section of the book is dedicated exclusively to behaviorism. Without behavioral approaches to teaching, all the requisite skills that students and teachers need to reflect and reason, such as active listening, attending to appropriate cues, clarifying and extending questions, paraphrasing, etc., could never occur. Nevertheless, the confusion continues. The purpose of this address is to engage the audience in a semantic and functional analysis of behavioral and constructivist approaches to teaching and learning. |
|
|
|
|
Acquisition and Generalization of Social Skills |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–2:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Marjorie H. Charlop (Claremont McKenna College) |
CE Instructor: Marjorie H. Charlop, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Presentation of research conducted at the Claremont Autism Center that examines the acquisition and generalization of positive behaviors including social initiations and social skills. Studies to be discussed included a comparative analysis of generalization techniques, assessment of socio-communicative function of inappropriate behaviors, social initiations in nonverbal children, and a comparison of the effectiveness of Steps to Social Success (SSS) and Social Stories for Teaching Social Skills to children with autism. |
|
Comparative Analysis of Generalization Strategies. |
GINA T. CHANG (Claremont Graduate University), Marjorie H. Charlop (Claremont McKenna College) |
Abstract: The study conducted a comparative analysis of generalization strategies with different loci of control. Research has demonstrated that specifically implementing facilitators of generalization into behavioral interventions increases generalization and maintenance of newly acquired skills (e.g., Chandler, Lubeck & Fowler, 1992; R. L. Koegel & Koegel, 1995; Schreibman, 1988; Stokes & Baer, 1977). However, only a few studies have attempted to understand the role that different strategies play in promoting generalization, and none have directly compared strategies. The present study presents a comparison of the known facilitators of generalization; multiple stimuli training, indiscriminable contingency training, and reinforced generalization training. The study uses a multi-element design with a multiple baseline design across and within children additional control to compare which generalization strategy works the most effectively in assisting children with autism to generalize behaviors taught in the clinical setting to the natural environment. |
|
Increasing Social Initiations in Nonverbal Children with Autism: A Comparison of Modified Incidental Teaching Sessions (MITS) and Discrete Trial Training (DTT) |
KARI BERQUIST (Claremont Graduate University), Marjorie H. Charlop (Claremont McKenna College) |
Abstract: This study examined the acquisition and generalization of social initiations (e.g., greetings, sharing) in three nonverbal children with autism. Children were taught two different social behaviors in which they initiated an interaction with another person, thus promoting overt social communication. Modified Incidental Teaching Sessions (MITS) and Discrete Trial Training (DTT) were compared and used to increase children’s social initiations. It was hypothesized that children with autism would show increases in the use of social initiations after either treatment (MITS or DTT) was implemented, but that only the behaviors taught using MITS would show better generalization. An alternating treatment, multiple baseline design across participants was used. Inter-observer agreement was above 80% for each child. Initial results suggest that all three children increased in their frequency of social initiations after either treatment (MITS or DTT); however, generalization and maintenance of target behaviors was superior with MITS. |
|
Increasing Social Initiations through Functional Assessment and Communication Training in Children with Autism. |
KATHERINE K. BYRD (Claremont Graduate University), Marjorie H. Charlop (Claremont McKenna College) |
Abstract: One of the major deficits of children with autism is in social interaction with others. These two experiments were designed to identify the socio-communicative function of inappropriate behaviors and assess the effects of communication training upon the use of replacement behaviors. In Experiment 1, we developed an assessment method for identifying the subtle and idiosyncratic behaviors in three children and classified these behaviors (e.g., grabbing, jumping, and engaging in stereotypy) in terms of social function. Results indicated that all children expressed inappropriate behaviors that served a social function. The most frequently displayed initiations were those aberrant behaviors expressing or requesting affection or attention. In Experiment 2, assessment data were used to select more appropriate social behaviors that served the same socio-communicative function as the previous behaviors. Two children participated in the communication training that consisted of modeling and prompting the replacement behaviors in the settings where each child previously displayed an inappropriate behavior. Results of a multiple baseline design across children showed that children learned the replacement behaviors and showed decreases in inappropriate behaviors. These findings suggest that identifying the social function of inappropriate behavior may facilitate the acquisition of effective social initiating behavior in low functioning children with autism. |
|
A Comparison of Steps to Social Success (SSS) and Social Stories for Teaching Social Skills to Children with Autism. |
SABRINA D. DANESHVAR (Claremont Graduate University), Marjorie H. Charlop (Claremont McKenna College) |
Abstract: Social Stories (Gray & Garand, 1993) is a widely used social skills program for children with autism despite little empirical validation. Based on severe cognitive and social deficits present in these children, it is curious how Social Stories can be effective in teaching social skills to this population, and the scarcity of empirical data makes it more questionable. Despite the name “social” stories, what little data there are addressed behaviors other than social skills (i.e., tantrums, off-task behavior). In this study an alternative social skills program, Steps to Social Success (SSS), was created to capitalize on the strengths of children with autism and include facilitators for motivation, generalization and maintenance. Importantly, the program clearly focuses on teaching social behaviors. An alternating treatments design with a multiple baseline design across children was used to empirically assess and compare the effectiveness of Social Stories and the newly developed SSS program in teaching social skills to four children with autism. Results found that SSS was effective whereas Social Stories was not. Results also showed greater ancillary increases in spontaneous social behavior and decreases in inappropriate behavior in the SSS condition. Interobserver agreement was at satisfactory levels (greater than 80%). Results are discussed in terms of how children with autism learn best and the importance of scientific study of commonly used treatment techniques. |
|
|
|
|
Contributions of Behavioral Pharmacology/Toxicology to the Experimental Analysis of Behavior: III |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–2:20 PM |
Piedmont |
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Steven I. Dworkin (University of North Carolina, Wilmington) |
Discussant: Steven I. Dworkin (University of North Carolina, Wilmington) |
CE Instructor: Steven I. Dworkin, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This is the third symposium in the continuing series of presentations outlining the contributions of research in behavioral pharmacology to the experimental analysis of behavior. Although the contributions of EAB to BPH are easily identified, the advancements made in the other direction are not as readily apparent. This symposium will highlight significant contributions of BPH to EAB. |
|
Using Poisons to Probe Behavior - and Vice Versa. |
ROBERT C. MACPHAIL (University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill) |
Abstract: A central concept that emerged early in behavioral pharmacology was that of drug-behavior interactions. By this principle, the behavioral effect of a drug depended on the compound and its dose - but also on the conditions maintaining the behavior under investigation. The concept has had broad applicability in neurobiology and to a lesser degree in toxicology. Studies will be reviewed, however, supporting the conclusion that the effects of many toxic environmental pollutants (pesticides, metals and toxins) also display drug-behavior interactions. |
|
Translating the Contributions of Behavioral Pharmacology/Toxicology to Human Health Issues. |
JOHN R. GLOWA (National Institutes of Health) |
Abstract: n/a |
|
A Look Back Towards the Future. |
VICTOR G. LATIES (University of Rochester Medical Center) |
Abstract: n/a |
|
|
|
|
Further Evaluation of Indirect and Direct Methods of Functional Assessment |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–2:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Cynthia M. Anderson (University of Oregon) |
CE Instructor: Cynthia M. Anderson, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Practitioners interested in conduting a pre-intervention functional assessment are faced with the daunting challenge of identifying a method that will be useful in a given setting and with a given population. The difficulty they are faced with has only increased in recent years as the number of functional assessment methods available in journals and on the world wide web has exploded. In this symposium we explore questions related to reliability, validity, and treatment utility of indirect and direct methods of functional assessment. |
|
Current Status of Validity Data for the QABF (Questions About Behavioral Function). |
THEODOSIA R. PACLAWSKYJ (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Johnny L. Matson (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Ruth M. DeBar (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Mary-Claire Brett (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: A persistent challenge for clinicians in applied settings who work with individuals with developmental disabilities and maladaptive behaviors is to reconcile the need for efficacious assessment and treatment development with the knowledge that functional assessment questionnaires are not guaranteed to produce an accurate or valid outcome. Most ABA practitioners are aware of the fact that functional analyses conducted via analog sessions demonstrate the greatest validity and experimental control. However, in too many cases clinicians lack the resources necessary to conduct such analyses, whether due to time, personnel, or workload factors. Therefore, further efforts at validation of a functional assessment checklist remain critical. In the current paper, we present the comparison data between the outcomes of the QABF and functional analysis sessions and compare these outcomes to treatment data. Patient data for 90 cases in which a function-based treatment was successfully implemented were reviewed retrospectively. Agreement between the QABF and functional analysis outcome was modest (mean across subscales=64%). Results are discussed in terms of identifying the limiting conditions for use of the QABF in clinical settings. |
|
Agreement between Teachers and Students on Function of Student Problem Behavior as Indicated in Brief Functional Behavioral Assessment Interviews. |
KENT MCINTOSH (University of Oregon), Robert H. Horner (University of Oregon) |
Abstract: This paper describes results from a study comparing data obtained from brief functional behavioral assessment interviews. Participants were 50 general and special education students in 4th, 5th and 6th grades with chronic problem behavior and their teachers. Each teacher participated in a brief functional behavioral assessment interview, during which a summary statement (identification of problem behavior, antecedents and function) was generated. Students were then provided with a summary statement with the function information omitted and were asked to provide a function for their problem behavior. Results indicated moderate agreement between sources, with several factors influencing the level of agreement. Such factors will be discussed in relation to increasing the accuracy of functional behavioral assessments completed in regular school settings. |
|
Descriptive and Experimental Analyses of Potential Precursors to Problem Behavior. |
CARRIE S. W. BORRERO (University of Florida & Spectrum Center, Inc.), John C. Borrero (University of the Pacific), Andrew R. Weiher (Spectrum Center, Inc.) |
Abstract: We conducted a descriptive analysis of severe problem behavior for an individual with developmental disabilities in order to identify potential precursors to problem behavior. After identifying potential precursors, we compared the unconditional probability of the precursor to the conditional probability of the precursor given problem behavior. We then conducted functional analyses of both the problem behavior and precursor to determine if both were reinforced by the same events. Results of the descriptive analysis demonstrated that the probability of the precursor was greater given problem behavior than the unconditional probability of the precursor, and suggested that the response may be a precursor to problem behavior. In addition, results of the functional analyses demonstrated that both problem behavior and the precursor were reinforced by access to tangible items and escape from instructional demands. The method may be useful for determining the extent to which one response precedes problem behavior and whether precursors and problem behavior are members of the same (or different) response classes. |
|
Psychometric Properties of the Questions About Behavioral Function Scale in a Pediatric Population. |
KURT A. FREEMAN (Oregon Health Sciences University), Michael Walker (Oregon Health Sciences University), Jeremy Kaufman (Oregon Health Sciences University) |
Abstract: The Questions About Behavioral Function (QABF) scale is a caregiver report form designed to identify behavioral functions of aberrant behavior. Previous research regarding the psychometric properties of this instrument has been conducted with adults, largely in residential settings. Because of this, the goal of the present investigation was to evaluate psychometric properties of the QABF in an outpatient pediatric population. Ninety-one children between the ages of 2 and 18 with developmental delays and aberrant behavior (e.g., physical aggression, self-injury, property destruction) participated. All participants were seen in an outpatient behavioral assessment clinic operated through a medical university hospital. One caregiver (i.e., parent or legal guardian) completed the QABF and Motivation Assessment Scale (MAS) focused on one problematic behavior identified in a pre-appointment interview for each child. Results indicate that the QABF exhibited fair to good internal consistency, acceptable inter-subscale correlations, and convergent validity with the MAS. Current results extend the literature on the QABF by demonstrating acceptable psychometric properties with a pediatric population evaluated in an outpatient setting. Available data suggest that the QABF may be a viable functional assessment tool for use in situations in which more experimentally rigorous functional assessment procedures (e.g., analog functional analysis) are not feasible. |
|
|
|
|
Further Refinements of Observation and Measurement Procedures |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–2:20 PM |
Regency VI |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Eileen M. Roscoe (New England Center for Children) |
CE Instructor: Eileen M. Roscoe, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium will present four papers describing various refinements in observation and measurement procedures in the field of applied behavior analysis. The first paper, presented by Jeffrey Luke, will present data comparing whole-session means and latency to first response as methods for identifying the function(s) of severe problem behavior. The second paper, delivered by Maeve Meanny, will discuss data comparing partial-interval recording (PIR) and momentary-time sampling (MTS) methods for estimating duration and frequency. She will also present data evaluating how PIR and MTS methods may affect treatment interpretation. The third paper, delivered by Frank Symons, will review the strengths and weaknesses of recent developments in sequential analysis, focusing on issues relevant to contingency analysis in natural environments. Finally, the last paper, presented by Luanne Witherup, will discuss the utility of obtaining behavioral measures of running away for children in foster care. |
|
Utilizing Latency-to-First-Response as a Measure in the Evaluation of Functional Analysis Outcomes. |
JEFFREY R. LUKE (University of Iowa), Joel Eric Ringdahl (University of Iowa), Tory J. Christensen (University of Iowa), Jayme Mews (University of Iowa), Jason M. Stricker (University of Iowa), Terry S. Falcomata (University of Iowa) |
Abstract: Since the initial application of functional analysis logic to the assessment of severe problem behavior, variations in the methodology have emerged. Typically, such variations have included a change in design or in length of the assessment. In this study, we compared the graphic display of whole-session means and latency to first response as methods for identifying the function(s) of severe problem behavior. Visual inspection of the graphic displays latency to first response resulted in similar conclusions as visual inspection of whole-session mean data. These results will be discussed relative to their implications for session length during analog functional analyses and when such methodology should be employed (e.g., dangerous behavior, etc.). Inter-rater agreement was obtained for at least 30% of the comparisons and was above 90%. |
|
A Comparison of Momentary Time Sampling and Partial Interval Recording Measurement Methods. |
MAEVE G. MEANY-DABOUL (New England Center for Children), Eileen M. Roscoe (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children), Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to compare partial interval recording (PIR) and momentary time sampling (MTS) methods for estimating duration and frequency, and to evaluate how PIR and MTS methods may affect treatment interpretation. Five individuals with autism, who exhibited problem behavior characterized by different bout durations, participated. Responding was recorded across baseline and treatment conditions using each type of measurement method to determine whether the different methods affected the data record, and thus, data interpretation. Results indicated that MTS was a better estimator of duration than PIR across all bout durations, and that PIR was a better estimator of frequency than MTS across short and medium bout durations. Long bout durations resulted in decreased accuracy of estimates when compared to frequency. Separate graphic displays were then created for each measurement method. A dual-criterion (DC) method was used to analyze each graph for evidence of appropriate phase changes and treatment effects. Visual inspection using the DC method resulted in appropriate phase-change decisions but varied treatment interpretations across measurement methods and bout durations. IOA was collected during 33.8% of sessions and averaged 95%. |
|
Calculating Contingencies in Natural Environments. |
FRANK J. SYMONS (University of Minnesota), Jennifer J. McComas (University of Minnesota), Ellie C. Hartman (University of Minnesota), John D Hoch (University of Minnesota) |
Abstract: In this paper, we rejoin the discussion initiated by Vollmer and Hackenberg (2001) on identifying and estimating reinforcement contingencies in the natural environment. The conceptual and logical basis for inferring a reinforcement effect is revisited. Recent developments in sequential analysis are reviewed along with their strengths and weaknesses. Data from descriptive analyses are used to illustrate points of convergence and divergence. Remaining issues germane to contingency analysis in natural environments are discussed. It is concluded that the conceptual distinctions among contiguity, contingency, and dependency are critical if the logic of sequential analysis is to be extended successfully to a behavior analytic account of reinforcement in natural environments. |
|
Baseline Measurement of Running Away Among Youth in Foster Care. |
LUANNE WITHERUP (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to examine the feasibility and usefulness of obtaining behavioral measures of running away for children in foster care. Participants included 84 runaways residing in one service district of the Florida Department of Children and Families (FDCF). All data were obtained from existing databases managed by FDCF. Seven baseline measures were calculated for each runner including (a) the number of run initiations, (b) the proportion of opportunity days in which the child initiated a run, (c) the number of days the child spent on the run, (d) the proportion of opportunity days that the child spent on the run, (e) the duration of successive run episodes, (f) successive episode inter-response times and (g) successive initiation inter-response times. The first four of these measures were also calculated for various sub-groups of children constructed from the original sample. In addition, an observer-panel evaluation was conducted to identify baselines that would be suitable for research-based treatment evaluations. Results demonstrate the feasibility of obtaining baseline measures of running away, but suggest that such measures may not be suitable for research-based treatment evaluations in many cases. However, results indicate that such treatment evaluations may be possible via an analysis of groups of runners rather than individual subjects. |
|
|
|
|
Promoting Compliance and Decreasing Problem Behavior |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–2:20 PM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Rachel H. Thompson (University of Kansas) |
CE Instructor: Rachel H. Thompson, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This series of presentations will explore a number of variables that influence the extent to which behavior is allocated toward compliance with academic tasks and other adult requests rather than less desirable responses (e.g., noncompliance, stereotypy). Collectively, these studies explore the effects of praise, instructions, three-step prompting, differential reinforcement, shaping, and non-contingent reinforcement. These variables were evaluated under both analog experimental conditions and under in more naturalistic settings (e.g., the preschool classroom.). The utility of and limitations associated with each of these strategies will be discussed, and researchers will provide recommendations for practice. |
|
An Evaluation of Strategies for Promoting Desirable Response Allocation Among Toddlers. |
PAIGE M. MCKERCHAR (University of Kansas), Rachel H. Thompson (University of Kansas), Nicole M. Cotnoir (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Caregivers working with toddlers are challenged with arranging environmental conditions to promote appropriate responses (e.g., compliance) and discourage inappropriate responses (e.g., destructive behavior). This study evaluated the effects of commonly recommended procedures on toddler response allocation, within a concurrent-operants arrangement. Data were collected on the frequency of simple responses (e.g., stacking) under analog conditions. Interobserver agreement was collected during a minimum of 28% of sessions and averaged above 85% across participants. Results showed that, for all participants, praise alone was ineffective in producing desired response allocation. For participant 1, the delivery of an edible combined with descriptive praise was effective. For participant 2, instructions plus general praise plus delivery of an edible was successful. For participants 3 and 4, three-step prompting plus general praise was effective. And for participants 5 and 6, three-step prompting plus general praise plus access to a preferred item was required to produce desired response allocation. Results for participant 6 were replicated under naturalistic conditions in the classroom. These results suggest that, although there is an abundant amount of research demonstrating the effectiveness of praise, it may be insufficient to produce desirable changes in toddler behavior even when combined with explicit instructions. |
|
Evaluation of a Three-step Prompting Procedure to Reduce Noncompliance among Typically Developing Preschool Children. |
DAVID A. WILDER (Florida Institute of Technology), Julie Atwell (Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: The effectiveness of a three-step prompting procedure to reduce noncompliance among typically developing preschool children was evaluated. After baseline data on compliance to common demands were collected, a parent, instructional assistant, or graduate research assistant implemented the three-step prompting procedure, which involved the delivery of progressively more intrusive prompts contingent upon noncompliance. The effects of the procedure were examined using a non-concurrent multiple baseline design across participants. The results suggest that the procedure was effective for four of the six children who participated. |
|
An Examination of Percentile Schedules of Reinforcement to Increase Compliance. |
ELIZABETH S. ATHENS (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Claire C St. Peter (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Shaping is frequently used to teach new behavioral repertoires as well as to increase the likelihood of engagement in current behavioral repertoires. The purpose of the current study was to evaluate a method of quantifying the shaping process in applied settings using percentile schedules. Percentile schedules are used as a mathematical method of quantifying the shaping process in order to limit variation in the shaping procedure between subjects. Despite its successful implementation in basic research, the method has gained little attention in application. In experiment 1 of the current study, percentile schedules were implemented in an elementary school setting with three children as a shaping procedure targeting compliance during various academic tasks. Results showed that percentile schedules were successful at shaping higher levels of compliance. In experiment 2 of the current study, we examined several different parameters for one of the variables in implementing a percentile schedule. The results of these experiments indicate that percentile schedules may be useful in the application of shaping, enabling quantification and objectivity across clients and therapists. |
|
Selective Effects of Noncontingent Access to Reinforcers "Matched" to Problem Behavior on Problem Behavior and Academic Behavior. |
ELIZABETH CHRISTENSEN (New England Center for Children), Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: Non-contingent access to sources of reinforcement matched to the putative sensory consequence maintaining automatically reinforced problem behavior has been shown to be an effective treatment. In the present study, a functional analysis indicated that the problem behavior (stereotypy) of two participants diagnosed with autism was automatically maintained. A competing-items assessment showed that non-contingent music suppressed vocal stereotypy in both participants. The effects of non-contingent music on stereotypy and engagement in academic responding in a classroom setting were examined using a multi-element design. The results showed that non-contingent access to reinforcement matched to the hypothesized sensory consequence maintaining problem behavior produced decreases in stereotypy but no decreases in rates of trial completion or accuracy of responding. |
|
|
|
|
Promoting Spontaneous Language Use and Cooperative Play in Young Children with Autism |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–2:20 PM |
Regency V |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University) |
Discussant: Patricia J. Krantz (Princeton Child Development Institute) |
CE Instructor: Thomas S. Higbee, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Many children with autism display deficits in the use of spontaneous language and cooperative play. Research recently conducted at Utah State University to address these challenges will be presented in this symposium. Topics will include the use of social scripting and script fading procedures, cooperative activity schedules, and strategies to teach manding for information by contriving motivating operations. |
|
Parents Use of Script Fading Procedures to Teach Conversation to Children with Autism. |
KARA A. REAGON (Utah State University), Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University) |
Abstract: Scripts and script fading procedures have been effective strategies to teach children and adolescents with autism conversational language. Audio taped scripts have been used with nonreaders (Stevenson, Krantz, & McClannhan, 2000) and written textual scripts (Krantz & McClannahan, 1993; Krantz & McClannahan, 1998; and Sarokoff, Taylor & Poulson, 2001) have been used with readers. Conversational topics have included initiations and question asking to adults about an upcoming event, initiations to peers and or adults about recently completed activities or upcoming activities, and lastly children have been taught to comment about objects within their environment, such as a snack or video game. Script and script fading procedures have also been implemented to teach youths appropriate conversational skills during simulated shopping trips that were then generalized to local retail stores (Brown, 2003). The purpose of the present study is to extend the use of script and script fading procedures to a home setting by training parents to implement and systematically fade scripts to promote conversational language in young children with autism. Both the parent’s use of script and script fading procedures and children’s use of scripts and unscripted responses will be examined using a multiple-probe design across participants. Generalization across activities will also be assessed. |
|
Teaching Children with Autism to Mand for Information By Contriving Motivating Operations. |
KATIE ENDICOTT (Utah State University), Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University) |
Abstract: Although many students with autism have demonstrated the ability to mand for tangible items, they often experience difficulty asking questions. Questions can be categorized as mands for information, as the question is controlled by a motivating operation and the response provided results in specific reinforcement. In the present study, young children with autism were taught to mand for information by contriving motivating operations to make the information more "valuable" and thus making mands for information more likely. Results of the study will be shared and their implications for establishing question asking repertoires in children with autism will be discussed. |
|
Teaching Preschool Aged Children with Autism to Engage in Peer Play Using Group Photographic Activity Schedules and Script Fading Procedures. |
ALISON M. BETZ (Utah State University), Kara A. Reagon (Utah State University), Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to increase social engagement and social interaction between two children with autism by using a group activity schedule. Three dyads of preschool aged children with autism were used to assess the effects of using a group photographic activity schedule on children’s social engagement including on-task behavior and percentage of independently completed activities. Scripts and script fading procedures were used to increase social interactions and initiations. A multiple baseline across dyads was used in this study. |
|
|
|
|
The Modification of Direct Instruction For Use with Different Learner Characteristics |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–2:20 PM |
International Ballroom North |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: David M. Corcoran (BEACON Services) |
Discussant: Robert K. Ross (BEACON Services) |
CE Instructor: Robert K. Ross, M.S. |
Abstract: Direct Instruction (DI) has been proven to be a very effective instructional program. This symposium will describe extensions of DI to learners with varying characteristics. DI has been used with learners with developmental disabilities, emotional disturbance, and autism. The three presenters will discuss modifications of DI for each of these populations, with sample data showing the continued effectiveness of the DI protocols. |
|
Modification of Direct Instruction Programs for Students with Developmental Disabilities. |
WENDY L. KOZMA (Evergreen Center) |
Abstract: This presentation will review Direct Instruction implementation in a residential setting for children and young adults with severe disabilities, emphasizing the instructional modifications required to implement DI with atypical learners. Program emphasis for DD populations has historically focused on the development of self-help and vocational skills. Direct Instruction implementation, including DISTAR Math, Corrective Reading Decoding, and Language for Learning, allows the more traditional academic skills to be incorporated into vocational and self-help domains. Rigorous teacher training and coaching allows for systematic modification of instructional delivery and program materials while maintaining fidelity to scope and sequence and integrity of the overall curriculum. Discussion will include presentation of several case studies and video clips of teachers implementing DI formats utilizing specific modifications. Data supporting the effectiveness of modifications will be presented and a model for ongoing, center-wide coaching and supervision of DI teachers will be suggested. |
|
The Use of Direction Instruction in the Public Schools with Children with Autism. |
ANN FILER (BEACON Services), Robert K. Ross (BEACON Services) |
Abstract: This presentation will provide a review of outcome data related to the implementation of two (DI) curriculum components; Language for Learning and Reading Mastery in a population of children with a diagnosis of Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD). The relevance for use with individuals with ASD will be demonstrated. Modifications of instruction and strategies to support the implementation of DI with children with ASD will be discussed and highlighted via videotape. The methods and structure of DI incorporate behavioral principles into instruction, including prompt fading, use of multiple exemplars and frequent measurement of efficacy. The instructors will provide in depth review of the types of instructional modifications required to implement DI with atypical learners. These modifications will include the use of token systems, visual schedules, additional visual prompts, presenting tasks in isolation and pre-teaching. These modifications although not specified in traditional DI scripts and trainings will be reviewed. |
|
Accelerating Reading and Writing Skills in Students with Emotional Difficulties Through the Implementation of a Comprehensive Language Arts Program. |
MARY K. LENGEL (Keystone Schools/UHS) |
Abstract: This paper will present evidence of effectiveness of core intervention Direct Instruction programs: Corrective
Reading, Reasoning, and Writing/Expressive Writing Program, and Spelling Mastery/Spelling Through Morphographs, in significnatly accelerating language arts fluency with students diagnosed with Emotional Disturbance. Pre and post test data will be presented; data from periodic fluency measures will also be presented and discussed. Methods for collecting baseline data and post test data will be described. Procedures for obtaining bi-weekly fluency measures will be described and demonstrated and the process for interpreting and disseminating results to classroom teachers will be outlined. Implementations for school-wide academic scheduling, individual student program adjustments, and evidenced-based instructional decision making will also be addressed. |
|
|
|
|
Using Multiple Modalities to Enhance Communication in Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
1:00 PM–2:20 PM |
Chicago A-F |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Stephanie Lockshin (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton) |
Discussant: Stephanie Lockshin (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton) |
CE Instructor: Stephanie Lockshin, Ph.D. |
Abstract: One of the defining characteristics of children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorders is a qualitative impairment in communication. The deficits in communication seen in children range from mutism, impaired use of nonverbal communication, limited ability to initiate or sustain conversational exchanges. These deficits present challenges to parents and educators and they clearly impact upon the social/emotional development of children on the spectrum. The papers included in this symposium will present behavioral interventions that have been developed for the purpose of overcoming problems often encountered when trying to teach language to children on the spectrum. |
|
Nonverbal Communication: Portable Materials that make use of Pictures for Communication Less Cumbersome. |
STEPHANIE LOCKSHIN (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton) |
Abstract: Nonverbal communication has been established as an effective, alternative mode of communication for nonverbal children with autism and pervasive developmental disorder. However, as the children develop the capacity to use multiple pictures to communicate their wants and needs, the use of picture books can be cumbersome and the books may not always be accessible when communication needs arise. The current paper investigates the impact of using a more “user friendly” version of a picture communication system on functional and social usage. |
|
Social Scripting to Increase Communication about Affective States in order to Reduce Maladaptive Behavior in a Classroom Setting. |
ROSE F. EAGLE (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton), Emily Huber Callahan (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton), Stephanie Lockshin (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton) |
Abstract: The current presentation describes an intervention implemented at the Institute for Child Development focused on providing children with behavioral disorders (including pervasive developmental disorders) tools to increase their ability to communicate about affective states. Teaching children with language delays coping skills presents various challenges, however we have found the use of a variety of visual and written strategies to be helpful. The current paper investigates the effectiveness of using social scripts, symbols, pictures, and other visual cues such as reminder cards on a child’s ability to communicate and regulate affect. |
|
Assessment of Preferred Modalities for Instruction. |
EMILY HUBER CALLAHAN (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton), Sara White (Binghamton University), Latha V. Soorya (Mt. Sinai School of Medicine), Rose F. Eagle (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton), Stephanie Lockshin (Institute for Child Development, State University of New York, Binghamton) |
Abstract: In young children with limited language abilities, it is often difficult to determine with which language modality instruction should begin: Verbal language? Picture communication? Sign language? The current paper describes an assessment procedure developed at the Institute for Child Development that assists in determining a child’s preferred modality for instruction. Data resulting from the assessment procedure will be presented, as will data related to the external validity of the assessment procedure. |
|
|
|
|
Teaching the Principal the Principles: The Role of ABA in Public Schools |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
2:00 PM–2:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: TBA; Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Ilene S. Schwartz, Ph.D. |
Chair: Pamela G. Osnes (Behavior Analysts, Inc.) |
ILENE S. SCHWARTZ (University of Washington) |
Dr. Ilene S. Schwartz earned her Ph.D. in child and developmental psychology at the University of Kansas. She has an extensive background working with young children with special needs, specifically with young children with autism and other severe disabilities. Currently, Dr. Schwartz is the faculty advisor of the integrated preschool and kindergarten programs at the Experimental Education Unit at UW. Dr. Schwartz maintains an active line of research and personnel preparation activities. She is the Principal Investigator of the PDA Center, an OSEP funded national training program on autism and of a model demonstration project to develop school-based services for young children with autism, a research project to assess the differential effectiveness of preschool programs for young children with autism, and of a personnel preparation to prepare early childhood teachers who work with children with severe disabilities in inclusive settings.. Dr. Schwartz has published numerous chapters and articles about early childhood special education and social validity. She was recently appointed to the Governor's Commission on Autism in Washington State. |
Abstract: The purpose of this presentation is to describe the role of behavior analysts in preparing educators to work with children with and without disabilities. Although much of the work of applied behavior analysts deals with the school age population, as a field we are often absent from debates about school reform and teacher education. During this presentation we will make the case forwhy it is important to increase our presence in these forums and suggest strategies to talk about behavior principles in a manner that is acceptable to our colleagues in public schools and colleges of education. |
|
|
|
|
Autism Spectrum Disorder: Comparing the Effectiveness of Behavioral & Traditional Treatment Approaches |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
2:30 PM–3:50 PM |
Regency V |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Christine Reeve (Mailman Segal Institute) |
CE Instructor: Jeannie A. Golden, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Behavioral and traditional approaches to treating children with autism are very different in terms of philosophies, goals, curriculums, and specific teaching methods. Each of the presenters will provide a brief overview of these differences and discuss a study that they are implementing together in order to compare the effectiveness of the two approaches. The participants in this study are children ages 2-5 years that have a diagnosis of Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). The children were videotaped in a standard situation with the same teacher and typically developing peer. Once the children had been video taped in the three situations, trained observers used the Autism Behavioral Observation System (ABOS) to measure the percentage of intervals in which specific target behaviors occurred. Inter-observer reliability and validity were measured for the ABOS. As the children were being video taped, their parents were interviewed in order to obtain detailed diagnostic information, as well as to determine which type of treatment approach had been chosen by the parents. Nine months later, parents will be interviewed again and the children will be videotaped in the same standard situations. Comparisons will be made between the children who are matched according to age, gender and initial level of autism to ascertain their progress in various areas of development. The researchers also investigated family characteristics that effected parents selection of a behavioral vs. traditional approaches to treatment of their children with autism. Finally, there are examples of using ABA approaches for children with ASD within the public school regular classes. |
|
The Development of a Tool for Measuring Videotaped Interactions of Children with Autism & a Typically-Developing Peer. |
KIM FLOYD (East Carolina University), Jeannie A. Golden (East Carolina University) |
Abstract: Measures of children with autism do not often include observation of their interaction with peers, although this is one of the more difficult problems exhibited by children with autism. The presenters will describe a tool that has been developed to videotape children with autism in a standard situation with the same teacher and typically developing peer. The children are video taped in the three situations: teacher child interaction, teacher led child and peer interaction, and child and peer free play. |
|
The Autism Behavioral Observation System: Is It A Valid & Reliable Measure Of Autism? |
JEANNIE A. GOLDEN (East Carolina University), Amy Diachenko (East Carolina University), Alicja Lipinski (East Carolina University) |
Abstract: The participants in this study were children ages 2-5 years that have a diagnosis of Autism or PDD-NOS using Gillian Autism Rating Scale (GARS). The study took place at a childcare center in Greenville, North Carolina. The children were videotaped in a standard situation with the same teacher and typically developing peer. Once the children had been video taped in the three situations (teacher child interaction, teacher led child and peer interaction, child and peer free play), trained observers used the Autism Behavioral Observation System to measure the percentage of intervals in which specific target behaviors occurred. As the children were being video taped, their parents filled out the Social Communication Questionnaire (SCQ) to determine the degree of autism of the children. Degree of autism as determined by the GARS and SCQ was compared to the frequency of specific target behaviors to determine the concurrent validity of the Autism Behavioral Observation System as a measure of autism. Inter-observer reliability of the behavioral observation system was also measured and found it to range from 78 to 100%. |
|
The Role of Family Demographics in the Choice of Treatments for Autism: Does Where You Live Make a Difference? |
EMILY COGDELL (East Carolina University), Jeannie A. Golden (East Carolina University) |
Abstract: This study looked at the family demographics of families with children with autism in two states, Florida and North Carolina, to determine which characteristics predicted whether the family chose an ABA program or special education program. The families were contacted through local agencies and asked to fill out a survey based on family characteristics at the time of diagnosis. Demographic information requested included income level, education level of parents, number of children in family, internet access, and race. It was hypothesized that two characteristics which will predict that a family chooses ABA over traditional special education programs in North Carolina are high income and high level of education, whereas in Florida these factors would be irrelevant. |
|
Using Embedded Instruction to Support Students with Autism and Developmental Disabilities in General Education Classrooms. |
JESSE W. JOHNSON (Northern Illinois University) |
Abstract: Embedded instruction is a set of instructional strategies that capitalize on opportunities to teach critical skills to students with moderate and severe disabilities in the context of naturally occurring routines (Brown, Evans, Weed, & Owen, 1987; Ford et al, 1989). This presentation summarizes the results of eight studies focused on examining the utility of embedded instruction in supporting students with Autism Spectrum Disorders and students with moderate and severe disabilities in general education settings. The results of all eight studies showed that 1) embedded instruction can be implemented successfully by general educator and paraprofessionals, and 2) embedded instruction procedures are effective in teaching targeted skills to students with moderate and severe disabilities in general education class rooms. There are important implications of these studies for providing |
|
|
|
|
Behavior Analysis Research in Safety and Health |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
2:30 PM–3:50 PM |
Greenbriar |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: R. Wayne Fuqua (Western Michigan University) |
Discussant: John Austin (Western Michigan University) |
CE Instructor: R. Wayne Fuqua, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Behavior excesses and deficits have been identified as causal or contributing factors for a the leading causes of death, injury and disability. This symposium illustrates the role of behavior analysis interventions in altering risky behavior (i.e., dangerous behavior on school playgrounds), in promoting protective behavior (i.e., wearing bicycle safety helmets), and understanding factors that contribute to injurious behavior (i.e., the influence of violent video games on aggressive behavior). |
|
It's All Fun and Games until Somebody Gets Hurt: Reducing Risky Behavior on School Playground Equipment. |
KIMBERLY SECKINGER (Western Michigan University), R. Wayne Fuqua (Western Michigan University), Geoffrey D. DeBery (Western Michigan University), Nancy J. Lindahl (Advantage Schools Inc. - Kalamazoo Academy) |
Abstract: Each year, over 200,000 people receive emergency room care for injuries sustained on recreational equipment, and a vast majority of these injuries involve children under the age of 15 who have been hurt on school playground equipment. A number of strategies to reduce playground injury have been proposed but few controlled studies have been published to evaluate the impact of injury reduction proposals on safe and risky playground behavior. A notable exception was Heck, Collins, & Peterson, 2001 who reported reductions in risk-taking behavior on playground equipment when programmed consequences were implemented for unsafe behavior. The purposes of the current investigation were to replicate and extend previous research though a component analysis of an injury prevention package designed to decrease unsafe use of playground recreational equipment among elementary school children. Results demonstrated that consistent behavioral contingencies for risky behavior produced the greatest reduction in students' unsafe behavior on the slide, although a portion of this decline could be attributed to a reduction in the absolute amount of play on this particular piece of equipment. Implications of these findings and further areas for research are discussed. |
|
Effects of Playing Violent Video Games and Young Adult's Behavior and Physiology. |
R. WAYNE FUQUA (Western Michigan University), Kent D. Smallwood (Western Michigan University), Joseph Charles Dagen (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Abstract: Each year, interactive technology becomes more and more advanced, offering more lifelike environments, immersive experiences, and realistic situations. Additionally, the videogame industry has over doubled in size in less than ten years, now rivaling the box office industry. However, technological advances have quickly outpaced our understanding of the effects of certain types of adult content on the game player. To date, the majority of the research on the topic was conducted before the games themselves were technologically advanced enough to draw meaningful conclusions; the few studies conducted in the last few years, while offering promising methodological advancements from previous work, still have several shortcomings, mostly in their choice of dependent measures. The purposes of the present investigation were to build off of the small research base related to effects of violent video games on behavior and physiology, as well as utilize several different types of dependent measures not used in other studies. Results demonstrated limited behavioral effects and no physiological or attitudinal difference between the group that played the nonviolent game, compared to the group that played the violent game. Implications of these findings, limitations, and suggestions for future research are discussed. |
|
An Evaluation of the Behaviorally Based Helmet Program in Middle Schools. |
RON VAN HOUTEN (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: The Behaviorally Based Helmet Program was evaluated at two middle schools with a history of helmet use enforcement and a third School with no background of helmet use enforcement using a multiple baseline across schools design. One of the two schools with a history of helmet enforcement also received the Behaviorally Helmet Program the previous year. Researchers scored helmet use and correct helmet use in the afternoon when students left school to ride home. Probe data were also collected in when students arrived at school in the morning, and some distance from the school in the afternoon to determine whether they took there helmets off. The treatment consisted of: 1. Group goal setting on helmet use; 2.) A short lecture on the importance of helmet use; 3.) a short DVD on how to correctly fit a helmet; 4.) peer helmet monitoring in the afternoon; 5.) Posted feedback on afternoon helmet use based on peer collected data; 6.) Shared reinforcement in the form of a party when peers for increased helmet use. Following the introduction of the treatment package afternoon helmet use increased from 82% to 98% at the school that received the program the previous year (baseline the previous year was about 50%) and from 52% to 95% at the second school which had not received the helmet program the previous year. The remaining school which only applied the Behaviorally Based Helmet Program without a history of enforcement showed an increase in helmet use from 14% to 45%. Correct helmet use was scored when the helmet was appropriately buckled, and level. Correct use increased from 64% to 80% and from to 37% to 78% at the schools with a history of helmet enforcement and from 9% to 40% at the school which did not have a history of helmet enforcement. The major reason that helmets were scored as worn incorrectly during baseline was that they were unbuckled. During treatment most were buckled but those scored as being worn incorrectly typically were not secured as tightly. These increases in helmet use were maintained after the program was terminated and in spot checks conducted some distance from the schools and transferred to the morning arrival. It is interesting to note that students were rarely ticketed for not wearing their helmets after the program was introduced at the two schools which had a policy of enforcement for non-helmet use. |
|
|
|
|
International Symposium - Correspondence Training: Educational and Recreational Applications |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
2:30 PM–3:50 PM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Michael J. Cameron (Simmons College) |
CE Instructor: Michael J. Cameron, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Correspondence training, also referred to as "say-do" instruction can be used for: improving academic performances, behavioral support, and teaching motor skills. The purpose of this symposium is to demonstrate how correspondence training was used in the classroom and community. Implications for educators will be discussed. |
|
Effects of Reinforcement History and Types of Verbalization on the Generalization of Say-Do Correspondence. |
EDHEN LAURA LIMA (West Virginia University), Josele Abreu-Rodrigues (Universidade de Brasilia) |
Abstract: This study analyzed the effects of reinforcement history (reinforcement dependent on correspondence, independent on correspondence and dependent on the absence of correspondence) and types of verbalizations emitted between ‘say’ and ‘do’ (of numbers and of ‘doing’) on the acquisition and generalization of say-do correspondence. Thirty-nine 3 to 5 year-old children were divided in four groups. The groups differed in terms of verbalizations emitted during the training, as well as percentage of reinforcer delivery dependent on the presence of correspondence. After correspondence training, generalization was tested with two different behaviors. The findings suggest that: (a) effects of reinforcement contingencies were affected by the type of verbalizations emitted between ‘say’ and ‘do’; (b) reinforcement of correspondence was effective only in the presence of verbalizations of ‘doing’; (c) reinforcement of non-correspondence was effective only when verbalizations of distracting stimuli (numbers) occurred, and (d) the functional role of ‘say’ was influenced by correspondence – reinforcer relations. |
|
The Use of Correspondence Training to Increase Compliance. |
KRISTOFER VAN HERP (Simmons College), Michael J. Cameron (Simmons College) |
Abstract: Problematic or socially inappropriate behaviors in individuals should be replaced with behaviors that are functionally equivalent, but socially appropriate. This study will shows that the use of discrimination training followed by correspondence and functional communication training can assist individuals in choosing to express their frustration in a socially appropriate and more successful manner. The participant in this study was a 7 year old boy, Wade, who attended a suburban public school in Massachusetts. In times of challenge for Wade, he would display “resistance” behaviors. Resistance behavior was displayed through a slouching body, vocal unresponsiveness, as well as aggressive behavior towards adults and his environment. We used discrimination training to self-identify in situations of frustration for him. This was followed up by correspondence training paired with functional communication training which taught Wade what to say and what to do when he identified his frustration. Frequency of the problem behavior, resistance, and the latency from the onset of resistance to the display of functional communicative responses was recorded. This training resulted in Wade's increased ability to appropriately communicate his difficulty in challenging situations to adults as well as decrease both his frequency and duration of resistance behavior episodes. |
|
The Effects of Correspondence Training on Exercise. |
ELISE COOKE (Simmons College) |
Abstract: Physical exercise is a cornerstone of a healthy lifestyle. Individuals who are in good health have more productive years and less medical expenses. Although as behavior analysts we are committed to examining socially significant issues, there is relatively little research on physical exercise in this field. The majority of the published behavior analytic research on exercise focuses on exercise as an antecedent, as part of a treatment package, or as contingent punishment. Few articles highlight exercise as the primary behavior targeted for change. This paper focuses on the use of correspondence training to change exercise behavior of typically developing adults. Inspired by the numerous sports psychology research articles relating to imagery, mental rehearsal, and visualization, we use a behavior analytic lens to examine measurable visual/verbal preparation and its effects on exercise performance. |
|
|
|
|
Expanding the Use of Functional Assessment: Three Case Examples of Effective Behavior Support Plans with Children Under Three During Typical Home Routines |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
2:30 PM–3:50 PM |
Baker |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Michelle A. Duda (University of South Florida) |
Discussant: Glen Dunlap (University of South Florida) |
CE Instructor: Michelle A. Duda, Ph.D. |
Abstract: In recent years, researchers have employed strategies associated with positive behavior support to develop interventions that focus on the reduction of challenging behavior. PBS and the process of functional behavioral assessment offer an empirically sound approach to intervening with the problem behaviors of children and adults with disabilities (Lucyshyn et al., 2002). Although there is great confidence from researchers in the importance of this approach for children, very little research has been conducted with children younger than three years. Three case studies will be presented that demonstrate the completion of an FBA and comprehensive PBS support plan. Following assessment, hypotheses were formulated and support plan strategies developed. The components generated included changes to parent interactions, child participation, and environmental modifications. All components were implemented by each childs mother, and were effective in reducing challenging behavior and increasing child engagement during typical home routines. A multiple baseline design was utilized for each study and illustrates changes in behavior. These investigations broaden the scope and utility of conducting functional assessment and provides evidence of the expanded impact of behavior analytic principles with a population not widely represented. |
|
An Illustrative Case Example of a Behavior Support Plan for A Two-Year-Old Child Across Three Home Routines. |
SHELLEY CLARKE (University of South Florida), Lise Fox (University of South Florida), Glen Dunlap (University of South Florida), Stephanie Johnston (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: The current study demonstrates the completion of an FBA within a PBS support plan for a twenty-four-month-old boy who exhibited a speech delay, and engaged in challenging behavior. Following assessment, hypotheses were formulated and support plan strategies developed. The components generated included changes to parent interactions, child participation, and environmental modifications. All components were implemented by the child’s mother, and were effective in reducing challenging behavior and increasing child engagement during three typical home routines. A multiple baseline design illustrates changes in behavior. This investigation broadens the scope and utility of conducting functional assessment and provides evidence of the expanded impact of behavior analytic principles with a population not widely represented. Data-based; video vignettes will be shared. |
|
Functional Communication Training with Toddlers in Home Environments. |
GLEN DUNLAP (University of South Florida), Lise Fox (University of South Florida), Tera Ester (University of South Florida), Sherri L. Langhans (Infinite Possibilities in Behavior Support, LLC) |
Abstract: This study was conducted to study the effects of functional communication training when used by mothers to address the serious challenging behaviors of toddlers. Multiple baseline (across home routines) designs were used with two mother-child dyads. The data showed that the mothers used the procedures correctly, and that the interventions produced reductions in the children’s challenging behaviors and increases in their use of communicative replacement skills. Social validity data supported the clarity of the effects and indicated that the procedures were viewed by the mothers as feasible and as having acceptable contextual fit. The results are discussed in relation to the importance of resolving challenging behaviors early in a child’s life, and the need for additional research on effective strategies that can be used by typical intervention agents in typical settings. Data-based. |
|
Evaluating Multi-Component Behavior Support Plans in the Home Environment of a Preschool-Aged Sibling Set. |
MICHELLE A. DUDA (University of South Florida), Lise Fox (University of South Florida), Shelley Clarke (University of South Florida), Glen Dunlap (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: This case study involved a family whose three children demonstrated challenging behavior (two fraternal twin 30 month-old boys, a 5 year-old girl). An individualized positive behavior support plan was developed and implemented by natural intervention agents (e.g., mother, older sister) across four routines within the home environment (e.g., playtime, clean up, dinner). A multiple baseline design was used to demonstrate reductions in challenging behavior, reductions in composite challenging behavior, and increases in engagement across both children and routines. In addition, procedural fidelity data document the implementation of plan components by the parent. Data-based; video vignettes will be shared. |
|
|
|
|
Increasing Advanced Interpersonal Skills in Children with Autism |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
2:30 PM–3:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
Discussant: Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
CE Instructor: Gerald E. Harris, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Early behavioral intervention has often demonstrated the ability to instill or increase basic social and interpersonal skills in children with autism. However, there remain many more advanced skill areas where programming is less evolved. This symposium presents data based procedures for ameliorating deficits in stranger safety, assertiveness and joint attention skills. These skill areas are often more challenging to develop than basic language, academic, and self-help behaviors. As behavioral interventions become more widespread and effective, increased numbers of children need assistance with the more subtle social skills. The first presentation reports on a program designed to improve childrens ability to protect themselves in high risk situations in the community. Child abduction is a real threat in todays world, and previous research has shown that children with autism are vulnerable. The second presentation describes an intervention to help children protect themselves from less severe mistreatment by peers in their environment. Being assertive is a positive social skill, and may also reduce resorting to aggressive behavior for self protection. The third presentation tells about a behavioral intervention to increase joint attention in children with autism, thus allowing the shared awareness and experience that makes social interaction so rewarding. |
|
Stranger Safety Training for Children with Autism. |
FRANK B. CARLE (Texas Young Autism Project), Sanjuanita Pedraza (Texas Young Autism Project), Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
Abstract: Current literature suggests that children with autism are more susceptible to lures provided by strangers than typical developing children. The current study provided behavioral intervention to participants who displayed susceptibility to lures presented by a stranger. The intervention consisted of 3 phases. Phase 1: learning to discriminate between familiar people (i.e., family members) versus unfamiliar people (i.e., strangers). The child was taught to receptively and expressively label pictures either by the familiar person’s name, or as a “stranger.” Phase 2: a video in which a stranger presented various types of lures, the video was immediately paused and the child was taught the correct verbal response (stating “No!”) and motor response (e.g., running away). The child moved to Phase 3 contingent upon meeting the mastery criteria (90%) for Phase 2. Phase 3:Testing the children in the natural environment to observe if the safety skills taught in phases 1 and 2 maintained and generalized. Interobserver agreement for the dependent variables of verbal and motor response averaged 90% across sessions. The results of this study demonstrate that children with autism can emit correct verbal and motor responses in a risky situation when Behavioral Skills Training (BST) is imposed. |
|
A Comparison of Two Different Approaches for Teaching Assertiveness to Young Children with Autism. |
LAUREN HARRINGTON (Texas Young Autism Project), Maureen Childs (Texas Young Autism Project), Maritza Cervantes (Texas Young Autism Project), Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
Abstract: Previous research has shown differential effects for various procedures used to teach assertiveness to children with autism. The present study used a multiple baseline design to compare two procedures for teaching assertiveness. The dependant variable for this study was assertiveness, defined as the ability to verbally and physically maintain possession of a preferred item. Four children participating in a discrete trial ABA program were randomly assigned to one of two conditions; each consisted of a well-established behavioral method for teaching assertiveness. The first method, a role-play approach, taught children using confederates. The second method shaped assertiveness using sequencing cards. After five months of implementing the assertiveness training, each child was placed in an experimental analog scenario to elicit learned assertiveness skills. Tests to evaluate maintenance of these skills were administered approximately two weeks later. The children were then placed in a novel scenario to determine if learned assertiveness skills generalized. A follow-up assessment was conducted six weeks after treatment was discontinued to further assess skill maintenance and generalization. Results suggest that although the role-play approach yielded faster skill acquisition, the sequencing card approach lead to broader generalization. Inter-observer agreement was found to be above 80% for all phases. |
|
A Behavior Analytic Intervention and Programmed Generalization of Joint Attention Skills in Children with Autism. |
TREA DRAKE (Texas Young Autism Project), Alexis Hyde-Washmon (Texas Young Autism Project), Jennifer Shen (Texas Young Autism Project), Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
Abstract: Joint attention has been identified as an essential element of a functional social repertoire. Deficits in joint attention often serve as discriminative behavioral markers in children with autism. This study evaluates a treatment protocol developed by the Texas Young Autism Project designed to mitigate the joint attention deficits of children with autism. Three children from the project’s Day Treatment Center participated in the study. Each child’s ability to respond to the joint attention bids of others and to initiate joint attention exchanges was assessed utilizing components of the Early Social Communication Scale (ESCS) and natural environment observations of parent and peer interactions. The treatment protocol emphasized generalization of the skills to the child’s home environment. All participants reached mastery criterion in both responding to the joint attention bids of others and initiating joint attention. Assessment of joint attention skills in the natural environment revealed that the skills generalized following programmed natural environment training. Inter-observer agreement was evaluated for 30% of the sessions revealing an average agreement of 95%. |
|
|
|
|
Variables Influencing Response Allocation in the Treatment of Behavior Disorders |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
2:30 PM–3:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Stephanie M. Peterson (Idaho State University) |
CE Instructor: Stephanie M. Peterson, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium will provide four presentations that consist of unique applications of concurrent schedules of reinforcement to the treatment of problem behavior. Two of the presentations focus on prevention of problem behavior, while the other two focus on teaching alternative behaviors (mands) and biasing responding in favor of them. The first presentation evaluates the effects of preferred and nonpreferred toys during demand conditions. Results showed that the participants consistently allocated their time to demanding tasks and displayed little problem behavior when preferred toys were present. The second presentation provides a summary of a 4-experiment study in which the authors identified alternative stimulation that was substitutable for problem behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement. Providing alternative stimulation reduced problem behavior when both were concurrently available. The third presentation demonstrates how different qualities and durations of reinforcement can be manipulated to bias choice responding in favor of work requests, as compared to break requests and problem behavior, within functional communication training packages. The final presentation demonstrates that a resurgence of problem behavior may occur during FCT when newly taught alternative behaviors are placed on extinction or lean schedules of intermittent reinforcement; thus, these alternative behaviors may no longer compete effectively with problem behavior. |
|
An Evaluation of Competition Between Positive and Negative Reifnorcement During a Choice Assessment. |
JAY W. HARDING (University of Iowa), David P. Wacker (University of Iowa), Wendy K. Berg (University of Iowa), Kelly M. Schieltz (University of Iowa) |
Abstract: We evaluated time allocation, problem behavior, and task completion during a choice assessment that manipulated the presence of preferred and non-preferred toys during demand conditions. The participants were 2 preschool-aged boys with developmental delays who displayed severe problem behavior. All procedures were conducted in the children’s homes with their mothers serving as therapists. Multielement, concurrent schedules and reversal designs were used to evaluate assessment results. Inter-rater agreement was assessed across 30% of sessions and averaged 97%. During Phase 1, a preference assessment identified highly preferred and less preferred toys. During Phase 2, functional analyses showed that problem behavior was maintained by both positive and negative reinforcement. In Phase 3, we conducted a choice assessment with two conditions. In Condition 1, the participants had a choice between a demand option with less preferred toys or playing with the same toys alone. In Condition 2, the choice was between demands with highly preferred toys or playing with a less preferred toy alone. Results showed that both children allocated their time primarily to the demand option and displayed relatively low levels of problem behavior and high levels of task completion when tasks involved preferred toys. |
|
Further Evaluation of Methods to Identify Matched Stimulation. |
JOHN T. RAPP (St. Cloud State University) |
Abstract: The effects of alternative stimulation on the vocalizing of two individuals were evaluated in a series of experiments. Experiment 1 showed that the vocalizing of both participants persisted in the absence of social consequences, but decreased markedly during noncontingent access to music. Experiment 2 showed that one participant manipulated toys that did and did not produce audio stimulation; however, only sound-producing toys (contingent audio stimulation) decreased vocalizing. For the other participant, sound-producing toys, alone, did not decrease vocalizing and paradoxically increased vocalizing when presented with music. Experiment 3 showed that the vocalizing of both participants remained below pre-intervention levels following the removal of audio stimulation and that one participant’s vocalizing increased following the removal of contingent reprimands. These patterns suggest that audio stimulation functioned as an abolishing operation for vocalizing and reprimands functioned as an establishing operation for vocalizing. Finally, Experiment 4 showed that a participant preferred a toy that produced contingent audio stimulation over an identical toy that did not generate audio stimulation. Collectively, the four experiments provide a method for identifying alternative stimulation that may be substitutable for automatically reinforced behavior. |
|
"I Choose Work:" Increasing Work Choices Using Concurrent Schedules of Reinforcmeent Within Functional Communication Training Packages. |
RENEE KOEHLER VAN NORMAN (University of Nevada, Las Vegas), Stephanie M. Peterson (Idaho State University), Nancy A. Neef (The Ohio State University), Traci M. Cihon (The Ohio State University) |
Abstract: Although a viable treatment option for escape-maintained problem behavior, functional communication training treatment packages are not without limitations. One such limitation with FCT is an initial increase in break requests, resulting in continuous access to reinforcement (Marcus & Vollmer, 1995). An additional limitation may surface in the form of extinction bursts when implementers attempt to gradually introduce additional task demands over time (also known as stimulus or demand fading; e.g., Zarcone, Iwata, Smith, Mazaleski, & Lerman, 1994). This study investigated the effects of combining two interventions (FCT and DRA with increasing work requirements) within a 3-choice scenario in an attempt to address these limitations. Concurrent schedules of reinforcement with differing levels of quality and duration were applied to each response alternative: mands for break, mands for work, and problem behavior. Then, the effects of systematically increased demands were evaluated while the concurrent schedules of reinforcement remained in place. The results will be discussed in relation to the matching law and choice making. |
|
An Applied Evaluation of Resurgence: Functional Communication Training (FCT) and Treatment Relapse. |
VALERIE M. VOLKERT (Louisiana State University), Nathan Call (Louisiana State University), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston, Clear Lake), Nicole M. Trosclair-Lasserre (Louisiana State University) |
Abstract: Extinction is a very important component of functional communication training (FCT). Thus, the potential undesirable effects of extinction must be considered before this type of treatment is implemented. Resurgence, the recurrence of previously reinforced behavior when another behavior is placed on extinction, is a possible undesirable effect of extinction. Resurgence may account for some instances of treatment relapse in situations where problem behavior recovers following implementation of extinction-based treatments such as FCT. Despite the potential relevance of resurgence to understanding why problem behavior may re-emerge, few applied studies have examined resurgence effects. The current study attempted to determine whether resurgence of problem behavior occurred when a newly trained alternative behavior was placed on extinction or contacted a thin schedule of reinforcement and if the resurgence effect could be repeated within an individual. The present investigation also attempted to replicate and extend the results of Experiments 2 and 4 in Lieving and Lattal (2003) by examining resurgence with human participants who engage in aberrant behavior. Results showed that, in some cases problem behavior recovered when the alternative behavior was placed on extinction or intermittent schedules of reinforcement. Interoberserver agreement coefficients exceeded 80% or 90% for all participants. |
|
|
|
|
International Symposium - Dynamic and Complex Systems in Behavior Analysis and Development: Theory & Application |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Singapore |
Area: DEV; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Gary D. Novak (California State University, Stanislaus) |
CE Instructor: Gary D. Novak, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Behavioral development involves constant changes in individuals embedded in complex systems. Dynamic systems theory has been applied to many scientific fields, including behavior analysis and developmental psychology, but to a large extent there has been a total separation of these two fields. This symposium will begin by describing how dynamic systems or chaos theory can be useful in behavior analysis. Then, connecting complexity theory with behavior analysis it will then provide a basis for relating behavior analysis. Finally, a behavioral systems approach will be applied to real-world problems of children. |
|
Using Dynamical Systems to Explore Variability in Schedules of Reinforcement. |
MARK S. HOYERT (Indiana University Northwest) |
Abstract: One of the classic problems in behavior analysis involves the examination of moment to moment variability in schedules of reinforcement. Some researchers have suggested that this variability is the product of a system of interacting variables. Other researchers have suggested that the variability is the result of stochastic inputs. Similar questions have been addressed recently by researchers in nonlinear dynamics. A number of techniques have been developed that are useful in distinguishing between stochastic and deterministic system. None of the procedures is sufficient to provide proof of the underlying character of the system, but a series of analyses used simultaneously may provide convincing multiple converging evidence. In this paper, I explored the utility of three methods: a) estimation of the correlation dimension, b) calculation of the fractal dimension, and c) attractor reconstruction for examining three types of data. a) Empirical data collected from four pigeons responding to a Fixed-Interval schedule of reinforcement. b) Theoretical data generated from a system of deterministic equations that model Fixed- Interval performance. c) Theoretical data generated to produce random performance. The techniques were able to identify correctly identify theoretically generated stochastic and deterministic output. They suggest that pigeon performance is deterministic. |
|
Behavior Analysis and Complexity Theory: a Possible Unified Selectionist Enterprise? |
INGUNN SANDAKER (Akershus University College) |
Abstract: Complexity theory is being applied to many fields concerned with multiply determined, continuous, and nonlinear changes among its constituents. Just as other scientific fields have been enhanced by the incorporation of complexity theory principles, behavior analysis, would be enhanced by looking at behavioral change from the viewpoint of complex systems. The special relevance to longer run development will be noted. |
|
Dynamic Systems Principles in Child Development: Changes in Complex Behavioral Systems. |
GARY D. NOVAK (California State University, Stanislaus) |
Abstract: Novak and Pelaez (Novak, 1996, Novak & Pelaez, 2003) have presented an approach to development that combines behavior analysis with dynamic systems principles. Called, a Behavioral Systems Approach, it adds many concepts from chaos theory to a contextualistic behavior analytic view of development. This paper will present this approach to the study of child development. It will explain concepts such as multiple determination, equifinality, nonlinearity, phase shifts versus stages, control parameters, coalescent organization versus self-organization, behavioral momentum, and behavioral cusps, and how these relate to the study of child development. |
|
A Critique of Stage theories of Development: Optimizing Treatment with b\Behavioral Systems Approaches. |
MARTHA PELAEZ (Florida International University), Victoria Minette (Florida International University) |
Abstract: The scientific study of human development has the ultimate goal of optimizing humanbehavior, which can be accomplished through the creation of social service (behavior-analytic) programs. The programs have the mission of prevention, intervention, and treatment for individuals and society. Theories of human development have provided guidelines for program development but not always effectively. Stage theories (Freud, Erikson, Piaget) are linear and tend to be descriptive rather than explanatory. The behavioral systems approach outlined in this prevention incorporates some dynamic principles and places emphasis in nonlinear reciprocal interaction processes between behavior and environment. The approach emphasizes the multiple influences of human interactions within a contextualistic, and not mechanistic, world view. A critical and comparative analysis of stage theories is presented while illustrating how dynamical systems theories offer a more functional, comprehensive, and effective guideline for programs dealing with significant social problems such as adolescent suicide and substance abuse. |
|
|
|
|
Promoting and Exporting ABA Values Along With Our Technology |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: CSE/TPC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College) |
CE Instructor: Maria R. Ruiz, Ph.D. |
Panelists: HENRY S. PENNYPACKER (University of Florida), KENT JOHNSON (Morningside Academy), RICHARD M. FOXX (Pennsylvania State University) |
Abstract: The best case scenario for most behavior analysts would be the successful promotion and exportation of our values and technology with no sacrifice of our science. One approach to be discussed focuses on marketing the benefits of our technology without attempting to market our world view simultaneously. Evidence for the quality of our products and services is found in the direct measures of behavior that are the foundation of our science. Consumers frequently recognize the value of this and wonder why it is absent in other services they receive. One of our basic values is thus transmitted. Behavioral educational methods which rely on direct measurement strategies have been amongst the most important technological contributions of our field. We will present a set of rights and responsibilities related to education developed by an ABA Task Force to illustrate the values that underlie promoting and delivering these technologies. Key to our success and to the integrity of our values, goals and outcomes is the correspondence between what we say we should do and what we actually do. Finally the panelists will make specific recommendations which include 1) examining other models, such as Positive Behavioral Supports, that have a track record of exportation and promotion 2) strongly supporting behavior analytical entrepreneurial efforts 3) value highly the study and achievement of maintenance and generalization effects 4) recognize that much of the elegant research published in JABA is the experimental rather than applied analysis of human behavior; and 5) reinforce and promote widespread dissemination of our technology and values by creating and supporting two new publications. |
HENRY S. PENNYPACKER (University of Florida) |
Dr. Henry S. Pennypacker, Professor Emeritus at the University of Florida, has been a major figure in behavior analysis through his contributions in research, teaching, and service. He has made significant contributions to instructional design through his work in precision teaching and his book (with Jim Johnston), "Strategies and Tactics in Behavioral Research", now in its second edition, has become a classic and essential reference on methodology in behavior analysis. Many of his students have become major figures themselves, especially in applied behavior analysis. He helped to establish Florida as a model for behavior-based treatment in the area of developmental disabilities. He is perhaps best known both within and outside the field as the developer of methods and devices for effective training of self-examination for breast cancer and founded a company (Mammatech) to further this potentially life-saving effort. This work has been widely recognized in the behavioral medicine and cancer prevention communities. He served as ABA President in 1986-87 and has been a very active Trustee of the Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies. |
KENT JOHNSON (Morningside Academy) |
Dr. Kent Johnson graduated from Georgetown University and received his M.S. and Ph.D. in psychology from the University of Massachusetts in Amherst. Dr. Johnson founded Morningside Academy, in Seattle, Washington, in 1980, and currently serves as its Executive Director. Morningside is a laboratory school for elementary and middle school children and youth. Morningside investigates effective curriculum materials and teaching methods, and has provided training and consulting in instruction to over 90 schools and agencies throughout the USA and Canada since 1991. Dr. Johnson has published several seminal papers about research-based curriculum and teaching methods. Most recently he published a book, “The Morningside Model of Generative Instruction: What It Means to Leave No Child Behind,” with Dr. Elizabeth Street (2004, Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies). Dr. Johnson is also a co-founder of Headsprout, Inc., a Seattle-based company funded by investors to develop web-based, interactive, cartoon-driven instructional programs. Prior to founding Morningside, Dr. Johnson was professor at Central Washington University, director of staff training at the Fernald School in Massachusetts, and instructional designer at Northeastern University in Boston |
RICHARD M. FOXX (Pennsylvania State University) |
Dr. Richard M. Foxx is a Professor of Psychology at Penn State Harrisburg. He is a Clinical Adjunct Professor of Pediatrics at the College of Medicine of the Pennsylvania State University. Dr. Foxx has written seven books. He has written over 130 scientific articles and has made 13 training films on the use of behavioral principles. He has given over 1500 talks and workshops. Dr. Foxx is an internationally recognized expert in treating behavioral problems. He has lectured in 10 foreign countries and 47 states throughout the United States. He is the editor of the journal, Behavioral Interventions. He was the co-editor-in-chief of Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, is on the editorial board of eight scientific journals and is the consulting editor for the Research Press Special Education Series. Dr. Foxx is a fellow in Divisions 12, 25, 33, 37, and 53 of the American Psychological Association, as well as a Fellow in the American Psychological Society and the American Association on Mental Retardation. He was the President of the Association for Behavior Analysis. Dr. Foxx was President of the Division of Mental Retardation and Developmental Disabilities of the American Psychological Association. He has served as an expert witness in a number of court cases involving the developmentally disabled including Youngberg vs. Romeo which was heard by the U.S. Supreme Court. One of his books, Toilet Training in Less Than a Day, has sold over two million copies and has been translated into seven languages, and one of his training films, "Harry" (the treatment of a self-abusive man), has won numerous cinematic awards. |
|
|
|
|
Recent Research on Assessment in OBM |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Vancouver |
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: James W. Jackson (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale) |
CE Instructor: David A. Wilder, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Three papers on assessment in OBM will be presented. |
|
The Accuracy of Managerial Prediction of Preference Among Employees. |
KRISTEN ROST (Florida Institute of Technology), David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology), Megan McMahon (Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: We asked managers to predict items they thought their employees would prefer to earn as part of a performance improvement plan. Next, we asked employees what they would prefer to earn. The managerial predictions were then compared to employee report. |
|
Keeping an Uphill Edge: Using the PDC and PIC/NIC Analysis to Identify and Manage Cleaning Behaviors at a Ski Shop. |
JOSHUA LIVESEY (Appalachian State University), Jessica Doll (Appalachian State University), Timothy D. Ludwig (Appalachian State University) |
Abstract: Using Austin’s (1996) PDC we identified 7 cleaning behaviors that were deficient in employees of a local ski shop. Following a 4-week baseline, the 7 cleaning behaviors were monitored and 5 were targeted for an ABC design intervention. A PIC/NIC Analysis (Daniels & Daniels, 2004) suggested the following intervention tactics: a task clarification session, a performance checklist, publicly posted graphic feedback, and private written feedback. After the first phase of the intervention, cleaning behaviors increased 53%, and the second phase of intervention caused an additional 12% increase. In addition, the results suggested response generalization to the 2 cleaning behaviors not targeted for intervention. |
|
Mobile Computing Solutions for Organizational Behavioral Management Applications: Performance Checklists. |
JAMES W. JACKSON (Southern Illinois University, Carbondale), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: Recent developments in computer technology and the increasing affordability of devices using that technology have many implications for the field of behavior analysis. Combining the utility of any device running the Windows CE operating system and Microsoft Visual Basic will allow anyone with basic computer skills to design and create custom data collection system applications that are portable and functional. The current presentation describes the development of simple technological solutions for the collection of data in organizational behavior management applications using the Pocket PC and Microsoft Visual Basic. The current presentation describes the methods necessary to create performance checklists that can be customized based on the specific job performance skills targeted, individual subject performance, or group performance. |
|
|
|
|
TeachTown: A Comprehensive Computer-Assisted ABA Treatment Program for Children with Autism |
Saturday, May 27, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Regency VII |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Christina Whalen (TeachTown) |
Discussant: Ilene S. Schwartz (University of Washington) |
CE Instructor: Christina Whalen, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The TeachTown program is based on best-practices from ABA, education, and developmental psychology. The software includes a comprehensive curriculum for children with autism and teaches receptive language, social understanding, self-help, attention, memory, auditory processing, and early academic skills. The software also includes a complete data tracking system which provides the adult with information about the childs progress including prompts, errors, correct responses, etc. In addition, the software includes an innovative communication system where adults can send messages or write session notes. Multiple facilitators can access the program from various locations so that the child can play anywhere without losing any data. The software program also includes a large library of non-computer supplementary activities (based on PRT and other naturalistic programs) which can be printed out and used by any adult (i.e. does not require a trained therapist). A demonstration of the software along with results from 3 research studies will be presented. The potential for using TeachTown and other computer-assisted programs will be discussed. |
|
Facilitating Language and Social Behaviors Using the TeachTown Program. |
CHRISTINA WHALEN (TeachTown), Lars H. Liden (TeachTown), Brooke Ingersoll (Lewis & Clark College), Eric Dallaire (TeachTown), Sven Liden (TeachTown) |
Abstract: Children with autism spectrum disorders often respond well to treatment programs that incorporate visual learning including pictures and videos. Recently, researchers have begun to study the effects of using computers to teach children with autism and have demonstrated some effectiveness. One of the biggest criticisms of using computers with this population is that it may impede two of the most critical learning areas for children with autism – language and social interaction. In a recent study, language and social behaviors of 4 children with autism and 4 children with other developmental disorders were measured in play and computer sessions with their parents. For the children with autism, inappropriate language and social behaviors decreased and appropriate language and social behaviors increased while on the computer compared to play sessions with the parent. A demonstration of the software will be presented along with research data. |
|
Comparing Teacher-Implemented Discrete Trials to Teach Town: Rate of Acquisition and Generalization. |
NANCY ROSENBERG (University of Washington), Bonnie J. McBride (University of Washington), Ilene S. Schwartz (University of Washington) |
Abstract: Four young children with ASD participated in this intervention. The purpose of this intervention was to compare the rate of acquisition and generalization of receptive vocabulary items taught using teacher-implemented discrete trials and a computer-generated discrete-trial program (i.e., Teach Town). The primary research questions were: (a) which intervention resulted in children learning the vocabulary items more quickly, (b) which intervention resulted in more generalization, and (c) during which intervention did children display more positive affect and behavior. A parallel treatment design was used to answer these questions. Results will be discussed in terms of trials to acquisition and percent of generalized responding. Social validity data will also be presented. |
|
Incorporating TeachTown into a Comprehensive Behavior Analytic Program for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders. |
ELIZABETH J. WYMAN (ASTAR Center), Susan K. Malmquist (ASTAR Center) |
Abstract: Empirical evidence supports the need for 25-40 hours per week of intensive behavioral intervention, for children with autism, most effectively begun at the age of diagnosis. Families often struggle with locating direct service providers to supply these hours, wait lists with ABA providers, and funding these services. Providing this intense number of behavioral therapy hours is a challenge. The utilization of a computer software program to provide discrete trials or to supplement an existing therapy program is one option for families. However there are some pre-requisite skills that must be in place before the computer software can be used as an effective teaching tool (e.g. the ability to remain seated in a chair, isolated pointing, visual scanning, attending). We examined and compared the skills required to utilize the TeachTown software effectively with children who demonstrated the basic prerequisite skills and those who demonstrated few or none. An analysis of these skills as well as the children’s skill acquisition and generalization rates were also considered and analyzed. |
|
|
|
|
Ethics and Values in Behavior Analysis: Do Our Consumers Know What they Are? Do We? |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: CSE; Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Jon S. Bailey, Ph.D. |
Chair: Janet Ellis (University of North Texas) |
JON S. BAILEY (Behavior Management Consultants, Florida State University, and Florida Association for Behavior Analysis) |
Dr. Jon S. Bailey worked with Jack Michael, Lee Meyerson, and Mont Wolf as a graduate student at Arizona State University and the University of Kansas where he received his PhD in 1970. In 2005 he received the SABA Award for Distinguished Service to Behavior Analysis. Jon Bailey's research has spanned a wide range of topics over his 35-years at Florida State University. He has worked in developmental disabilities, was a pioneer in behavioral community psychology and most recently has published and trained students in performance management. In the last six years he has teamed up with his co-author Mary R. Burch to produce a similarly wide range of books on dog training (How Dogs Learn), single-subject design (Research Methods for Applied Behavior Analysis), and most recently he has turned his attention to ethics (Ethics for Behavior Analysts). In his address to day he will discuss the relationship between ethics and values |
Abstract: Behavior analysts who are Board Certified now have Guidelines for Responsible Conduct that clearly define our ethical responsibilities to our clients, students, colleagues, society, and to the field of behavior analysis itself.Remaining to be codified, however, are a set of values statements that represent the best our field has to offer those individuals we serve. Often, the services we provide involve life-saving behavioral procedures. Because we are now in constant competition with other professions who work hard to sell their "values" (almost in lieu of an effective technology of behavior change), I believe it is critical that we address our own values. In a recent survey of leaders in ABA we found that the question, "What values are important for our field?" yielded a diverse range of responses from "empiricism" to "logic" to "induction" and "save the world through BF Skinner" none of which are likely to appeal to consumers.In this presentation I will attempt to offer some guidelines for the development of a set of values statements for behavior analysis that will appeal to advocates and consumers in autism, education, rehabilitation, and community treatment. |
|
|
|
|
Child Clinical Applications of Behavior Analysis |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Kennesaw |
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Teresa A. Rodgers (Agency for Persons with Disabilities) |
CE Instructor: Jeannie A. Golden, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Children and adolescents can be treated effectively using functional behavioral assessment and behavioral interventions for social, emotional and medical difficulties in a variety of settings. These settings include: a hospital treating children for chronic or terminal illnesses, a permanent residence with a loving family, a group home specifically designed to treat adolescents with multiple diagnoses, and a regular public school. The speakers in this symposium will present research-based approaches from the behavioral literature, as well as techniques they have used in clinical case studies, that effectively deal with numerous social, emotional and medical difficulties in children. Diagnoses that have been given to the children in these case studies include: Cancer, Diabetes, Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder, Oppositional Defiant Disorder, Conduct Disorder, Moderate Mental Retardation, Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder, Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder, Motor Stereotypy, Depression, Psychosis, Learning Disability, School Phobia with Panic Attacks and Social Anxiety Disorder. In each of the case studies discussed, these children either: were able to be receive necessary medical treatments that were previously refused, had one or more of their diagnostic labels removed or were able to be served in a typical setting after previously being removed due to their behavioral, social and emotional difficulties. |
|
Using Functional Behavioral Assessment to Identify Appropriate Treatment Strategies for Children in Hospital Settings. |
LYNN A. OLSON PAGE (Regent University) |
Abstract: Children with chronic and acute medical conditions face a number of challenges, both medically and psychologically. Pediatric psychologists are often to assist with issues that arise during hospitalization. Concerns about patient functioning may revolve around the physical consequences of emotional or behavioral distress, emotional or behavioral symptoms resulting from the diagnosis, or psychological trauma (Kush & Campo, 1998). Often these difficulties require an individualized, problem-solving approach to address difficulties quickly. A functional behavioral assessment approach represents a feasible and effective means of addressing problems within the hospital setting, but there is a paucity of research documenting the use of functional behavioral assessment in the acute hospital setting. Three case examples are used to provide a model of functional behavioral assessment in the hospital setting to improve coping, increase exercise and physical activity, and decrease distress to a medical procedure. |
|
Using Applied Behavior Analysis & Cognitive Behavioral Methods to Promote Long-Term Emotional & Moral Development in a Child with Attachment Problems. |
JEANNIE A. GOLDEN (East Carolina University) |
Abstract: A five-and-a-half-year-old girl with diagnoses of ADHD, Depression & Psychoses was placed in foster care after having been removed from her biological home due to abuse and neglect, two other foster homes and several day care settings. The foster mother was a behavioral psychologist who used several behavioral interventions including: positive reinforcement, tokens, role-playing, feedback, coordinating of all adult caregivers, and consistent follow-through. The child was taken off of all medications within three weeks, was adopted two-and-a-half years later, and is currently twelve-and-a-half years old and in a regular seventh-grade class. The child has, however, experienced some attachment problems and receives ongoing treatment in order to promote emotional and moral development. |
|
Using Applied Behavior Analysis to Treat School Phobia with Panic Attacks & Social Anxiety Disorder: Two & Three Year Follow-Up. |
ADAM A. SPENCER (East Carolina University), Troy Roberts (East Carolina University), Jeannie A. Golden (East Carolina University) |
Abstract: A twelve-year-old boy who appeared to have been the victim of a traumatic event developed school phobia and was being home-schooled one hour a week due to his school avoidance. When attempting to return to school, he was told by the principal to return for a full day or he would be expelled from school. Working with another school principal who was willing to try a more gradual approach, the behavioral consultant was able to use systematic desensitization, shaping, token reinforcement, role playing, and feedback to return the child to full days at school. Comparison of several treatments from the research literature will be discussed, as well as the use of functional behavioral assessment to understand school avoidance. |
|
Managing the Behavior of Elementary School Children with Various Behavioral & Learning Problems. |
BRYAN CRISP (East Carolina University), Jeannie A. Golden (East Carolina University) |
Abstract: Differential reinforcement has been demonstrated to be an effective strategy to reduce or eliminate behavior without the presentation of a punishing stimulus. The purpose of this study was to decrease the out of seat behavior of students in a general education elementary classroom. Data for the reduction of out of seat behavior of three elementary students is presented. Problems associated with the use of differential reinforcement in the general education classroom are discussed. Additionally, a training tape in the implementation of differential reinforcement procedures in a class of students with severe behavior problems and learning difficulties will be shown and discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Recent Research in the Analysis and Treatment of Trichotillomania |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Baker |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University) |
CE Instructor: Raymond G. Miltenberger, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium includes four papers describing recent research on trichotillomania (chronic hair pulling) with adults and children and represents the most recent behavior analysis research in this area. The first paper describes a treatment study evaluating habit reversal and adjunct treatments for hair pulling by adults. The second study describes factors, identified from a descriptive functional assessment, that are functionally related to hair pulling by adults and that may predict treatment success and relapse. The third study reports the types of comorbid mental health conditions experienced by children diagnosed with trichotillomania seen at a specialty clinic for children with chronic hair pulling. The fourth study evaluates the utility of different self-monitoring methods for chronic hair pulling by children. |
|
Analysis of Habit Reversal and Adjunct Treatments in the Treatment of Trichotillomania. |
CANDICE JOSTAD (Western Michigan University), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Amanda Bosch (North Dakota State University), Peter J. Knudson (North Dakota State University), Amy Mackner (North Dakota State University) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of habit reversal for treatment of chronic hair pulling in adults and to evaluate adjunct treatments if habit reversal was not entirely effective. Six women participated. We measured the number of hairs pulled daily through participant self-monitoring and the damage to the affected area through a rating scale of hair loss. Results showed that hair pulling was greatly diminished to near zero for three participants with habit reversal consisting of awareness training, competing response training, and social support. Adjunct treatments, consisting of relaxation training, a behavioral contract, and response prevention procedures, were needed for 3 participants. We discuss the need for individualized treatment planning when habit reversal is not effective. |
|
Factors Contributing to Hair Pulling, Treatment Effectiveness, and Relapse. |
PETER J. KNUDSON (North Dakota State University), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Amanda Bosch (North Dakota State University), Candice Jostad (Western Michigan University), Amy Mackner (North Dakota State University) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to identify the antecedents and consequences functionally related to hair pulling and to discuss factors related to the effectiveness of treatment and relapse. We collected functional assessment information via interview for 10 individuals who engage in chronic hair pulling. The antecedents consist of negative emotional experiences, stress or tension, boredom, lack of activity, and being alone, with all participants’ experiences being slightly different. The self-reported consequences are consistent with an automatic negative reinforcement function for the behavior (relief from negative emotions, tension, or unpleasant sensations). Factors related to the effectiveness of treatment and relapse, identified for 6 individuals receiving habit reversal treatment, include the presence of a social support person, compliance with the treatment procedures, and stressful events or negative life experiences (e.g., marital conflict). The implications of these factors for successful treatment are discussed. |
|
Children and Trichotillomania: Behavioral Problems and Comorbid Concerns. |
CHRIS A. FLESSNER (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Christine A. Conelea (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Michael B. Himle (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Andrew Busch (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Chad Wetterneck (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee) |
Abstract: This paper provides an overview of behavioral problems and comorbid mental health concerns found in children diagnosed with Trichotillomania (TTM). Participants include children assessed as part of the third author’s Tic Disorder and Trichotillomania Specialty Clinic or children assessed as part of ongoing research at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee’s department of psychology. Each child, the child’s parent(s), and the child’s teacher completed several self-report forms, while the child and child’s parent(s) also completed a clinical interview. Results indicated that children diagnosed with TTM may display average to above average intelligence, and may experience increased levels of anxiety, somatic symptoms, and may be increasingly more withdrawn from their peers. Conclusions, implications for treatments recommendations, limitations, and future areas of research are discussed. |
|
The Assessment of Trichotillomania Severity in Children and Adolescents: An Examination of Several Self-Monitoring Procedures. |
CHRIS A. FLESSNER (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee), Douglas W. Woods (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee) |
Abstract: This paper provides an examination of several methods of self-monitoring for use in the assessment of hair pulling severity in children and adolescents diagnosed with TTM. Participants are currently being recruited through referrals to the second author’s Tic Disorder and Trichotillomania Specialty Clinic at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee’s department of psychology. The current study will follow an ABACA design and will examine three methods of self-monitoring; (1) use of a golf-counter, (2) golf-counter + frequent reminders from the participant’s parent(s), and (3) golf counter + reminders + daily reminders from the first author. This study is currently in progress, and data will be presented as to the method of assessment providing the most accurate and reliable data regarding the severity of an individual’s hair pulling problem. Conclusions, implications for the future assessment of hair pulling severity, limitations, and future areas of research will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Research on Behavioral Characteristics of the Prader-Willi Syndrome |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida) |
CE Instructor: Brian A. Iwata, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium provides an overview of the Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS) and summarizes research related to three of its major behavioral characteristics: food preference (poor diet), exercise, and self-injurious behavior. |
|
Overview of the Prader-Willi Syndrome. |
STEVE DRAGO (Alachua County Association for Retarded Citizens) |
Abstract: This presentation will provide a general description of the Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS) and the clinical context for the current research. PWS is a genetic disorder associated with mild mental retardation and a variety of clinical and behavioral features. The most striking behavioral characteristic of PWS is hyperphagia (overeating), which leads to extreme obesity and life-threatening complications, including hypertension, heart disease, and diabetes. The UF-ARC project provides residential and vocational services to approximately 50 individuals with PWS, making it one of the largest in the country. Two unique features of the program include its extensive use of behavioral technology across all aspects of service delivery and its emphasis on research as the basis for program development and revision. |
|
Determinants of Food Preference in Individuals with Prader-Willi Syndrome. |
JESSICA L. THOMASON (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Pamela L. Neidert (University of Florida), Claudia L. Dozier (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Previous research has shown that several characteristics of reinforcers and their delivery, including quality, magnitude, delay, etc., may affect preference. We examined the influence of those characteristics on food preferences in individuals with Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS), a genetic disorder in which excessive food consumption is a major problem behavior. Preference assessments were conducted initially to identify foods that were of “high quality” (highly preferred). Next, baseline sessions were conducted to examine behavioral sensitivity to reinforcer quality, magnitude, and delay. Two response options were available; one response was associated with the optimum value of a characteristic; the second response was associated with a lower value of a characteristic (e.g., one response resulted in immediate reinforcer delivery; the other response resulted in delayed reinforcer delivery). The relative influence of each characteristic on responding was evaluated during a final phase, in which the values of two characteristics were simultaneously manipulated, and response allocation was measured. Results are discussed in terms of implications for the assessment and treatment of dietary management and food-related problem behaviors. |
|
Descriptive and Experimental Research on Exercise in the Prader-Willi Syndrome. |
CLAUDIA L. DOZIER (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Jessica L. Thomason (University of Florida), Pamela L. Neidert (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Physical exercise is an important therapeutic intervention in the management of life-threatening obesity, a prominent clinical feature of Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS). To date, however, very few studies have been conducted on the occurrence of physical exercise in individuals with PWS. We conducted a descriptive study initially to identify types of physical activity (e.g., sitting, laying down, walking, running, cleaning) exhibited by individuals with and without PWS throughout their daily routines. We subsequently evaluated the effects of a reinforcement contingency to increase the frequency of exercise by individuals with PWS. Of particular interest was an assessment of the utility of conjugate reinforcement schedules as maintenance procedures. Access to preferred activities (music, television) was available under conjugate or more traditional ratio schedules, and both performance and preference were examined. Results of this comparison are discussed with respect to the use of non-food interventions to increase the occurrence of exercise for individuals diagnosed with PWS. |
|
Prevalence and Functions of Self-injurious Behavior in the Prader-Willi Syndrome. |
PAMELA L. NEIDERT (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Claudia L. Dozier (University of Florida), Jessica L. Thomason (University of Florida) |
Abstract: It has been noted that individuals with Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS) often engage in self-injurious behavior. The most commonly reported form of SIB is skin picking (Dykens & Shah, 2003). In the current study, we established the prevalence, frequency, and severity of SIB in individuals with PWS by way of a structured questionnaire sent to all providers registered with the National Prader-Willi Syndrome Association of the USA. Second, we conducted experimental analyses to identify the functional characteristics of SIB in a sample of PWS individuals. Results are discussed in terms of form and function of SIB in individuals with PWS, as well as the implications these findings have for treatment development. |
|
|
|
|
Some Current Research in the Application of the Verbal Behavior Approach to Teaching Children with Autism |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Learning Center |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic) |
CE Instructor: Vincent Joseph Carbone, Ph.D. |
Abstract: B. F. Skinner (1957) provided a conceptual tool for analyzing the acquisition of language or verbal behavior. His conceptual analysis has encouraged research to emprirically verify his claims of the benefit of a natural science approach to the understanding and development of verbal behavior. During the past 25 years a body of empirical literature has emerged which has begun to provide support for the basic concepts he outlined in his theoretical analysis. The purpose of this symposium is to present four(4) data based research papers which apply Skinners conceptual analysis of verbal behavior to three (3) important topics in the treatment of children with autism, e.g. teaching the mand repertoire, use of alternative communication methods to develop vocal responding and methods to strengthen the echoic repertoire. The first two (2) papers will present data regarding methods to bring the mand repertoire under the control of motivational variables and methods to increase the number of items in the environment that will serve as a form of reinforcement. In the third paper the author will present data to support the use of sign language and other independent variables that successfully increased the frequency and variety of speech sounds produced by children with limited vocal repertoires. The last paper will provide data comparing the effects of two (2) different methods of teaching the echoic repertoire. Final comments will be offered regarding the application of these experimental findings to treatment programs for children with autism. |
|
Transferring Control for the Mand Repertoire to the Motivating Operation in Children with Autism. |
EMILY J. SWEENEY (Carbone Clinic), Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic), Leigh Mariano O'Brien (Carbone Clinic), Gina Zecchin (Carbone Clinic), Marietta Nel Janecky (Carbone Clinic) |
Abstract: The mand repertoire allows the speaker to effectively control the social environment. While the motivative operation is ultimately the controlling antecedent variable for the mand, clinical experience has demonstrated that many learners with autism fail to acquire mands exclusively under the control of the MO and a listener. The purpose of this study was to replicate the findings of previous studies related to mand training and to develop a modified time delay procedures in order transfer stimulus control of mands from the multiple control exerted by a discriminative stimulus such as presence of the item desired and motivation, to mands primarily under the control of MO and a listener. In addition, this study was designed to extend the previous findings to the treatment of children with autism and to develop procedures that could be easily implemented by teachers and instructors in educational settings. |
|
Increasing the Mand Repertoire of Children with Autism Using the Transitive Establishing Operation. |
DANIELLE DRAPER (Carbone Clinic), Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic), Emily J. Sweeney (Carbone Clinic), Margaret Murdoch Hagerty (Carbone Clinic), Zachary T. Ikkanda (Carbone Clinic) |
Abstract: The transitive conditioned establishing operation (CEO) appears to be most relevant to the conditioning of stimuli as reinforcers (Sundberg, 2005) and may play an important role in teaching language to children with autism who fail to acquire verbal behavior through typical means. The transitive establishing operation converts neutral stimuli to conditional conditioned reinforcers and therefore evokes all responses that have in the past been strengthened by their delivery. By contriving this type of situation a teacher could condition items or activities in the environment as reinforcers and use these now established reinforcers to teach language disordered persons to mand for them. Moreover, by using the transitive EO to condition items as reinforcers in a chain of responses, language disordered children can be taught to mand for items primarily under the control of the EO and therefore free their responses from the additional control exerted by the presence of the item. The purpose of this study transitive EO study was the replicate previous finding that have identified the transitive EO as an independent variable relevant to the teaching of the mand and to verify the effects of the repertoire with children with autism. |
|
Increasing Vocalizations of Children with Autism Using Sign Language and Mand Training. |
VIVIAN A. ATTANASIO (Independent Consultant), Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic), Lisa Delaney (Hudson Valley Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Gina Zecchin (Carbone Clinic) |
Abstract: Manual sign language has been shown to support the development of vocal verbal behavior in some individuals with autism and developmental disabilities (Mirenda & Erickson, 2000; Mirenda, 2003; Tincani, 2004). However, there is a subset of children with autism for whom sign language may not facilitate vocal production (Mirenda, 2003). In those cases it may be necessary to add other behavioral interventions to increase the development of vocal responding. Language training programs that manipulate motivative variables to teach manding have been shown to increase spontaneity (Shafer, 1994) and vocalizations (Charlop-Christy, Carpenter, LeBlanc & Kellett, 2002). In addition time delay procedures have also been effective in increasing vocal spontaneity and production when a vocal model was provided. Although demonstrated effective with participants who had a vocal repertoire, the time delay procedure has not been previously tested for its value in evoking novel vocal responses in children with autism who emitted very few vocalizations. The purpose of this study was to determine the effects of sign mand training combined with a time delay, vocal prompt, and differential reinforcement procedure on the development of vocalizations in children with autism for whom sign language mand training alone had not produced vocal responding. |
|
Teaching the Echoic Repertoire. |
GINA ZECCHIN (Carbone Clinic), Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic), Emily J. Sweeney (Carbone Clinic) |
Abstract: Vocal imitation training is the most commonly used method of improving articulation in children with deficient echoic repertoires. This technique involves presenting the final form of a targeted word and reinforcing the child’s increasingly closer approximations of the word. Difficulties arise, however, when children’s improvements in approximations cease and parity of the final form is never achieved. Alternative procedures to improving the echoic repertoire suggest, however, that by presenting successive approximations to the final form of the word and reinforcing parity of these approximations, word production may be better shaped. Therefore the purpose of this study was to compare the effects of two interventions designed to improve deficient echoic repertoire of children with autism. The interventions compared included traditional vocal imitation procedures in which the final form of the targeted words was presented and the Kaufman Speech Praxis Treatment Kit in which successive approximations to the final form of the targeted words was presented. |
|
|
|
|
The Acquisition of Novel Operants through Observational Learning and Peer Tutoring |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Amy J. Davies Lackey (Hawthorne Country Day School) |
Discussant: Amy J. Davies Lackey (Hawthorne Country Day School) |
CE Instructor: Amy J. Davies Lackey, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Explanations of the phenomenon of observational learning as well as its operational definition have been a source of debate and research since the early 1960s (Bandura &Walters, 1963; Catania, 1998; Staats, 1975; Gewirtz, 1971; Metz, 1965). Individuals with developmental disabilities, such as those with a diagnosis of autism, share a common deficit in the area of social and academic skills (Bauminger, 2002). An example of these deficits includes the ability to learn through observation, a critical repertoire in succeeding in less restrictive environments. The research reported herein provide an expanded analysis of several tactics on the development of observational learning in children with autism who did not have such repertoires. |
|
The Acquisition of Observational Learning via Yoked Peer Contingencies and Video Modeling. |
AMY J. DAVIES LACKEY (Hawthorne Country Day School), Marisa Savard (Hawthorne Country Day School) |
Abstract: The purpose of these experiments was to test the relationship between video modeling and yoked peer contingency and the acquisition of an observational learning repertoire. A multiple baseline design across participants and within participants across the two modeling conditions (video and in vivo) and across academic and social tasks was used. Each participant was presented two similar tasks from his or her curriculum; one task was used for the video condition, while the other was used for the in vivo condition and paired with the yoked peer contingency. The primary dependent variable in this experiment was the number of correct tacts that the Observer emitted in the initial probe for observational learning and post-yoked peer contingency probe for observational learning. This dependent variable was used to determine existence of an observational learning repertoire. The independent variable was the presentation and use of the yoked peer contingency, and the video modeling. Results are presented in terms acquisition of tasks for in vivo modeling, and video modeling and their efficiency in promoting generalization. Additional results are discussed in terms of video modeling and the yoked peer contingency’s motivating and attention maintaining qualities. |
|
A Comparison of Video Modeling and Yoked Peer Contingencies on the Acquisition of Observational Learning. |
SARAH NATARELLI (Shema Kolainu) |
Abstract: The purpose of these experiments was to test the relationship between video modeling and yoked peer contingency and the acquisition of an observational learning repertoire across multiple school settings. A multiple baseline design across participants and within participants across the two modeling conditions (video and in vivo) and across academic and social tasks was used. Each participant was presented two similar tasks from his or her curriculum; one task was used for the video condition, while the other was used for the in vivo condition and paired with the yoked peer contingency. The primary dependent variable in this experiment was the number of correct tacts that the Observer emitted in the initial probe for observational learning and post-yoked peer contingency probe for observational learning. This dependent variable was used to determine existence of an observational learning repertoire. The independent variable was the presentation and use of the yoked peer contingency, and the video modeling. Results are presented in terms acquisition of tasks for in vivo modeling, and video modeling and their efficiency in promoting generalization. Additional results are discussed in terms of video modeling and the yoked peer contingency’s motivating and attention maintaining qualities. |
|
The Role of Peer Tutoring in the Acquisition of Verbal Operants. |
SUDHA RAMASWAMY (Hawthorne Country Day School) |
Abstract: We present experiments with 3 children with developmental disabilities that identify how peer tutoring can function as a procedure to teach children to emit verbal operants with peers in play setting using a multiple baseline design. The dependent variable consisted of the number of verbal operants emitted in play settings (90-100% interobserver agreement). The results showed a change in level of the emission of verbal operants in comparing baseline to post-treatment sessions. In addition to the 3 target participants, 3 peers were taught to monitor the tutoring sessions and (correct and incorrect responses of their peers as well as to monitor the delivery of reinforcers by peers). The treatment consisted of the monitors completing a series of teaching sessions in which they learned to monitor their assigned peers correct and incorrect responses as well as to monitor the delivery of reinforcement during instruction. The results demonstrated a higher level of emission of verbal operants between the monitors and fellow peers in the classroom in post-treatment in comparison to baseline sessions. The results showed that the participants’ emission of verbal operants was not localized to the peers that were in direct instruction, but also to the monitors who were taught to observe peer tutoring sessions. |
|
|
|
|
The Effect of Precision Teaching with Frequency-Building of Component Skills on Application to Composite Skills |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Sandra L. Harris (Rutgers University) |
Discussant: Carl V. Binder (Binder Riha Associates) |
CE Instructor: Marlene Cohen, Ed.D. |
Abstract: The Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center has been in the process of incorporating Precision Teaching with frequency building procedures over the past several years in an effort to answer a multitude of research questions regarding best practice for older learners with autism. The papers will address an overview of the research outcomes compiled over a one-year period utilizing a multiple probe across subjects design. The first paper will review the results of frequency building with an adult with autism and childhood hemiplegia. Data will be presented on the acquisition of a fluency target (free-grasp/place/release) and the generalized effects of this type of instruction on vocational performance. The second paper will focus on the implementation of frequency building procedures with an adult with autism and a genetic syndrome. The results of frequency-building of conversation topics (see-say topics, followed by free-say topics) and the generalized effects of instruction on spontaneous conversation throughout the work day. The third paper will discuss the results of fine motor skill frequency building (free-grasp/place/release) for an adult with autism and cerebral palsy. The effects of frequency building on the performance of activities of daily living will be discussed. The three subjects participated in a multiple probe design, with implementation of frequency-building procedures staggered in three-month periods. |
|
The Effect of Precision Teaching of Fine Motor Skills on Application to Vocational Skills in an Adult with Autism. |
DONNA L. SLOAN (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center), Marlene Cohen (Rutgers University) |
Abstract: This paper will review the results of frequency building with an adult with autism and childhood hemiplegia. A multiple probe design was implemented. Data will be presented on the acquisition of a fluency target (free-grasp/place/release) and the generalized effects of this type of instruction on vocational performance (envelope stuffing, folder assembly and copying machine use). |
|
The Effect of Precision Teaching of Component Skills on the Application to Conversation Skills in an Adult with Autism. |
DONNA L. SLOAN (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center), Marlene Cohen (Rutgers University) |
Abstract: This paper will focus on the implementation of frequency building procedures of see-say conversation topics with an adult with autism and a genetic syndrome. The results of frequency-building of conversation topics and the generalized effects of instruction on the number and content of conversation topics throughout the work day were examined. A multiple probe design was utilized. |
|
The Effect of Precision Teaching of Fine Motor Skills on the Performance of Activities of Daily Living in an Adult with Autism and Cerebral Palsy. |
MARLENE COHEN (Rutgers University), Donna L. Sloan (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center) |
Abstract: This third paper will discuss the results of fine motor skill frequency building (free-grasp/place/release) for an adult with autism and cerebral palsy. The effects of frequency building on the performance of activities of daily living will be discussed. A multiple probe design was implemented. The effect of minimal opportunity to practice on application to composites was examined. |
|
|
|
|
International Symposium - The Induction and Prevalence of Naming and Related Higher Order Operants in Young Children |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Singapore |
Area: DEV; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School) |
CE Instructor: R. Douglas Greer, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Research on naming has traditionally investigated naming in terms of its relation to stimulus equivalence or relational frames. More recently naming has also been investigated as a verbal development capability related to Skinner speaker-as-own listener and the experimental identification of multiple exemplar experiences as a sufficient intervention to induce naming in children who were missing naming capabilities. We shall present experiments on the induction of naming, its prevalence in, and relations to functionally analyzed theory of mind tests, and tests of a role of verbal behavior in equivalence relations in children with and without language delay diagnoses. |
|
Experiments on the Induction of Naming In Children With and Without Verbal Delays. |
R. DOUGLAS GREER (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Lauren M. Stolfi (The Fred S. Keller School), Carol A. Fiorile (Private Consultant), Lina Gilic (Columbia University Teachers College) |
Abstract: We will review a series of experiments in the induction of naming as a function of multiple exemplar experience for children with autism or other language delays in which the naming capability was missing. We also induced naming in typically developing 2-year olds who were missing the capability at the time of assessment. In addition we assessed the prevalence of naming in a sample of typically developing 2 and 3-year olds. |
|
Prevalence of Naming and Observational Learning in Pre-School and First Grade Children and Relations to Other Measures. |
DENISE O'SULLIVAN (Columbia University Teachers College & CABAS), Jeanne Marie Collins-Speckman (The Fred S. Keller School & Columbia University Te), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School) |
Abstract: We assessed 50 typically developing First Graders and 50 preschoolers with and without language delays for the prevalence of naming, other related higher order verbal operants, and observational learning and their relations to other language assessments. Recent research suggests that these higher order verbal operants may in fact be empirically identified stages of verbal development. We shall describe the prevalence of these repertoires before and after interventions and their relations to other types of language assessments. |
|
Perspective Taking Training: A Higher Order Verbal Operant. |
INMACULADA GOMEZ BECERRA (Universidad Almería, Spain), Maria Jesus Martin (Universidad Almería, Spain), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Mapy Chavez-Brown (Wagner College) |
Abstract: The objective of this study was to develop tests that, from a functional-contextual perspective, evaluate and train perspective taking perspective skills as well as those skills that previous studies have shown to be prerequisites or closely related (Gómez, Martín, Greer and Chávez-Brown, 2004, 2005, in review). The procedures used incorporate the verbal discriminations I/you/he-she, before/after, is/isn’t, here/there; they also incorporate the shared instructional history of the observer and the one being observed, protocols of reinforcement of listener behavior, and the repertoire of speaker-as-own listener, and prompts that allowed for discrimination of the relevant elements of perspective taking. The participants were 10 children between the ages of 4 and 5 years old. |
|
The Emergence of Equivalence Relationships in Verbal Development. |
INMACULADA GOMEZ BECERRA (Universidad Almería, Spain), Rosa García Barranco Brranco (Universidad Almería, Spain), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School), Mapy Chavez-Brown (Wagner College) |
Abstract: The objective of the present study is to identify at what point in the normative development generalized equivalence responses emerge and to analyze the role of certain prerequisites and symbolic behaviors (Horne y Lowe, 1996; Luciano, Barnes-Holmes y Barnes-Holmes, 2001; Luciano, Gómez y Rodríguez Valverde, in review). A sequential design, with repeated measures during a six-month period was used. The participants were 15 preschoolers ranging in age from 15 to 24 months. The visual-visual and visual-auditory equivalences were evaluated through matching to the sample tasks. The “receptive” and “expressive” abilities were also evaluated utilizing diverse standardized tests shown to be effective in previous studies of equivalence with infants (Peláez, Gewirtz, Sánchez y Mahabir, 2000; Horne y Lowe, 2001); the repertoire of speaker-as-own listener (Greer y Keohane, 2005); the level of development of other operants (generalized imitation and spatial-temporal relations and abstractions); direct measured obtained in structured situations, as well as indirect measured obtained from parents and educators. The results are analyzed in terms of the role of naming and the need of multiple example experiences in future procedures. |
|
|
|
|
The Treatment of Aggressive/Destructive Behavior: The State of the Art |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Regency VII |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Richard M. Foxx, Ph.D. |
Chair: Richard M. Foxx (Pennsylvania State University) |
JAMES NICHOLSON MEINDL (Pennsylvania State University, Harrisburg) |
JEFFREY S. GARITO (Pennsylvania ABA) |
RICHARD M. FOXX (Pennsylvania State University) |
JONATHAN W. IVY (Pennsylvania State University) |
Abstract: The education and treatment of individuals with aggressive destructive behavior is complicated and confounded by controversies that exist within the disabilities field. These controversies relate to treatment approaches, philosophy, ethics and ideology. This panel discussion will include a review of the literature since the 1989 NIH conference on destructive behavior, presentation of an index for assessing severity, and discussion of two cases illustrating the state of the art. |
|
|
|
|
Ethical Standards for Behavior Analysts: The Work of the Professional Affairs Committee |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
Lenox |
Area: CSE/TPC; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Thomas L. Zane, Ph.D. |
Chair: Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center) |
SAUL AXELROD (Temple University) |
GERALD A SHOOK (Behavior Analyst Certification Board) |
KATHERINE A. JOHNSON (Advances Learning Center) |
Abstract: The mission of the Standards and Professional Affairs Committee (PAC) is to focus on the practice of behavior analysis, including certification, continuing education, codes of ethics, practice standards, legislation and public policy, and third party payments. This panel discussion will involve brief presentations of these topics of interest to behavior analysts who are researchers, academicians, and clinicians. The discussions and issues raised by the panel and audience will be considered by the PAC for possible presentation to the ABA Council. |
|
|
|
|
Training Echoic Repertoires in Autistic Children under Motivative and Joint Control |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:20 AM |
Singapore |
Area: DEV; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Maricel Cigales (University of South Florida) |
CE Instructor: Maricel Cigales, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Utilizing the language and theory outlined in Skinners Verbal Behavior (1957), language and learning interventions for children with autism will be explored. Empirical data from two experiments will be presented and analyzed with an emphasis on clinical first study demonstrates the effectiveness of combining motor echoic training and manipulating motivating operations to elicit generative and spontaneous verbal behavior across operant classes. The second study addresses the efficacy of training echoic rehearsal strategies to improve task performance and enable responding under joint control for autistic youth. Theoretical and process issues raised by each experiment will be addressed, particularly the superiority of topography-based, over selection-based language interventions. Additionally, the role of generalized imitation in higher order processes will be examined. |
|
The Combined Effects of Motor Echoic Sign Language Training within the Context of a Motivating Operation. |
KARELIX ALICEA (Florida International University) |
Abstract: The significant effects that echoic, mand, and sign language training procedures have on the acquisition of verbal behavior have been widely demonstrated when employed individually. It still remains, however, that more efficient treatment strategies are still needed. The goal of this study was to combine all 3 treatment strategies into one treatment intervention in order to investigate the joint effects they may have on verbal behavior. A total of 6 subjects participated in the study, 5 whom received treatment and 1 who served as a control. Treatment intervention totaled 1 hour per day for 5 days per week until a mastery criterion for motor echoic behaviors was achieved. Despite the fact that motor echoic behaviors were the only ones targeted for skill acquisition, significant increases in spontaneous motor mands were noted in all treatment subjects. Additionally, 4 out of the 5 treatment subjects also demonstrated significant gains in vocal echoic and spontaneous vocal mand repertoires. No significant increases were noted in the responses of the control subject. This research suggests that, in comparison to conventional treatment strategies, motor echoic sign language training within a MO may provide more efficient results in teaching functional language repertoires to developmentally delayed children. |
|
Training Echoic Rehearsal Strategies Improves Discriminated Responding Controlled Jointly by two Verbal Operants. |
TARA M. SHEEHAN (Florida International University) |
Abstract: To resolve the issue that stimulus control cannot explain generalized responding in selection-based behavior, Barry Lowenkron (1991) introduced the concept of joint control. Lownkron’s work on joint control explains the mechanism behind selection-based behavior utilizing operant principles rather than resorting to typically invoked cognitive or linguistic mechanisms. Lowenkron has demonstrated that without mediating verbal responses (echoic rehearsal), generalized responding is absent in matching to sample (1984), selection-based behavior (1991), and relational responding (1995, 2000). Examining the role of joint control in word-object relations obviates the need to rely on notions of semantics or symbolism, which are explanatory fictions characterized by circular reasoning. When two stimuli concurrently evoke a response of a single topography, that response is emitted under joint control. Typically, such a response is emitted under self-echoic/tact control jointly. This data-based presentation examines the strengthening of responding under joint control through an intervention in which young children with autism were taught to develop their own self-echoic repertoire. Participants were prompted to emit vocal echoic rehearsal responses that enabled them to complete complex discrimination tasks. The ability to use mediating verbal responses significantly improved participants’ receptive task performance. |
|
BLANK |
BLANK BLANK (Blank) |
Abstract: BLANK |
|
|
|
|
An Application of Skinners Analysis of Verbal Behavior to Services for Children With Autism: Behavior Analysts, Inc. and the STARS Model |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: James W. Partington (James W. Partington, Ph.D., A Psychological Corporation) |
Discussant: James W. Partington (James W. Partington, Ph.D., A Psychological Corporation) |
CE Instructor: James W. Partington, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium will present information about the service delivery model based on Skinners analysis of verbal behavior to serve children with autism, their parents, and their teachers that is used at Behavior Analysts, Inc. The Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills (ABLLS), will be described as the focal assessment tool used in the Strategic Teaching and Reinforcement System (STARS) model classroom. Additionally, ABLLS-training opportunities are provided on an international level and will be described in the presentation. The service delivery methods used in the STARS classroom, the STARS Integrated Sites model classrooms, the Start Teaching and Reinforcing Today (START) program which provide in-clinic and in-home services to parents, and the training activities and processes used at Behavior Analysts, Inc. will be described. Exemplary data will be provided throughout the symposium to validate the models effectiveness. |
|
ABLLS Training: What's New and What's Not? |
JAMES W. PARTINGTON (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Stacy Apraez (Behavior Analysts, Inc.) |
Abstract: This presentation will describe the focal assessment tool used throughout the service delivery applications at Behavior Analysts, Inc., the Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills (ABLLS) (Partington & Sundberg, 1998). Its use at the STARS model classroom, Integrated Sites, and by parents and professionals will be described. |
|
STARS and START: Program Delivery Aimed at Generalized Responding. |
LOLLY LEE (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Joel Vidovic (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Debbie Ramirez (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Darcy L. Bachrach (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Pamela G. Osnes (Behavior Analysts, Inc.) |
Abstract: This presentation will describe the services provided at the Strategic Teaching and Reinforcement Systems (STARS) classroom of Behavior Analysts, Inc., a school that serves children with autism, and in the Start Teaching and Reinforcing Today (START) program. While STARS serves children with autism using Skinner's analysis of verbal behavior in a classroom setting, START serves the children's parents as well as parents from the community. In START, parents learn the same methods that the STARS staff use, thereby facilitating generalized responding across classroom to home for those children enrolled in STARS. |
|
Integrated Sites (IS): STARS in the Community. |
KATHLEEN MULCAHY (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Jamie Hughes (Behavior Analysts, Inc.), Joel Vidovic (Behavior Analysts, Inc.) |
Abstract: This presentation will describe the services provided by the Integrated Sites (IS) component of Behavior Analysts, Inc. IS oversees STARS model classrooms in the San Francisco Bay area by providing consultation with classrooms in use of the ABLLS, behavior management, IEP development, and other related services. Additionally, IS provides assessment services on an as-needed basis to additional classrooms and schools. |
|
|
|
|
Expanding the Scope of Research on Treatment Integrity in Behavioral Interventions |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Regency VI |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: April S. Worsdell (Southern Illinois University) |
CE Instructor: April S. Worsdell, Ph.D. |
Abstract: A central focus of applied behavior analysis is the demonstration of functional relationships between independent and dependent variables. The failure of an intervention to produce desired behavior change may be related to the incomplete application of the programmed independent variable. Conversely, an initially robust treatment outcome may be weakened when an intervention is not implemented will full procedural integrity. This symposium will present a series of experiments designed to explore the issue of treatment integrity in behavioral interventions. Specifically, these studies sought to determine: (1) the extent to which independent variable integrity is assessed and monitored in applied experiments, and (2) whether positive treatment outcomes maintain in the face of varying levels of procedural integrity. |
|
Treatment Integrity Revisited: Do We Practice What We Preach? |
APRIL S. WORSDELL (Southern Illinois University), Jennifer A. Benne (Southern Illinois University) |
Abstract: In applied experiments, a double-standard has been observed wherein operational definitions and reliability estimates are reported when the behavior serves as the dependent variable but are rarely reported when the behavior serves as the independent variable (Gresham, Gansle, & Noell, 1993; Peterson, Homer, & Wonderlich, 1982). The purpose of this study was to evaluate the degree to which behavioral experiments monitored the integrity of independent variables. The primary questions of interest were whether the studies included treatment integrity data, an operational definition of the intervention, and an indication that the therapist received training. A total of 188 articles published in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis (JABA) between 1994 and 2004 were reviewed. A second rater coded 11.1% of the articles, and percentage agreement was above 83%. Results showed that 41.5% of the reviewed studies reported a numerical index of treatment integrity. In 29.8% of articles, a precise operational definition of the independent variable was included. Finally, 29.8% of the reviewed articles mentioned that the therapist received training in the implementation of the intervention. The results are discussed with regard to how to close the methodological gap between the observation and reporting of dependent and independent variables in applied experiments. |
|
Sequence Effects in DRA Treatment Integrity Failures. |
CLAIRE C ST. PETER (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Applied behavior analysts commonly use differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) as a treatment for behavior disorders. Although a relatively straightforward treatment, DRA is sometimes implemented imperfectly by caregivers. Vollmer et al. (1999) evaluated the effects of treatment integrity failures on DRA treatments and found that DRA remained largely effective even when implemented imperfectly. One limitation of this study was the lack of control for potential sequence effects. We examined potential sequence effects by replicating one of Vollmer et al.’s integrity failure conditions (50/50) following both baseline and full treatment conditions, using a translational research model. Experiment I evaluated possible sequence effects using undergraduates responding on a computer. In experiment II, we replicated our procedures in a school setting. The results of both experiments showed that compromised DRA was generally not effective at reducing rates of problem behavior. Additionally, sequence effects were evident in both experiments, such that the rate of responding during integrity failure phases was different when those phases followed baseline than when they followed full treatment. |
|
Effects of Varying Levels of Treatment Integrity During Treatment with a Three-Step Prompting Procedure. |
DAVID A. WILDER (Florida Institute of Technology), Julie Atwell (Florida Institute of Technology), Byron J. Wine (Florida Institute of Technology) |
Abstract: The effects of three levels of treatment integrity (100%, 50%, 0%) on child compliance were evaluated in the context of the implementation of a three-step prompting procedure. Two typically developing preschool children participated in the study. After baseline data on compliance to one of three common demands were collected, a therapist implemented the three-step prompting procedure at three different integrity levels. One integrity level was associated with each demand. The effects of the integrity levels were examined using multielement designs. The results indicated that child compliance varied according to the level of treatment integrity which was in place. |
|
Immediate and Subsequent Effects of Response Blocking on Self-Injury. |
KATY ATCHESON (University of North Texas), Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas), Roxanne L. Wolf (University of North Texas), Heather A. Moore (University of North Texas), Amanda J. McAllister (University of North Texas), Curtis J. Harris (University of North Texas), V. White (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: In many institutional settings, blocking, response restriction (e.g., restraint, protective equipment) and re-direction procedures are used extensively as interventions for SIB, but the effectiveness of these types of procedures has not yet been demonstrated. In the current study, a three component, multiple-schedule analysis was used to examine the immediate and subsequent effects of blocking on occurrences of SIB. The first and third component consisted of baseline sessions, in which the participant was in the room, alone, with no social consequences for SIB. The second component was the response restriction component, in which the therapist was sitting in the room with the participant and blocked occurrences of SIB. After the end of the second component, the therapist left the room and the third component, baseline began again, and no social consequences were given for occurrences of SIB. Results indicated that, although blocking was effective in decreasing SIB while it was in place, subsequent effects were idiosyncratic across participants. Evidence of increased levels of SIB following blocking was observed for some participants. |
|
|
|
|
Precision Teaching with Very Challenging Learners: Case Studies in Benefits and Effects |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Regency V |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Discussant: Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
CE Instructor: Michael Fabrizio, M.A. |
Abstract: Given the increased interest in the role that Precision Teaching can play in behavior analytic intervention for children with autism, our discipline has seen increased numbers of presentations and publications addressing the matter. Relatively few of these, however, have demonstrated the ways in which Precision Teaching may benefit intervention programs for children with very severe autism and very low skills. This symposium will present three data-based case studies that outline such applications. |
|
Precise Reading Instruction for Non-Vocal Students with Autism. |
KELLY J. FERRIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Abstract: Teaching non-vocal students with autism to read presents many challenges to teachers and instructional designers. No published program adequately teaches both decoding skills as well as comprehension skills appropriate for non-vocal students without adaptation. We have paired the effective teaching strategies of discrimination training, Direct Instruction curricula, and instructional design techniques to create a precise reading instructional program. We will present student data on progress in Direct Instruction curricula and timed practice data on the Standard Celeration Chart. We will include suggested scope and sequence diagrams of pre-requisite skills required for students to be successful in the program sequence. The paper will include example programs of the reading comprehension programs. |
|
Redefining Meaningful Outcomes: The Role of PT Data. |
KRISTIN N. SCHIRMER (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kelly J. Ferris (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Alison L. Moors (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Abstract: This paper will demonstrate how social validity and independence in daily living skills are important outcome measures. This pertains especially to teaching an older low skilled student with autism and mental retardation through Precision Teaching. Data will show component fine motor skills to composite functional living as well as social validity measures. |
|
Precision Teaching Functional Communication Skills to a Young, Low-skilled Child with Autism. |
SHELLEY MCINNIS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kelly J. Ferris (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Krista Zambolin (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Michael Fabrizio (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Abstract: Simon is a 5-year-old boy with severe Autism. He started receiving Fluency based intervention in June 2003 and continued until July 2005. At the start of his program, he was non-verbal and used physical gestures when manding to obtain or escape varying activities. This created a lot of frustration for Simon, resulting in episodes of crying, yelling and physical aggression towards his caregivers when he was not able to communicate his needs appropriately. We did a functional assessment to determine the antecedents of his outbursts, which generated a list of specific mands that Simon needed to learn in order to communicate more effectively in his home environment. We taught him a list of 15 adapted signs, but his limited fine motor abilities prevented him from learning anything too complex. We introduced the Picture Exchange Communication System to increase his repotoire of mands in his environment. Once the targets were mastered in smaller teaching sets, data was collected on the number of times he used his signs and PECS symbols to communicate during his in-home program and family time. |
|
|
|
|
Teaching Complex Social Responses to Individuals with Autism |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Chicago A-F |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Dawn B. Townsend (Institute for Educational Achievement) |
CE Instructor: Dawn B. Townsend, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Increased interest in the more complex social responses of individuals with autism has been evident recently. As a result, we have seen the advancement of behavioral accounts of the social deficits noted in individuals with autism and the development of teaching strategies to ameliorate such deficits. The papers in this symposium will address social deficits of individuals with autism with respect to joint attention, perspective taking, empathy, and sharing behavior. Through the use of single-subject experimental designs, the researchers have investigated strategies of teaching the above social responses to students with autism, ranging in age from pre-school to adolescence, and will demonstrate the effective use of such strategies to increase appropriate social responding in the presence of target discriminative stimuli. In addition, each presenter will define methods by which the generalization of these important social skills was targeted and the extent to which these responses were displayed under non-training conditions. Finally, each presenter will detail the acquisition and generalization of these responses through a learning-based account and comment on the importance of these skills in advancing the social repertoires of individuals with autism. |
|
Using Scripts and Script-Fading to Promote Bids for Joint Attention. |
JOYCE L. MACDUFF (Princeton Child Development Institute), Regina Ledo (Princeton Child Development Institute), Patricia J. Krantz (Princeton Child Development Institute), Lynn E. McClannahan (Princeton Child Development Institute) |
Abstract: A multiple-probe design across subjects assessed the efficacy of using audio-taped scripts to promote the joint attention responses of young children with autism. A one-word script (“See”) was presented on a button-activated recorder, and separate recorders were attached to toys and photographs that were placed in areas of the school not typically used for instructional activities. Children were taught to activate the recorders, point to pictures and toys, orient toward a conversation partner, and comment about the objects or photographs. After they reliably made joint attending responses, scripts were removed from the recorders and finally, the recorders were removed. The results indicated that all three children learned joint attending responses and when the scripts were faded, bids for joint attention maintained and generalized to untrained materials and to settings in which no training had occurred. |
|
Using Pretend Play to Teach Empathy Skills to Children with Autism. |
JESSICA A. SCHRANDT (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City Unive), Dawn B. Townsend (Institute for Educational Achievement), Claire L. Poulson (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York) |
Abstract: Many children with autism fail to display empathy skills. The purpose of this research was to assess the extent to which presentation of affective discriminative stimuli, graduated guidance, modeling through auditory scripts, and reinforcement were effective in teaching generalized empathy skills to 4 children with autism. A multiple-baseline-across-participants experimental design with an embedded multiple-baseline-across-response categories for one subject was used to evaluate effects of treatment. Instructors presented vignettes with dolls/puppets demonstrating various types of affect, and taught participants to perform pretend-play responses indicating a shared perspective (e.g., when a doll said “I’m sad,” to pat her arm and say “It’s okay”). The dependent measure was the number of empathy responses to affective discriminative stimuli per session. During baseline, the children responded infrequently to displays of affect. Increases in empathy responses occurred systematically with the introduction of treatment for each participant and response category. Furthermore, responding generalized from training to nontraining stimuli for all participants. For two participants, generalization occurred from dolls/puppets to people in a nontraining classroom. For the others, generalization was observed to the nontraining people and classroom, but subsequently decreased to baseline level. Brief introduction of treatment in the nontraining setting produced rapid acquisition of the target skills. |
|
Increasing the Use of Empathy Statements in the Presence of Non-Verbal Affective Stimuli in Adolescence with Autism. |
PAUL ARGOTT (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Dawn B. Townsend (Institute for Educational Achievement), Peter Sturmey (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Claire L. Poulson (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York) |
Abstract: Previous studies have shown that children with autism do not show empathic responding, but that they do acquire social interaction skills with the aid of a script-fading procedure. This study included 3 adolescents with autism, 2 males and 1 female. A non-verbal affective stimulus was presented and students’ empathic responding was recorded. Data were collected on scripted and unscripted verbal statements of empathy in the presence of training discriminative stimuli. To assess generalization, data were collected on unscripted verbal statements of empathy in the presence of non-training discriminative stimuli. A multiple-baseline-across-participants experimental design was used to assess the effectiveness of a script-fading procedure on increasing verbal statements of empathy. With the successive introduction of scripts and a script-fading procedure across participants, the percentage of opportunities on which scripted and unscripted statements of empathy occurred, in the presence of the training stimuli, increased systematically. For two of the participants an increase in the percentage of opportunities on which an unscripted statement of empathy occurred, in the presence of the generalization stimuli, was observed. These data show that adolescents with autism can learn to differentiate non-verbal affective stimuli and display differential empathic responses via behavioral intervention. |
|
Teaching a Generalized Sharing Repertoire to Children with Autism. |
JAIME A. DEQUINZIO (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York), Dawn B. Townsend (Institute for Educational Achievement), Claire L. Poulson (Queens College and The Graduate Center, City University of New York) |
Abstract: Children with autism have severe deficits in social interactions, as characterized in part by the failure to engage in sharing responses. In this study, four children with autism were taught a complex three-step sharing response chain (motor and verbal responses of showing, giving, and playing) derived from observations of children of typical development (Rheingold, Hay, & West, 1976). Using a multiple-baseline-across-participants-experimental design, the treatment package (manual guidance, auditory modeling, and contingent access to toy play with the recipient instructor) was introduced successively across all four participants. None of the participants engaged in the three-step sharing response chain during baseline. With the introduction of the treatment package, systematic increases in responding occurred for all four participants in the presence of training stimuli associated with the treatment package. In addition, generalization measures indicated that all of the participants learned to engage in the three-step sharing response chain in the presence of non-reinforced probe stimuli. Pre- and post-test measures indicated that the participants demonstrated this skill in the presence of peers, in a classroom containing non-trained toys. The results are discussed in terms of discriminative stimulus control of complex social behavior. |
|
|
|
|
Technology in Organizational Behavior Management (OBM): Providing Immediate Feedback and Proximate Goals |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Cairo |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Timothy D. Ludwig (Appalachian State University) |
Discussant: W. Kent Anger (Oregon Health & Science University) |
CE Instructor: Timothy D. Ludwig, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium includes three research papers focusing current technological trends in Organizational Behavior Management. Each paper includes reports of data-based research conducted in warehouse settings where performance variables of interest included productivity, measured in the number of cased picked per hour, and accuracy, measured by the average numbers of errors committed by employees. The first paper reports on research where an incentive program in a distribution warehouse was enhanced by the implementation of proximal performance goals and immediate feedback based on Engineered Labor Standards and delivered on handheld scanning devises. The second paper reports on the implementation of oral prompts and immediate feedback delivered by computer-voice headsets on selectors in a warehouse. The final paper, in a separate study, compares the impact of the handheld scanning devises, where feedback is delivered visually, versus the voice headsets, where feedback is delivered through an auditory devise, on both productivity and errors. The discussant for this session will review the merits and deficiencies of each study as well as comment on the growing impact of technology on OBM interventions. |
|
Enhancing Incentive Programs with Proximal Goals and Immediate Feedback: Engineered Labor Standards and Technology Enhancements In Stocker Replenishment. |
DAVID T. GOOMAS (Tarrant County College District), Timothy D. Ludwig (Appalachian State University) |
Abstract: Common incentive programs can be ineffective in maintaining employee productivity. With the advent of Electronic Performance Monitoring (EPM) objective indicators of employee performance can be made immediately available and visible. As a result, work unit goals and performance feedback can be delivered to the employee immediately thereby enhancing incentive programs. Stocking performance was substantially improved in an auto-parts after-market distribution center when the incentive program was enhanced with an intervention package that included the depiction of proximal goal times and immediate performance feedback on wireless hand-held computers using newly implemented labor standards that took into account travel time, box cutting time, and stocking time of each stocking work-unit. A monthly bonus was given to the members of the stocking team if they maintained 100% performance average throughout the month. Upon the onset of the intervention, employee performance increased by an average of 4.46 cases stocked per hour per person, an increase of 24% over the baseline phase, and was maintained for the10-week duration of the study. |
|
Voice Assisted Technology Providing Immediate Feedback to Reduce Employee Errors. |
SAM BERGER (Appalachian State University), Timothy D. Ludwig (Appalachian State University) |
Abstract: A foodservice distributor in the southeastern United States implemented a voice assisted selecting tool to reduce selector errors by providing immediate feedback when errors occur. An AB design with a non-equivalent control group was used to examine the effects of the voice technology on 132 selectors whose mispicks and shorts were collected over six weeks of baseline and eights weeks of the intervention phase. Selector errors were reduced from 2.44 errors per 1000 cases picked to 0.94 errors per 1000 cases when voice technology was implemented. Further analysis indicated that the immediate feedback provided by voice had a greater impact on employees who were making the most errors during baseline. |
|
Voice Picking versus Bar Code Scanner: Providing Immediate Feedback to Increase Productivity and Reduce Errors. |
TIMOTHY D. LUDWIG (Appalachian State University), David T. Goomas (Tarrant County College District) |
Abstract: Warehouses are investing in voice technology to provide immediate and individualized feedback after each unit of work in an order selection task. However, another technology that uses handheld devices with screens that scan product bar codes can also be adapted to provide this type of feedback after each work unit. Two case studies reported in this study suggest that the implementation of voice technology had a substantial impact on productivity (number of items selected an hour) as did the implementation of handheld scanning devices. The voice system increased productivity an average of 18% more than did the handheld system. There were no differences between voice technology and handheld scanning associated with a reduction of errors presumably because of dependencies based on upstream events. |
|
|
|
|
Clinical Application of A Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure for Increasing Verbal Behavior of Young Children with Autism |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Regency V |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Robert LaRue (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University) |
Discussant: Mary Jane Weiss (Rutgers University) |
CE Instructor: Lara Delmolino, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Verbal behavior deficits are central to the communication impairments of individuals with autism. Development of a vocal verbal behavior repertoire can be challenging when a learner demonstrates a lack of spoken language. Previous research and clinical demonstrations have suggested the efficacy of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure to develop or expand the vocal repertoire of learners with absent or limited functional vocal behavior. This session reports the impact of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure for two young children with autism. In the first paper, procedural variations and comparison to previously documented strategies are highlighted. In the second paper, one learners development of a vocal echoic and mand repertoire are presented, along with a discussion of other generalized effects. The third paper reports the collateral effects of the procedure demonstrated in two learners who showed a significant decrease in stereotyped vocalizations. Clinical implications and future directions will be discussed. |
|
Methodological Variations in the Clinical Application of a Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure to Increase Functional Speech in Children with Autism. |
LARA M. DELMOLINO (Rutgers University), Joelle Lugo (Rutgers University), Jacqueline J. Wright (Rutgers University) |
Abstract: The literature regarding the efficacy of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure to increase the vocal verbal behavior of young children with autism has been promising but mixed. The current paper presents a model of implementation for use of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure to increase the verbal mand and echoic repertoires of two young learners with autism. Specifically, the current paper describes the impact of the stimulus pairing procedure within individual pairing sessions, and over the course of time, an aspect which has not been extensively explored in the literature. In addition, the current paper describes how the use of the pairing procedure was systematically transferred to a contingent reinforcement procedure over the course of its implementation, and presents data regarding the subsequent impact of this shift. Further, the current clinical application utilized a variety of stimuli in the pairing component of the procedure, rather than one specific stimulus paired with each target speech sound. The clinical utility of these procedural variations will be discussed. |
|
Development of a Vocal Mand and Echoic Repertoire with a Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure: Acquisition and Generalized Effects. |
JOELLE LUGO (Rutgers University), Lara M. Delmolino (Rutgers University), Karitssa Fernandez (Rutgers University), Stacy Leibross (Rutgers University) |
Abstract: The effects of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure on the production of appropriate speech sounds in a six-year-old boy with autism are presented. The student presented with a limited repertoire of speech sounds and used a picture system to communicate. Sounds were identified that the student did not emit when asked and had never been heard to emit. Using a multiple baseline design across sounds, a pairing procedure was implemented in which the instructor repeatedly produced the target sound while delivering preferred items non-contingently. The student's production of the target sound was recorded before, during, and after pairing sessions. The pairing procedure produced a measurable increase in the students production of the sound during and immediately after pairing sessions. This improvement was augmented by adding contingent reinforcement for production of the target sound in the second phase of the procedure. Probe data indicated that during the course of the procedure, the student acquired the ability to produce the sound on request and began to utilize the sound communicatively in other settings. These data support the potential contribution of the stimulus pairing procedure for increasing the vocal repertoires of individuals with autism where other procedures have been ineffective |
|
Collateral Changes in Stereotypic Vocal Behavior during a Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure: Effects in two Learners with Autism. |
LARA M. DELMOLINO (Rutgers University), Joelle Lugo (Rutgers University), Karitssa Fernandez (Rutgers University), Stacey Leibross (Rutgers University) |
Abstract: While research and clinical case studies have demonstrated the impact of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure on the development of vocal verbal behavior for learners with extremely limited or absent vocal speech, there is very little literature regarding the impact of such strategies on the rates of non-functional stereotyped vocal behavior. For two learners with autism exposed to a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure, targeted increases in functional vocalizations were accompanied by significant decreases in non-functional vocalizations and other stereotypic behavior. These changes occurred predictably during the periods immediately following the stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure, and the degree of reduction increased over time and exposure to the pairing procedure. Changes in stereotyped behavior were documented although these behaviors were not targeted specifically. Clinical and theoretical implications of these findings will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Establishing Safety Skills in Children: Recent Empirical Investigations |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Baker |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Adel C. Najdowski (Center for Autism and Related Disorders) |
Discussant: Patrick C. Friman (Father Flanagan's Girls and Boys' Town) |
CE Instructor: Adel C. Najdowski, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Recent research has focused on a variety of methods to increase safety skills. However, given the on-going national growth in accidental injuries and deaths, there is a continued need for empirical investigations on the establishment of these vital skills. Three papers will be presented on teaching children safety skills. First, research will be presented on enhancing the effectiveness of behavioral skills training for teaching safety skills to prevent gun play across 45 6-7 year olds. Second, the results of implementing a group contingency to decrease dangerous playground behaviors among typically developing children will be presented. Finally, research on training safety skills to children diagnosed with autism will be presented in addition to the results of training caregivers of children from this population to decrease potential home safety hazards. |
|
Enhancing the Effectiveness of Behavioral Skills Training for Teaching Safety Skills to Prevent Gun Play. |
AMY C. MACKNER (North Dakota State University), Raymond G. Miltenberger (North Dakota State University), Peter J. Knudson (North Dakota State University), Amanda Bosch (North Dakota State University), Candice Jostad (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Recently, researchers have shown that in situ training enhances the effectiveness of behavioral skills training (BST) for teaching safety skills to children. The purpose of this study was to compare BST and an enhanced BST procedure that incorporated simulated in situ training for teaching skills to prevent gun play. We randomly assigned 45 6- and 7-year olds to 3 groups (BST, enhanced BST, and control), assessed safety skills with in situ assessments, and evaluated the procedures in a posttest only, control group design. For participants who did not use the safety skills at posttest, an in situ training session was conducted. The results showed that both training groups were superior to control at posttest and that enhanced BST was superior to BST at posttest. In situ training resulted in an increase in safety skills for both training groups and for the control group. Finally, the safety skills generalized to a dyad assessment in which the participants were assessed when a peer (confederate) challenged them to play with the gun. |
|
Decreasing Dangerous Playground Behaviors Utilizing a Group Contingency. |
MICHELE D. WALLACE (University of Nevada), James Summers (University of Nevada) |
Abstract: Playground injuries are currently the leading cause of death and injury in young children. Little research utilizing behavior analytic techniques to decrease risky playground behavior has been conducted. We evaluated a group reinforcement contingency to decrease risky playground behavior. Results demonstrated that dangerous playground behavior was reduced by over 80%. In an effort to add to the literature as well as give parents, teachers, and school administrators a tool to decrease risky behavior with low response effort, we provide a simple technique, the result of which is drastically reduced risky playground behavior. We utilized a group reinforcement contingency wherein the children could gain access to preferred stimuli contingent on a reduction in dangerous behavior relative to baseline measures. |
|
Teaching Children with Autism Safety Skills. |
JAMES SUMMERS (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Rachel S. F. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Jonathan J. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), Arthur E. Wilke (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.), JiYeon H. Yoo (Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Inc.) |
Abstract: Five percent of home accident fatalities involve children between birth and 4 years of age (National Safety Council, 2000). Explicit training of safety skills in children diagnosed with autism is of utmost importance due to the pervasive behavioral deficits commonly exhibited by these children. In an effort to add to the current research in household safety in young children with autism we sought to discover a practical method to teach these vital skills. A multiple-baseline design across participants was implemented to evaluate the effects of using rules, prompts and social praise to teach participants to respond appropriately to a doorbell as well as to the presence of dangerous household chemicals. Further, an assessment system that quantifies potential home safety hazards was implemented across several homes of children diagnosed with autism. Results of these analyses will be presented in addition to a review of the current behavioral literature on safety skills training. |
|
|
|
|
Improving Instructional Practices for Children and Adults with Disabilities |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Alan E. Harchik (The May Institute) |
CE Instructor: Alan E. Harchik, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Many behavior analysts devote a considerable amount of time to teaching new skills to children and adults with developmental disabilities. The ongoing improvement of instructional procedures is likely to make teaching sessions more effective. In this symposium, papers are presented that address different aspects of instructional programming. In the first paper, the researchers compare the effectiveness of two different prompting procedures. In the second paper, the authors present a training process for special education undergraduate students to learn a range of instructional procedures that are often effective. The authors of the third paper utilized the ABLLS to guide curriculum for an adult with severe disabilities. The researchers then taught three of the identified skills and examined the results within an experimental design. Finally, in the fourth paper, the author describes a comprehensive approach to teach new skills while addressing a serious problem behavior. |
|
Comparing Different Prompting Procedures on Teaching New Skills to Children with Autism. |
JULIE A. ACKERLUND (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Sarah Tillman (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Britta L. Fiksdal (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Nicole Zeug (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire), Kevin P. Klatt (University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire) |
Abstract: Various procedures have been used to teach new communication, social, and play skills to children with autism. One of the most common procedures used in both analog and natural settings is the use of a prompt delay procedure. This procedure requires the teacher to give the child an instruction, followed by a prompt to help the child respond correctly, and then the prompt is faded across trials until the child responds independently. More recently, a simultaneous prompt procedure also has been used to teach new skills to children and adults with developmental disabilities. This procedure requires the teacher to provide an immediate prompt on all teaching trials. This procedure presumably prevents the child from making errors because the prompt is immediate. Although both procedures have been used successfully to teach new skills to persons with developmental disabilities, little research has been conducted comparing the two procedures or evaluating the effectiveness of either with young children with autism. The purpose of the first phase of this study was to investigate the effectiveness of two types of constant prompt delay and the simultaneous prompt procedure in teaching new skills to young children diagnosed with autism. This phase showed the constant prompt delay procedures to be more effective than the simultaneous prompting procedure. The second phase of this study is to investigate the effectiveness of the two types of constant prompt delay procedures. |
|
Introducing Teachers to the Continuum of Instructional Formats in ABA. |
SHANE D. ISLEY (University of North Texas), Shahla S. Ala'i-Rosales (University of North Texas), Kathleen S. Laino (University of North Texas), Jessica Leslie Broome (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: A continuum of empirically based instructional formats is used in behavioral autism interventions. In order for practitioners to provide quality, individualized treatment for individuals with autism an understanding of the variety of formats is useful. This presentation describes a pilot introductory course designed to teach special education students about the common components of quality instruction and about three of the instructional formats found within ABA interventions. Formats include discrete trial, naturalistic, and precision teaching. At the beginning of the course, each student completed a three task assessment that included: (1) describing the instructional components, empirical basis, and applications of each instructional format; (2) identifying examples of each format; and (3) performing teaching role plays in each format. Based on their performance during assessment, recommendations were made to each student regarding which instructional format to focus on for the duration of the course. Following assessment, group teaching and individual tutoring were provided. At the end of the semester students completed an exit assessment, which was identical to the initial assessment except that only the designated format required the performance role-play. Pre and post data will be presented along with a discussion of the considerations involved in course design and implementation. |
|
Using the ABLLS to Guide Instruction for an Adult with Disabilities. |
ALAN E. HARCHIK (The May Institute), Jessica Day (University of Massachusetts), Rachel Fox (The May Institute) |
Abstract: Typically, when an individual with developmental disabilities ages out of the public school system and enters the adult-service system, the intensity of instruction decreases. For example, the number of skill-training objectives might drop from 40 per year to 10 per year. The frequency of instruction is also greatly reduced. In addition, many older adults never received any type of quality educational services. Consequently, adults continue to have numerous skill deficits. The purpose of this study was to use a popular assessment tool, the Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills (ABLLS, Partington & Sundberg) that was developed for children with language delays and is often used for children with autism and other developmental disabilities. We utilized the ABLLS to help provide guidance in choosing appropriate skills for an adult with developmental disabilities. After choosing three skills based upon the assessment, instructional procedures were implemented and the effects were assessed via a multiple baseline design. Results showed that typical instructional procedures (shaping, prompting, fading, reinforcement, practice) resulted in skill acquisition. Reliability was assessed in all conditions. The findings provide an example of a way to increase the skill training opportunities available to adults with developmental disabilities. |
|
Reducing a Child’s Physical and Environmental Aggression at School and Home. |
SHANNON KAY (The May Institute) |
Abstract: Physical aggression to other people and to the environment is dangerous and can lead to placement in a more restrictive setting. In this study, these behaviors were exhibited by a five-year-old boy with autism in all settings: school, play, home, and with other children as well as adults. A comprehensive intervention, consisting of positive reinforcement, interruption and redirection, and restitution were implemented in a multiple baseline fashion across settings and across the two types of aggression. Procedures were implemented by paraprofessionals at school and by the boy’s parents at home. Measures of treatment fidelity were taken. Results showed that when the comprehensive intervention was implemented, aggressive behaviors decreased. |
|
|
|
|
Including Young Children with Autism in Less Restrictive Settings: Are Readiness Criteria Relevant? |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Chicago A-F |
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: David A. Celiberti, Ph.D. |
Chair: David A. Celiberti (Coyne & Associates, Inc.) |
LEN LEVIN (Coyne & Associates, Inc.) |
MARY ELLEN MCDONALD (Eden II Programs/The Genesis School) |
AUDREY MEISSNER (New Haven Learning Centre) |
MICHAEL J. MORRIER (Emory University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: The goal of intensive, ABA-based, early intervention services for young children with autism is admission to typical kindergarten or first grade. Often, the initial intervention consists of highly structured, 1:1 teaching interactions, either in a home-based or a segregated, center-based program. At some point during this intervention process, decisions are made by relevant individuals (e.g., senior clinical staff, parents, other service providers) regarding the learners readiness to make the transition to a small group preschool or inclusion environment. Many professionals refer to readiness criteria (e.g., Johnson, Mayer, & Taylor, 1996) to help guide that decision-making process. Other researchers and clinicians de-emphasize prerequisite criteria for inclusion and, instead, integrate young children with autism with typical peers right from the outset of intensive intervention. Empirical data to guide the decision-making process, to include or not to include, has been limited. The purpose of the panel is to present the range of views and practices regarding readiness criteria and inclusion of young children with autism, and will attempt to answer the ultimate question: Under what conditions should a young child with autism participate in a more typical pre-school setting? |
|
|
|
|
Preventing Child Maltreatment with Large-Scale Behavioral Programs |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Lenox |
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Jennifer L. Crockett (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Discussant: John R. Lutzker (Marcus Autism Center) |
CE Instructor: Jennifer L. Crockett, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Child Maltreatment Prevention is receiving increased attention in behavioral research and practice. Due to the associated long-term negative health and social consequences of Child Maltreatment, its prevention is also a priority for the CDC. This symposium examines the effectiveness of Parenting Programs implemented at agency and state levels. The first presentation focuses on a population-level evaluation of Triple P (Positive Parenting Program). Triple P is an evidenced-based program with five Levels of Intervention. The second presentation takes a closer look at one of the specific Levels of Intervention within Triple P (Primary Care Level 3), focusing on parents generalization of strategies across settings. The final presentation examines both Parent-Child Interaction Therapy (PCIT) and Project Safe Care. PCIT was implemented within a Child Welfare Services agency. Project SafeCare was implemented both within a Child Welfare Services agency for high-risk families as well as statewide for active Child Welfare cases. These presentations will include discussions of fidelity monitoring, the challenges with large-scale implementation, and program dissemination. |
|
Conducting a Population-Level Trial to Enhance Parenting. |
RON PRINZ (University of South Carolina), Matthew R. Sanders (University of Queensland) |
Abstract: This presentation focuses on programming to strengthen parenting at a population-level, which is the approach being tested in the U.S. Triple P System Population Trial. The population trial is a systematic implementation of the entire multi-level Triple P (Positive Parenting Program) system, an evidenced-based approach to parenting and family support developed by Sanders and colleagues. The presentation highlights the differences between a population trial and a clinical trial, the components of population dissemination, the challenges of broad-scale implementation, and role of media and informational strategies in such an endeavor. Quality-assurance facets of the trial will be discussed particularly with respect to the training of service providers from a broad array of disciplines working in a variety of settings. Implications of the trial for program transfer and dissemination will be discussed. |
|
Evaluating Programmed Generalization in a Brief In-Home Parent Training Program. |
CYNTHIA L. BOYLE (Center for Disease Control & Prevention), John R. Lutzker (Marcus Autism Center) |
Abstract: Pursuant to its research agenda to prevent child maltreatment, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention funds a population-based effectiveness trial of the Positive Parenting Program (Triple P) in South Carolina. In a substudy of this trial in Columbia, South Carolina and Atlanta, Georgia, we focused on Primary Care Level 3 (of 5 possible levels), which consists of four consultation sessions for parents of children with common child behavior problems. Specifically, we investigated the ability of parents to generalize parenting strategies trained directly in one setting to another untrained setting using a multiple probe design across settings or siblings. This design was embedded within a multiple probe design across families. Direct observation revealed decreases in aversive child behavior posttreatment; however, booster sessions were required to maintain decreases and/or generalization effects. Rates of aversive child behavior remained low at 6-to 8-week follows-up. Inter-rater reliability ranged from 84.2% to 96.12%. Indirect measures showed dramatic intervention effects with some families indicating clinically significant change from baseline. Importantly, social validity measures suggested overall satisfaction with the program. |
|
Implementing Behavioral Parent Training Models within Child Welfare Service Systems--Experiences with SafeCare and PCIT. |
MARK CHAFFIN (University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center), Jane Silovsky (University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center), Debra Hecht (University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center), Beverly Funderburk (University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center) |
Abstract: This talk will describe implementation experiences drawn from three ongoing randomized trials testing outcomes of behavioral parent training programs in child welfare service systems. The first trial isa single-agency implementation of PCIT. The second is a single agency implementation of the SafeCare model for a high-risk prevention population. The third trial is a multi-agency statewide implementation of the SafeCare model for active child welfare cases. The role ofongoing fidelity monitoring and direct service observation in determining downstream client outcomes will be discussed. Finally, a model for how behavioral parent training programs can be systematically developed, improved, and tested within large public sector service systems will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Treating Problem Behavior with Functional Communication Training: Variables that Impact Response Selection and Stimulus Control |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston, Clear Lake) |
CE Instructor: Dorothea C. Lerman, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Functional communication training is commonly used to treat problem behavior. However, further research is needed on factors related to the selection and maintenance of communication responses, especially during periods of extinction. In the first paper, Laura Grow and colleagues demonstrate a methodology for identifying communication responses that are already in the individuals repertoire prior to treatment and for determining if the responses are in the same response class as problem behavior. In the second paper, Carrie Dempsey and colleagues examine the benefits of using signaled versus unsignaled reinforcement while maintaining communication responses on VI schedules. In the third paper, Jeffrey Tiger and colleagues present a study on the use of signaled reinforcement with preschool-aged children. The authors examine the effects of signaled reinforcement on childrens tolerance for periods of extinction and assess the children's preference for signaled versus unsignaled reinforcement. Finally, Anna and colleagues examine a strategy for teaching children with autism to discriminate between periods of reinforcement versus extinction under multiple, naturally occurring situations. |
|
The Emergence of Mands During Extinction of Problem Behavior. |
LAURA L. GROW (Marcus Autism Center and Georgia State University), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center, Kennedy Krieger Institute, and Emory University School of Medicine), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center, Kennedy Krieger Institute, and Emory University School of Medicine), M. Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center), Richard K. McCranie (Marcus Autism Center), Karen Myers (Marcus Autism Center) |
Abstract: Functional Communication Training (FCT) is a differential reinforcement procedure in which communication responses are reinforced while problem behavior is placed on extinction (Carr & Durand, 1985). Generally, a functional analysis is followed by training of an alternative behavior using the same consequences identified as the maintaining variable. Although previous studies have investigated the conditions under which appropriate behaviors may be acquired (e.g., Shirley et al., 1997) and maintained (e.g., Fisher et al., 1993), alternative responses in these and other studies are often arbitrarily selected. To date, no studies have examined the extent to which the application of extinction may evoke behaviors in the same response class as problem behavior as an aid for selecting an alternative response. The purpose of the current investigation was to determine whether exposing problem behavior to extinction would evoke appropriate behavior without explicit training. Results indicated that appropriate behaviors were (1) emitted during periods of extinction of problem behavior and (2) maintained by the consequence that maintained problem behavior. These findings are discussed in the context of both typical acquisition training procedures and the effects and side effects of extinction procedures. |
|
Effects of Signals on Responding during Reinforcement-Schedule Thinning. |
CARRIE M. DEMPSEY (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Pamela L. Neidert (University of Florida), Jennifer N. Fritz (University of Florida), Jessica L. Thomason (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Once a response is acquired through functional communication training (FCT), it is desirable to thin the reinforcement schedule to facilitate maintenance in the natural environment. Results of previous studies suggest that the inclusion of discriminative stimuli during schedule thinning may result in low rates of problem behavior and clinically desirable rates of communication. The purpose of this study was to examine patterns of responding when reinforcement was delivered according to a variable interval (VI) schedule and when the availability of reinforcement was signaled. Study 1 involved a basic demonstration of the effects of signaled and unsignaled reinforcement. Results showed that more moderate rates of responding were associated with signaled versus unsignaled reinforcement. Study 2 involved an evaluation of signaled reinforcement during VI schedule thinning following FCT for individuals who exhibited problem behavior. Results indicated that signaling reinforcement during VI schedule thinning resulted in low rates of problem behavior (e.g., self-injury) and moderate rates of communication. |
|
Towards a Proactive Strategy to Teach Preschoolers Tolerance for Unavailable Reinforcement. |
JEFFREY H. TIGER (University of Kansas), Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kansas), Kylie Larsen (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Tiger and Hanley (2004) arranged teacher attention into a multiple-schedule of reinforcement (i.e., periods of reinforcement and extinction were correlated with continuously presented discriminative stimuli and were rotated according to a time-based schedule) as a potential means of teaching children to tolerate periods in which attention was unavailable. The present study evaluated a potentially more practical variation of this multiple-schedule arrangement in which reinforcement and/or extinction components were signaled via a brief vocal signal for 4 preschool-aged children. Further, children's preferences for these arrangements were assessed via a concurrent-chains arrangement. Results showed that brief signals were effective discriminative stimuli, but for one child, continuously presented stimuli were found to be more effective than those presented briefly. All children preferred the multiple-schedule arrangement in which both reinforcement and extinction components were briefly signaled relative to arrangements in which either (a) extinction was not signaled or (b) both reinforcement and extinction components were not signaled. The results are described in terms of preventing the development of young children's problem behavior during conditions of non-reinforcement. Interobserver agreement was assessed during a minimum of 20% of sessions across participants and averaged above 85% for all dependent measures. |
|
Teaching Individuals With Autism to Attend to Naturally Occurring Discriminative Stimuli During FCT. |
ANNA E. CHIRIGHIN (Kennedy Krieger Institute), David E. Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute/Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute/Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Katrina Marie Zelenka (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Mandy M. Triggs (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: Once latent problem associated with communication-based interventions is the potential for responding at extremely high rates. Fisher, Kuhn, and Thompson (1998) evaluated a multiple schedule arrangement using picture cards (discriminative stimuli) to reduce communications when reinforcement was not available (i.e., not signaled). The current study was designed to extend the findings of Fisher et al. by using naturally occurring discriminative stimuli (e.g., caregiver behavior), as opposed to arbitrary stimuli (e.g., picture cards). Two children diagnosed with Autism participated in this study. Following successful treatment evaluations with functional communication and extinction, each participant was taught to differentially request attention based on whether the caregiver was engaging in “busy” (e.g., talking on the phone) or “non-busy” (e.g., reading a magazine) behavior. Multiple busy and non-busy situations were taught. During training, each participant began allocating all communication responses to times when caregivers were engaged in non-busy behavior. Reliability data were collected during more than 33% of all sessions and interobserver agreement coefficients averaged above 80%. These results demonstrate a first step towards integrating a function-based treatment with social skills training. |
|
|
|
|
A Panel Discussion of the Invited Address by Stephen Suomi Titled: Gene-Environment Interactions In Rhesus-Monkey Behavior Development |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
2:30 PM–3:20 PM |
Singapore |
Area: DEV; Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Jacob L. Gewirtz, Ph.D. |
Chair: Mark Lipsitt (Lipsitt Training Services) |
STEPHEN SUOMI (National Institute of Child Health & Human Development) |
MARK LIPSITT (Lipsitt Training Services) |
Abstract: This panel will include Stephen Suomi and will discuss and criticize his invited address which was given in the immediately-preceding time slot in the same room. Suomi will respond to questions raised by and comments of members of the panel. |
|
|
|
|
School-Wide Positive Behavior Support as an Application of Behavior Analysis |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Roswell |
Area: TPC/EDC; Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Carie L. English, Ph.D. |
Chair: Carie L. English (University of South Florida) |
DONALD K. KINCAID (University of South Florida) |
LAUREN A. LOVELL (School District of Lee County) |
Abstract: Baer, Wolf, and Risley (1968, 1987) described behavior analysis as applied, behavioral, analytic, conceptual, technological, effective, and displaying generality. Each of these characteristics defines behavior analysis as a field of research and application. School-wide positive behavior support (SWPBS) is an application of behavior analysis. SWPBS also can be defined within the context of these seven characteristics, meeting the criteria for applied behavior analysis established by Baer et al. This presentation will discuss school-wide positive behavior support within the context of the seven characteristics identified by Baer et al. to demonstrate that SWPBS applies behavior analytic principles and technology to non-clinical populations to demonstrate the utility (ecological validity) of behavior analysis. |
|
|
|
|
International Symposium - Stimulus Control and Verbal Behavior |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
International Ballroom South |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Caio F. Miguel (New England Center for Children) |
Discussant: Martha Hübner (USP Sao Paulo, Brazil) |
CE Instructor: Caio F. Miguel, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Verbal behavior and stimulus control have evolved as separate areas within behavior analysis. However, attempts have been made to combine research traditions from these two areas in order to explain and teach complex behavior. Braga-Kenyon et. al. investigated whether defined responses can be included in equivalence relations. The results so far suggest that defined responses, along with the stimulus members of an analytic unit, participate in the equivalence relation. Andrade et al. compared the effectiveness of two teaching procedures to establish auditory-visual discrimination; progressive delay of point prompts and no-delay. Results suggest, so far, that prompt delay is a more effective way to teach conditional discriminations. Such results raise questions regarding the behavioral events that take place during the delay of the prompt. Perez-Gonzales et al., investigated whether teaching operants with the same response form as the intraverbal targeted to emerge would facilitate emergence. Results suggest that teaching tacts and intraverbals with the same response as the probed intraverbals facilitates the emergence of intraverbals. |
|
Inclusion of Defined Responses in Equivalence Relations: A Systematic Replication of Manabe et al. (1995). |
PAULA RIBEIRO BRAGA-KENYON (New England Center for Children), Maria Andrade (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children), Murray Sidman (N/a) |
Abstract: The present study, with human subjects, provided systematic replication of a study reported by Manabe, Kawashima, and Staddon (1995), with budgerigars as subjects. In Experiment I, five adults were taught, during Phase 1, the relation visual stimuli (A1/A2) to defined responses (R1/R2), and then, during Phase 2, the relation visual stimuli (B1/B2) to visual stimuli (A1/A2). During Phase 2 trials, the samples were novel, and comparisons were the original discriminative stimuli (B1/A1 and B2/B2). When the sample stimuli appeared on the screen (B1/B2), any of the previously defined responses (R1/R2) produced the comparisons (A1/A2). In Experiment II two adults were exposed to the same procedures of Experiment I for 3 classes (A1/B1/R1; A2/B2/R2; and A3/B3/R3). Six of the seven participants came to respond to samples B during Phase 2 trials in the same way they responded to A, respectively, during Phase 1 trials. These results suggested that defined responses, along with the stimulus members of an analytic unit, participate in the equivalence relation. |
|
Teaching Auditory-Visual Matching-To-Sample: A Comparison Between Prompt Delay And No Delay For Point Prompt Procedures. |
MARIA ANDRADE (New England Center for Children), Paula Ribeiro Braga-Kenyon (New England Center for Children), Nicole Groskreutz (New England Center for Children), Caio F. Miguel (New England Center for Children), Shannon Trimmer (New England Center for Children), Erin C. McDermott (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to compare a time delay prompt procedure and a no delay prompt procedure in teaching auditory-visual matching-to-sample. A thirteen-year-old female with autism participated in this study. Prior to the experimental phases, the participant demonstrated differentiated performance given an auditory visual matching-to-sample task with known stimuli. The Prompt Delay (PD) procedure involved a 1 s progressive delay fading of a point prompt. The No Delay (ND) procedure consisted of a 0 s delay point prompt across all teaching sessions. Mastery was demonstrated during post-training probe trials. These probe trials were conducted at the end of each session, with the stimuli from each condition interspersed. Primary dependent variables included the percentage of correct independent responses emitted during post-session probes and the number of trials to criterion for each procedure. Results obtained with this participant indicated that auditory visual discriminations were more promptly acquired using the PD procedure than the ND procedure. Attempts to replicate these results with additional participants are currently in progress. |
|
The Effect of Teaching the Response in the Emergence of Novel Intraverbals. |
LUIS ANTONIO PEREZ-GONZALEZ (Universidad de Oviedo, Spain), Carlota Belloso-Diaz (Universidad de Oviedo, Spain), Gladys Williams (Applied Behavioral Consultant Services, NY) |
Abstract: Previous studies have shown that children often do not demonstrate the emergence of intraverbals. We wondered whether teaching operants with the same response form as the intraverbal targeted to emerge would facilitate this emergence. First, we taught an intraverbal with two relevant stimuli and one response (e.g., we taught, “Name the tribe of Pakistan” –the correct response was, “The Kalash”) and then we probed the intraverbal with the stimulus/response functions of two relevant elements inverted (e.g., we reversed the functions of “Pakistan” and “Kalash” by asking “Name the country of the Kalash” –the correct response was “Pakistan”). Children did not show the emergence of the novel intraverbals. Subsequently we used either one of two conditions. In Condition 1, we taught participants to tact a picture with the same response as the probed intraverbal. When novel intraverbals were probed again, five of six children showed the emergence of the novel intraverbals. In Condition 2 we taught the children another intraverbal with the same response as the probed intraverbal. When novel intraverbals were probed again, all children showed emergence. Results suggest that teaching tacts and intraverbals with the same response as the probed intraverbals facilitates the emergence of intraverbals. |
|
|
|
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Behavior Analysis: History and Historiography |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
3:30 PM–4:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom I |
Area: DEV |
Chair: Alexandra Rutherford (York University) |
CE Instructor: Edward K. Morris, Ph.D. |
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Behavior Analysis: History and Historiography |
Abstract: Notwithstanding B. F. Skinners comment that Historical research can take the place of scientific inquiry and give one time out for an honorable snooze, while pretending to carry on, historical research in behavior analysis directly engages the fields basic and applied science, as well as it science education. Just as behavior analysis is forward-looking, so too is historical research. With this as background, this tutorial describes the foreground -- the fields history and historiography. That is, it (a) relates the evolution of behavior analysis as a science, discipline, and profession and (b) delves into methodological considerations relevant to conducting historical research and the interpretation of its findings. The main topics I address are the value history inquiry (e.g., predicting current function), the historical subject matter (e.g., events, individuals, institutions), approaches to historical analysis (e.g., qualitative, quantitative), and the methodological considerations (e.g., zeitgeist vs. great person history). Throughout the tutorial, I interweave a history of behavior analysis that is informed by these values, areas, and methods, as well as by other considerations (e.g., origin myths; viz. the cognitive revolution). I also present historical puzzles and problems that vary widely enough to suit the interests and abilities of junior colleagues and senior scholars alike, as they seek to advance behavior analysis as a cultural practice. Finally, I describe a variety of resources that can promote effective historical inquiry. I close with some comments on what it is like to be an historian of behavior analysis. |
|
EDWARD K. MORRIS (University of Kansas) |
|
Dr. Edward K. Morris received a B.S. in psychology from Denison University and a Ph.D. in psychology from the University of Illinois, with Sidney Bijou and William Redd as his mentors. His sole academic position has been in the Department of Human Development and Family Life (HDFL) at the University of Kansas. Although he has published studies of empirical research, a latent interest in conceptual issues led him to the history of behavior analysis. He has edited books on its seminal figures (e.g., Watson, Skinner), written on the field’s history (e.g., behavior analysis in the 1950s), and analyzed the meaning of relevant terms (e.g., radical behaviorism). Lately, he has been pursuing the integration of like-minded perspectives in the behavioral, social, and cognitive sciences (e.g., theories of direct action), which have histories, too. Dr. Morris has been president of ABA and APA Division 25, and KansABA. He has served as editor of The Behavior Analyst and the Division 25 Recorder. He is a Fellow of APA, a Founding Fellow of APS, and a BCBA. As the Department’s chairperson, he has overseen its recent evolution -- red in tooth and claw -- from HDFL to the Department of Applied Behavioral Science. |
|
|
|
|
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Incidental Teaching and Students with Autism: How to Do It and How to Appreciate the Research |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
3:30 PM–4:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: AUT |
Chair: Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University) |
CE Instructor: Gail G. McGee, Ph.D. |
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Incidental Teaching and Students with Autism: How to Do It and How to Appreciate the Research |
Abstract: Incidental teaching is a behavior analytic technique that can be especially useful for teaching new behaviors. Incidental teaching calls for arranging the environment so that highly reinforcing materials or activities are available to the child. But the key to incidental teaching is that the child is obligated to interact with the teacher or other adults in the environment in order to gain access to the materials or some aspect of the activity. Typically arrays of incidental teaching opportunities are arranged. In this way, naturally reinforcing interaction with teachers is optimized, as are opportunities for reinforcement. Incidental teaching has a long history of use with children with autism and it continues to be an efficient and effective teaching technique. In this invited tutorial Dr McGee will feature a review of the literature on the use of incidental teaching and offer a series of recommendations for incorporating incidental teaching in any intervention program for children with autism. |
|
GAIL G. MCGEE (Emory University School of Medicine), Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Expanding Applications of Behavior Analysis in Schools |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
3:30 PM–4:20 PM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: John A. Northup (University of Iowa) |
CE Instructor: Cynthia M. Anderson, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The field of behavior analysis has much to offer schools and, in recent years the number of behavior analysts working with schools has increased markedly. In this symposium we present state of the art, data-based methods of assessment and intervention that (a) illustrate how behavior analytic principles and technology can affect meaningful and positive changes in schools, and (b) demonstrate how specific strategies might be applied to assist individual students or groups of students in a school. |
|
An Analysis of Imperative Statements and Preference for Control with Elementary School Children. |
JASON M. STRICKER (University of Iowa), John A. Northup (University of Iowa), Terry S. Falcomata (University of Iowa), Kelly M. Vinquist (University of Iowa), Brenda J. Engebretson (University of Iowa) |
Abstract: Functional analyses were conducted with three children who made excessive imperative statements in a classroom setting. Results for each child suggested that contingent access to control of a leisure activity increased rates of imperative statements compared to noncontingent control and free play conditions. We then conducted a series of concurrent operants assessments using procedures similar to Harding et al. (1999) that varied the availability of therapist attention and access to high or low preferred toys. All three children chose therapist directed play with high preferred toys over directing the therapist to play with low preferred toys. However, three patterns of allocation were observed when only low preferred toys were available. Matt chose therapist directed play with high preferred toys, but chose to play alone when low preferred toys were available. Jeff chose therapist directed play over playing alone with high or low preferred toys. Paul chose to play alone regardless of preference and only selected the therapist directed play choice when the alternative was to sit alone. These data will be discussed in terms of control as a reinforcing consequence and social stimuli such as attention and access to high preferred activities as abolishing operations for behaviors maintained by control. |
|
Classroom Based Functional Analysis:A Model for Assessing Challenging Behaviors within the Classroom Environment. |
MARK J. PALMIERI (Rutgers University), Karen L. Lenard (Temple University), Kate E. Fiske Massey (Rutgers University), Aurelie Welterlin (Rutgers University), Diane Antinoro (Rutgers University), Robert LaRue (Rutgers University), Sandra L. Harris (Rutgers University) |
Abstract: The utility of functional assessment has been well established in the research literature. Over the last 30 years, a number of functional assessment methodologies have emerged (i.e., indirect methods, descriptive analysis, analogue functional analysis). Analogue functional analyses (e.g., Iwata et al., 1982/1994) are considered to be the most precise functional assessment methods, yet these procedures are rarely used outside of highly controlled clinical settings. The purpose of the current investigation was to: a) evaluate the use of a brief classroom-based model of functional analysis using teachers as therapists; and b) evaluate the degree of correspondence between the different methods of functional assessment (e.g., descriptive analysis, classroom-based FA, analogue FA). The results indicate that teachers can be effectively trained to implement functional analysis procedures with high levels of integrity in the classroom. In addition, the results also indicate that the correspondence between functional assessment techniques was relatively high, although DA tended to over-identify functions of behavior. |
|
Check-in Check-out: Evaluation of a Targeted Group Intervention in Elementary Schools. |
AMY KAUFMAN (University of Oregon), Sarah A. Fairbanks (University of Oregon), Anne Wonderly Todd (University of Oregon), David Guardino (N/a) |
Abstract: N/a |
|
An Analysis of the Effectiveness of the Behavior Education Program. |
KATHERINE SANDRA MACLEOD (University of Utah), Leanne Hawken (University of Utah) |
Abstract: The Behavior Education Program (BEP) is a modified check-in, check-out, targeted intervention implemented school-wide with students at risk for increasing occurences and intensity of behavior problems. Until recently, research documenting the effectiveness of targeted or secondary level interventions has been limited. This presentation will present two analyses of the effectiveness of the BEP in an elementary school setting. The first analyses will report the effects of the BEP on office discipline referrals for students participating in the intervention. These results indicate that the BEP was effective with 9 out of 12 students or 75% of the students who received the BEP. The second analysis used functional behavioral assessment to evaluate the relationship between the function of the student's problem behavior and the effectiveness of the BEP. Results support the use of functional behavioral assessment in determining appropriateness of the BEP for individual students and when individualized intervention is necessary. Program implementation fidelity and social validity ratings for the BEP will also be presented. |
|
|
|
|
Quality Assurance within Autism Service Programs |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
4:00 PM–4:50 PM |
Chicago A-F |
Area: AUT/OBM; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Mary Ellen McDonald, Ph.D. |
Chair: Joanne Gerenser (Eden II Programs) |
SHIRLEY DUNN (Eden II Programs) |
EILEEN HOPKINS (Eden II Programs) |
RANDY I. HOROWITZ (Eden II Programs) |
Abstract: Autism is a complex and challenging disorder. Agencies providing services to individuals with autism and their families are faced with meeting these complex challenges in a variety of different ways across many different settings. In order to insure that these services are provided in a safe and effective way and achieve the best possible outcomes, a comprehensive quality assurance program should be in place. The quality assurance program should provide oversight to areas such as student and consumer outcomes, incidence management, program compliance, consumer and staff safety to name a few. This panel will provide an overview of a comprehensive data based quality assurance program applied within a multi-program autism service delivery agency. Specifically, strategies employed within a childrens school program, an adult services program, in-home family support programs as well as residential group homes will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Skinners Analysis of Verbal Behavior: Applications for Multiple Operants, Environments, and Populations |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
4:00 PM–5:20 PM |
Learning Center |
Area: VBC; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: David W. Sidener (Lafayette College) |
CE Instructor: William A. Flood, M.A. |
Abstract: Four papers will discuss basic and applied issues relative to the assessment and treatment of various verbal operants using Skinners analysis of Verbal Behavior. The first paper (Sidener) examines stimulus control over word usage of college students during interviews. The second paper (Flood) discusses how Skinners analysis of Verbal Behavior was used to increase manding of a child with autism when a discrete trial format was ineffective. The third paper (Barker) found discrete trial instruction to be highly effective in teaching tacts to children with developmental delays when this format was embedded into everyday activities at a preschool. Finally, the fourth paper (Firth, Sidener, and Carr) examined the effects of interspersing mands and tacts during acquisition training with preschool children. |
|
Evidence for Stimulus Control of Word Usage in Semi-Structured Interviews. |
DAVID W. SIDENER (Lafayette College) |
Abstract: Thirty-seven college students were interviewed twice each and prompted to talk about issues commonly of interest to students. Interview questions in each of two sets contained one of a pair of matched target words. Students tended to answer questions in each session using target words that were embedded in that session’s questions. That is, when asked a question, participants’ answers tended to include target words embedded into that question rather than comparable, synonymous words from the corresponding questions. Findings are discussed in terms of Skinner’s description of the echoic and stimulus control over word. |
|
A Case Study Comparison of Discrete Trial Training and Skinner’s Analysis of Verbal Behavior. |
WILLIAM A. FLOOD (May South) |
Abstract: The present study evaluated the effects of the Discrete Trial Training (DTT) and Verbal Behavior (VB) formats on daily rates of manding of a three-year old girl diagnosed with autism. The participant was enrolled in a home-based program based upon a model of Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) for thirty hours a week. The participant emitted very little functional speech upon admission. Initially, a DTT format used to teach all skills, including mands. After four months of enrollment in the program, her rate of manding did not increase and her manding program was switched a VB format. Shortly after this transition, the total numbers of mands emitted per session increased dramatically. Results indicate that the VB format was superior in evoking mands for this participant. Implications of these results upon intensive behavioral program development and future research will be discussed. |
|
Expanding the Tact Repertoire of Preschool Studentswith Developmental Disabilities by Embedding Direct Instruction into Everyday Classroom Activities. |
MAE R. BARKER (Florida State University) |
Abstract: The present study evaluated the effectiveness of using discrete-trial based embedded instruction for increasing the tact repertoires of four preschoolers with developmental delays and expressive language deficits. All four participants acquired tacts for common classroom items following the implementation of embedded instruction by teaching assistants. Students demonstrated acquired tacts to variable degrees during post-intervention probes. Based on student performances on probes, better learning outcomes resulted from embedding instruction into “planning” and “recall” times (small group instructional activities) than during the “worktime” (free play) period. Average percent correct on 1 wk post-intervention probes was 98% for planning items, 86% for recall items, and 63% for worktime items. Students obtained few, if any, of the control items that were not exposed to the intervention. Following training (task clarification, video modeling and criterion-based role-play), teaching assistants implemented instructional procedures with a high degree of fidelity (assistants averaged 94% correct implementation). Assistants later reported that they felt the instructional procedures were effective, easy to implement, and beneficial for this population of students. The results obtained have implications for early skill assessment, instructional design of preschool curriculums, and the professional development of educators. |
|
Effects of Single Versus Multiple Verbal Operant Arrangements on the Acquisition of Mands and Tacts in Preschool Children. |
AMANDA M. FIRTH (Western Michigan University), Tina Sidener (Western Michigan University), James E. Carr (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Treatment programs based on Skinner’s analysis of verbal behavior often teach language targets by interspersing novel and acquired exemplars across verbal operant categories. For example, “cookie” might be concurrently taught as a mand and a tact/intraverbal by arranging a situation in which the trainer prevents access to the cookie when the child is hungry, alternated with opportunities for the child to respond to the question, “What is this?” in the presence of the cookie. Previous research has demonstrated that mixed mand and tact sessions result in faster acquisition of tacts than tact-only sessions. However, further research is warranted to address limitations of these studies and extend this procedure to other verbal operants. The purpose of the current investigation was to replicate and extend previous research by evaluating effects of tact-only, mand-only, and mand-tact arrangements on the acquisition of mands and tacts in preschool children. When minimal differences in acquisition were observed during a systematic replication (Study 1), a direct replication of previous research was conducted (Study 2). |
|
|
|
|
Extensions of Functional Behavior Analysis Strategies at a Residential Treatment Facility |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
4:00 PM–5:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center) |
Discussant: Jennifer R. Zarcone (University of Rochester Medical Center) |
CE Instructor: Thomas L. Zane, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Functional Analysis has provided excellent tools to clinicians to help solve behavior problems more effectively. Research on functional analysis procedures has focused on expanding our knowledge of variables related to this assessment strategy. For example, researchers have investigated brief versus extended analyses, analogue versus in-vivo settings, and the utility of such procedures on subjects varying in age, abilities, and competence. The purpose of this symposium is to describe three studies extending functional analysis in different ways. In these papers, experimenters empirically tested the application of functional analysis to dually diagnosed subjects, focusing on transient tic disorders, and on precursors to dangerous behaviors. |
|
The Use of Precursors of Dangerous Behaviors to Determine Operant Function. |
ALICE I. SYMMES (Evergreen Center), Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center) |
Abstract: Functional Analysis methodologies have provided caregivers with excellent diagnostic tools with which to confidently determine the function of problem behaviors and to design more effective treatments. Students with severe disabilities often engage in self-stimulatory or self-injurious behaviors that can cause damage to themselves or others. It is reasonable to conduct functional analyses to determine the function of these behaviors, but to do so might result in more tissue damage, since the intent of systematic functional analysis is to manipulate variables in the hope of detecting an increase in behavior rate in one or more conditions. However, often times behaviors that are precursors to the targeted problem behavior might be observed. Since precursors are less likely to cause tissue damage, it is important to determine whether determining the operant function of these behaviors would provide treatment recommendations to successfully solve the targeted dangerous behaviors. The purpose of this study was to determine a systematic procedure for determining the precursors of specific dangerous behaviors, and the extent to which staff could successfully identify precursors that reliably preceded the targeted problem behavior. |
|
Extending Functional Analysis Procedures to the Assessment of Transient Tic Disorders. |
TARA-LYNN BURBEE (Evergreen Center), Lawrence L. Lockwood (Evergreen Center), Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center) |
Abstract: Tic disorders are defined as involuntary, recurrent vocal or body movements that regularly occur. The etiology of tics is not yet proven, but there is a belief that they are neurologically based, with some influence of the external environment. Functional analysis procedures would help determine whether tics are influenced by social environmental factors, and - if so – would suggest treatment alternatives. The purpose of this study was to apply functional analysis methodology to tic disorders of patients with Tourettes and Transient Tic Disorder. Two subjects with these diagnoses were observed in analogue contexts and the rate of tics was recorded to assess the traditional behavioral functions. Two different functional analysis sessions were conducted per subject. Results were undifferentiated, suggesting either a non-social or multiple functions of tics. |
|
The Consistency of Functional Analysis Results Across Different Stimulus Conditions. |
LAWRENCE L. LOCKWOOD (Evergreen Center), Tara-Lynn Burbee (Evergreen Center), Thomas L. Zane (Evergreen Center) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to determine whether the results of functional analysis would vary across different stimulus conditions. Two subjects who were dually diagnosed (with at least one diagnosis being Tourette’s Syndrome or Transient Tic Disorder) and who exhibited either motor or vocal tics served as subjects. Experimenters conducted a series of brief functional analyses in different locations, such as analogue settings, natural classroom, lunchroom, and gymnasium. Results were compared across these different conditions, showing that the function often changed due to a change in location. Discussion focused on the need for multiple assessments to be more confident n the function before developing treatment strategies to deal with targeted behaviors. |
|
|
|
|
On Extinction |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
4:30 PM–5:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Brian A. Iwata, Ph.D. |
Chair: Gary M. Pace (The May Institute) |
BRIAN A. IWATA (University of Florida) |
Dr. Brian Iwata received his Ph.D. in Clinical and School Psychology from Florida State University as a student of Jon Bailey. He subsequently held faculty appointments at Western Michigan University and at the Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine, and he is currently Professor of Psychology and Psychiatry at the University of Florida, where he directs research programs on self-injurious behavior, the Prader-Willi syndrome, and autism. Brian’s primary areas of interest are research methodology, developmental disabilities, functional analysis of severe behavior disorders, and program evaluation. He has published over 200 articles and chapters on these topics and has received over $5 million in research grants to support that work. Brian is the former editor of JABA and past president of ABA, APA Division 33, FABA, SABA, and SEAB. He has chaired study sections for both NIH and NIMH and is a fellow in AAMR, ABA, APA, and APS. Brian has received a number of significant awards for his work, including the D.F. Hake Award for Contributions to Basic and Applied Research as well as the Award for Applied Research from APA, the Award for Distinguished Contributions to Service from ABA, and the R. B. Dillard Award for Excellence in Research from AAMR. Brian is just as much a teacher of researchers as he is a researcher: Half of the recipients of the B. F. Skinner Award (APA Division 25) have been his former Ph.D. students. |
Abstract: Extinction is the most direct method for reducing the frequency of behavior. Nevertheless, the procedure is prone to misapplication, may produce undesirable effects, and can be difficult to implement. This presentation will consider some limitations associated with the use of extinction and will suggest alternative strategies. |
|
|
|
|
History and Historiography of Behavior Analysis: A Panel Discussion of Morriss Invited Tutorial |
Sunday, May 28, 2006 |
4:30 PM–5:20 PM |
International Ballroom North |
Area: DEV/TPC; Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Edward K. Morris, Ph.D. |
Chair: Alexandra Rutherford (York University) |
JAY MOORE (University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee) |
JOHN C. MALONE (University of Tennessee) |
EDWARD K. MORRIS (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: This panel discussion addresses Dr. Edward K. Morriss invited tutorial on the history and historiography of behavior analysis. The panelists will comment on his main topics (e.g., the value history inquiry, approaches to historical analysis, the methodological considerations), the history of behavior analysis that he interwove among them, and related historiographic concerns (e.g., origin myths). They will address the puzzles and problems he presented and suggest how to solve them. And, they will relate what they think it is to be an historian. |
|
|
|
|
International Symposium - Applications of Basic Research on Behavioral History, Cooperation, and Demand Effects on Preference |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Patrick R. Progar (Caldwell College) |
Discussant: Ralph Spiga (Temple University) |
CE Instructor: Patrick R. Progar, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The symposium will integrate the research of three unique but related topics under the heading of translational research. The first symposium will present data on behavioral history effects on both problem and appropriate behavior using a pseudo-random binary sequence. The behavior of scripting - repeating lines from a movie or TV show out of context and manding for a preferred food item appeared sensitive to both proximal and more distal contingencies of reinforcement, replicating work from the basic laboratory. The second presentation used a matrix-style game to assess levels of defection and cooperation in sets of two individuals diagnosed with a developmental disability. Rates of cooperation were generally low, however a component analysis suggested alternative strategies to increase cooperation in this population. The third presentation applied behavior economic principles to a free-operant preference assessment. By increasing the "cost" of the most preferred item, consumption of that item decreased and preferences for previously less-preferred items tended to increase suggesting that the items were substitutable for each other. Demand curves were fit to the data and explained a significant portion of the variance. |
|
An Analysis of Behavioral History Effects on Scripting. |
PATRICK R. PROGAR (Caldwell College), Frances A. Perrin (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Camille Daniels (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Misty B. Simmons (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Caron Casciato (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Michael C. Davison (University of Auckland) |
Abstract: The present study adapted the use of a pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) from basic research findings to an applied setting. The study examined the influence of both proximal contingencies (i.e., those in effect today) and distal contingencies (i.e., those in effect on previous days). The participant was an 15-year old female diagnosed with autism. Appropriate behavior in the form of manding for a preferred food item and inappropriate behavior in the form of scripting (e.g., repeating lines from a movie or TV show out of context) were reinforced for 10 sessions in a pseudorandom fashion between concurrent variable interval 15-s variable interval 15-s schedules, followed by 31 sessions conducted on a concurrent variable interval 15-s variable interval 60-s schedule. Interobserver agreement data were collected during 51% of the sessions with an average total agreement of 97% for scripting and 99% for manding. The results indicated that both proximal (i.e., current) contingencies and more distal contingencies exerted control over the behavior of the individual. These results have implications for the generalization and maintenance of behavior as well as for preventing relapses due to poor treatment integrity. |
|
Examining Cooperation and Self-Control in Individuals with Developmental Disabilities. |
ERIC EBERMAN (Bancroft NeuroHealth/Temple University), Ralph Spiga (Temple University), Frances A. Perrin (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Patrick R. Progar (Caldwell College) |
Abstract: In this study, we examined different means to train cooperative behavior in the applied setting. Using the basic framework developed by Brown and Rachlin (1999), we used a matrix-style game to assess social cooperation and different methods in which this could be trained. Participants in the current study consisted of two individuals diagnosed with developmental disabilities. This study examined cooperation by having the two participants engage in turn-taking game in which each participant’s choice subsequently affected the other participant’s choice. Participants received 0 to 4 tokens depending on their choice and phase of the study. Cooperation and defection within each session was determined by the combination of choices that were made by both participants during an individual trial. The data indicate that, despite our training efforts, participants continued to behave in a non-cooperative manner during the majority of sessions. Some cooperative behavior was observed, but these results could not be replicated during the reversal. Interobserver agreement was collected during 48% of all sessions with a mean agreement of 99%. |
|
Demand Effects on Preference. |
FRANCES A. PERRIN (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Patrick R. Progar (Caldwell College), Ralph Spiga (Temple University) |
Abstract: Behavioral economic procedures may provide important concepts and methods for assessing and describing the reinforcing effects in the applied setting. Specifically, the concept of demand is central to the behavioral economic approach. According to this perspective, demand assesses consumption as a function of price (e.g. response cost) of the reinforcer (commodity). Participants in the current study consisted of three individuals diagnosed with developmental disabilities. During a session each participant has a choice between a preferred food item and alternative food items. The price of the preferred item, in this case the distance from the participants, was manipulated. The concurrently available items were initially placed 1 ft from the participant. Over sessions, the preferred item was placed at ascending and descending order of 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, & 24 inches away from 1-ft mark while the alternatives remained on that mark. The data indicate that increasing the price of the preferred item increased choices of non-preferred items. Once these behavioral patterns developed successfully, consumption of alternative items increased as consumption of the preferred item decreased. The profile of choices indicated that the alternatives function as economic substitute commodities. The demand equation was fit to the data and explained a significant portion of the variance. |
|
|
|
|
Evaluating the Effectiveness of Floridas Behavior Analysis Services Program Across Multiple Settings |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Techwood |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Kimberly Crosland (University of South Florida) |
CE Instructor: Kimberly Crosland, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Floridas Behavior Analysis Services Program (BASP) is a statewide program for dependent children and their caregivers. Over 60 board certified behavior analysts from the University of South Florida and the University of Florida work with parents and staff to improve their interactions with previously abused and neglected children. Caregivers receive training in the Tools for Positive Behavior Change Curriculum and learn how to implement individualized behavior plans when necessary. Three presentations within the current symposium discuss the results of the training across several settings; Foster homes, group homes, a group shelter, and a Statewide Inpatient Psychiatric Program (SIPP) Facility. The results of these studies indicated that the training was effective in producing positive outcomes (i.e., decreasing restrictive procedures and increasing positive interactions across all of these settings). The final presentation focuses on two components of the training; the in-class and in-home components. Results indicated that caregivers who received both components showed higher post-test scores and greater increases in positive interactions with their children when compared to those caregivers who only received the in-class component. In summary, the results of the current studies indicate that the BASP program can be effective across multiple settings and caregivers. |
|
Longitudinal Evaluation of Placement Disruptions within Individual Foster Homes. |
DAVID GELLER (University of South Florida), Bryon Neff (University of South Florida), Michael Cripe (University of South Florida), Terresa A. Kenney (University of South Florida), Kimberly Crosland (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: There appears to be a consensus among different professionals and families in the foster care system that too many children experience multiple placement changes. Few articles have been published that have focused on foster parenting skills in relation to placement disruptions, although there is some evidence that placement disruptions could be prevented by providing more services and training to foster parents. Stone and Stone (1983) found that greater case worker contacts and rapport building with foster parents was associated with increased placement stability. The current study proposes to teach foster parents how to interact in a positive way with foster children using the Tools for Positive Behavior Change Curriculum which could result in decreases in behaviorally based placement disruptions. Behavioral disruptions prior to and after parents met competency measures in the curriculum were recorded. Results showed that 15 out of 19 foster homes showed decreases in behavioral placement disruptions after training. The overall rate of behaviorally based disruptions decreased from .75 to .47 disruptions per year from baseline to treatment. This reduction was found to be significant (z=2.12, p<.05). Although a small sample size, this study shows that teaching foster parents a behaviorally based curriculum may reduce placement disruptions. |
|
Decreasing the use of Restrictive Procedures at a group shelter and Statewide Inpatient Psychiatric Program Facility. |
ALFREDO BLANCO (University of South Florida), Tamela Giddings (University of South Florida), Maricel Cigales (University of South Florida), David Geller (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: The use of some restrictive procedures, including physical restraint, has been controversial. The Child Welfare League of America (CWLA) has estimated that between 8 and 10 children in the United States die each year due to restraint, while numerous others suffer injuries such as broken bones and damaged joints (CWLA, 2002). For foster care children who have already suffered various degrees of abuse, restrictive procedures may only add to their emotional and behavioral problems. In the current study, staff from both a group foster care shelter and a SIPP facility for foster children were trained in the Tools for Positive Behavior Change Curriculum. Baseline measures were conducted in which the use of restrictive procedures was recorded based on incident reports at each facility. Following training, decreases in several restrictive procedures were observed at both facilities. At the group shelter, take down procedures reduced significantly from approximately 10 per month to less than 1 per month. The SIPP facility showed a 70% or greater reduction in physical holds, restraint procedures, and psychiatric medication use. These results indicate that the training was effective in decreasing the use of the most restrictive procedures used by these facilities over several months following treatment. |
|
Effects of Staff Training on Types of Interactions Observed within Several Group Homes for Foster Care Children. |
CATHERINE WILCOX (University of South Florida), Wayne A. Sager (University of South Florida), Terresa A. Kenney (University of South Florida), Randi Pickle (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: Staff training is an often used intervention designed to strengthen caregiver behaviors that may function to decrease inappropriate child behavior and increase appropriate child behaviors. Weise (1992) conducted a critical review of caregiver training research and suggested that more studies need to collect specific direct observation data on caregiver behavior change. She reported that approximately 83% of published caregiver training studies only used subjective measures, such as rating scales and self-report measures. The current study collected both baseline and treatment measures, employing both AB and multiple baseline designs across a total of five group homes. All caregivers were trained in the Tools for Positive Behavior Change Curriculum. Direct observation measures were conducted in which data were collected on positive interactions, negative interactions (i.e., coercives), and tool use. Reliability measures were obtained for approximately 20% of the sessions. Increases in both positive interactions and tool use were observed in the treatment phase while decreases in negative interactions were also found for four of the group homes. For one of the group homes, positive interactions did not increase, however, tool use increased and negative interactions decreased. Overall, the Tools for Positive Behavior Change Curriculum resulted in positive changes in staff behavior. |
|
Evaluating the Tools for Positive Behavior Change with Parents of Children Enrolled in ESE Programs. |
KIMBERLY CROSLAND (University of South Florida), Amanda Keating (University of South Florida), Bryon Neff (University of South Florida), Glenn Dunlap (University of South Florida) |
Abstract: The majority of parent training studies have evaluated either a group training curriculum or some form of individual behavioral training, while few studies have specifically compared the effects of group training versus individual training with the same curriculum. Two studies have suggested that some didactic group training along with home supports may provide an optimal combination of services to increase parenting skills (Hampson, Schulte, and Ricks, 1983, Kaiser et al., 1995). Using a cross-over design, the current study evaluated the effects of in-class training alone versus in-class training plus in-home training and attempted to determine when the in-home training is more effective (i.e., during or after the in-class training). Parents from the Hardee County School District attending the positive behavior change program were randomly selected for each group. Reliability measures were collected on approximately 30% of the pre- and post-test scores and 25% of the home observations and were consistently above 80% interval agreement. Results showed that parents who received both the in-class and in-home components showed greater improvement on post-test scores and also showed greater increases in positive interactions during home visits when compared to parents who only received the in-class component. |
|
|
|
|
Improving Behaviors at Home, School, and Inpatient Settings |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Regency VI |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Alan E. Harchik (The May Institute) |
Discussant: Patrick C. Friman (Father Flanagan's Girls and Boys' Town) |
CE Instructor: Alan E. Harchik, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Ensuring correct use of behavioral procedures by families, staff members, and paraprofessionals is an ongoing challenge for behavior analysts. In this symposium, three papers are presented that provide examples of the successful application of behavior analysis in different settings and with different behavior change agents. All three studies target serious problem behaviors of children with autism and other developmental disabilities. In the first paper, the researchers present a program for incorporating the use of single-subject experimental design methodology in working with family members. The second paper addresses serious problem behavior in a residential treatment program. Finally, the author of the third paper describes the successful use of behavioral intervention procedures in an inpatient setting. |
|
Keeping the Analysis in ABA: A Data-Based Program Description. |
KATHLEEN S. LAINO (University of North Texas), Shahla S. Ala'i-Rosales (University of North Texas), Jessica Leslie Broome (University of North Texas), Donna Dempsey (University of North Texas), Victoria A. White Ryan (University of North Texas), Michelle Greenspoon (N/a) |
Abstract: Although research designs are often difficult to employ in clinical practice, all providers of human services should be aware of and utilize as many evaluation methods as possible, including single-case research designs. Because the multiple baseline design can be employed across behaviors, settings, or individuals, it is a feasible, ethical and valuable method for evaluating behavior analytic interventions in a variety of applied programs. One such program is The Family Connections Project (FCP). FCP is designed to enhance the quality of relationships within families who have young children with autism. FCP offers treatment packages that include, but are not limited to, communication training, planned activities training, and extended family training. Ongoing empirical evaluation using single-subject research designs is considered an essential component of FCP. Specifically, the multiple baseline design is used to inform the treatment process and analyze observed behavior change as a function of the manipulation of independent variables. Single case experiments from FCP are provided as case study examples. In all cases, initial baselines indicate low levels of target responses. Following intervention, meaningful increases are demonstrated with confidence across skill sets, settings and materials, and people. Results are discussed in the context of effectiveness, practicality and ethics. |
|
Assessment and Treatment of Trichotillomania in a Child with Cri-du-Chat. |
CHRISTINA M. VORNDRAN (Bancroft NeuroHealth), Gary M. Pace (The May Institute), James K. Luiselli (The May Institute), Jennifer Flaherty (The May Institute), Lauren E. Christian (The May Institute), Ava E. Kleinmann (The May Institute) |
Abstract: Published interventions of trichotillomania (chronic hair pulling) have involved punishment or the use of protective equipment. The present study sought to reduce trichotillomania, in an 8 year-old girl with Cri-du-Chat and severe mental retardation, using alternatives to aversive or restrictive interventions. A functional analysis revealed that hair pulling was maintained by attention and automatic reinforcement. Assessment data also indicated that hair pulling co-varied with thumb sucking. Based on the results of the functional analysis an intervention consisting of noncontingent attention and response blocking plus redirection to preferred items was developed. A reversal design established that the intervention reduced hair pulling. Follow-up data indicated that the treatment generalized to another setting and results maintained one year later. The co-variation between hair pulling and thumb sucking was not observed during follow-up sessions. This study demonstrates the importance of conducting functional analyses for behaviors historically considered to be habit disorders maintained by automatic reinforcement. It also provides preliminary evidence that relatively non-intrusive procedures can effectively reduce hair pulling maintained by automatic reinforcement. |
|
Shaping Approach Responses as Intervention for Specific Phobia in a Child with Autism. |
JOSEPH N. RICCIARDI (The National Autism Center), James K. Luiselli (The May Institute) |
Abstract: Anxiety is being described as a common complication of autism. In addition, there are several reports of the diagnosis of DSM-criteria anxiety disorders in children with autism. What is not clear is how such cases can be treated, given the complicating language and cognitive deficits that are at the core of autistic disorder. We evaluated a simple procedure, contact desensitization (reinforcing approach responses), as a fear-reduction intervention with a child who had autism and a psychiatric diagnosis of specific phobia. During hospital-based intervention the boy was able to encounter the feared stimulus without distress or avoidance, and results were maintained post-discharge. Notably, the intervention was based on a purely behavioral model, and does not incorporate popular “cognitive” explanations of behavior. In addition, researchers directly measured change in multiple dimensions of the central feature of phobia, avoidance of specific stimuli. IOA were acceptable (88-100%, across 28% of sessions). The project utilized an experimental design (changing criterion). |
|
|
|
|
Precise Descriptions: Why Autism Treatment Requires Them and the Effects of Their Absence |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Dunwoody |
Area: TPC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Harry A. Mackay (Northeastern University, Shriver Center) |
Discussant: David M. Corcoran (BEACON Services) |
CE Instructor: Robert K. Ross, M.S. |
Abstract: A defining characteristic of applied behavior analysis is the requirement for precise descriptions of target behaviors and carefully specified interventions to enable replicability. In applied autism treatment we have found a number of instances and common problems that do not meet this standard. For example terms such as transition problems, sensory processing dysfunction, and auditory processing problems are commonly used to identify what are hypothesized causes of difficulty rather than specific behaviors to be treated. These terms do not enable clinicians to identify the behavioral problem to be treated with any degree of specificity, nor do they address the environmental variables of which the behavior may be a function. Often these inadequate descriptions are used to explain or even justify why the individual is having difficulty. Indeed for many people these inadequate descriptions are now treated as symptoms of autism. However, the lack of precision in description may misdirect those providing interventions and thus focus on irrelevant variables that may not produce an effective outcome. This symposium will outline the parameters of effective and precise descriptions and then present three case examples where poor description has led to ineffective treatment. |
|
"Transition Problems": Why They are not "Transition Problems". |
ROBERT K. ROSS (BEACON Services) |
Abstract: The term “transition problem” does not meet the requirement of precise description as required in applied behavior analysis. It is a misnomer that lacks precision about the behavior(s) involved, and actually suggests variables that may not be relevant. This description may even misguide the clinician into implementing potential solutions to problems that do not exist. A transition problem does not involve the inability to end one activity and move to another. In its common usage the term rarely refers to a lack of ability to move from place to place. Indeed, it is almost always used to describe situations in which a person is asked or directed to leave a preferred condition and go to a less preferred setting or activity. The relevant variables thus involve considerations about reinforcement, and stimulus control by instructions. Case examples will highlight how imprecise description has led to ineffective treatment and how accurate description has resulted in positive outcomes. |
|
"Sensory Processing Dysfunction": What Does This Mean? And Imply? |
DAVID M. CORCORAN (BEACON Services) |
Abstract: The term “sensory processing dysfunction” does not meet the requirement of precise description as required in applied behavior analysis. It is a misnomer that lacks precision about the behavior(s) involved, and actually suggests variables that may not be relevant. This description may even misguide the clinician into implementing potential solutions to problems that do not exist. A “sensory processing dysfunction” is inferred from evidence that the individual either does not respond in a typical manner to auditory, visual or tactile stimuli. It is rarely backed up with neurological or neuro-physiological data showing the presence of a “processing dysfunction”. That someone covers their ears in the presence of a particular sound, is evidence that they cover their ears in the presence of that sound. The inference of neurological dysfunction on the basis of this evidence alone is not sound behavior analytic (or indeed medical) practice. The “processing dysfunction” explanation, takes us away from considering relevant variables such as reinforcement history with respect to the stimulus in question. Case examples will highlight how imprecise description has led to ineffective treatment and how accurate description has resulted in positive outcomes. |
|
BLANK |
MAJDA M. SEUSS (ABAI) |
Abstract: BLANK |
|
|
|
|
The Acquisition and Generalization of Verbal Operants |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Learning Center |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Jeffrey H. Tiger (University of Kansas) |
CE Instructor: Jeffrey H. Tiger, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Skinner's (1957) analysis of verbal behavior has served as the foundation of many language interventions for children with developmental disabilities. The present symposium presents four evaluations of teaching procedures to further improve the communicative abilities of young children. Specifically procedures to promote the acquisition and generalization of Skinner's tact and intraverbal relationships were examined. |
|
Acquisition of Signed Tacts in Infants and Toddlers. |
KELLY A. DANCHO (University of Kansas), Rachel H. Thompson (University of Kansas), Jennifer Lynne Bruzek (University of Kansas), Tanya Baynham (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Thompson, McKerchar, and Dancho (2004) trained three typically developing infants to sign using delayed physical prompting and reinforcement. Children in the Thompson et al. (2004) study exhibited a limited communicative repertoire consisting of a single mand displayed only under controlled experimental conditions. This investigation sought to expand the signing repertoires of three typically developing children and two children diagnosed with developmental disabilities by (a) teaching tacts, (b) teaching multiple signs to the same child, (c) evaluating whether the effects of sign training would generalize to other appropriate conditions, and (d) evaluating whether signs occurred under stimulus control of relevant events. All participants acquired signs using delayed model and physical prompting and reinforcement. Generalization of the effects of sign training was observed with two participants, and results for two participants showed that signing was under stimulus control of relevant stimuli. Interobserver agreement was assessed during a minimum of 30% of all sessions, and agreement ranged between 60 and 100% for all participants. |
|
An Evaluation of Tact Generalization. |
ELIZABETH S. ATHENS (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida) |
Abstract: A number of techniques for generalization training are available; however, few have undergone experimental scrutiny for training verbal behavior. The purpose of the current study was to evaluate a method of examining the effects of explicit within-stimulus category generalization training on the subsequent sensitivity to generalization of other related responses. Methods were modeled after those presented by Haring (1985), and were designed to test a model based on the training of sufficient exemplars strategy. Specifically, verbal responses to pictures of items of varying representativeness were progressively trained until generalization occurred within a stimulus class (e.g., pictures of “castles”). In addition, generalization probes were conducted in other stimulus class sets, in a sense to test a “generalized” generalization effect. Interobserver agreement was collected during at least 30% of sessions across participants and averaged 99.5%. Results showed that the sufficient exemplar method is useful for teaching within class generalization, but a sensitivity of generalization in other stimulus sets emerged idiosyncratically. |
|
An Analysis of Procedures to Generate Socially-Appropriate Answers to Novel Questions. |
EINAR T. INGVARSSON (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Jeffrey H. Tiger (University of Kansas), Kasey Stephenson (University of Kansas), Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Four preschool children (with and without disabilities) who often responded inappropriately to developmentally appropriate questions participated in the current study. Pretests established sets of questions that the children either did or did not answer appropriately (i.e., known and unknown questions). We then sequentially taught two specific answers to a subset of unknown questions: (a) “I don’t know,” and (b) “I don’t know, please tell me” (an information-seeking response). Results showed that the targeted answers generalized across questions and behavior-change agents for all participants. Following the “I don’t know” training, some undesirable generalization to known questions occurred for three participants, and some limited undesirable generalization of the “I don’t know please tell me” response occurred for two participants. An enriched reinforcement contingency was necessary to establish correct answers to previously unknown questions. The importance of teaching generalized responses that enable the acquisition of novel intraverbals is discussed. |
|
An Evaluation of Intraverbal Training and Listener Training for Teaching Categorization Skills to Preschool Children. |
ANNA I. PETURSDOTTIR (Western Michigan University), James E. Carr (Western Michigan University), Sarah A. Lechago (Western Michigan University) |
Abstract: Curricula employed in early and intensive early intervention programs sometimes recommend teaching receptive before expressive skills, but the empirical literature suggests that the reverse sequence may sometimes be more efficient. In particular, it appears fairly well established that tact training is more likely to generate an emergent listener repertoire than listener training to generate an emergent tact repertoire. Less is known about the extent to which a similar relation holds for intraverbals and listener behavior, even though the sequencing of intraverbal and listener training is a consideration in many language training programs, such as those that teach various categorization skills. The purpose of the present study was to provide a controlled evaluation of the effects of intraverbal training and listener training on intraverbal and listener categorization, as well as on other untrained categorization skills. The participants were3- and 4-year-old typically developing children who learned to categorize previously unfamiliar stimuli, such as characters from foreign writing systems, and outline maps of foreign countries. Overall, little emergence of untrained categorization skills was observed. Interobserver agreement was assessed on at least 25% of all sessions and averaged over 96% for each participant. |
|
|
|
|
Toward a Neurogenetics of Problem Behavior |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Baker |
Area: CBM; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University) |
Discussant: Travis Thompson (University of Minnesota) |
CE Instructor: Craig H. Kennedy, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The causes of problem behavior involve environmental and biological determinants that impose organizational structure on responding. The past two decades have seen parallel, but separate innovations in (a) the functional analysis of problem behavior and (b) neurogenetics. The former innovations have allowed behavior analysts to identify and manipulate the discriminative stimuli, motivating operations, reinforcement contingencies, and reinforcing/punishing stimuli that influence response probability. The latter innovations have allowed for the molecular identification and measurement of single-nucleotide polymorphism (SNPs) occurring within genes that regulate neural circuitry function. In this symposium, we present data on the first synthesis of these two scientific domains. Our goal is to develop an integrated biobehavioral analysis of gene-brain-environment determinants of problem behavior. Each experiment will focus on problem behaviors, but within a distinct population. The experiments also build on each other by expanding the complexity of the SNPs and neural circuitry involved in the occurrence of problem behaviors. Our findings indicate distinct pattern of SNPs regulating monoaminergic circuits that are associated with the development and maintenance of behavior problems. |
|
Association between the Monoamine Oxidase A (MAOA) Gene and Chronic Problem Behavior in Adults with Developmental Disabilities. |
MICHAEL E. MAY (Vanderbilt University), Laura Hodges (Vanderbilt University), John A. Phillips (Vanderbilt University), Randy D. Blakely (Vanderbilt University), Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University) |
Abstract: A functional polymorphism in the promoter of the monoamine oxidase A (MAOA) gene has been associated with aggression in a general population sample of males. In this study, we sought to extend these findings to adults with developmental disabilities with histories of aggression. DNA samples and behavioral records were obtained from adult males with developmental disabilities, distinguished only by the presence or absence of aggression. These data were compared with a gender, ethnicity, and age-matched contrast sample. Our findings indicate that 54% of adults with developmental disabilities who were aggressive had the short allele version of the MAOA gene. In comparison, 23% of adults with developmental disabilities who were nonaggressive and 18% of the contrast group had the short allele MAOA polymorphism. Our findings suggest that a polymorphism in the MAOA gene may be associated with an aggressive phenotype in people with developmental disabilities. |
|
Associations among the MAOA and Serotonin Transporter (SERT) Genes and Problem Behavior in Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder. |
JOHN A. W. JACKSON (Vanderbilt University), Michael E. May (Vanderbilt University), Christina F. Roantree (Vanderbilt University), Jill Parks (Vanderbilt University), Molly Ann McGinnis (Vanderbilt University), John A. Phillips (Vanderbilt University), Randy D. Blakely (Vanderbilt University), Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University) |
Abstract: We analyzed SNPs in two genes – monoamine oxidase A (MAOA) and the serotonin transporter gene (SERT) – for an association with behavior problems in children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). DNA samples and behavioral records were obtained from male children with ASD, along with behavioral samples using direct observation and interview. Our findings indicated a high correlation (.76) between the less efficient MAOA gene polymorphism and the degree of problem behaviors. There was a moderate association (.53) between autism severity, behavior problems, and MAOA gene polymorphism. No association was observed for type of ASD or polymorphisms in the SERT gene. Our findings suggest that polymorphisms in the MAOA gene are associated with problem behaviors in children with ASD and that a stronger association exists for those with a higher severity of autism. |
|
Associations among the MAOA, SERT, and catechol-O-methyl transferase Genes and Problem Behavior in Children with Severe Behavior Disorders. |
CRAIG H. KENNEDY (Vanderbilt University), Joseph H. Wehby (Vanderbilt University), Christina F. Roantree (Vanderbilt University), Katherine Falk (Vanderbilt University), John A. Phillips (Vanderbilt University), Randy D. Blakely (Vanderbilt University) |
Abstract: Problem behaviors affect a broad range of children and adolescents, from those with autism spectrum disorders to those with severe behavioral disorders (SBD). Although a range of treatments are being developed to reduce the occurrence of problem behavior, intervention is usually started after the onset of behavior problems. Yet to be established are neurobiological conditions that might increase the probability an individual develops behavior problems, thus potentially leading to prophylactic treatment. In this study, we analyzed three candidate genes for an association with problem behavior in children with SBD. We obtained participant characteristic and behavior problem data in the form of rating scales and direction observations from a group of males (age= 6 to 10 years) with SBD (N=60) and matched comparisons without SBD (N=60) and tested for associations with polymorphisms in the MAOA promoter gene, SERT gene, and catechol-O-methyl transferase (COMT) gene. We found positive associations between MAOA and COMT genes and problem behavior. In addition, there was a strong interaction between MAOA and COMT genes and the presence of environmental stressors, suggesting a gene x brain x environment effect on problem behavior. |
|
|
|
|
Using Direct Instruction to Improve Educational Outcomes for Children |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Jennifer L. Austin (California State University, Fresno) |
Discussant: Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University) |
CE Instructor: Jennifer L. Austin, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Direct instruction programs have proven beneficial to improving learning outcomes for a wide range of children. This presentation will present three studies in which different DI programs were used to teach important skills to children of various populations (e.g., English language learners, typically developing low SES students, etc.). The effects of the DI curricula on language, mathematics, and calendar performance will be presented. For the majority of participants in all studies, the use of DI programs was associated with improvements in performance across all target behaviors and assessments. |
|
The Effects of a Direct Instruction Math Program on Higher-Order Problem Solving Skills. |
JENNIFER L. AUSTIN (California State University, Fresno), Pamela Christofori (Tri-County TEC) |
Abstract: One of the most firmly held beliefs of educators who object to Direct Instruction programs is that they are only appropriate for teaching basic skills, and subsequently impede the development of higher order problem-solving skills. This study was designed to examine the validity of this criticism. Specifically, the study sought to determine whether students taught basic addition and subtraction skills using Saxon Mathematics (a DI program) were able to generalize those skills to solve more advanced mathematics problems requiring the same skill set. Using a multiple baseline design, the effects of the DI program on two groups of 2nd graders with low math performance were assessed. Math word problem probes were administered during both baseline and treatment sessions to assess the children’s performance on higher-order math skills. For both groups and all participants, the Saxon Math curriculum produced immediate and positive changes in mathematics performance. In addition, the novice teacher who taught the DI math lessons reported that the program was easy to learn, easy to use, and produced visible changes in the students’ math skills. |
|
The Impact of Language for Learning and Language for Thinking. |
LAURA D. FREDRICK (Georgia State University), Alice Nanda (Georgia State University), Amy C. Scarborough (Georgia State University) |
Abstract: Language for Learning was taught to 163 kindergarten students while Language for Thinking was taught to 167 first grade students, 40 of whom were Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL). The Peabody Picture Vocabulary Test—3rd Edition (PPVT-III) and six subtests of the Test of Language Development—Primary 3rd Edition (TOLD-P3) were administered as pre and posttest assessments with approximately eight months of language instruction between administrations. For both kindergarten and first grade students and for the 40 ESOL students there was a statistically significant improvement on the PPVT-III and on all administered subtests of the TOLD-P3 based on age norms. The improvement from pre to posttest for both percentile scores and standard scores was statistically significant for both kindergarten and first grade students on all six composite scores of the TOLD-P3—Listening, Organizing, Speaking, Semantics, Syntax, and Total Spoken Language. For ESOL students, there was a statistically significant improvement on all composite scores of the TOLD-P3 except for the Listening Composite. According to teacher log data, during the instructional days between the pre and posttest teachers averaged one lesson every two days. |
|
Teaching Calendar Concepts and Operations to Preschoolers: Comparisons between Traditional and a Direct Instruction Program. |
PAUL WEISBERG (University of Alabama), Roberta Stark Weisberg (Tuscaloosa Association for Citizens with Mental Retardation) |
Abstract: Traditional calendar instruction in the early grades is a ubiquitous and useful activity, but it suffers from many programming deficiencies which slow the rate of progress of many concepts and operations. At least five negative outcomes are likely to result because of programming limitations: (1) teaching of generalized date identification is severely delayed; (2) insufficient practice and cumulative review results because only a few of these events are usually practiced during each day; (3) learning to report the dates by saying the month and the relevant ordinal number is not taught; (4) children are not independently tested for reporting different dates either for the current or other months; (5) a calendar table filled with an assortment of unknown stimuli can lead to distractions that interfere with the learning basic calendar facts and skills. In the present DI program, the calendar content was divided into smaller teaching units called Tracks. Comparisons of mostly at-risk kindergarten-entering children taught by the DI program with three kindergarten classes taught through traditional calendar procedures revealed substantial and significant difference in favor of the DI group after one school year. The content areas assessed were calendar facts, reporting the sequence of major events without reference to the calendar, calendar operations, and knowledge about special calendar events. |
|
|
|
|
Verbal Behavior: The Model Used for Changing/Expanding the Repertoires of Students and Staff. Everyday Applications across Educational Settings in NYC |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Vinings |
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Gina Marie Feliciano (Shema Kolainu - Hear our Voices) |
Discussant: Susan M. Silvestri (Hawthorne Country Day School) |
CE Instructor: Gina Marie Feliciano, Other |
Abstract: The following symposium will highlight how a non public school in New York City implements verbal behavior teaching procedures for both students and staff. The application of Skinners analysis of verbal behavior has been utilized to increase the rule governed and contingency shaped behaviors of teachers, to evoke initial verbal operants from young children and as a framework for implementing speech and language services and augmentative and alternative communication devices for students with an autism spectrum disorder. Our goal is to demonstrate how verbal behavior and applied behavior analysis can be integrated into an entire educational system to change student and staff behaviors. |
|
Changing the Behavior of Teachers through Video Monitoring and Supervisor Presented Instruction. |
SARAH NATARELLI (Shema Kolainu - Hear our Voices), Gina Marie Feliciano (Shema Kolainu - Hear our Voices) |
Abstract: Research has shown that providing learn units to teachers in the form of teacher performance rate and accuracy in center based settings is effective for changing the repertoires of teachers (Ingham, & Greer, 1992). However supervision for teachers providing discrete trial training in a community based setting does not always allow for frequent, intensive supervision and training. The purpose of this study was to investigate the efficacy of video monitoring and learn unit delivery to teachers as a model for changing rule governed and contingency shaped behavior of teachers. Three teachers who provided discrete trial training in a community based setting participated in this study. A multiple treatment design was used to teach teachers specific target behaviors to improve teacher repertoires and in turn student performance. |
|
The Increased use of Verbal Operants Following the Implementation of Augmentative and Alternative Communication (AAC) Devices with Children on the Autism Spectrum. |
GILI P. RECHANY (Shema Kolainu - Hear our Voices), Megan Anne Petrizio (Shema Kolainu - Hear our Voices) |
Abstract: The current investigation focused on the evaluation and implementation of AAC devices with school age children presenting with an autism spectrum disorder. This study examined the prerequisite skills needed for successful implementation of an AAC device by examining the children’s performance on the ABLLS assessment, as well direct observation of functional communication in the classroom. A multiple baseline across participants design was implemented. This study measured the increase in verbal operants following the implementation of augmentative and alternative communication (AAC), and examined the verbal behavior procedures used to implement the AAC. Three verbal behavior topographies were measured, generalized mands, generalized tacts, and generalized intraverbals. |
|
The Use of a Pairing Procedure in Conditioning Vocalizations to Evoke Parroting and Echoic Responses to Teach Mands. |
CHANIE KESSLER (Shema Kolainu - Hear our Voices), Gina Marie Feliciano (Shema Kolainu - Hear our Voices), Jessica D. Rodriguez (Shema Kolainu - Hear our Voices) |
Abstract: The current investigation used a stimulus- stimulus pairing procedure to condition vocalizations as reinforcers in order to increase the frequency and number of vocalizations that could be used to teach an echoic response to nonvocal verbal children. Once parroting responses were evoked an echoic to mand function was taught using a multiple baseline design. Following pre-experimental observations target vocalizations were identified for parroting and echoic training and pairing. Upon meeting criterion in pairing an echoic to mand training procedure was used, followed by a return to the pre-pairing condition. The data suggest that a pairing procedure was effective in evoking parroting responses which could then be taught as echoics, for some students. |
|
|
|
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Professional Development Series: Introduction to Acceptance and Commitment Therapy |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: CBM |
Chair: Marianne L. Jackson (University of Nevada, Reno) |
CE Instructor: Steven C. Hayes, Ph.D. |
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Professional Development Series: Introduction to Acceptance and Commitment Therapy |
Abstract: Behavior analysis has had a hard time penetrating the mainstream of psychology since the rise of cognitive psychology. The two primary barriers underlying this problem are a lack of clarity and understanding of the philosophical core of radical behaviorism, and the need for a comprehensive and experimentally adequate account of language and cognition. The first is primarily a terminological problem that is rectified by functional contextualism; the second is an empirical and theoretical problem that is rectified by Relational Frame Theory. With these two barriers removed, there is nothing to prevent behavior analysis from capturing center stage in many areas of psychology, but the form of behavior analysis results is decidedly post-Skinnerian -- that is, true to the Skinnerian tradition philosophically and empirically, but distinct in its approach to complex human behavior as a consequence of empirical developments. The empirical and political success of Acceptance and Commitment Therapy is offered as a concrete demonstration of the success of this strategy. Other possible extensions are briefly explored. |
|
STEVEN C. HAYES (University of Nevada, Reno) |
|
Dr. Steven C. Hayes is Nevada Foundation Professor at the Department of Psychology at the University of Nevada. An author of twenty five books and 340 scientific articles, his career has focused on an analysis of the nature of human language and cognition from a behavior analytic point of view and the application of this to the understanding and alleviation of human suffering. In 1992 he was listed by the Institute for Scientific Information as the 30th "highest impact" psychologist in the world during 1986-1990 based on the citation impact of his writings during that period. Dr. Hayes has been President of Division 25 (Behavior Analysis) of the American Psychological Association, of the American Association of Applied and Preventive Psychology and of the Association for Advancement of Behavior Therapy. He was the first Secretary-Treasurer of the American Psychological Society, which he helped form. He has received the Don F. Hake Award for Exemplary Contributions to Basic Behavioral Research and Its Applications from Division 25 (Behavior Analysis) of the American Psychological Association and was appointed by US Health and Human Services Secretary Donna Shalala to a 5-year term on the National Advisory Council on Drug Abuse in the National Institutes of Health. |
|
|
|
|
|
Verbal Behavior and Autism Intervention |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom I |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Mark L. Sundberg, Ph.D. |
Chair: Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University) |
MARK L. SUNDBERG (Sundberg and Associates) |
Dr. Mark L. Sundberg received his doctorate degree in Applied Behavior Analysis from Western Michigan University (1980), under the direction of Dr. Jack Michael. Dr. Sundberg is a Licensed Psychologist and Board Certified Behavior Analyst who has been conducting language research with children with autism for over 30 years. He is the founder and past editor of the journal The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, and is the co-author (with James W. Partington) of the books Teaching Language to Children with Autism or Other Developmental Disabilities, The Assessment of Basic Language and Learning Skills: The ABLLS, and (with Jack Michael) A Collection of Reprints on Verbal Behavior. He has published over 40 professional papers, given over 400 conference presentations and workshops, and taught 80 college courses on behavior analysis, verbal behavior, sign language, and child development. Dr. Sundberg received the 2001 “Distinguished Psychology Department Alumnus Award” from Western Michigan University. |
Abstract: Should we stop doing mand and intraverbal language training for children with autism? It was suggested by Green (2005) that language training procedures for children with autism that are based on Skinners (1957) analysis of verbal behavior should not be disseminated until data supporting those procedures are obtained. The purpose of the current presentation will be to present an analysis of the existing data on the mand and intraverbal relations. In addition, an analysis of how the mand and intraverbal repertoires are addressed and taught in traditional discrete trial programs will presented. The results will show that there is empirical support for the distinction between the mand, tact, and intraverbal, and it is a mistake to assume these repertoire will emerge from the tact only training common to most discrete trial curricula. |
|
|
|
|
Behavior Analysis and Biomedical Psychiatry: Conflicting Concepts and Treatment Approaches |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Baker |
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Stephen E. Wong (Florida International University) |
CE Instructor: Stephen E. Wong, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium examines some conflicting concepts and treatment approaches of behavior analysis and biomedical psychiatry, with a critical eye on assumptions underlying the biomedical model and financial backing of this model by the pharmaceutical industry. Dr. Wyatts presentation discusses external pressures on the profession of psychiatry and dynamics within the profession that encouraged it to adopt a biomedical approach to mental disorders. This philosophical realignment allowed the new biomedical psychiatry to regain its dominant position over the other mental health professions, including behavior analysis. Dr. Winstons presentation by takes a humorous look at logical fallacies in DSM-IV diagnoses and pharmacological treatments. It also provides a behavioral re-interpretation of some common mental disorders. Dr. Wongs presentation compares behavioral and biomedical treatments for schizophrenia and depression. It also examines ideological, political, and economic forces that promote the latter over the former, regardless of the latters scientific merits. |
|
Psychiatry’s Flight from Science: A Profession’s Headlong, Non-empirical Rush to Biological Explanations. |
W. JOSEPH WYATT (Marshall University) |
Abstract: Psychiatry underwent a struggle of reduced professional esteem within and outside the medical profession, starting in the 1960s and 1970s. The percentage of medical school graduates choosing psychiatry as their specialty declined by more than half, from 11% to 5% from 1970 to 1980. Adding to organized psychiatry’s concerns was the influx into the mental health arena of increasing numbers of non-physicians (behavior analysts, clinical psychologists, counselors, clinical social workers) who threatened to undermine both psychiatry’s status and patient base. In response, organized psychiatry turned toward increasing reliance upon biological explanations of complex behaviors, including most depressive disorders, anxiety disorders, child conduct disorders and others. As a result, over the past several decades the culture has been inundated with claims of biological causation, often minus empirical support. With those claims has come the suggestion that physicians are the best qualified to undertake treatment, and that medication is the treatment of choice. This presentation will review the history of the biological causation movement of the past thirty-five years, with suggestions for dealing with the phenomenon at a community level. |
|
A Behavioral Analytic Look at Mental Disorders, the DSM-IV, and Functional Effects of Psychotropic Medications. |
MERRILL WINSTON (Professional Crisis Management, Inc.) |
Abstract: This presentation critiques diagnostic criteria for mental disorders listed in the DSM-IV, as well as examines functional effects of medications (in terms of behavior) as opposed to their supposed neurochemical effects. The presentation provides behavior analysts with a framework that they may use to better understand mental disorders and how treatment goals may be formulated. Participants will also be more prepared to “get to the heart of the matter” regarding the problems that give rise to a particular diagnosis. Individuals will also be better equipped to help evaluate the effectiveness and appropriateness of various medications as they pertain to target behaviors. |
|
Behavioral vs. Biomedical Treatments for Schizophrenia and Depression. |
STEPHEN E. WONG (Florida International University) |
Abstract: This paper will examine biomedical and behavioral treatments for two mental problems, schizophrenia and depression, revealing that the current dominance of biomedical approaches to these problems is not based on their superior treatment efficacy. Some of the serious side-effects of biomedical treatments, typically psychotropic drugs, will be reviewed. Reasons why biomedical and pharmacological solutions are the dominant approach to dealing with these problems will be discussed, including: huge profits garnered by the pharmaceutical industry, industry-controlled clinical research, drug company sponsorship of professional education, extensive media advertising campaigns, financial influence of client advocacy groups, infiltration of government regulatory agencies, and lobbying of legislative representatives. |
|
|
|
|
Evaluation of Deviant Sexual Behavior in Sex Offenders with Developmental Disabilities |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Jorge Rafael Reyes (University of Florida) |
CE Instructor: Timothy R. Vollmer, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium will include four papers describing various methods for the assessment and treatment sex offenders with developmental disabilities. The first presentation, given by Robert Reed, is a discussion of some of the cultural issues related to sexual deviance including the historical development of assessing and treating deviant sexual behavior. The second presentation, given by Jorge Reyes, shows outcome data from the assessment and treatment of deviant sexual arousal. The third presentation given by Cristina Whitehouse, describes two novel assessment procedures. One of the procedures involves assessing responding in high-risk situations, and the other involves assessing preference for deviant stimuli (e.g., pictures of children) through the use of a computerized program. The final presentation, given by David Pyles, involves a discussion of assessments and services needed for sex offenders with developmental disabilities that may differ from needs posed by non-developmentally delayed offenders. |
|
Deviant Sexual Behavior in our Culture. |
ROBERT H. REED (The Seguin Unit), Astrid Hall (The Seguin Unit), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Jorge Rafael Reyes (University of Florida), Kimberly Sloman (University of Florida) |
Abstract: The focus of the current presentation is on the historical issues related to identifying, assessing, and treating deviant sexual arousal. Cultural and legal factors related to sexual deviance will be discussed with a special emphasis on the feasibility or lack thereof for community reintegration with sex offenders with developmental disabilities. Three general themes will be elaborated upon. One, “deviant” sexual behavior is a relative and culturally defined phenomenon. Two, existing research is inadequate to determine whether sexual behavior deemed deviant in our culture can be modified to safe levels. Three, the issue of reintegration is especially complex for offenders with developmental disabilities, due to the tenuous balance between public safety and active, personalized, treatment. |
|
Replications and Extensions in Plethysmograph Based Arousal Assessments. |
JORGE RAFAEL REYES (University of Florida), Astrid Hall (The Seguin Unit) |
Abstract: Previous research by our group has shown that the use of the penile plethysmograph, designed to measure penile tumescence in the presence of various stimuli, can identify differential patterns of arousal for sex offenders with developmental disabilities. For example, Reyes et al. (in press), identified three general outcomes: a) deviant arousal to a specific age category and gender, b) deviant arousal across a range of child age groups, and c) no deviant arousal. The current clinical evaluation consisted of two separate components. The first component was a replication of Reyes et al., and involved conducting additional arousal assessments with 4 participants. Results from the arousal assessments showed similar patterns of responding as in the previous study. The second component involved an evaluation of pre-session masturbation on arousal. For this investigation, the participants were instructed to masturbate immediately (i.e., within 5-min) before the session was conducted. Results showed decreased levels of arousal during the pre-session masturbation sessions. Treatment implications for these types of manipulations as well as other potential manipulations will be discussed. |
|
A Description of Two Novel Assessment Components. |
CRISTINA M. WHITEHOUSE (University of Florida), Jorge Rafael Reyes (University of Florida), Andrew Samaha (University of Florida), Kimberly Sloman (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), G. Wade Brodkorb (The Seguin Unit) |
Abstract: Two assessment components for sex offenders with developmental disabilities will be described. Ultimately, these assessment components will be part of a more comprehensive assessment protocol. The first procedure involves assessing responding in high-risk situations. The procedures were based on other studies that involved covertly observing people placed in high-risk situations (e.g., Himle et al., 2005). Participants, who believed they were alone, were observed in a waiting room (via a one-way mirror) that contained both appropriate materials (e.g., sports and car magazines) and high-risk materials (e.g., magazines with pictures of children). Data were collected on their responses to the high-risk and appropriate materials. The second procedure involves a visual preference assessment in which participants select one of three different pictures that vary in terms of gender, age, and more specific characteristics within categories such as hair and eye color. By determining specific victim characteristics this information could be included as one component of a larger evaluation of risk of re-offense. Although the primary purpose of this presentation is to describe methodology, some preliminary data from each procedure will be presented. |
|
Risk Assessment and Supervision Needs for Sexual and Criminal Offenders with Developmental Disabilities. |
DAVID A. PYLES (Illinois DHS Division of Developmental Disabilities) |
Abstract: A number of standardized assessment instruments have been developed to assess risk of sexual offenders reoffending in the future. At this time, the instruments have not been developed or normed for people with developmental disabilities, and in fact may skew the results. Because sexual offenders with developmental disabilities do not reflect a homogeneous population, the assessment of risk and programming/supervision needs become particularly important. This presentation discusses risk factors and supervisory needs of non-charged and charged sex offenders. |
|
|
|
|
International Symposium - Imitation Its Sources, Lines of Fracture, and Role in Expanding Behavioral Repertoires |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Singapore |
Area: DEV; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Jacob L. Gewirtz (Florida International University) |
Discussant: Jacob L. Gewirtz (Florida International University) |
CE Instructor: Jacob L. Gewirtz, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Imitation is widely considered fundamental in human learning, in natural development as well as in special education programs for developmentally disabled persons. The purposes of the present symposium are to review (1) the history of imitation theory and empirical research, (2) current research questions and empirical data, (3) conceptual issues, and (4) directions for future behavior-analytic research on imitation. |
|
The History of Imitation Research and Suggestions for its Future. |
MARICEL CIGALES (Advance Behavior Consulting) |
Abstract: The act of imitating is widely considered fundamental for normal human learning and development. Imitation has been ascribed an important role in cognitive, language, moral and social development. This is evidenced by the more than 500 peer-reviewed articles published on the subject between 1967 and 2005. Yet, there is no consensus on the mechanisms of imitation. Multiple theories have been proposed to account for why and how humans imitate. This paper reviews the history and trends in imitation theory and empirical research. The role of imitation in higher-order learning processes is explored and directions for future behavior analytic research on imitation are suggested. |
|
Stimulus Control in Generalized Imitation. |
DEBRA PAONE (Graduate School and University Center, City University of New York), Claire L. Poulson (Graduate School and University Center, City University of New York) |
Abstract: This study examined the extent to which imitation generalizes within a set of stimulus models that can be arrayed along a physical continuum. The participants, three typically developing children, were presented with a choice to imitate one of two stimulus models during both probe and training trials. During training trials, one of two stimulus models that occasioned reinforcement was presented with one stimulus model that never occasioned reinforcement. Probe trials, which were interspersed among training trials, were used to measure the extent to which imitation generalized within a set of stimulus models. Imitation of stimulus models used during probe trials was never reinforced. Following training, tests of generalization were conducted under extinction conditions. The data showed that as the physical similarity of the probe models to the S+ models increased, the level of imitative responding increased. The results are discussed in terms of stimulus control of imitative responding. |
|
Imitation as Continuous Repertoires. |
PER HOLTH (The Behavioral Center, Oslo) |
Abstract: A multiple exemplar training aimed at establishing imitative skills must necessarily consist of a limited number of exemplars in which reinforcement is contingent upon responses that are similar to the responses of a “model”. Such “imitation training” may sometimes be considered successful when a certain number of directly taught performances can occur in mixed order with few or no errors. However, this result may be nothing more than a series of separately reinforced discriminated operants in which the similarity between responding and the responses of a “model” remains irrelevant to the controlling relation. Instead, a true imitative repertoire can be characterized as a continuous repertoire in which novel values on some dimension of behavior varies as a function of similar novel values on that dimension of the behavior of a “model”. However, in behavior analysis, characterizations, be it higher-order classes, relational frames, or continuous repertoires, remain characterizations rather than explanations. Sources, possible prerequisites, and optimal sequencing of tasks to facilitate the development of continuous repertoires still need to be investigated. |
|
|
|
|
International Symposium - The Implicit Association Test (IAT) and Derived Relational Responding: Conceptual Analyses and Empirical Tools |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Dunwoody |
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College) |
CE Instructor: Maria R. Ruiz, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The Implicit Association Test (I.A.T.) developed by Anthony Greenwald is said to measure unconscious cognitions that influence attitudes and preferences towards a wide range of social phenomena including race, politics and views on sexual orientation. Interestingly, the I.A.T. technique bears a striking similarity to behavioral methods of attitude and behavior assessment that rely on the concept of stimulus equivalence and derived relational responding. Our symposium provides an overview of the I.A.T and outlines its relevance to behavioral research in the social sciences. We will present a functional analytic model of the IAT in terms of derived stimulus relations and data supporting the behavioral account will be outlined. |
|
The IAT and Derived Relational Histories as Epistemological Tools. |
BRYAN T. ROCHE (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College), Amanda Gavin (National University of Ireland, Maynooth) |
Abstract: The Implicit Association Test was developed by Anthony Geenwald and colleagues (1998) for the express purpose of identifying racial prejudice. In the test a participant responds to a series of items on a computer screen that can be classified into four categories; usually two representing a concept such as race (eg black, white) and two representing an attribute (pleasant/unpleasant). Participants respond more rapidly and accurately when the concept and attribute sharing the same response key are strongly associated (white/pleasant) than when they are weakly associated (lack/pleasant). We have begun to construct a functional-analytic model of the Implicit Association Test in which the effects are construed in terms of the subjects’ fluency with verbal categories (ie. derived relations) and their degree of experience juxtaposing members of those categories. We will present data on relational verbal histories constructed in the laboratory and employing nonsense syllables, and from field studies using actual words that we assume participate in culturally driven relational histories to illustrate our model and its potential uses. |
|
Juxtaposing Images of Children and Sexually Explicit Words: Gender and Criminal History as Predictors of the IAT Effect. |
MARIA R. RUIZ (Rollins College), Bryan T. Roche (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Kevin M. Miraglia (Rollins College) |
Abstract: Roche, Ruiz, O’Riordan and Hand (2005) used an IAT-type procedure to examine differences in relational responding between paedophiles serving time for sex crimes against children, male criminals from the general prison population and a random sample of non incarcerated individuals (male and female) from the general population. The procedure is designed to assess participants’ fluency in associating terms related to sexuality with images of children. On one block of tasks participants are presented with rules that instruct them to press left for sexual terms and images of children and right for horrible words and images of adults. On any given trial a cartoon image of a child, a cartoon of an adult, a sexually explicit word, or a nonsexual disgusting word is presented. Thus there are four types of trials, each presented twenty times in a quasi random order. The results suggest that paedophiles make significantly more correct responses when child images and sexual terms require the same operant response. Thus the convicted paedophiles were distinguishable from the other groups using these tests. An unexpected but very interesting finding was that only the female control group responded with fewer errors when adult images –sexual words and child images -horrible words shared the same operant response. In the current study we are replicating our procedure to examine the apparent sex differences in relational responding using sexually explicit words and images of children. We will discuss the potential implications of our results. |
|
A Derived Relations Model of the Implicit Association Test: Testing a Key Prediction. |
AMANDA GAVIN (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Bryan T. Roche (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College) |
Abstract: Subjects were exposed to a word-picture association training phase in which two nonsense syllables, one blue and one red, were paired with sexual and disgusting images, respectively. Subjects were then exposed to an equivalence training procedure which led to the formation of two three-member equivalence relations, each containing one of the two nonsense syllables. Subjects were then exposed to an IAT-type test consisting of red, blue, sexual, and disgusting images and a more complex IAT-type test consisting of sexual and disgusting images, and all members of the trained equivalence relations. Subjects were then exposed to a further equivalence training procedure in which one of the baseline conditional discriminations was reversed, before being re-exposed to the original IAT. Results suggested that IAT performances can be understood as relational performances, and moreover that such performances are sensitive to respondent conditioning histories, as well as both long term and short-term relational histories with the relevant stimuli. |
|
Acquisition and Generalization of the Implicit Association Test (I.A.T.) Effect: A Replication. |
CHRISTEINE M. TERRY (University of Washington), Bryan T. Roche (National University of Ireland, Maynooth), Maria R. Ruiz (Rollins College) |
Abstract: The Implicit Association Test (I.A.T.) is hypothesized to measure unconscious attitudinal biases/preferences. Recent research on the I.A.T. using a derived stimulus relations’ model suggests that the I.A.T. does not measure unconscious attitudinal bias, but instead provides a description of the organization of the verbal relations in an individual’s verbal repertoire. Specifically, this model suggests that the I.A.T. effect is the result of an individual’s fluency with specific types of verbal relations. The current paper further investigates the use of the I.A.T. as a measure of an individual’s organization of verbal relations by reporting on an ongoing study designed to examine and replicate findings from a previous study that tested a derived stimulus relations’ model of the I.A.T. effect. The method used in both studies involved participants matching stimuli that are either equivalent or non-equivalent in a given context. The results from the previous study found participants’ performances improved across trials and generalized to another set of equivalent stimuli. These findings suggest that the I.A.T. effect is not based on unconscious attitudinal bias, but on the participant’s experience and fluency with the task. Preliminary results from the ongoing study will be discussed along with implications and extensions of the paradigm. |
|
|
|
|
The Use of Staff Training and Performance Feedback to Increase Staff Performance in Community Based Day and Residential Settings |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Techwood |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: John Stokes (Charles River ARC) |
CE Instructor: John Stokes, M.S. |
Abstract: The following studies review the use of current training strategies and their effects on staff performance in community treatment settings. The first studies review the use of performance feedback on staffs ability to exhibit desired appropriate behaviors in the at a vocational training program. The studies also examine the effects combined with video modeling. The second study examines the effects of staff training on the reliability of indirect assessment of challenging behavior across three day treatment setting. The third study demonstrates how to implement the combination of performance feedback and video modeling to increase the implementation of behavioral treatment programs. |
|
Becoming Measurable and Observable: The Use of Performance feedback and Video modeling in Training Clinical Competence and Vocational Skills in an adult program. |
JOHN STOKES (Charles River ARC), John C. Randall (Charles River ARC), Donna Gagne (Charles River ARC), Liz Deren (Charles River ARC) |
Abstract: A three step performance training program was implemented across 4 day programs. The goal of the training was to instruct staff in how to increase their delivery of positive consequences for appropriate behaviors as well as provide extinction for undesirable behaviors. The program involved defining desired staff behavior, training and performance feedback. The procedure resulted in increased rates of appropriate teaching behaviors being exhibited by staff working in the respected programs. (Parsons et.al, 2004). The greatest increase in teaching behavior by staff was demonstrated during the performance feedback session of the training. All staff increases their performance to at least 90% within 4 trials during this session. Data is displayed graphically and results are discussed in terms of using effective staff training as a means of increasing the use of intervention procedure and individuals performance in a vocational program. Inter-observer agreement data was taken for 30% of trial for each subject. There was a mean IOA of 89% with a range of 76% to 100%. |
|
The Effects of Staff Training on the Reliability Analysis of the MAS, FAST, and PBS. |
AMY SLYMAN (Vinfen Corporation), Jennifer L. Link (Vinfen Corporation), Diana Poles (Vinfen Corporation), Michael F. Dorsey (Vinfen Corporation & Simmons College) |
Abstract: The MAS, FAST, and PBS are widely used indirect functional assessment instruments. All three are questionnaires contain likert based scales designed to determine the function of an individual’s behavior. Zarcone et al., (1991) published a study demonstrating that inter-rater reliability on the MAS was well below the generally accepted 80%. The current study expanded on those findings. The staff of three day programs (n=60) serving adults diagnosed with mental retardation completed the MAS, FAST, and PBS in groups of two to three staff for a single subject. Staff then received training in a didactic format regarding functional analysis and role plays in completing each of the respective scales. These trainings were staggered in a multiple baseline fashion across the three day programs. After completion of the training the staff then completed a second series of scales for a second time on a new set of subjects. The primary dependant variable was the Interobserver Reliability scores on each of the three scales calculated as in the Zarcone et al., (1991) study. The results demonstrated the effects of training on staff reliability scores. |
|
The Use of Digital Video Recording and Performance Feedback to Increase Program Implementation. |
AMY INCLIMA WOOD (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Angela Glavin (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center), Susan Ainsleigh (Simmons College) |
Abstract: Treatment integrity and program implementation are consistent issues for agencies serving individuals with developmental disabilities. This study presents the use of live Digital Video Recording (DVR) and examines the effectiveness of immediate versus delayed feedback on program implementation. Subjects in the study included teachers and paraprofessional staff hired to implement written programs for each student in a classroom. The setting of this study was a day and residential school serving individuals with conduct disorders, emotional disorders, brain injury, psychosis, or autism and other related disabilities. Through the use of DVR, program administrators are able to monitor program implementation for treatment drift; frequency of such deviations were measured. Providing immediate feedback via verbal conference was compared to providing delayed feedback, both in verbal and written format. The effect of various frequencies and format of feedback on program implementation is reported. |
|
The Use of Public Posting to Increase Safety Procedures in a Public School Setting. |
JOHN C. BARKER (Simmons College), Susan Ainsleigh (Simmons College) |
Abstract: In this study, areas for improvement in school safety were identified after consultation with local law enforcement. Two specific problems were identified at a public elementary school: 1) staff and visitors to the school were not consistently wearing required employee and visitor badges while working or visiting the school building and 2) staff members were not enforcing the visitor sticker program, nor were they approaching individuals in the school who were not displaying proper identification. This study used public posting throughout the school building to increase compliance with identification procedures. Results demonstrated a significant increase in staff and visitor compliance with school safety procedures. |
|
|
|
|
Token Reinforcement Systems: Investigations on the Value of Tokens and the Selection of Back-Up Reinforcers |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Manila |
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University) |
CE Instructor: Iser Guillermo DeLeon, Ph.D. |
Abstract: In both basic and applied behavior analysis, the consequent stimuli that maintain behavior often derive their reinforcing function from their association with stimuli that have previously been established as reinforcers. Termed conditioned reinforcers, these stimuli play a crucial and ubiquitous role not only in our understanding of learning processes, but in the application of behavioral principles to the solution of socially-relevant behavioral problems, perhaps most conspicuously in the establishment of token reinforcement systems. The present symposium will attempt to expand further our knowledge of the factors that modulate the efficacy of tokens and other behaviorally neutral stimuli as conditioned reinforcers. Specifically, the presentations will discuss (1) token value as a function of response effort, (2) changes in efficacy during the conditioning process to establish tokens as reinforcers, (3) the correspondence between preference assessment outcomes and the selection of back-up reinforcers and (4) direct comparisons of response maintenance between primary and token reinforcers. |
|
Sensitivity to Token Loss as a Function of Earning Requirements. |
LISA M. TOOLE (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University), David M. Richman (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Gregory A. Lieving (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Melissa J. Allman (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: The purpose of the current investigation was to examine the influence of earning requirements on the differential value of token reinforcers. Subjects participated in two phases. In Phase 1, experimental subjects were required to earn 20 tokens by identifying target stimuli in a field of stimuli. Control subjects were simply given 20 tokens (no earning requirement), one at a time, while the times of gains and losses were yoked from an experimental subject. All subjects then had the opportunity in Phase 2 to gamble with their tokens during discrete trials that each could result in a win or loss. The probability of a loss during these trials increased systematically across blocks of 10 trials. Of primary interest was the number of trials in Phase 2 at which the participant opted to escape from the task (i.e., cash out tokens). Generally, those who earned their 20 tokens in Phase 1 spent less time in Phase 2 and opted out sooner than those who received free tokens. These results are discussed in terms of the possible direct, positive relation between the effort required to earn tokens and the subsequent value of those tokens, particularly as value relates to the efficacy of response cost. |
|
An Assessment of the Reinforcing Efficacy of Tokens. |
STACIE L. FITCH (New England Center for Children), Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: Participants were 5 children diagnosed with autism. All sessions were conducted in the children’s classroom. Participants were exposed to three conditions (contingent tokens, contingent edibles, and extinction) in a multielement design. Sessions ended following 5 min or following the delivery of the number of reinforcers that matched the number of tokens that the subjects typically earned prior to token exchange. In the contingent tokens and contingent edibles conditions, consequences were delivered according to a random interval (RI) schedule which was arranged such that the number of arranged reinforcers in the session matched the number of tokens that the participant typically earned before exchange in his daily programming (e.g., if a participant usually exchanged tokens after the delivery of 10 tokens, an RI 30-s schedule was used such that, on average, 10 tokens or edibles would be arranged for delivery contingent upon responding). The edibles used were those that typically served as back-up reinforcers for the tokens earned by the participants outside of experimental sessions. The tokens used, were also those already in use for each participant. The data indicated that the tokens served as reinforcers for two participants but not for the other three. The results suggested that the methodology used in the study may be useful in identifying the reinforcing efficacy of tokens currently being used for behavioral programming. |
|
Token Training and Motivating Operation Effects on the Outcomes of Preference and Reinforcer Assessments. |
CARLY MOHER EBY (New England Center for Children, Northeastern University), Daniel Gould (New England Center for Children), Richard B. Graff (New England Center for Children), Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: Preference assessments have been shown to be effective procedures for identifying potential reinforcers. Typically, the stimuli included in preference assessments are limited to edible or activity items, rather than conditioned reinforcers (e.g., tokens). The present studies made use of preference- and reinforcer-assessment procedures to evaluate the reinforcing efficacy of tokens as they were being established as conditioned reinforcers (Experiment 1). Three participants underwent a series of paired-stimulus preference assessments with edibles and tokens. In token training, novel stimuli were paired repeatedly with either the participants’ highest- or lowest-preferred edible items. Reinforcer assessments were carried out using a multi-element design across conditions of baseline, novel tokens, and conditioned tokens. Following this, the effects of motivating operations on the reinforcing effectiveness of tokens was tested (Experiment 2). The reinforcing effectiveness of tokens and edibles was assessed in an ABAB design. Controlled-access and satiation conditions were compared. Results for Experiment 1 indicated that the tokens were effectively established as conditioned reinforcers. Results for Experiment 2 indicated that reinforcer effectiveness decreased for both edibles and tokens during satiation relative to the controlled-access condition. |
|
Correspondence Between Preference Assessments and Actual Item Selection. |
KIMBERLY SLOMAN (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Jorge Rafael Reyes (University of Florida) |
Abstract: We conducted a study to evaluate the correspondence between various preference assessments and actual item selection for highly verbal adult males with developmental disabilities. First, we conducted a verbal preference assessment with items in the unit token store and compared the results with actual items purchased. Next, preference assessments were conducted using picture representations of the items and correspondence was again assessed. Finally, preference assessments using the actual items were conducted. There was little to no correspondence between any of the preference assessment methods and actual item selection. Additionally, there was little correspondence between assessment types (e.g. verbal compared to picture preference assessment). However, there was high to perfect correspondence between token store selections across months. Implications for reinforcer assessments with individuals who have extensive verbal repertoires will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Using Voice Output Communication Aids with Children with Autism and Other Developmental Disabilities |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Regency VI |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Melissa L. Olive (University of Texas, Austin) |
CE Instructor: Melissa L. Olive, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Children with autism and other developmental disabilities often fail to develop spoken language. Consequently, augmentative or alternative communication (AAC) strategies must be made available to ensure the development of expressive communication skills. One type of AAC is the use of a voice output communication aid (VOCA). This session will focus on the use of VOCAs to teach a variety of communication skills. The first paper will briefly overview the types of AAC products available to consumers. Strengths and weaknesses of each will be highlighted. The second paper will review the literature on the combined use of FCT and VOCA for young children. Areas for application and future research will be discussed. The third paper will present the results of a study where a 4-button VOCA was used to teach greeting skills to children with autism. The fourth paper will present the results of teaching a child to request attention using a VOCA during play activities. |
|
Overview of Voice Output Communication Aids. |
BERENICE DE LA CRUZ (University of Texas, Austin), Melissa L. Olive (University of Texas, Austin), Tonya Nichole Davis (University of Texas, Austin), Russell Lang (Lake Travis Independent School District), Hyung-Mee Kim (University of Texas, Austin) |
Abstract: This paper will provide an overview of the types of VOCA available to consumers. Relevant literature will be presented to support the use of such devices. Finally, literature will be used to describe the strengths and weaknesses of each device. |
|
A Literature Review of the Combined use of FCT and VOCA with Young Children. |
HYUNG-MEE KIM (University of Texas, Austin), Melissa L. Olive (University of Texas, Austin) |
Abstract: Studies have demonstrated that AAC is a beneficial intervention for children with severe communication delays. Unfortunately, AAC is not widely accepted and used with young children. One could assume then, that children with severe communication delays and challenging behavior will likely need an intervention package consisting of FCT and AAC. However, if AAC strategies are underutilized with young children; it is likely that the combined use of FCT and AAC is also underutilized. Therefore, the purpose of this paper is to complete a literature review of studies where AAC strategies were combined with FCT for young children. 17 articles were reviewed. A total of 28 children participated in the 17 studies across settings such as clinical, home, and educational settings. Most participants were male, nonverbal, diagnosed with mental retardation, and engaged in self-injury or aggressive behavior. The combination of FCT and AAC has been effective in increasing new communication responses while concomitantly reducing challenging behaviors. The most commonly used AAC strategy consisted of symbols and voice output communication aids (VOCAs). |
|
The Effects of Using a VOCA to Teach Greetings to Young Children with Autism. |
RUSSELL LANG (Lake Travis Independent School District), Melissa L. Olive (University of Texas, Austin), Jennifer K. Burns (University of Texas, RISE School), Laura Brown (The Westview School), Amy Narbut (Infant Parent), Jessica Kerfoot (Moore-Weis School for Children), Hsiaoying Chen (University of Texas, Austin) |
Abstract: Children with autism and other developmental disabilities often have delays in communication and social interaction. VOCAs have been used successfully to teach a variety of communication skills. While greeting skills have been taught to children with disabilities (e.g., Barry et al., 2003; Simpson, Langone, & Ayers, 2004), VOCAs have not been used to teach this skill. Therefore, this study sought to teach a social greeting to children with autism and developmental disabilities using a VOCA. A second purpose was to assess for generalization of the greeting skill across behavior therapists. If generalization did not occur spontaneously, systematic training across therapists was used using the method, “train sufficient exemplars”. The results showed rapid skill acquisition for one children using naturalistic intervention. However 1 child needed training using a discrete trial format. Once the greeting skill was acquired, generalization was observed to other therapists. Two children began vocalizing the greeting. |
|
The Effects of Using a VOCA to Teach Attention Requesting to a Young Child with Autism. |
TONYA NICHOLE DAVIS (University of Texas, Austin), Melissa L. Olive (University of Texas, Austin), Russell Lang (Lake Travis Independent School District), Berenice de la Cruz (University of Texas, Austin), Chia-Hui Ma (University of Texas, Austin) |
Abstract: Functional Communication Training is one intervention that may be used to address challenging behavior. However, when the new topography of the behavior requires more response effort than the existing topography (i.e., challenging behavior), skill acquisition may be slow. One way of lessening the response effort of the new communicative skill is to use a Voice Output Communication Aid (VOCA) where only a button pressing response is needed. This study examined the use of a 4-button VOCA to teach attention requesting to a 4-year-old with autism. The child learned to use the VOCA and she began verbalizing the request. Additionally, following intervention she used fewer pronoun reversals than in baseline. |
|
|
|
|
On the Utility of the Concept of Automatic Reinforcement in Applied Behavior Analysis |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Melissa L. Olive, Ph.D. |
Chair: Kent Johnson (Morningside Academy) |
TIMOTHY R. VOLLMER (University of Florida) |
Dr. Timothy R. Vollmer received his Ph.D. from the University of Florida in 1992. From 1992 until 1996 he was on the psychology faculty at Louisiana State University. From 1996 to 1998 he was on the faculty at the University of Pennsylvania Medical School. He returned to the University of Florida in 1998 and is now an Associate Professor of Psychology and recently was named Research Foundation Professor. His primary area of research is applied behavior analysis, with emphases in developmental disabilities, reinforcement schedules, and parenting. He has published over 80 articles and book chapters related to behavior analysis. He was the recipient of the 1996 B.F. Skinner New Researcher award from the American Psychological Association (APA). He received another APA award in August, 2004 for significant contributions to applied behavior analysis. Currently, he is principal investigator for a collaborative project with the Florida Department of Children and Families, teaching parenting skills to foster parents. In addition, his research in developmental disabilities runs the basic-to-applied gamut with studies in an operant rat lab, a human operant lab, and school-based assessments and treatments of behavior disorders. |
Abstract: Automatic reinforcement refers to (positive or negative) reinforcement in the absence of social mediation. Despite early discussions of automatic reinforcement by Skinner and other eminent behaviorists (e.g., Michael), the concept of automatic reinforcement was not widely discussed or incorporated into applied research until the last couple of decades or so. Now, the notion of automatic reinforcement is widespread in applied research and practice. The presenter will show data reflecting the increasing trend of studies on automatic reinforcement. A result of the recent proliferation of research is that we now have enough data to at least begin exploring questions about the utility of the automatic reinforcement concept. While discussing a range of advantages and disadvantages of the concept, the presenter will reach two very general conclusions: 1. The concept of automatic reinforcement is useful because it draws attention to the fact that not all reinforcement is socially mediated, but 2. The concept of automatic reinforcement is limiting when and if it detracts from an analysis of specific stimuli and events that may function as reinforcement. |
|
|
|
|
An Evaluation of Clinical Procedures in Early Intensive Behavioral Intervention Programs for Children with Autism |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Regency VII |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Janice K. Doney (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Discussant: JiYeon H. Yoo (Center for Autism and Related Disorders) |
CE Instructor: Janice K. Doney, M.A. |
Abstract: This symposium addresses effects of clinical procedures that may be encountered in an early intensive behavioral intervention program for children with autism. The first paper is a discussion of an analysis on the effects of decreases in number of treatment hours per week on accuracy of performance on previously mastered tasks and problem behavior. The second paper is a discussion of an examination of whether vocal or non-vocal feedback following an incorrect response is more effective in teaching a child with autism a new skill. The third paper is a discussion of the comparison of retention of academic skills following fluency-based versus discrete trial instruction with children with autism. |
|
Analysis of the Effects of Decreases in Treatment Hours during Early Intervention for Children with Autism. |
SIENNA GREENER-WOOTEN (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Rachel S. F. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Jonathan J. Tarbox (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), JiYeon H. Yoo (Center for Autism and Related Disorders), Doreen Granpeesheh (Center for Autism and Related Disorders) |
Abstract: There is no consensus regarding the optimum number of hours per week of ABA based intervention for children diagnosed with autism. Previous authors have suggested that more than ten hours per week of ABA treatment is necessary to affect significant change (e.g. Lovaas, O.I., 1987; Smith et al, 1997), however, one study found no correlation between change in IQ scores and number of intervention hours per week (Sheinkopf & Siegel, 1998). There are a number of ways to interpret this finding (e.g. perhaps more impaired children received more intensive therapy), but no one has empirically evaluated this as of yet. Moreover, other previous investigators have suggested that 30 to 40 hours per week of therapy results in the greatest treatment gains (for a review see Smith 1999), however often times this recommended level of intervention is not met. Decrements in treatment hours resulting from circumstances such as decreases in funding for services or frequent or prolonged absences from treatment (i.e., for vacation or due to illness) often occur. However, the effects of such circumstances on treatment efficacy have yet to be evaluated. An analysis on the effects of decreases in number of treatment hours per week on accuracy of performance on previously mastered tasks and problem behavior will be presented. |
|
Effects of Vocal and Non-Vocal Feedback on Discrete Trial Instruction with Young Children with Autism. |
AMY KENZER (University of Nevada, Reno), Ginger R. Wilson (University of Nevada, Reno), Patrick M. Ghezzi (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Abstract: Discrete trial instruction has been demonstrated to be very effective in the education of children with autism. However, it is unknown whether vocal or non-vocal feedback following an incorrect response is more effective in teaching a child a new skill. Due to deficits in language development, vocal feedback following an incorrect response (i.e., “No” or “Try again”) may be confused with vocal feedback following a correct response (i.e., “Yes” or “That’s right”). Thus, vocal feedback in general may be reinforcing and lead to continued incorrect responding. Non-vocal feedback following an incorrect response may be less likely confused with the consequence for a correct response. Unfortunately, very little documentation is available to demonstrate that either type of feedback following incorrect responses leads to faster acquisition of a new skill. This study compared vocal and non-vocal feedback on the rate of acquisition of a novel task using discrete trial instruction. |
|
A Comparison of Discrete Trial Instruction and Fluency Instruction on Retention of Academic Tasks with Young Children with Autism. |
AMY KENZER (University of Nevada, Reno), Patrick M. Ghezzi (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Abstract: The use of discrete trials procedures is currently viewed as the method of choice for educating individuals with disabilities. Fluency instruction, in contrast, is rarely implemented with children with autism. Further, investigations concerning potential beneficial outcomes of fluent performance have primarily included undergraduate students. Thus, the extent to which benefits of fluency instruction extends to individuals with developmental disabilities is not known. The retention of academic skills was assessed up to 21 weeks following fluency and discrete trial instruction with children with autism. |
|
|
|
|
Behavioral Parent Training in Child Welfare |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Greenbriar |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Kristin Mayfield (University of Florida) |
Discussant: John R. Lutzker (C.D.C.) |
CE Instructor: Kristin Mayfield, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Three presentations will examine the role of behavioral parent training within the context of child welfare. The first presentation will evaluate program outcomes for the University of Florida Behavior Analysis Services Program (UF-BASP), which provides behavioral parent training to caregivers of children who have been abused and/or neglected and who are currently involved in the child welfare system in Florida. The evaluations will involve both large scale (i.e., over hundreds of caregivers) and single-subject evaluations of the effectiveness of the program at a) teaching parenting skills and b) increasing placement stability for children in foster care. The second presentation will describe a systematic replication of the UF-BASP being conducted at the University of North Texas. Descriptions of the projects progress and future plans will be provided. Our final presentation will describe a behavioral parent training program for parents at risk of committing child maltreatment. Single-subject data on improved parent and child behaviors as a function of parent training will be presented. |
|
The Behavior Analysis Services Program and Caregiver Training: Evaluations of Program Effectiveness. |
CAROLE M. VAN CAMP (University of Florida), Janet L. Montgomery (University of Florida, Behavior Analysis Services Program), Han-Leong Goh (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida) |
Abstract: One of the primary objectives of the Behavior Analysis Initiative involves improving caregiver parenting skills, with the ultimate goals to decrease placement disruptions (the movement of a foster child from one foster home to another) from the homes of trained foster parents. Over the last 4 years, hundreds of caregivers have completed a 30-hour positive parenting course, during which 9 parenting skills are taught. Parent performance on these skills is measured on the first day of class (pre-test) and on the last day of class (post-test) via role-play assessments. Hundreds of caregivers have demonstrated an increase in accurate skill use following the completion of the course. Data on caregiver performance on these A-B assessments will be presented. In addition, more controlled evaluations of caregiver performance, which include repeated measures of parent performance and multiple-baseline across skills designs will be presented for a smaller sample of caregivers. Next, data on the effectiveness of the program in increasing the length of placements for individual children will be presented. Finally, the effects of “booster” remedial training on parent performance on skills assessments will be described. |
|
Reducing Child Maltreatment in Texas: The Texas Child Welfare Project. |
AARON A. JONES (BehaviorMachine.com), Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas), Kerri P. Berard (University of North Texas), Kathleen S. Laino (University of North Texas), Michelle S. Greenspan (University of North Texas), Anna Whaley Carr (University of North Texas), Roxanne L. Wolf (University of North Texas), Carla M. Smith (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: Last year, the Department of Behavior Analysis at the University of North Texas created a service-learning program to serve child victims of abuse and neglect. The Behavior Analysis Resource Center has established relationships with local and regional organizations and agencies to provide services to parents. Initiated as a systematic replication of the Florida Department of Children and Families' foster parent training program, this project soon developed its own identity as it adapted to the meet the specific needs of the Texas child welfare system. The project, though young, has already begun to produce some impressive results. This presentation offers a description of this project’s inception and growth, its progress so far, and some plans and expectations for the future. Recent accomplishments include the development of a curriculum for training professional personnel to deliver the parent training modules, establishment of a practicum experience for graduate students interested in conducting parent training and delivering related services, and delivery of a five-week sequence of classes to parents referred for intervention from Texas’ Department of Families and Protective Services. |
|
Parent Training for Parents At-Risk for Child Maltreatment: Prevention through Intervention. |
JENNIFER L. CROCKETT (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Meagan Gregory (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Michael F. Cataldo (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: We evaluated a Behavioral Parent Training program for parents at risk of Child Maltreatment that focused on increasing parent-child interaction and increasing parents’ effective use of instructions and behavior management skills. Additional targets included increasing child compliance with parental instruction and decreasing child inappropriate behavior. Such parent and child behaviors are related to a trajectory or pathway that begins with poor parenting, Child Maltreatment, disruption of families, and eventually leads to delinquency, violence, and other negative physical and mental health outcomes. Training consisted of didactic instruction, modeling, role-playing, and feedback. Training was conducted in a multiple-baseline design across Child-Lead Play, Parent-Lead Play, and Parent-Lead Demand conditions. Following training, we evaluated the effects of providing live feedback to parents while they worked directly with their children (coaching sessions). Results indicated improvements in parent behavior across conditions following training with further improvements following coaching sessions. Similar improvements were observed with child compliance and behaviors. Parent and child gains continued across generalization and maintenance sessions. Inter-rater reliability was assessed across 49% of sessions, and ranged from 78.44 – 100 (mean 91.77). |
|
|
|
|
From Chaos to Competence: Implementing ABA Instructional Technology and Procedures in Pre-School Through High School Classrooms |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Janet Ellis (University of North Texas) |
CE Instructor: Janet Ellis, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Instruction oftentimes includes more than delivering academic material to students in well-organized, smoothly running classrooms. Behavioral consultants are invited into classrooms where problematic behavior and lack of instructional technology run rampant. These papers include successful interventions conducted in vastly different academic settings: from PPCD classrooms for pre-schoolers with seriously disruptive behavior to a special education life skills classroom wherein one child was taught to feed herself and to walk independently to 3 high school teen-agers with severe reading deficits in regular education classrooms. The 4th paper describes an experiment in literacy training conducted in 2 PPCD classrooms for children ages 3-1/2 to 5 years old. In all of these settings behavioral technology came to the rescue when traditional academic instruction had failed or, due to the ages of the students, had never been undertaken. All data will be presented in graphic formats and a short video clip will also be included. |
|
Introducing Environmental Restructuring, Academic Tasks, Staff Training, and Individualized Teaching Materials into a PPCD Classroom. |
JANET ELLIS (University of North Texas), Brook B. Wheetley (Spectrum Center) |
Abstract: This intervention was designed to meet the needs of the 13 different preschool students in morning and afternoon classes. Because of teacher frustration with problematic behavior exhibited by 4 of the 7 students in the morning class and 3 of the 6 children in the afternoon class, we targeted individualized interventions for these 7 while also focusing on necessary environmental changes and individualized academic training for all students in both classes. Relocation of activity areas, discontinuing “open center” activities, providing sound cues for staff and students, establishing a 1-on-1 training area for academics, and staff training were the primary environmental program changes. Also, individualized interventions for these 7 students were designed and implemented. Data will be presented in graphed formats. |
|
Yes We Can! Teaching Reading to Pre-Schoolers with DD using Fluency-Based Instructional Technology. |
SARAH A. LAW (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: One-on-one trainers taught reading skills to pre-school children with developmental disabilities. The 6 participants, ages 4 to 5, were trained to expressively and receptively identify sounds and blends in a discrete trial format. Individualized training occurred for 15-30 minutes/day/child. When students met 90% mastery criterion for each letter sound both expressively and receptively, fluency-based instruction was introduced. Fluency-based instruction consisted of short timings that included mastered letter sounds following by timings of blends and short words. Pre-and post data are presented in graphed formats showing the week-to-week progress of each student. |
|
Developing Reading Repertoires for Teenaged-High School Nonreaders: Success Story with A Bittersweet Ending. |
LISA G. FALKE (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: NCLB mandates that schools will be accountable for student reading and math test scores regardless of student skill level. In a pilot program for 3 high school non-readers: 2 entered training on 8 November 2004; 1, on 24 January 2005. They attended two 1-hr training sessions/day. In addition to reading, comprehension was also targeted as all students, regardless of skill level, took an NCLB-mandated reading achievement test in April 2005. Teaching materials included the Morningside Phonics Fluency, DISTAR Decoding, and the SRA Specific Skill Series. The morning training session focused on training fluent decoding, while afternoons trained reading comprehension. Baseline and post training data will be presented in graphed format. The bittersweet ending was that after the pilot project and school administration saw that reading skills could be improved significantly over a short time span the administrators decided to hire a “reading specialist” to train all the non-readers in the 11-12th grades. |
|
Teaching Critical Survival Skills (Self-Feeding, Drinking, Walking) for Long-Term Retention. |
JASON C. COHEN (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: Early intervention is important in building functional skills into behavioral repertoires of children with disabilities. A 4-year-old girl with multiple disabilities in a PPCD classroom could not walk without assistance, feed herself, drink independently, or imitate adaptive behavior. The purpose of the intervention was to shape skills including independent walking, self-feeding, independent drinking, gross motor imitation, and the use of a picture based communication system. Walking was trained using most to least prompting (first standing alone then walking) and access to preferred items contingent on independent standing and walking. Self-feeding and drinking were trained using hand-over-hand prompting and a prompt fading procedure. Gross motor imitation was also trained using hand-over-hand prompting, prompt fading, and access to preferred items contingent on approximations of imitative behavior. The picture communication system was introduced initially by using photographs of preferred items. Data indicate the progress made in all skill sets. |
|
|
|
|
Implementing an Evidence Based Educational Program for Children with Autism: What are the Characteristics of a Good ABA Classroom? |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Regency V |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Michael F. Dorsey (Vinfen Corporation & Simmons College) |
Discussant: Patricia A. Gonzalez (U.S. Department of Education) |
CE Instructor: Michael F. Dorsey, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The primary focus of this symposium will be to discuss the concurrence between the federal regulations requiring evidence-based practices found in the No Child Left Behind Act of 2003, as well as in the 2001, the U.S. Department of Educations Office of Special Education Programs (OSEP) report by the National Research Council on the education of children diagnosed with autism, and the generally accepted educational practices of Applied Behavior Analysis. The participants will first to operationally define evidence-based, and second to describe an externally validated process by which a research literature might be reviewed systematically. Next, a review of the evidence base and present survey data on the types, characteristics, intensity, and combinations of services approved, as opposed to recommended, will be presented for very young children. Finally, an objective measurement system for evaluating educational services, based on current literature, will be presented with examples taken form actual assessments. The Discussant, from the Education Sciences -- U.S. Department of Education, will comment on the implications of these regulations on special education services for children with Autism. |
|
Evidence-Based Practice in Autism: Why We Need It and What it Is. |
JOSEPH N. RICCIARDI (National Autism Center) |
Abstract: Over the past several years the demand for educational and intervention services for children with autism and related conditions has risen. A range of approaches are presently popular and widely available. However, few of these approaches are supported by scientific evidence, though most claim such. In addition, a veritable “cottage-industry” of interventions and products with claims of efficacy and even cure for autism has emerged. No doubt, a rationale for identifying what constitutes evidence of effectiveness would help families, educators, and policy-makers. The purpose of this presentation is to 1) operationally define evidence-based, 2) describe an externally validated process by which a research literature might be reviewed systematically and with care to reduce bias, in order to identify evidence-based interventions, and 3) to report current thinking on which programmatic and procedural interventions for autism presently meet criteria as “evidence-based”. This presentation includes both theoretical/conceptual material, service delivery recommendations, and data. |
|
Evidenced Based Practices in ABA: Application to Early Intervention and Preschool Programs. |
RAYMOND G. ROMANCZYK (Institute for Child Development), Jennifer M. Gillis Mattson (State University of New York, Binghamton) |
Abstract: Prior to participation in ABA classrooms, many children receive services as part of Early Intervention programs, home programs, and preschool programs. Great controversy exists as to which treatment approaches, and what treatment intensities, are appropriate for very young children. We briefly review the evidence base and present survey data on the types, characteristics, intensity, and combinations of services approved, as opposed to recommended, for very young children. Appropriate program characteristics are presented in the context of the rapid developmental changes for children 1-5 years of age. ABA programs for children in this age group are critiqued for poor goal selection and poor repertoire assembly, as well as poor procedural integrity. Supposed evidenced based programs must meet the boundary conditions of the research protocol if use of the now ubiquitous self-promotion of ‘evidenced based practice’ is to be claimed. Quality control indicators for consumers are presented. |
|
The Use of Applied Behavior Analysis in the Education of Children With Autism: What is a “Good ABA Classroom?” |
MICHAEL F. DORSEY (Simmons College), Katherine A. Johnson (Advances Learning Center and Simmons College) |
Abstract: The use of Applied Behavior Analysis is widely recommended for use in the education of children with autism, including: support from the United States Surgeon General, the U.S. Department of Education’s Office of Special Education, the National Science Foundation, the New York Department of Health Clinical Practices, among others. Educational services for children diagnosed with Pervasive Developmental Disorder/Autism, requires consistent attention to detail, including the application of scientifically validated educational approaches (No Child Left Behind Act of 2003). However, in a review of the current literature, no objective definition of what constitutes the critical components of such services is found. This presentation will attempt to clarify this issue, by combining various recommendations from numerous publications and other sources. In addition, an objective assessment tool for the evaluation of classrooms will be presented for use by teachers, administrators and evaluators. |
|
|
|
|
Positive Behavioral Support and Applied Behavior Analysis: Is there a necessary distinction? |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: David A. Celiberti, Ph.D. |
Chair: David A. Celiberti (Private Practice) |
JAMES E. CARR (Western Michigan University) |
GLEN DUNLAP (University of South Florida) |
GINA GREEN (San Diego State University) |
LEN LEVIN (Coyne & Associates) |
Abstract: For the last 15 years, the field has witnessed much interest in the area of Positive Behavioral Support (PBS) as reflected by conference events, published literature, and the formation of the PBS SIG. This burgeoning interest has been met with concerns about the need for a new school of thought, the potential for misconceptions and schisms to arise, and the extent to which PBS actually falls under the umbrella of ABA. In recent years, there have been a few attempts to address the relationship between Positive Behavioral Support and Applied Behavior Analysis. Unfortunately, some of these discussions have been not been constructive, were often one sided, and may even be perceived as contentious. This topic deserves a professional and balanced dialogue. To that end, the panel will tackle this critically important matter and be comprised of individuals with rather divergent perspectives. |
|
|
|
|
Recent Research on Establishing Operation Manipulations |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
1:30 PM–2:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine) |
Discussant: F. Charles Mace (University of Southern Maine) |
CE Instructor: Henry S. Roane, Ph.D. |
Abstract: In the past 20 years, a number of applied investigations have examined the relative influence of motivational variables on responding during reinforcement-based programs for individuals with developmental disabilities. One category of such variables that has been the subject of considerable research is establishing operations (EOs). An EO is an environmental event that has two effects on behavior: (a) it changes (increases or decreases) motivation for a particular reinforcer; and (b) it changes (increases or decreases) the probability of responses that have produced that reinforcer in the past. The present symposium will focus on three recent areas of research in which EOs have been used to influence appropriate behavior. Collectively, these studies will examine (a) the establishment and termination of reflexive conditioned EOs, (b) the modification of reflexive conditioned EOs to increase in-seat behavior, and (c) the effects of peer observations on item preferences. |
|
Basic and Applied Analyses of Reflexive Conditioned Establishing Operations. |
MICHAEL E. KELLEY (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine), Joanna Lomas (Marcus Autism Center), Robert-Ryan S. Pabico (Marcus Autism Center), Michael J. Schafer (Marcus Autism Center), Karen Myers (Marcus Autism Center), Henry S. Roane (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine) |
Abstract: Results of previous research have shown that establishing operation manipulations can influence responding during assessments of preference (e.g., Gottschalk, Libby, & Graff, 2000; Zhou, Iwata, & Shore, 2002), assessment of problem behavior (e.g., Iwata, Dorsey, Slifer, Bauman, & Richman, 1994), assessment of reinforcement efficacy (e.g., Vollmer & Iwata, 1991), and treatment (e.g., Mace & Lalli, 1991). However, the influence of conditioned establishing operations (CEO) on responding has not been well evaluated in the literature (McGill, 1999; Michael, 2000). In the current study, we evaluated the extent to which (1) CEO relations may be generated and terminated and (2) applied treatments may be enhanced as a result of the identification and/or manipulation of CEOs. Thus, the purpose of Experiments 1 was to demonstrate a methodology to both establish and extinguish reflexive CEO relations in a basic arrangement. The purpose of Experiment 2 was to provide an applied example of a reflexive CEO relation and demonstrate its potential for enhancing assessment and treatment development. |
|
Manipulating Reflexive Conditioned Establishing Operations with Young Children with PDD. |
M. ALICE SHILLINGSBURG (Marcus Autism Center), Steven Shapiro (Auburn University) |
Abstract: Previous research has demonstrated the effects of manipulating establishing operations (EO) on the effectiveness of items as reinforcement (e.g., Vollmer & Iwata, 1991), preferences for tangible items (e.g., McAdam et al., 2005), and problem behavior (e.g., McComas, Thompson, &Johnson, 2003). Much research on EO has focused on deprivation and satiation effects, whereas little research has been conducted on the manipulation of conditioned EO (CEO), such as surrogate, transitive, and reflexive CEO. We examined the effects of manipulating reflexive CEO on in-seat behavior during instructional tasks. In phase 1, two children diagnosed with Pervasive Developmental Disorder (PDD) were administered tasks during 10-min demand sessions. In phase 2, one therapist removed demands and paired the teaching environment with the participant’s preferred activities while a second therapist continued to conduct demand sessions. In phase 3, both therapists conducted demand sessions. Results indicated that (1) in-seat behavior during demands was higher and aberrant behavior was lower following pairing and (2) pairing the teaching environment with the child’s preferred activities established interacting with the therapist as reinforcement and evoked behaviors that prolonged that interaction. Results are discussed in terms of the benefits of manipulating reflexive EO prior to demand presentation. |
|
Peer Observations as an Establishing Operation for Preschool Play Materials. |
JENNIFER LYNNE BRUZEK (University of Kansas), Rachel H. Thompson (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to determine the effects of peer observations on the reinforcing value of toys among preschoolers. A 10-item paired choice preference assessment was conducted to identify a preference hierarchy. Based on the results of that assessment, a reinforcer assessment was conducted wherein the most highly preferred item and the least preferred item were presented along with a control (no item) to test the relative reinforcing effects of those stimuli. Data collectors recorded the frequency or duration of the target response and interobserver agreement was assessed during a minimum of 30% of all sessions with a mean agreement of above 85% for all participants. During baseline, no peer observation was conducted, and participants responded consistently for the high-preference item. Participants then observed a peer playing with one of the items for 2 min prior to each reinforcer assessment session. During the peer observation phases, the participants consistently responded for access to the toy manipulated by the peer during pre-session observation, independent of initial preference for that item. These data suggest that preschooler preferences may be, in part, a result of peer observation. |
|
|
|
|
An Analysis of Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedures for Increasing Language in Children with Autism |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Chicago A-F |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Laura Lee McIntyre (Syracuse University) |
Discussant: Meredith S. Needelman (AMAC) |
CE Instructor: Laura Lee McIntyre, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Stimulus-stimulus pairing has been suggested as a means by which children learn language, and therefore a means by which children with lagging language skills may be taught to communicate. Studies presented will address the effectiveness of stimulus-stimulus pairing procedures with augmentative communication, manding procedures, and comparisons of stimulus-stimulus pairing with contingent reinforcement procedures. |
|
Stimulus-stimulus Pairing Used with Augmentative Communication for Students with Autism. |
BOBBY NEWMAN (Room to Grow), Rocio E. Chavez (AMAC), Laura Lee McIntyre (Syracuse University), Debora Harris (ELIJA Foundation), Nicole Dibra (ELIJA Foundation) |
Abstract: Stimulus-stimulus pairing procedures have been described as a means of teaching language to children with autism. The literature has focused exclusively on spoken responses, however. In this paper, the use of stimulus-stimulus pairing will be examined with an augmentative communication system. |
|
Stimulus-stimulus Pairing used to Teach Manding in Students with Autism. |
ROCIO E. CHAVEZ (AMAC), Tammy Hammond Natof (EPIC), Laura Lee McIntyre (Syracuse University), Bobby Newman (Room to Grow) |
Abstract: Stimulus-stimulus pairing procedures have been described as a means of increasing language. Several published studies, however, have focused on phonemic responses that had no meaning to a listener. The current study will examine such a procedure applied to manding in students with autism. |
|
Stimulus-stimulus Pairing Versus Direct Reinforcement for Increasing Language in Students with Autism. |
LAURA LEE MCINTYRE (Syracuse University), Bobby Newman (Room to Grow), Rocio E. Chavez (AMAC) |
Abstract: Stimulus-stimulus pairing procedures have been recommended as a means of increasing language. There is no direct reinforcement of a spoken response within such procedures, however. The stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure will be compared with a direct contingent reinforcement procedure for increasing language in students with autism. |
|
|
|
|
Behavioral Developmental Approaches to Interventions with People and Organizations |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Singapore |
Area: DEV; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Patrice Marie Miller (Salem State College) |
CE Instructor: Patrice Marie Miller, Ed.D. |
Abstract: We examine how the Model of Hierarchical Complexity, a behavioral-developmental model of stage-like development, improves interventions with people and organizations. Behavior analytic techniques are helpful in bringing about the acquisition of single behaviors in a sequence. But almost all ABA approaches are limited to the acquisition of 2 or 3 behaviors in a sequence. Each sequence has to be discovered on its own. Here, we address some issues which people and organizations find difficult. We examine how elemental behaviors are formed into complex behaviors, and those in turn are formed into even more complex behaviors. The more complex behaviors are more than chains; they are defined in terms of the elemental behaviors and organize them. This model identifies what new behaviors must be more hierarchically complex, specifying the sequence of actions that would be most helpful. It also helps identify what current behaviors can be combined to form a more complex combination and what the entire sequence of increasingly more complex behaviors should be. With a universal notion of how complex behaviors are formed, many problematic issues stand a better chance of being successfully solved. Using this model, we address interventions with interpersonal and social relationships, teachers, and organizations. |
|
Organizing Components into Combinations: How Transition Works. |
MICHAEL LAMPORT COMMONS (Harvard Medical School) |
Abstract: To plan how to intervene in problems that people and organizations may have, it is important to understand both the new behavior to be acquired and the means by which the intervention is to proceed. The Model of Hierarchical Complexity, a non-mentalistic model of development, suggests that more complex behavior results from non-arbitrarily combining two or more less complex behaviors. The resulting combinations are not arbitrary chains, but instead, new, more powerful behaviors that can be shown to more effectively address the problems at hand. Using this model as a generator, sequences of tasks can be constructed. These sequences, as will be illustrated in this symposium, allow specification of both prerequisite behaviors, and the behavioral goals of interventions. Performance of a task at a particular order of complexity is said to be at a particular stage. Transition from one stage to the next is posited to consist of alternations in previous-stage behavior. As transition proceeds, the alternations increase in rate until the previous stage behaviors are “smashed” together. Once the smashed-together pieces became co-ordinated, new-combination behavior can be said to have formed. This view of transition is used to make suggestions for interventions in the papers that follow. |
|
Teaching Stages and Interventions to Change Teacher Stage. |
PATRICE MARIE MILLER (Salem State University) |
Abstract: We present a sequence of minimal behavioral developmental stages at which teaching takes place. The stages range from the Primary Stage, exhibited by many Teacher’s Aids, who are closely supervised, to the Concrete stage for the early grades of Elementary School in which teachers carry out an established curriculum, to Formal Operations for High School teachers, and Systematic stage for four-year college instructors. Metasystematic performance is required to design an entire educational enterprise such as computer aided instruction that works really well. Serious problems occur with concrete and abstract stage performance. Formal stage performance is needed to have the skills to provide empirically based solutions to individual student problems. But with extensive training and support, people who normally function at the abstract stage may also solve such problems. Performing at a higher stages may increase the teacher’s effectiveness but may lead individuals to leave teaching at that level for better opportunities. Following the overall model of how to bring about transition, when individual’s current strategies of doing things fail, sets the conditions for them try different behaviors. If new behaviors modeled and reinforced stage change may take place. |
|
Deficits in “Attachment Stages” in Adults and Suggested Interventions for Each Stage. |
SUSANNE T. LEE (Dare Institute) |
Abstract: The Model of Hierarchical Complexity has generated descriptions of predictable sequential behavioral changes in close relationships with others. Here, we argue that behaviors characteristic of each stage determine what kinds of interventions to carry out. For example, the Preoperational stage is characteristic of young children do not differentiate between individual’s their fantasies and reality, and tend to provide magical explanations for occurrences. This stage is usually seen only in highly disordered adults, such the most dangerous prisoners. Suggested interventions focus on providing supervision and support to understand others’ perspectives and to differentiate fantasy from reality. At the formal stage -- the adult modal stage -- individuals generate simple one-cause models for explaining behavior of themselves and others. As a result, formal operational explanations of relationships often include blaming the other or oneself for relationship problems. Because of the greater tendency of individuals at this stage to reflect upon their own behavior, the strategy is to expose them to situations in seeing how each person’s behavior contributes to the success and failures. This may occur during impasses when focusing on the bidirectional interaction begins to improve both individuals’ behavior. |
|
Bringing About Changes in Workplace Behavior. |
MICHAEL LAMPORT COMMONS (Harvard Medical School) |
Abstract: stage organizations are characterized by bureaucracy, and one-dimensional logically-understood regulations. Systematic stage organizations look to the purpose of regulations, balance multiple relationships to achieve goals. We propose that the hierarchical complexity of the contingencies that constitute a particular workplace atmosphere affects how the individuals within it behave. Individual’s stage of performance is described by the hierarchical complexity of the task demands and contingencies that they discriminate and prefer. Most organizations have short lives because below the Metasystematic stage, conformity is valued over creativity. Organizations that show unchanging allegiance to their founders and their principles do not flourish in the long run. Organizations that are democratic are also less creative, especially those relying on a popularity vote. At the metasystematic stage, the contingencies tend to be based upon absolute creative achievement alone, not popularity. Research universities and start-ups are the exceptional organizations and many tend to be organized using metasystematic principles. Some companies are also experimenting in being “learning” organizations by reorganizing along the lines of research universities. |
|
|
|
|
Behavioral Economic Applications in Individuals with Developmental Disabilities |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University) |
Discussant: Steven R. Hursh (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine & SAIC) |
CE Instructor: Iser Guillermo DeLeon, Ph.D. |
Abstract: In behavioral economics, reinforcement contingencies are viewed as transactions in which work (responding/behavior) is exchanged for a commodity (a reinforcer or stimulus). Overall consumption of a commodity is determined as a function of its price (work or response requirements), often in relation to the availability and price of concurrently available commodities that vary with respect to the degree to which they substitute for the first. Investigators have recently begun to explore behavioral economic relations in the response allocation of individuals with developmental disabilities, most notably with the aim of interpreting responding under various experimental constraints related to enhancing habilitative efforts. The present symposium will further discuss ongoing research in translating behavioral economic theory into practical application for individuals with developmental disabilities. Collectively, the presentations will examine (a) the relation between relative stimulus preference and demand and response output functions; (b) consumption of various reinforcers examined through demand and work functions derived from progressive-ratio schedules; (c) and the influence of unit price on response output in the context of treating problem behavior. |
|
Demand and Response Output Functions for High and Low Preference Stimuli. |
WILLIAM H. AHEARN (New England Center for Children), Kathleen M. Clark (New England Center for Children), Kacie Burregi (New England Center for Children), William V. Dube (University of Massachusetts Medical School, E.K. Shriver Center) |
Abstract: Behavioral economics views behavior as a transaction between the supply of a functional consequence and the demand for it whereby the amount of reinforcer accessed is analyzed with respect to the responding that was emitted for that access. Demand and response output functions are generated by exposing behavior to varying contingencies for access to a specific reinforcer. This presentation will describe the demand and response output functions obtained for commodities identified as either high or low preference during paired stimulus preference assessment. A discussion of the preference assessment procedures will follow presentation of the results of the study. Steady state responding was obtained with several variable ratio schedules (from VR6 up to a maximum of VR45) for access to both high and low preference commodities. A progressive ratio (PR) exposure to the same schedule values was conducted after the maximum VR schedule was completed for each item. Demand and response output functions are presented for each of these analyses. Generally, demand and response output functions were systematic with responding for the high preference item occurring at higher levels relative to the lower preference item. Results were not always systematic for the PR exposures to the same schedule values. |
|
The Utility of Progressive Ratio Schedules to Determine Reinforcer Value: An Economic Analysis. |
HENRY S. ROANE (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University School of Medicine), Ashley C. Glover (Marcus Autism Center), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University), Robert-Ryan S. Pabico (Marcus Autism Center), Joanna Lomas (Marcus Autism Center) |
Abstract: Progressive ratio (PR) schedules allow for the examination of responding under multiple schedule values that increase throughout the course of a single experimental observation. As such, PR schedules provide a method for briefly determining the relative value of a reinforcer. Despite this utility, relatively few studies have examined the usefulness of PR schedules in applied setting. In this presentation, sample data will be presented in which PR schedules were used to evaluate the relative value of reinforcers for individuals with developmental disabilities. Specifically, data will be presented in which PR schedules were used to evaluate the efficacy of different reinforcers when (a) the reinforcers were presented in a single- or concurrent-operant arrangement, and (b) different magnitudes of similar reinforcers are presented under PR schedules. Responding for and consumption of various reinforcers will be presented by examining demand and work functions. Results will be discussed in terms of procedural differences that might affect responding for reinforcers under PR schedules. |
|
Applying the Concept of Unit Price to Severe Problem Behavior: A Descriptive Analysis. |
JOHN C. BORRERO (University of the Pacific), Monica T. Francisco (University of the Pacific), Alayna T. Haberlin (University of the Pacific), Noel A. Ross (University of the Pacific), Sandeep K. Sran (University of the Pacific), Jamie Bartels (University of the Pacific) |
Abstract: We evaluated behavior exhibited by several individuals with developmental disabilities using the behavioral economic conceptualization of unit price. Descriptive observations were conducted during interactions between the participants and their primary care providers in a clinical laboratory environment, the participants’ home or school. Data were recorded on potential reinforcers and problem behavior. After identifying reinforcers for each participant’s problem behavior by way of functional analysis, the descriptive data were analyzed retrospectively, using the concept of unit price. Results showed that in some, but not all cases, overall response output decreased, when unit price increased. The results represent an extension of the concept of unit price to severe problem behavior under naturally occurring environmental conditions. |
|
|
|
|
Cambridge Center Symposium: The Accreditation of Behavioral Applications: Promoting Evidence-Based Practices |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom I |
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Dwight Harshbarger (Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies) |
Discussant: Dwight Harshbarger (Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies) |
CE Instructor: Dwight Harshbarger, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Behavior analysis is engaged in a competition to determine whether services aimed at making positive changes in behavior and in the impact or results of behavior will be based on demonstrably effective methods or left to tradition, professional custom, and union or guild protection. If the arbiters of success are uninformed client choices, testimonials, and unsubstantiated claims, that competition may not be winnable. If client choices can be based on evidence of effectiveness, services grounded in applied behavior analysis have a higher probability of being chosen. In addition, evidence-based decisions may provide a method to help us sort more effective from less effective behavior-analytic methods. The Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies has recent initiatives that award accreditation to behavioral programs of service based on evidence of effectiveness. Accreditation of principles of behavior-based safety programs has now been awarded to multiple organizations. Standards and methods for accrediting applied behavior analytic clinical services have been developed and the launch of this initiative is underway. The presenters in this symposium will discuss evidence-based accreditation, including alternatives in standards and methods. Initial problems and successes with accreditation efforts will be presented and analyzed. |
|
Standards for Accreditation. |
HENRY S. PENNYPACKER (University of Florida) |
Abstract: The public relies on a variety of accreditation or certification sources for information to inform their purchasing decisions. Such organizations as Good Housekeeping, Consumer Reports, and Underwriters Laboratory have earned the trust of the public over a long period by producing data that are both understandable and reliable. The Cambridge Center would like to join this select group by accrediting programs that engender desirable behavior change in identifiable populations of consumers. To succeed in this endeavor, the Center must adopt a set of standards against which candidate programs may be evaluated. I have suggested elsewhere that the standards used by the Food and Drug Administration, safe and effective, serve as temporary placeholders until more suitable ones can be crafted. We may have problems in reaching agreement on how to evaluate effectiveness. I will argue that we should adhere firmly to our traditions of direct, objective behavioral measurement and eschew such devices as testimonials, consumer satisfaction surveys, and the like. I will illustrate this strategy with a short discussion of how we have developed criteria for certifying clinical breast examiners that rely on accepted concepts of sensitivity and specificity. |
Dr. Henry Pennypacker, Jr. has been a guiding force in Behavior Analysis since the 1960s. His seminal book "Strategies and Tactics in Behavioral Research" with Johnston has been used as an essential textbook and reference by many in the field. His most recent book with Gutierrez and Lindley titled "Handbook of the standard celeration chart" was recently published by the Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies. His six books along with 21 book chapters and over 60 scholarly publications has established Dr. Pennypacker as one of ABA's most prolific authors. He was president of ABA from 1986-1987. Since the 1970's Dr. Pennypacker devoted his considerable talents toward applying ABA to the early detection of breast cancer. His work in this area has earned him patents in the US, Germany, Britain, and Canada as well as a grant from the National Cancer Institute. He is currently a Professor Emeritus at the University of Florida, President of Precision Teaching of Florida, Inc., and CEO of Mammatech Corporation. |
|
Accrediting Principles of Behavior-Based Safety Programs. |
BILL L. HOPKINS (Auburn University, Emeritus) |
Abstract: CCBS began accrediting safety initiatives built on the principles of behavior in 2004 to recognize and publicize exemplary programs. The need for this accreditation will be argued. The primary standard for accreditation of a safety program is evidence of effectiveness. Accreditation also requires strong arguments that the chosen safety data are important to conditions at the site, evidence that the safety data are accurate, methods that are based on the principles of behavior, and a written description of the program that is sufficiently detailed to allow for replications. Reasons for advancing the nomenclature “principles-of-behavior-based” rather than “behavior-based” or “applied-behavior-analysis-based” will be explained. The accreditation methods will be presented and explained. To date four programs have been accredited. Common and unique characteristics that go beyond the standard behavior-based safety program and primary data of accredited programs will be presented. Arguments will be advanced that applied behavior analysis can succeed as a widely used source of services only if it promotes evidence of effectiveness as the primary means of deciding program value. |
Dr. Bill L. Hopkins is Professor Emeritus in the Department of Psychology of Auburn University. He has done applied behavior analytic research with developmentally disabled children, with chronically mentally ill adults, with normal school children, and, since nineteen-seventy, with adults in work organizations . He has published many research and technical papers as well as papers on research methodology and four edited books about behavioral applications to education. Hopkins has served on the editorial boards of JABA, JOBM, and TBA. He has also sat as a member of study sections for several government agencies reviewing proposals for research and training and chaired the study section of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. He was the Director of the John T. Stewart Children’s Center at the University of Kansas and Head of the Department of Psychology at Auburn University. He chaired the ABA committee that drafted standards and guidelines for the certification of graduate programs of instruction in behavior analysis. He chaired the Cambridge Center committee that drafted standards and guidelines for the accreditation of principles-of-behavior-based safety programs and has chaired the review and site-visit teams for all of the successfully accredited programs. |
|
Accreditation of Organizations Providing Applied Behavior Analysis Services. |
MICHAEL WEINBERG (Southbury Training School) |
Abstract: The purpose of the CCBS Behavior Analysis clinical services accreditation is to establish a set of standards for programs and services that utilize Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) as a core or essential treatment approach. The standards and accreditation process are intended to provide a higher quality of service, and assurances to consumers of the services, and the public, that sound intervention methods are being used. Given the many significant developments in the field over the past two decades, and the questionable methods used in the name of applied behavior analysis, there has been confusion among the public and purchasers of these services. These events have also led to varying degrees of harm to service recipients which will be briefly reviewed. These concerns were among the reasons for creating a certification process (BACB). The BACB devised a means of identifying those using sound practices in the field, and has also promoted the notion that ABA is also a treatment approach. We believe that the time has arrived for the accreditation organizations that provide ABA services. The reasons and implications for the field and society will be further discussed during the presentation. |
Dr. Michael Weinberg is the director of psychological services at Southbury Training School in Connecticut, and is the owner and CEO of Orlando Behavior Health in Florida. He received his Ph.D. in 1985 in the experimental analysis of behavior program at Temple University in Philadelphia, and was previously at the E.K. Shriver Center and Northeastern University where he received his B.A. in psychology in 1977, with an emphasis in Applied Behavior Analysis. Dr. Weinberg is a licensed psychologist in three states, and is a Board Certified Behavior Analyst with 30 years of experience in the field, providing treatment to children and adults with developmental disabilities, autism, and various behavioral and learning disorders. Dr. Weinberg has been on the part-time faculty of Temple University, Psychology Department, and also adjunct at Rutgers University, where he taught courses in basic principles of behavior. Since becoming a charter certificant with the BACB, he has been teaching pre-approved courses for certification in Florida for the past five years, and is ACE coordinator for his company which is a BACB approved Type 2 CE provider. Dr. Weinberg is also the editor of the Behavior Analyst Today, an online journal which publishes articles in the philosophical, experimental and applied aspects of behavior analysis. Dr. Weinberg has also published articles and book chapters in behavior analysis, has developed a behavioral approach to treating reactive attachment disorder, and conducts workshops and seminars on OBM. He has been collaborating with the Cambridge Center since early 2005 to develop accreditation standards and review processes for programs and agencies providing ABA services. Dr. Weinberg is also a Trustee of the Cambridge Center for Behavioral Studies. |
|
|
|
|
Comparing Methods to Improve the Tact Repertoire in Children with Autism |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Kelle Wood Rich (Central Texas Autism Center, Inc.) |
Discussant: Kelle Wood Rich (Central Texas Autism Center, Inc.) |
CE Instructor: Kelle Wood Rich, M.Ed. |
Abstract: These studies compared relative effectiveness of procedures to improve the tact repertoire in children with autism. The first study compared the Effects of Mimetic-Tact versus Intraverbal-Tact training on the Acquisition of Sign Tacts in a Child with Autism. Similar to results obtained by Partington, Sundberg, Newhouse, & Spengler (1994), the subject acquired 14 tacts via intraverbal-tact transfer while acquiring 2 via mimetic-tact transfer demonstrating the superiority of intraverbal-tact transfer. The second study, a Comparison of Two Procedures for Teaching the Tact Repertoire in Children with Autism compared the relative effectiveness of repeated set prompting versus errorless teaching of individual items on rate of acquisition of tacts. Results revealed superior improvement in rate of acquisition in the repeated set prompting group and improved retention and application. The last study, the Effect of Tutor Modeled Successive Approximations Versus Tutor Modeled Adult Forms to Improve Topography of Tacts, extended the findings of Kasper and Godwin, 2003 and Carbone, 2005 from the echoic repertoire to the tact repertoire. Tutor-modeled successive approximations were used to improve topography of the vocal tact in a child with poor articulation. Use of tutor-modeled approximations resulted in improved articulation of tacts compared to other methods. |
|
Effects of Mimetic-Tact versus Intraverbal-Tact training on the Acquisition of Tacts in a Child with Autism. |
TAMARA S. KASPER (CCC-SLP/BCABA), Jennifer R. Godwin (Early Autism Project, Inc.) |
Abstract: Development of verbal repertoires in children with autism and limited vocal repertoires is the focus of many intensive behavior programs. For children who are non-verbal, manual sign language has been encouraged as an effective response form (Carr, 1979; Fulwiler & Fouts, 1976, Brady & Smouse, 1992; Layton, 1988). Many have examined procedures to facilitate the tacting repertoire. Carroll & Hesse (1987) and Arntzen & Almas (2002) examined the effects of mand-tact and tact-only training procedures on the acquisition of tact performance and demonstrated that fewer trials were needed to learn tacts in the mand-tact condition. Partington, Sundberg, Newhouse, & Spengler (1994) used procedures to transfer stimulus control from verbal to nonverbal stimuli in a subject who has an established mand repertoire and the subject was able to quickly acquire a total of 18 tacts. The current study extends these findings. The subject acquired 14 tacts via intraverbal-tact transfer while acquiring 2 via mimetic-tact transfer demonstrating the superiority of intraverbal-tact transfer compared to mimetic-tact transfer or no training for a child with autism who possessed an imitative repertoire but experienced difficult acquiring tacts. |
|
Comparison of Two Procedures for Teaching the Tact Repertoire in Children with Autism. |
ANGIE B. KEITH (Early Autism Project, Inc.) |
Abstract: This study compared the relative effectiveness of repeated set prompting versus errorless teaching of individual items on rate of acquisition of tacts in children who demonstrated slow acquisition rates of tacts. Repeated set prompting involved echoic prompting for each member of a target set of tacts with systematic probes and mastery criteria for the entire set. The Individual item condition consisted of training individual tacts via errorless teaching with systematic structure fade and time delay fading (Touchette and Howard, 1984) with mastery criteria for individual tacts. Comparison of results of the two independent variables to a no treatment group revealed gains with both methodologies, but superior improvement in rate of acquisition in the repeated set prompting group. In addition, improved retention and application were demonstrated for items acquired via repeated set prompting which may be related to three learning outcomes associated with automatic, or fluent behavior: retention, endurance, and application (Binder, 1993, 1996). |
|
Effect of Tutor Modeled Successive Approximations versus Tutor Modeled Adult Forms to Improve Topography of Tacts. |
ANN D. ELDRIDGE (Early Autism Project, Inc.) |
Abstract: Improving speech intelligibility is often an important component of home treatment programs for children with autism. Kasper and Godwin (2003) explored the effectiveness of use of tutor-modeled successive approximations to target words (based on the work of Nancy Kaufman 1998, 2001) to improve speech intelligibility in a child with autism. Results revealed significant improvement in intelligibility across the verbal operants and response class generalization to non-target words in one child with autism and apraxia of speech. Carbone (2005) compared the relative effectiveness of tutor-modeled approximations to tutor-modeled adult forms and demonstrated superiority of the approximations (Kaufman, 1998, 2001) in terms of rate of acquisition and articulatory precision for three children with autism. The current study extends these finding to the tact repertoire in which tutor-modeled successive approximations were used to improve topography of the vocal tact in a child with adequate stimulus control for tacting, but poor topography. Results were compared to tutor modeled adult forms and no treatment conditions. Use of tutor-modeled approximations resulted in improved articulation of tacts for the subject studied compared to other methods. |
|
|
|
|
Evidence-Based Practice and Special Education: An Analysis of Cultural Contingencies |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: John E. States (Wing Institute) |
Discussant: Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University) |
CE Instructor: Ronnie Detrich, M.S. |
Abstract: The purpose of this symposium is to examine the characteristics of culture within special education, analyze how these characteristics either facilitate or obstruct a movement toward evidence-based practices. We focus on special education because it has largely been ignored in the education reform efforts and, in many ways, it is a separate system from general education. Specifically, we will examine the role of formal and informal contingencies and how they relate to evidence-based practice in special education. Those contingencies operate at several levels. We propose an expanded model of an evidence-based education approach that requires both a demonstration of efficacy in controlled research conditions but also demonstrations of effectiveness once practices are taken to scale and implemented under usual conditions; a continuum of rigor that allows decision makers when the best available evidence does not meet the most rigorous standards of research. Finally, we propose a set of steps that can be taken to build an evidence-based culture within special education. |
|
An Expanded Model of Evidence-based Practice in Special Education. |
RONNIE DETRICH (Wing Institute), Randy Keyworth (Wing Institute), John E. States (Wing Institute) |
Abstract: The movement toward evidence-based education requires that we define what is a necessary and sufficient demonstration for evidence. It is the perspective of this paper that the necessary demonstration of evidence is not only a demonstration that an intervention is efficacious (producing results in a controlled research setting) but it is also necessary to demonstrate that the intervention is effective (producing results when taken to scale). A demonstration that a procedure is efficacious is an important step but it is critical as evidence based procedures are applied more broadly that consideration is given to the various social and political contingencies that may ultimately impact the effectiveness of an intervention. A simple example is that an intervention that is efficacious but is not acceptable to teachers expected to implement it is not likely to produce the expected results because the teachers are not likely to implement the intervention with sufficient integrity to produce the results. In addition to proposing a model of evidence-based practice that includes demonstrations of effectiveness, some of the common social and political contingencies that may negatively impact wide scale implementation will be described. Examples of successful and unsuccessful large-scale implementation will be considered for illustrative purposes. |
|
The Evidence Based Practice Bandwagon: Should Behavior Analysts Jump On? Can We? |
MARK D. SHRIVER (Munroe-Meyer Institute) |
Abstract: Although behavior analysts have previously discussed the need to bridge the divide between basic and applied research and the need to more effectively disseminate behavior analytic technology and principles, it is apparent that behavior analysis techniques and principles are still not widely accepted or used. In the past decade, there has been an increasing emphasis in education, medicine, and psychology as well as federal policies and legislation on the identification and dissemination of evidence based practices (EBP). In essence, there is a bandwagon of support across professional and governmental groups for EBP. Fads come and go and typically it is best to stay off bandwagons. It can readily be argued; however, that applied behavior analysis (ABA) is all about EBP. Barriers to the dissemination of ABA technology and principles for EBP are obstructing ABA’s jump on this bandwagon. This paper presents on some of those barriers including definitional issues (i.e., what do we disseminate?), research to practice issues (i.e., ABA research is not practice) and issues in how we disseminate technology and principles (i.e., ABA as an organization does not have a strategy to disseminate research to practice or EBP). Possible solutions to overcoming these barriers are presented. |
|
Getting There From Here: Creating an Evidence-based Culture within Special Education. |
JOHN E. STATES (Wing Institute), Randy Keyworth (Wing Institute), Ronnie Detrich (Wing Institute) |
Abstract: At each level in the special education culture there exist obstacles to implementing evidence-based practices. This paper will provide suggestions for each level within the special education culture. From a systems perspective, it is important that each level of the system has pieces in place that promote evidence-based practices. Failing to do so will result in the ultimate collapse of an evidence-based culture. One of the critical features of an evidence-based culture is that there is evidence for decision makers to evaluate. A second feature is that the decision makers routinely interact with the data. Curriculum based measurement shows great promise for bringing decision makers into regular contact with the relevant data. Other levels within the special education system also require attention if evidence-based practice is to become the primary working model for decision-making. As an example, the due process procedures built in as a safe-guard for parents has become so expensive for school districts that they often agree to settle disputes rather than proceed with a hearing to determine services. Problems arise when the settlement results in the adoption of unvalidated procedures. |
|
|
|
|
Functional Analysis and Assessment in the Applied Environment |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Regency VII |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Susan Ainsleigh (Simmons College) |
Discussant: Michael F. Dorsey (Vinfen Corporation & Simmons College) |
CE Instructor: John Stokes, Other |
Abstract: The purpose of this symposium is to review innovative methods for conducting functional analysis in the applied setting. The first paper demonstrates how to train staff teacher and families to implement functional analysis condition using performance feedback and video modeling. The second two presentations review innovative methods for conducting functional assessment and analysis. Additionally the relevance for using hypothesis driven interventions based off of the results of assessment is reviewed. All programs review present Reliability and results graphically. |
|
The use of Performance Feedback and Video Modeling in Training Staff and Parents to Implement Functional Analysis Conditions. |
JOHN STOKES (Charles River ARC), Michael F. Dorsey (n/a) |
Abstract: The present Study examined the use of performance feedback, video modeling and workshop training for staff and family member to conduct functional analysis. Results indicated that all 4 subjects met accuracy criterion following individual training and feedback. During generalization probes two subjects accurately conducted sessions with individuals in the day program. |
|
Functional Assessment in the Public School Classroom: Methods for Selecting Effective Treatment for Compliance to Academic Instruction. |
KRISTOFER VAN HERP (Stoneham Public Schools, Massachusetts), Susan Ainsleigh (Simmons College) |
Abstract: An unwillingness to participate in academic instruction on the part of a student prevents optimal learning in school settings. Research shows that high rates of engaged academic learning time is associated with a higher degree of success on the part of the student (Fischer & Berliner, 1985; Ysseldyke & Christensen, 2002). Teachers must identify the conditions associated with optimal learning in order to maximize instructional time and minimize time away from engaged learning in school settings. The subject of this study was a 7-year old non-verbal male diagnosed with pervasive developmental disorder (PDD) who attended a public school inclusive classroom. The student demonstrated low rates of compliance to academic instruction and, concurrently, high rates of problem behaviors such as self-injurious behavior, aggression, and bolting from the instructional setting. Indirect and direct functional assessment methods were utilized to identify variables hypothetically associated with optimal learning and compliance to instructional tasks. A structured analog assessment using a reversal design was conducted to verify these hypotheses. Results of these assessments were used to identify classroom-based interventions to increase academic compliance and, hence, engaged time in the classroom. Results demonstrate an overall increase in compliant behavior following implementation of the intervention package. Subsequent interview of teachers implementing the intervention package support its efficiency for use in the classroom. |
|
Functional Assessment and Analysis of Bolting Behavior in a Preschool Setting: Analyzing Topography of Attention Maintaining Problem Behavior. |
ELISE COOKE (Simmons College), Susan Ainsleigh (Simmons College) |
Abstract: Indirect and direct functional assessment methods were used to develop hypotheses regarding the maintaining variables of the bolting behavior of a 3.5 year old male diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. The subject of this study demonstrated bolting behavior in school and community settings. A long-term 1:1 staffing assignment was determined to be inefficient for maintaining this student during transitions, yet continued concerns for safety of the subject had been reported by both teachers and parents. The results of functional assessments suggested that attention from adults was a likely maintaining variable of bolting behavior. In order to determine the form of attention that was maintaining the bolting behavior, four attention conditions were implemented using an alternating treatment design: stern vocal attention with physical guidance (Condition A), physical guidance with no vocal attention or eye contact (Condition B), playful physical attention with no vocal attention or eye contact (Condition C) and playful physical attention and playful vocal attention (Condition D). Conditions were scheduled randomly, and each condition was scheduled for an entire school day; data were collected during three separate daily transitions. All staff throughout the school that typically interacted with the student were involved in implementing each condition, including teachers, therapists, secretaries, and the school nurse; the Lead Teacher provided direct training to each participant. Results showed that Condition D (playful physical attention and playful vocal attention) was associated with high rate bolting behavior and Condition A (stern vocal behavior with physical guidance) was associated with low rate bolting behavior. Results were used to design a multi-component treatment package. Implementation of the treatment package resulted in near zero-rate bolting behavior after 2 month follow-up. Functional analysis procedures can be successfully and efficiently implemented in public school elementary school classrooms, and can result in individually design treatment plans. |
|
|
|
|
How to Build a Quality Autism Program in Your School District |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Regency V |
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Elisabetta Pestrichella, M.S. |
Chair: Donna K. Anzalone (The Autism Help Center) |
DONNA K. ANZALONE (The Autism Help Center) |
BRIAN GOLDBERG (The Autism Help Center) |
ELISABETTA PESTRICHELLA (Long Island University) |
Abstract: Because the prevalence of autism continues to rise dramatically, school administrators struggle with the needs of children with autism and how best to provide appropriate, data-based programming in their district. This symposium will provide administrators and other district persons with practical solutions to assist in including students with autism into their district and building quality programs that fit their needs and add benefit to their staff. We will discuss the building of a district program by following several case study districts from their inception to their recognition by the state of New York as a quality school district program for students with autism spectrum disorder. Often, administrators find challenges at all levels of program creation, including finding resources, training personnel, and answering tough questions from parents and staff about including students with autism. The presenters will provide participants with answers to difficult questions and practical solutions to the challenges faced by administrators looking to create new programs. For those administrators who have existing programs in their district, this workshop will highlight issues of quality control and how to maintain programs as the district continues to grow. Handouts will include a framework for administrators to use with their district and a quality control checklist. |
|
|
|
|
International Symposium - Intersections Between Joint Attention and Social Referencing in Children With Autism and Typically Developing Children |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: DEV; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children) |
Discussant: Jacob L. Gewirtz (Florida International University) |
CE Instructor: Rebecca P. F. MacDonald, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Joint attention and social referencing have received increased attention in developmental psychology and behavior analysis because of their relation to the development of autism. Joint attention involves the coordinated attention between a social partner and an object in the environment and has been identified as one of the earliest emerging social behaviors in typically developing children. Social referencing involves the child searching or looking for cues in the facial expressions of the caregiver to determine how to act in the context of ambiguity. Deficits in joint attention and social referencing are apparent in very young children with autism. The development of operant models for the analysis of joint attention and social referencing are seen as important to the treatment of these deficits. The purpose of this symposium is to describe several research projects in which the authors are using an operant analysis of joint attention and social referencing to develop protocols for evaluating and treating children with autism. Data that support the etiology of social referencing with 18 very young infants will be reported. The implications of these analyses will be discussed as they relate to a behavioral analysis of this very important developmental phenomenon. |
|
Analysis and Treatment of Joint Attention in Young Children with Autism. |
REBECCA P. F. MACDONALD (New England Center for Children), William V. Dube (University of Massachusetts Medical School, E.K. Shriver Center), Jennifer L. Klein (New England Center for Children), Sally N. Roberts (New England Center for Children), Krista Smaby (New England Center for Children), Emily E. Wheeler (University of Massachusetts Medical School, E.K. Shriver Center) |
Abstract: This paper will describe a contingency analysis of joint attention in which the characteristic gaze shifts, gestures, vocalizations, are shaped and maintained by conditioned socially mediated reinforcers. According to this analysis, joint attention deficits in children with autism spectrum disorders may be related to failures of socially mediated consequences to function as conditioned reinforcers. Profiles of child performance will be shown using data from a concurrent choice procedure used to determine the value of social reinforcers, as well as, assessment data on joint attention initiations and responsiveness to joint attention bids. The assessments were administered to both children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorders and typically developing children, aged 2 to 4 years. Interobserver agreement was high for all behavioral measures. Case examples of intervention procedures to establish joint attention initiations will be presented. Results will be discussed in the context of the posited behavioral contingency analysis of joint attention. |
Dr. Rebecca MacDonald is a Licensed Psychologist in Massachusetts and a Board Certified Behavior Analyst who serves as the Director of Intensive Instructional Preschool Program for children with autism at the New England Center for Children. She is an Adjunct Professor in the Masters in Applied Behavior Analysis (MABA) Program at Northeastern University. Rebecca received her doctorate in Developmental and Child Psychology from the University of Kansas in 1983. Dr. MacDonald began at The New England Center for Children as the Clinical Director in 1983. She then taught for three years in the Graduate School of Education at Simmons College in Boston (1992-1995). In 1995 she returned to the New England Center for Children in her current position. Dr. MacDonald was a past Program Chair for the American Psychological Association for Division 25. Rebecca has presented her research at numerous conferences over the past twenty years and published studies that have appeared in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, Research in Developmental Disabilities, and Analysis and Intervention of Developmental Disabilities. Dr. MacDonald’s research interests currently include; assessment and teaching joint attention, teaching play and social reciprocity to children with autism, and measuring clinical outcomes of early intensive behavior intervention. |
|
Infants Learning to Reference Maternal Facial Expressions of Emotions. |
MARTHA PELAEZ (Florida International University) |
Abstract: The assumption that infant social referencing behaviors can result from contingency-based learning processes was tested. In a context of ambiguity or uncertainty, maternal emotional expressions can be learned by the infant as cues for positive and aversive events. Eighteen 4- to 5-month-old infants and their mothers participated in a repeated-measures reversal design. Infants were trained differentially to reach for an ambiguous object following joyful maternal expressions and not to reach following fearful maternal expressions. During baseline, none of the infants responded differentially to the joyful and fearful maternal expressions. After training sessions, however, infants learned to reach differentially following presentations of joyful and fearful cues. During a subsequent extinction (reversal) phase, the pleasant and aversive contingencies on reaching for the ambiguous object were discontinued producing extinction of the differential reaching response. During the last phase, infants were retrained differentially to respond again to the two maternal expressions. This study provides the basis for the alternative hypothesis that infant social referencing may result from contingency-based learning. |
Dr. Martha Pelaez is a Professor of Psychology. In 1992, she received her Ph.D. in Developmental Psychology, winning the International Dissertation Award from the International Society for Infant Studies (ISIS) on "Infant learning to reference maternal emotional expressions." In 1994, she completed a postdoctoral Fellowship at the University of Miami, School of Medicine. She has studied mother-infant interactions, maternal depression and its effects on infant behavior, and early social-learning processes like attachment, fears, and social referencing. Her theoretical contributions include the creation of taxonomy of rules and a behavior–analytic approach to moral development. Dr. Pelaez has published more than 40 articles in refereed journals (including the American Psychologist and the journal of Child Development); co-authored 11 chapters, published 1 textbook (with G. Novak) on child development, and edited several monographs. Martha Pelaez was the past Program Chair for the American Psychological Association for Division 25 and past Program Co-Chair for the Association for Behavior Analysis. She is the founder of the Behavior Development Bulletin and has served as its editor since 1990. She was awarded Fellowship status by the American Psychological Association. Currently, she serves in nine editorial boards of refereed journals, including The Behavior Analyst and is a member of the Florida Board of Governors--the board that rules the State University System. |
|
The Role of Joint Attention in Verbal Operants. |
PER HOLTH (The Behavioral Center, Oslo) |
Abstract: Research on joint attention, the synchronizing of the attention of two or more persons, has progressed mainly outside of behavior analysis. Research within the cognitive-developmental tradition has shown that deficient joint attention skills are strongly correlated with later developing ‘language abilities’ and that children diagnosed with autism may display a syndrome-specific joint attention deficit. The present paper focuses on the role of joint attention phenomena in verbal operants, such as tacts, mands, verbal behavior controlled by verbal stimuli, and autoclitics. An operant analysis of joint attention skills and how they are interwoven with verbal operants may point directly to suggestions for effective intervention strategies. |
Dr. Per Holth is currently a researcher at the Norwegian Center for the Studies of Conduct Problems and Innovative Practice and associate professor at Akershus University College. He is interested in behavior analysis in general; basic research as well as conceptual issues and various areas of application. His interest in an operant analysis of joint attention arose while he was the program director at the Center for Early Intervention in Oslo, working with children diagnosed with autism (2000-2003). His interest in verbal behavior extends back to his early study days, when he came across a copy of Skinner’s (1957) book (some people are lucky), and he teaches courses on verbal behavior at the Masters Program in Learning and Relational Competence at Akershus University College, Norway. |
|
|
|
|
Where Do We Fit in: Behavior Analysis in Psychiatric and Medical Settings |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
3:00 PM–4:20 PM |
Greenbriar |
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Ivy M. Chong Crane (William Beaumont Hospital) |
Discussant: Martin J. McMorrow (Center for Comprehensive Services, Inc.) |
CE Instructor: Ivy M. Chong Crane, Ph.D. |
Abstract: The role of behavior analysts working amongst inter-disciplinary teams within health care settings has varied over time. In the age of managed care the need for empirically based treatment options has amplified the utility of behavior analysis within these settings. However, due to the constraints of the philosophical underpinnings of the medical model behavior analysts have been forced to adapt. Although behavior analysts typically follow a functional approach to understanding human behavior, much success has been witnessed by integrating these two models. The current symposium examines the specific dynamics within this integrative model through an exploration of theoretical concepts, challenges involved and current case examples within both psychiatric and primary care facilities |
|
The Role of Behavior Analysts in Psychiatric Settings. |
KIMBERLY DWYER-MOORE (Our Lady of Peace), Jaime Flores (Our Lady of Peace), Katherine Miriam Johnson-Patagoc (Our Lady of Peace) |
Abstract: This paper examines the history and current practice of behavior analysis in psychiatric settings. Whereas the psychiatric approach to care has traditionally been predominated by the medical model, the effectiveness of combining the medical model with the behavior analytic treatment model is examined. A case illustration of this model in practice at Our Lady of Peace psychiatric hospital is presented. This facility is a unique and multi-faceted organization that provides state-of-the-art services to a range of inpatient and outpatient populations. Within this 200-bed facility behavior analyst work specifically with children and adolescents with developmental disabilities or brain injuries and psychiatric disorders including bi-polar disorder, conduct disorder and oppositional defiant disorder. Behavior Analysts work in conjunction psychiatrists and other trans-disciplinary team members to develop and implement individualized function based behavioral support plans derived from functional assessment outcomes. The role of behavior analysts in designing and implementing behaviorally based data collection procedures to aid psychiatrists in making clinically relevant decisions regarding medications, community access, length of stay and discharge placement is discussed within this case example. |
|
A Present Day Illustration of Behavior Analysis in a Psychiatric Setting. |
JAIME FLORES (Our Lady of Peace), Kimberly Dwyer-Moore (Our Lady of Peace), Beth A. Duncan (Our Lady of Peace) |
Abstract: The current paper depicts the role of behavioral assessment, data collection, treatment and staff training within Our Lady of Peace psychiatric hospital. Within this 200-bed facility, the Innovations and Neurobehavioral Centers encompass 62 beds and employ a unique combination of the behavior analytic and medical treatment models. The inpatient acute level of care required for admission and the rapid rates of admission and discharge necessitate immediate initiation of data collection and basic standard treatment protocols. While these basic protocols are in place, the behavior analyst immediately begins a thorough assessment including preference assessments, descriptive analyses, and analog functional analyses as appropriate. Following assessment, individualized function-based behavior intervention plans are developed. Intervention plans consist of customized data collection, proactive procedures, antecedents to problematic behaviors, strategies for teaching replacement behaviors and function based crisis intervention. A major focus of the behavior analysts is staff, family, and community provider training. Case illustrations exemplify the diverse and challenging population served and the innovative interventions implemented focusing on least restrictive treatment alternatives in a psychiatric setting. Challenges to providing treatment in this setting are explored. |
|
Beaumont Hospital Brings HOPE: Behavior Analysis Within the Medical Model. |
JENNIFER A. DELANEY (William Beaumont Hospital), Ivy M. Chong Crane (William Beaumont Hospital), Veronica J. McAtee (William Beaumont Hospital), Ruth M. Anan (William Beaumont Hospital) |
Abstract: The Division of Developmental-Behavioral Pediatrics has been providing diagnostic, assessment, and treatment services since 1968. An inter-disciplinary team including developmental pediatricians, child psychiatrists, child psychologists, and clinical social workers collaborate to identify problems and develop treatment plans for children with variety of diagnosis (e.g. autism, selective mutism, ADHD, disruptive behavior disorders). More recently behavior analysts have increasingly been involved in treatment decisions and interventions (i.e., functional assessment, parent training, intensive early intervention, and behavioral consultation). Historically behavior analytic services have been dichotomized from the medical model, as they are traditionally viewed as educational in nature rather than psychological or medical. As the healthcare community continues to strive for empirically based, efficacious treatment modalities, behavior analysts have been able to provide reimbursable services within the medical model. Currently, seven members of the psychological staff are nationally recognized Board Certified Behavior Analysts. Case examples of children who were treated with behavioral analytic principles and procedures under a mental health billing system will be reviewed. |
|
|
|
|
Presidential Address: Aversively Motivated |
Monday, May 29, 2006 |
4:30 PM–5:20 PM |
Centennial Ballroom I & II |
Chair: Frances K. McSweeney (Washington State University) |
CE Instructor: Thomas S. Critchfield, Ph.D. |
|
Presidential Address: Aversively Motivated |
Abstract: Behavior analysis once supported a rich tradition of studying aversive control, that is, behavior change through punishment or negative reinforcement. A variety of factors have shifted our contemporary emphasis -- almost exclusively -- to the study of positive reinforcement. This status quo is most easily justified for service delivery (especially with vulnerable populations) in which we are concerned about excessive reliance on aversive control and the side effects that this can cause. I will argue, however, that our collective disregard for the study of aversive control has left us in an untenable position, both scientifically and practically. Where science is concerned, the past three decades have seen important advances in the understanding of positive reinforcement for which no parallel insights exist regarding aversive control. Moreover, scientists outside of our field have revealed robust aversive-specific phenomena that behavior analysts have largely ignored. Our silence about these effects allows them to be explained within, or even seen as evidence for, nonbehavioristic theoretical frameworks. Where practice is concerned, a lack of new behavior analytic data on aversive control may suggest that we have nothing to say on the topic. As a consequence, perhaps, policy makers and others seeking consensus on issues like corporal punishment may not consult our field for guidance. Moreover, because aversive control is ubiquitous in the everyday world, it is difficult to see how a thorough analysis of socially important behavior can proceed without a proper understanding of aversive control. For instance, emerging notions about aversive control may generate counterintuitive treatment predictions that cannot be reached by thinking about positive reinforcement alone. In summary, the world out there encompasses, and is fascinated by, aversive control, and we should be motivated to reanimate our tradition of studying it. |
|
THOMAS S. CRITCHFIELD (Illinois State University) |
|
Dr. Thomas S. Critchfield graduated from West Virginia University, where he received his M.A. (1984, under the direction of Dr. Ernest Vargas) and his Ph.D. (1989, under the direction of Dr. Michael Perone). At Auburn University, he coordinated the doctoral program in Experimental Analysis of Behavior and served as Undergraduate Program Coordinator. He currently is Professor of Psychology at Illinois State University. Dr. Critchfield completed terms on the ABA Executive Council as Student Representative (1986-1989) and Experimental Representative (2002-2005), and has held positions with the Society for the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, with Division 25 of the American Psychological Association, and on the editorial boards of a number of behavior analysis journals. His scholarly interests focus on basic operant processes, on verbal behavior, and on scientific translation within behavior analysis. |
|
|
|
|
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Teaching Safety Skills to Children |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: DDA |
Chair: Kent Johnson (Morningside Academy) |
CE Instructor: Raymond G. Miltenberger, Ph.D. |
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Teaching Safety Skills to Children |
Abstract: This tutorial will begin by describing safety threats to children involving low incidence but highly dangerous situations that can result in injury or death (e.g., abduction attempts, home fires, finding a loaded gun). Two approaches to preventing injuries to children will be presented; changing adult behavior to remove the safety threat and teaching safety skills to children. The tutorial will describe and illustrate the essential components of behavioral skills training (BST) procedures for teaching safety skills to children. Recent research evaluating BST procedures for teaching safety skills will be reviewed with an emphasis on teaching children skills to prevent firearm injury. Various issues will be addressed including a) the distinction between skills deficits and performance deficits, b) strategies for increasing the effectiveness and efficiency of BST, c) strategies for promoting generalization, d) and strategies for promoting wide scale adoption of effective training procedures. |
|
RAYMOND G. MILTENBERGER (North Dakota State University) |
|
Dr. Raymond Miltenberger received his doctorate in Clinical Psychology from Western Michigan University in 1985 and is a Professor of Psychology at North Dakota State University. His current research interests are in self protection skills, including teaching safety skills to children to prevent gun play and teaching sexual abuse and abduction prevention skills, the analysis and treatment of habit disorders, and in functional assessment, treatment, and training approaches with individuals with developmental disabilities. Dr. Miltenberger has authored 125 research articles, 25 chapters, and is the author of Behavior Modification: Principles and Procedures, which is in its Third Edition and has recently been translated into Japanese. He has been the recipient of numerous awards, including the Chamber of Commerce NDSU Distinguished Professor Award and the Distinguished Alumnus Award from Western Michigan University. Dr. Miltenberger currently serves on the Professional Advisory Board for the May Institute, is Vice-President of the North Dakota State Board of Psychologist Examiners, is an Associate Editor of Education and Treatment of Children, and serves on the editorial boards of three additional journals. |
|
|
|
|
|
Developing University Practica and Field-Based Training to Meet the New BACB Experience Standards |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–9:50 AM |
Techwood |
Area: TBA; Domain: Applied Research |
CE Instructor: Gerald A Shook, Ph.D. |
Chair: Gerald A Shook (Behavior Analyst Certification Board) |
JAMES M. JOHNSTON (Auburn University) |
JOSE A. MARTINEZ-DIAZ (Florida Institute of Technology and ABA Tech) |
GERALD A SHOOK (Behavior Analyst Certification Board) |
Abstract: The panel members will address issues surrounding universities developing and implementing training programs that will meet the new experience standards of the BACB. Panel members will provide examples of intensive practica, practica, and supervised fieldwork experience-based programs that have been implemented successfully. Panel members will review the new experience standards and describe barriers to their implementation accompanied by solutions to these problems. Participants will be encouraged to ask questions of the panelists as well as provide their own examples of barriers and solutions. |
|
|
|
|
A Behavioral Analytic Approach to Special Educator Assessment |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Auburn |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Donald M. Stenhoff (University of Kentucky) |
Discussant: Charles L. Salzberg (Utah State University) |
CE Instructor: Bryan J. Davey, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Behaviorists seek to measure specific observable educators behaviors (e.g., opportunities for students to respond, praise delivered to students, and error correction procedures) rather than overall quality of classroom activities. To empirically assess the quality of teachers behaviors during instruction, it is imperative that measures are precise and reliable. When observable behaviors are recorded within a systematic framework and collected in an empirical manner, we can directly assess the extent to which teachers engage in research-based effective teaching behaviors. This is crucial in understanding and designing interventions to increase special educators effectiveness in the classroom and ultimately impact student outcomes. Often, personnel preparation programs and state offices of education rely on measures lacking direct behavioral observation methods and provide no evidence of validity. An instrument has been developed that captures the degree to which teachers engage in critical observable behaviors. The instruments reliability, and the relationship between the identified behaviors and student academic performance are being assessed. The purpose of this symposium is to: (a) discuss observable effective teaching behaviors, (b) describe a behavior analytic approach to teacher assessment, (c) present reliability data, (d) present longitudinal teacher data study, and (e) present a methodology to link teacher behavior to student outcomes. |
|
Directly Observed Teacher Behaviors and Their Link to Student Performance. |
BENJAMIN LIGNUGARIS/KRAFT (Utah State University), Donald M. Stenhoff (University of Kentucky) |
Abstract: Over 30 years of research has provided information that identifies important pedagogical skills. Some of those skills include providing frequent opportunities to respond, providing feedback to students, and monitoring student work. Researchers, assert that having a teaching certificate or completing college methods courses may not be indicative of these skills. This points clearly to the need to directly assess pedagogical skills rather than rely upon indirect measures such as certification status or courses completed. However, directly measuring effective teaching behaviors is a complicated task. It is important to identify critical behaviors based on prior studies that examined teacher behaviors and the relationship to student performance in the classroom. The purpose of this presentation is to provide an overview of the critical teaching behaviors that have been identified in the literature. Additionally, the presenter will discuss the current available instruments and the extent to which they incorporate these behaviors. |
|
The Characteristics and Reliability of a Behavioral Teacher Performance Measure. |
DONALD M. STENHOFF (University of Kentucky), Benjamin Lignugaris/Kraft (Utah State University), Bryan J. Davey (Southern Behavioral Group, Inc.) |
Abstract: Often in educational settings observers assess educators with instruments that depend on a high level of inference. While these instruments are frequently used, they do not provide observers or personnel preparation programs with an empirical behavioral measure of teacher performance. Thus, any instrument used to evaluate teacher performance should include defined objective measures with items that reflect a composite of research based effective teaching behaviors. A behavioral based instrument should have high interobserver reliability, and identify clear instructional strengths and needs. Such a measure provides personnel preparation programs with reliable information regarding the extent to which teachers engage in specific behavior. Precise behavior measurement allows observers to target specific behaviors with interventions (e.g., targeted training, specific feedback), which can be designed and implemented to improve teachers’ performance. The purpose of this presentation is to describe the characteristics of a distinct teacher observation instrument that relies on direct observation of observable and measurable educator behaviors. The instrument is used to assess the degree to which teachers engage in specific behaviors shown to produce higher student achievement. In addition, results from a reliability study will be presented. |
|
Observable Teacher Behaviors: Effective Measurement and a Methodology to Link Teacher Behavior and Student Outcomes. |
BRYAN J. DAVEY (Southern Behavioral Group, Inc.), Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University), Charles L. Salzberg (Utah State University), Donald M. Stenhoff (University of Kentucky) |
Abstract: The presentation examines special education teacher development from student teaching through the end of the induction year using a behaviorally based teacher performance measure (TPM). The measure is grounded in observable effective teaching behaviors and comprised of three general categories: (a) instruction; (b) classroom management; and (c) assessment and data collection. Longitudinal data were collected on observable teacher behaviors such as active monitoring, error correction procedures, opportunities to respond and praise rate. Data pertaining to classroom management and assessment and data collection techniques were also obtained through direct interview. Results are presented and discussed in terms of development across general categories and specific teaching behaviors. Further results are discussed in terms of implications for personnel preparation programs. The presentation will conclude with an introduction to a “value-added” methodology, which purports to assess beginning teachers’ effectiveness in relation to student achievement. |
|
|
|
|
Classroom Interventions within the Context of School-Wide Positive Behavior Support |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
University |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Debra M. Kamps (Juniper Gardens Children's Project) |
CE Instructor: Linda S. Heitzman-Powell, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium consists of four data-based presentations of classroom interventions for students with behavioral problems. Studies include effects for (a) classroom implementation of School-wide PBS procedures including eco-behavioral observations and data analysis, (b) use of Class-wide Function Based Intervention Teams (CW-FIT), a group contingency program to improve student performance in elementary and middle school classrooms, (c) secondary level interventions within the Behavior and Reading Improvement Center model of positive behavior support, and (d) teacher self-evaluation to improve praise rates and student behavior. Presentations will describe methods, intervention procedures, and results for teacher and student behaviors. Results indicated positive outcomes for increased on task and decreased disruptive behaviors for challenging students. Interventions also resulted in increased levels of teacher attention to appropriate behaviors and reductions in negative peer attention. |
|
An Ecobehavioral Observation Study of Schoolwide PBS and Students with or at Risk for EBD. |
HOWARD P. WILLS (Juniper Gardens Children's Project), Linda S. Heitzman-Powell (University of Kansas and Juniper Gardens Children's Project), Kimberly K. Bessette (University of Kansas), Rachel White (University of Kansas), Allison Kimbrell (University of Kansas), Kelley Young (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: This presentation will report the results of an ecobehavioral observation study involving 4 urban elementary schools, 32 classrooms, and 64 students with or at risk for EBD. Participating students were nominated by their primary teachers. Each student was observed for 30 min of 2 math and 2 reading periods in the fall and again in the spring. The Multi-Option Observation System for Experimental Studies (MOOSES) (Tapp et al., 1990) was used to record several student, teacher, and contextual measures. Duration codes included engagement, instructional group size, in-seat, transitions. Frequency codes included inappropriate behaviors, compliance, non-compliance, teacher praise and reprimands to individuals and group, and teacher precorrects. SET (Sugai, Lewis-Palmer, Todd & Horner, 2001), I-SSET (Lewis-Palmer, Todd, Horner, & Sugai, 2003), and PBS Surveys (Lewis & Sugai, 1999) were used to provide status of SwPBS implementation. In addition, a revised Classroom Atmosphere Rating Scale (Kamps et al., 2004) was used to document the fidelity of implementation of SwPBS at the classroom level. Findings indicate that, in all four schools, classroom implementation of SwPBS components is essential for the benefits of SwPBS implementation to address the needs of those students at greatest risk. |
|
Effects of the Class-wide Function Based Intervention Team ”CW-FIT” Group Contingency Program. |
LINDA S. HEITZMAN-POWELL (University of Kansas and Juniper Gardens Children's Project), Anna C. Schmidt (University of Kansas), Debra M. Kamps (Juniper Gardens Children's Project) |
Abstract: This presentation will include a program description of the CW-FIT group contingency intervention and data from two classroom settings. CW-FIT consists of 4 critical components. The first is teaching functional replacement behaviors for the inappropriate behaviors that currently function to (a) obtain attention (adult or peer); (b) escape from tasks; and (c) gain access to materials, privileges, and activities. The differential reinforcement of alternative behaviors (DRA)/contingencies consists of both group and individual contingencies, to be carried out as a class “game”, where students earn points for their teams by engaging in any of the desired behaviors (e.g., on-task, using quiet voices, ignoring misbehavior, remaining in seats during work time, using appropriate behaviors to gain teacher attention). The next component of the intervention is extinction, a process which minimizes social responses (e.g., attention) to inappropriate behavior. The final component of the CW-FIT is self-management. This consists of a “mini-chart” that matches to the class chart for the contingency program. This individual chart will be placed on the desk for each of the target students and 2-3 peers. Results indicated reductions in student disruptive behaviors, increased on task behavior, increased teacher praise and decreased use of reprimands. Data will be presented for two classrooms, 1st grade and 7th grade. |
|
Comparative Effects of Five Lower- Intensity Teacher-Mediated Secondary Interventions. |
RICHARD WHITE (University of North Carolina, Charlotte) |
Abstract: The model of positive behavior support employed by the Behavior and Reading Improvement Center at UNC Charlotte posits two levels of targeted secondary intervention. The model has been implemented across seven school sites in grades K-3. The first level entails lower intensity teacher-mediated or self-mediated interventions and the second level entails pull-out individual or small group direct social skill instruction. The first level interventions employed include contingency contracting, fixed schedule teacher-monitoring, fixed schedule self-monitoring, fixed schedule teacher evaluation, or fixed schedule self-evaluation. Teachers in collaboration with the school positive behavior support team make intervention selection decisions among these first-tier options. The presentation will address prevalence of teacher intervention selection, procedural reliability outcomes, and comparative effects of the five lower intensity interventions on student behavior. Results indicate teacher preference for contingency contracting in combination with one of the fixed schedule intervention options. Student behavior outcomes were more improved with the combination and hence higher dosage of these interventions even though the combination entailed overall lower procedural reliability outcomes. The fixed schedule interventions were effective, but less so than when combined with contingency contracting. There were no significant differences in procedural reliability or student outcomes among the fixed schedule options. |
|
Effects of Teacher Self Evaluation on Students’ Academic and Social Behaviors. |
JOSEPH H. WEHBY (Vanderbilt University), John E. Staubitz (Vanderbilt University), Kevin Sutherland (Virginia Commonwealth University) |
Abstract: While providing praise for desired behaviors have been shown to have positive effects on student outcomes, descriptive research suggests that teachers of students with emotional and behavioral disorders provide praise infrequently. The purposes of this study were to (a) examine the effect of a self-evaluation intervention using audio taped samples of teachers’ instructional behavior on the rates of praise and opportunities to respond in classrooms for students with EBD and (b) to examine the effect of the intervention on student disruptive behavior as well as academic performance assessed via curriculum-based measurement. Teachers from three classrooms for students with severe emotional and behavioral disorders participated in the project. A multiple baseline design across teachers was used. Results show that the intervention had positive effects on teacher praise and students’ correct academic responses, and the mean ratio of praise to reprimands changed across phases for teachers in the treatment group. Minimum change was noted on curriculum-based measures. Implications for future research and limitations of the study will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Current Research Focusing on Children Diagnosed with ADHD |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles) |
Discussant: Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University) |
CE Instructor: Michele D. Wallace, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This symposium will focus on current research conducted with children diagnosed with ADHD. The first paper will present a summary of a meta-analysis of the assessment and treatment literature related to problem behavior exhibited by children diagnosed with ADHD. The second paper will present a study evaluating the predictive validity of preferences assessments when conducted with children under different levels of medication status. The third paper will present a study demonstrating the effects of peer-mediated interventions for children displaying problem behavior in an afterschool program. Finally, the discussant will summarize the contributions and suggest avenues for future research realted to behavioral approaches working with children diagnosed with ADHD. |
|
A Review of the Assessments and Treatment of Problem Behavior Exhibited by Children Diagnosed with Attention Deficit and Hyperactivity Disorder. |
MARIA T. STEVENSON (University of Nevada, Reno), Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles) |
Abstract: Children who display problem behavior in school are more and more being diagnosed with Attention Deficit and Hyperactivity Disorder or Attention Deficit Disorder (ADHD/ADD). Common treatment approaches to eliminate these problems in school fall into three categories: Medical regimes, Behavioral approaches, or a Multitreament approach utilizing both medical and behavioral interventions. Although these approaches have been utilized to decrease problem behavior exhibited by children, a meta-analysis comparing these approaches with respect to their direct as well as their indirect effects has not been conducted. The purpose of this review was to evaluate the assessment and treatment literature related to decreasing problematic behavior exhibited by children diagnosed with ADHD/ADD with respect to: a) operational definitions, b) assessment approaches, c) treatment effects when behavioral approaches are utilized (e.g., reinforcement based procedures, antecedent manipulation procedures, and extinction based procedures), d) treatment effects when medication regimens are utilized, e) treatment effects when a combination of both approaches are utilized, and f) generalization and maintenance of treatment effects. In addition, suggestions for the treatment of problem behavior exhibited by children diagnosed with ADHD/ADD as well as future research suggestions are provided. |
|
The Predictive Validity of Preference Assessments Conducted During Different Levels of Medication for Children Diagnosed with ADHD. |
CARRIE ELLSWORTH (University of Nevada, Reno), Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles), Mandy J. McClanahan (University of Nevada, Reno), Brooke M. Holland (University of Nevada, Reno), Molly Halligan (University of Nevada, Reno) |
Abstract: The validity of preference assessments for predicting reinforcer efficacy was evaluated with children who took medication for the treatment of ADHD. Preference assessments were conducted during two medication levels. Full effects was when 1-2 hours had passed since the administration of the medication and partial effects was when 6-10 hours had passed since the administration of the medication. Reinforcer assessments were used to evaluate responding on an academic task using a progressive ratio (PR) schedule in which schedule requirements progressively increased within each session. Results demonstrated that preference assessments conducted during full effects accurately predicted performance during reinforcer assessments, whereas preference assessments conducted during partial effects did not predict performance. In addition, results demonstrate the utility of a PR schedule for evaluating reinforcer efficacy using various measures. |
|
Using Peer-Mediated Reinforcement in the Treatment of Children with ADHD. |
ALICIA N. MACALEESE (University of Nevada, Reno), Erin J. Pitts (University of Nevada, Reno), Mandy J. McClanahan (University of Nevada, Reno), Daniel H. Sutich (University of Nevada, Reno), Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles) |
Abstract: Typical treatments for children diagnosed with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) and who display problem behavior, often involve the use of psycho-stimulants. Moreover, behavioral interventions are typically under-utilized. One aspect of behavioral interventions that has not been extensively evaluated is the use of peers in mediating problem behavior of students diagnosed with ADHD. The use of peers may enhance behavioral treatments making them more desirable to psycho-stimulant interventions. The purpose of this investigation is to evaluate the use of a peer mediating procedure to decrease the inappropriate behavior in the classroom setting displayed by students diagnosed with ADHD, thus extending the previous literature in the area. Moreover, this procedure may demonstrate a behavioral treatment that does not increase teacher response effort. |
|
|
|
|
Differential Reinforcement in the Treatment of Behavior Disorders: Variables Related to Treatment Efficacy and Maintenance |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
CE Instructor: Louis P. Hagopian, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Behavioral interventions targeting problem behavior often include a component involving differential reinforcement for some alternative response (DRA) or for the absence of the targeted response (DRO). In this symposium, research illustrating various applications of differential reinforcement will be presented. In one study, research examining DRA without escape extinction applied with and without instructional fading will be presented. Another presenter will discuss DRA with and without escape extinction across various types of transitions. The third presentation will describe the role of DRO, relative to instructions and self-recording, in self-management training. The final presenter will discuss methods for thinning schedules of reinforcement under DRA arrangements. |
|
Differential Reinforcement of Alternative Behavior With and Without Stimulus Fading for Escape-Maintained Problem Behavior. |
GRIFFIN ROOKER (New England Center for Children), Eileen M. Roscoe (New England Center for Children), Diana Ervin (New England Center for Children), Nicole C. Groskreutz (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: Because Differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) procedures cannot always be implemented with extinction, it is important to identify treatment components that may enhance the effects of DRA without extinction. In the current study, DRA without extinction was compared with DRA without extinction plus stimulus fading. Three individuals diagnosed with autism, who exhibited disruptive behaviors, participated. Results from their functional analyses showed that their disruptive behavior was maintained by escape from demands. Following a demand baseline condition, two different treatment procedures were compared, DRA without fading and DRA with fading, using a reversal design. During both DRA procedures, compliance resulted in access to a token or an edible. During DRA without fading, an equal number of demands was delivered across sessions. During DRA with fading, the number of demands was gradually increased across sessions. During DRA with fading, disruptive behavior decreased for all participants and compliance increased for two of the three participants. Treatment effects maintained until the criterion number of demands (from the DRA without fading condition) was obtained. By contrast, DRA without fading was not associated with decreases in disruptive behavior or increases in compliance. IOA was collected during at least 30% of sessions and averaged above 90%. |
|
Treatment of Problem Behavior During Transitions: The Influence of Task Preference on DRA Efficacy. |
MELISSA M. SHULLEETA (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center, Munroe-Meyer Institute), Pamela L. Neidert (University of Florida) |
Abstract: The present study assessed participants’ preferences among a set of tasks and then attempted to determine if task preference was a variable that established escape as a reinforcer during task transitions. The task preferences of two children with developmental delays were determined through paired-choice assessments. We then compared rates of destructive behavior during transitions among high-, moderate-, and low-preference tasks. For both participants, destructive behavior was observed primarily when the transition involved moving from a higher to a lower preference task. During treatment, the efficacy of reinforced compliance (without escape extinction) vs. differential reinforcement of compliance (i.e., with escape extinction) varied systematically as a function of the sort of transition. For one participant, reinforced compliance was sufficient to reduce destructive behavior during transitions to moderate preference tasks, but escape extinction was required during transitions to the lowest preference tasks. For the other participant, reinforced compliance was sufficient to reduce destructive behavior with the exception of transitions from the highest preference task, wherein escape extinction was required. These results are discussed in terms of the potential establishing operation effects of task preference on destructive behavior. |
|
Component Analysis of a Self-Management Procedure for Treating Stereotypy. |
JENNIFER N. FRITZ (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida), Pamela L. Neidert (University of Florida), Erin Camp (University of North Carolina, Wilmington), Natalie Rolider (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Koegel and Koegel (1990) presented data indicating that stereotypic behavior exhibited by 4 autistic children with severe deficits decreased after the children were taught a “self-management” strategy. It was unclear, however, whether observed decreases in stereotypy were a function of instructions, self-recording, differential reinforcement, or some combination of these elements. We conducted a component analysis of the procedures contained in the Koegel and Koegel intervention and observed that decreases in stereotypy might be attributable to instructions or differential reinforcement but that self-recording per se had little effect on stereotypy. |
|
Probing Schedules of Reinforcement to Determine the Starting Point for Schedule Thinning. |
DAVID P. JARMOLOWICZ (Kennedy Krieger Institute), David E. Kuhn (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Eric Boelter (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: In order to make behavioral interventions more sustainable over time and across environments, reinforcement schedule thinning is often undertaken after establishing initial treatment effects under dense schedules of reinforcement. Typically, this is conducted by progressively thinning the schedule of reinforcement from dense to lean schedules. In the current study, we describe a procedure for selecting the initial reinforcement schedule prior to undertaking progressive reinforcement schedule thinning during FCT. These schedule probes were conducted to identify the most lean reinforcement schedule that could sustain clinically acceptable levels of problem behavior comparable to the clinical goal (an 85% reduction relative to baseline), and thus serve as the starting point for additional thinning of reinforcement, if necessary. Using this methodology, some of the early steps of schedule thinning that would have otherwise been included during schedule thinning were skipped for two individuals diagnosed with mental retardation. For one participant, schedule probes revealed that progressive schedule thinning was not required, as levels of responding during the probe of the terminal schedule was associated with clinically acceptable levels of problem behavior. Reliability data were collected for at least one third of sessions and averaged above 80%. |
|
|
|
|
Increasing Independence in Children with Autism and Developmental Disabilities: In the Home and Community |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Regency V |
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery |
CE Instructor: Mary Ellen McDonald, Ph.D. |
Chair: Ruth M. Donlin (Private Practice) |
RUTH M. DONLIN (Private Practice) |
MARY ELLEN MCDONALD (Eden II Programs/The Genesis School) |
RANDY I. HOROWITZ (Eden II Programs) |
NICOLE WEINDENBAUM (The Martin Barell School) |
Abstract: This panel will address specific and concrete interventions designed to promote independence in children with autism and related disabilities. Parents and educators in home-based programs are challenged to systematically achieve or maintain an individuals independence in a variety of home and community settings. As a result, many parents request further assistance in maintaining mastered skills or shaping their childs independence when trained staff is not working or when such services are unavailable. The panel will benefit parents and educators working with children where greater independence in the home and community is desired. A variety of interventions, beyond the basics, will be presented that address how to increase an individuals ability to independently engage in activities, display appropriate behavior in the supermarket, restaurant or similar settings, and to develop self-monitoring and other community-based skills. The panel will examine and discuss interventions that are feasible and achievable based on resources available to staff and family. Parents and professionals are encouraged to attend. Panelists will offer suggestions and the remainder of the time will be devoted to open discussion. |
|
|
|
|
Measuring the Effectiveness of Behavioral Interventions for Children with Autism |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Chicago A-F |
Area: AUT; Domain: Theory |
Chair: Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
Discussant: Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
CE Instructor: Gerald E. Harris, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Making behavioral treatment available to more children with autism entails convincing others, including health service providers, parents, insurance companies and public policy makers, that this treatment is effective. Unfortunately, all too often behaviorists are relying on assessment instruments with unknown or unproven reliability and validity for this special population. The 3 presentations in this symposium present data that significantly advances the psychometric knowledge for some of the most widely used measures of intelligence, language and behavior problems in the autistic population. Data was collected from comprehensive assessments of over 100 children diagnosed with autistic disorder as they participated in behavioral treatment programs. Sample sizes for the data analytic procedures are thus larger than usually seen in this area. The first presentation examines the most popular comprehensive intelligence test, the WPPSI-III, in terms of its applicability for children with autism. The second presentation looks at construct validity for several widely used language measures. What do they really measure, and what is the overlap in what they do measure? The third presentation investigates the utility of an efficient behavior report instrument for this special population. Together, these presentations provide insight into our ability to demonstrate the effectiveness of behavioral interventions. |
|
An Examination of the Use of the WPPSI-III Intelligence Test with Children with Autism. |
WENDY J. NEELY (Texas Young Autism Project), Allison Serra Tetreault (Texas Young Autism Project), Ehsan Bayat (Texas Young Autism Project), Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
Abstract: Assessment of cognitive abilities of children with autism is crucial to designing and evaluating behavioral interventions. Little is known about the psychometrics of the most widely used intelligence test, the Wechsler Preschool and Primary Scale of Intelligence -III, for this population. Wechsler published a study in the WPPSI-III Technical Manual (The Psychological Corporation, 2002) addressing the utility of the WPPSI-III for this special population. However, several significant methodological problems are noted in that study, including a very small sample (n = 21), and restrictions of age and I.Q., as well as unknown test administration and scoring procedures for the data provided by an independent third party examiner. In the present study, data from standard initial administrations of the WPPSI-III to a much larger group of children (n = 91) diagnosed with autism was analyzed and the results compared to the findings from the Wechsler study. Significant differences were found in means and distributions of subtest and composite area standard scores. Scores for lower functioning (I.Q. < 60) children with autism, in particular, were very different. Full results and implications for the use of the WPPSI-III for children with autism in clinical and research settings are discussed. |
|
Language Skills of Children with ASD: Construct Validity of Commonly Used Language Tests. |
CATRIONA BORG-HANSEN (Texas Young Autism Project), Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
Abstract: Language skills of children with an Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) are a central focus for both clinicians and researchers. When diagnostically assessing or when testing for effectiveness of interventions or treatments, common practice is to use only one of several tests available, assuming that the test is indicative of the participants’ overall language skills. The current study looked at construct validity of the most frequently used language measures: Reynell Developmental Language Scales, Preschool Language Scale- IV, Vineland Adaptive Behavior Scales, and General Language Index-WPPSI-III. One-hundred-one children diagnosed with ASD between the ages of 15 months and 13 years were assessed with multiple language measures as well as an intelligence measure. Participants’ mental age ranged from 10-53 months and I.Q. from 15-100. Partial correlations across all tests controlled for age equivalent scores on the intelligence test. Surprisingly, correlations across tests were generally low or nonsignificant. The overlap of variance accounted for beyond general intelligence ranged from r2 =.07-.69, indicating that the tests are measuring different constructs 31%-93% of the time. According to the results of this study, researchers, diagnosticians, and treatment providers need to use several assessments to accurately measure language skills in children with ASD. |
|
The Utility of the CBCL as a Screening Tool in Identifying Children with Autism. |
ALLISON SERRA TETREAULT (Texas Young Autism Project), Lauren Harrington (Texas Young Autism Project), Gerald E. Harris (Texas Young Autism Project) |
Abstract: As a behavior oriented measure, the Child Behavior Checklist (CBCL) has potential for increasing behavioral awareness and focus in clinical activities associated with autism. This investigation examines the CBCL to determine if the measure is useful as a screening tool in the identification of children with autism. The CBCL has been widely used to assess patterns of behavior problems in children based on parental, caregiver or teacher report. Problem behaviors are clustered into seven syndromes and five DSM-Oriented Scales, which group items based on their relationship to criteria for DSM diagnoses such as Autistic Disorder and Asperger’s Syndrome. Although the items in the DSM-Oriented Scales are related to criteria for clinical diagnoses, these scales do not correspond precisely to diagnostic criteria. The current study investigated the validity of the Pervasive Developmental Problems (PDP) DSM-Oriented Scale in 120 children previously diagnosed with autism. Results reveal a pattern of very elevated t-scores on the PDP scale in addition to clinical elevations on the Withdrawn Syndrome and the Attention Deficit Disorder Syndrome. A proposed CBCL profile for autism is presented and implications for clinical practice and future research are discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Selecting Reinforcers in Applied Settings: Variables that Impact Preference and Reinforcer Assessment Outcomes |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Regency VI |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas) |
CE Instructor: Richard G. Smith, Ph.D. |
Abstract: A large and growing array of procedures exists for evaluating stimulus preferences and selecting reinforcers for people with developmental disabilities. The presentations in this symposium examine factors that affect the outcomes of preference assessment and reinforcer effectiveness. The effects of variables including the extent of assessment, contingent delivery, noncontingent delivery, restriction, presession exposure to potential motivating operations on stimulus preferences were examined. Also, effects of choice and task difficulty/effort on reinforcer effectiveness were examined. The results of these studies indicate that these variables may alter preferences among stimuli, although some effects appear to be idiosyncratic across participants, and that choice and work requirements may interact to alter the effectiveness of reinforcement. Outcomes of these studies will inform both research and practice for those interested in effective methods for selecting and implementing reinforcement procedures with persons with developmental disabilities. |
|
Examining Variables that Contribute to Fluctuations in Relative Preference: Contingent Delivery, Noncontingent Delivery, and Stimulus Restriction. |
MEAGAN GREGORY (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University) |
Abstract: To date, a handful of behavior analytic studies have examined general changes in stimulus preferences and reinforcer durability over time for individuals with developmental disabilities. However, none have examined the variables that influence the durability and/or stability of reinforcers. We examined the effects of contingent delivery, noncontingent delivery, and restriction on changes in relative preferences over time. Paired-choice preference assessments were used to determine relative preferences. Four moderately preferred stimuli were selected and randomly assigned to one of four conditions. Two stimuli were presented contingent upon correct responses in an academic task. The first stimulus was delivered on an FR1 schedule and the schedule value for the second stimulus was increased across successive weeks from FR1 to FR2, FR5, and FR10. The third stimulus was delivered noncontingently on a schedule yoked to that used for the first stimulus. The fourth stimulus was restricted entirely. After exposure to these conditions, the preference assessments were repeated. For participants who completed four weeks of the manipulations, the data thus far have shown a slight decrease in preference ranking for the item delivered noncontingently and an increase for the increasing FR item. |
|
Some Effects of Motivating Operations on Assessments of Preference. |
TRACY L. KETTERING (Marcus Autism Center), Michael E. Kelley (Marcus Autism Center and Emory University), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center, Munroe-Meyer Institute), Ilana Rappaport (Georgia State University) |
Abstract: Previous research on preferences assessments suggest that several methodologies are effective for establishing hierarchies of preferred stimuli. However, results of some studies suggest that preference may shift due to the presences of edible items (i.e., edible items may displace leisure during preference assessments in combined assessments) or other inadvertent motivating operation (MO) manipulations (e.g., Bojak & Carr, 1999; DeLeon, Iwata, & Roscoe, 1997; Gottschalk et al., 2000). However, the effects of access to specific preference assessment items and other general MO manipulations have not been well studied. In the current investigation, specific MOs were manipulated to determine subsequent effects on MSWO preference assessments. MSWO sessions with 4 leisure and 4 edible items were conducted 30 minutes prior to meals, 30 minutes following meals, and 30 minutes following meals that were supplemented with a preference assessment edible item. Results were idiosyncratic across participants and suggested that the consumption of meals functioned as an MO for edible items in the assessment for two participants, while the consumption of preference assessment edible items did not function as an MO for any of the participants. Results are discussed in terms of previous preference assessment research, general implications for preference assessments, and clinical implications. |
|
A Comparison of Brief versus Extended Paired-Choice and Multiple-Stimulus without Replacement Preference Assessment Outcomes. |
AMANDA J. MCALLISTER (University of North Texas), Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas), Caroline C. Stevens (University of North Texas) |
Abstract: Few studies have systematically evaluated the effects of the extent of assessment on preference assessment outcomes. Typically, studies have used brief procedures to select potential reinforcers for use in intervention. The present study administered a total of 17 food and leisure paired-choice preference assessments and 12 multiple-stimulus without replacement (MSWO) preference assessments to 22 subjects. Results were evaluated to determine the extent to which the results of a brief (i.e., single-session) assessment correspond with those from more extended procedures (i.e., 5-10 sessions). Results indicate stability in rank order across assessments for the most highly preferred stimuli but substantial variability in rank-order among less-preferred stimuli in both the paired-choice and MSWO preference assessments. These outcomes suggest that a brief assessment can be useful when a single, potent reinforcing stimulus is desired, and an extended assessment should be conducted when a larger number of preferred stimuli is needed. |
|
The Effects of Reinforcer Choice on Responding as a Function of Ratio Requirements and Task Difficulty. |
KATHARINE GUTSHALL (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Johns Hopkins University) |
Abstract: The effect of choice of reinforcers on response rates has been examined using both concurrent and single-operant analyses. However, results have differed with regard to the extent of added benefit from reinforcer choice. Related areas of research have suggested that increases in work requirements can magnify small differences in relative reinforcer efficacy. The current study thus used a single-operant design to examine choice versus no choice of reinforcers in children with disabilities using various manipulations related to task difficulty or effort. Results thus far reveal that the provision of reinforcer choice did not enhance responding when ratio requirements or task difficulty were increased. However, differences did emerge when reinforce choice vs. no-choice conditions were compared under progressive-ratio schedules. These results are discussed in terms of the potential effects of choice when amount of work is considered and the sensitivity of various preparations to relative reinforcer efficacy. |
|
|
|
|
Teaching Children with Pervasive Developmental Disorders in Inclusive Settings |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Regency VII |
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Brian Doyle (CEC - Behavioral Services) |
Discussant: Mariela Vargas-Irwin (CEC - Behavioral Services) |
CE Instructor: Brian Doyle, M.A. |
Abstract: The education of children with autism in natural environments poses a unique set of challenges to the field of Applied Behavior Analysis. Rather than transporting children to environments that have specifically been designed to meet their needs, inclusion strives to both help children adapt to their community and to change these natural environments to meet their needs. This symposium examines different issues in the education of children with Autism Spectrum Disorders in the natural environment. |
|
How Do Kids with Autism Talk? Natural Language Samples of Children with Autism and Typically Developing Peers. |
MARIELA VARGAS-IRWIN (CEC - Behavioral Services), Rafael Castro (CEC - Behavioral Services), Brian Doyle (CEC - Behavioral Services), Meehan Leila (CEC - Behavioral Services), Vangala Madhuri (CEC - Behavioral Services) |
Abstract: Skinner's classification of verbal behavior in mands, tacts, echoics, and intraverbals was used to compare natural language samples of two third grade students with autism with samples of their typically developing peers’ language. When compared to natural language samples of children with Pervasive Developmental Disorders, typical children were found to have larger proportions of tacts and intraverbals. Implications for language pragmatic and social skills training are discussed. |
|
Ongoing Measurement of Social Behavior in Children with Pervasive Developmental Disorders. |
MADHURI VANGALA (CEC - Behavioral Services), Rafael Castro (CEC - Behavioral Services), Brian Doyle (CEC - Behavioral Services), Leila Meehan (CEC - Behavioral Services), Mariela Vargas-Irwin (CEC - Behavioral Services) |
Abstract: Proximity to children, receipt of social bids from other children, spontaneous verbalizations towards adults and children, and focus on toys have been identified as critical indicators of social skills in pre-school children with autism. This case presentation examines the data collected on the social behavior of three pre-school students with Pervasive Developmental Disorder integrated in a typical pre-school settings with the support of instructors trained in Applied Behavior Analysis. The advantages of ongoing measurement of social behavior are discussed. |
|
Late Intervention for Children with Pervasive Developmental Disorders. |
LEILA MEEHAN (CEC - Behavioral Services), Rafael Castro (CEC - Behavioral Services), Brian Doyle (CEC - Behavioral Services), Mariela Vargas-Irwin (CEC - Behavioral Services) |
Abstract: In the field of autism there is extensive empirical support for the importance of beginning intensive intervention immediately after diagnosis. However, intensive services are sometimes offered by local school districts only after strong parent advocacy. This case study presents pre and post intervention data for a child with Pervasive Developmental Disorder, Not Otherwise Specified who began receiving one-to-one instruction based on Applied Behavior Analysis at age eleven. The data documents the importance of advocating for behavioral education for older children. |
|
|
|
|
The Regulation of Drug Taking by Humans and Other Animals |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
9:00 AM–10:20 AM |
Piedmont |
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Steven I. Dworkin (University of North Carolina, Wilmington) |
Discussant: Steven I. Dworkin (University of North Carolina, Wilmington) |
CE Instructor: Steven I. Dworkin, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Several different mechanisms have been proposed to account for the different patterns of drug intake observed in humans and other animals. Recently it has been proposed that drug intake is the result of both sensitization and habituation to the drug during consumption. Factors controlling human cigarette smoking and nicotine consumption by rats will be presented and discussed in the context of specific notions related to the regulation of drug intake. |
|
Sex Differences in a Rat Model of Adolescent-Onset Nicotine Self-Administration. |
AMIR REZVANI (Duke University Medical Center), Susan Lawrence (Duke University Medical Center), Ann Petro (Duke University Medical Center), Jed E. Rose (Duke University Medical Center), Edward Levin (Duke University Medical Center) |
Abstract: The vast majority of tobacco addiction begins during adolescence, and 88% of current smokers smoke their first cigarette before age 18 and 60% before age 14 (CDCP, 1991, 1998a, 1998b). Effects of nicotine during adolescence can be critical in determining the tenacity of addiction through the rest of life. Important neurobehavioral development is still occurring during the adolescent period. Critical differences between adolescent and adult neural function may underlie adolescent vulnerability to nicotine addiction. Adolescent neurobehavioral function may predispose individuals to greater nicotine self-administration than adults. This project was aimed at developing a rat model in which the neurobehavioral basis of adolescent vulnerability to nicotine addiction can be studied. Previously, we found that beginning nicotine SA during adolescence vs. adulthood caused a significant increase in SA that persisted through the period when the female adolescent rats became adults (Levin et al. Psychopharmacology, 169:141-149, 2003). In the current study, we showed that adolescent male rats have an even higher rate of nicotine SA during adolescence vs. adulthood than females. In male rats, the adolescent-onset group had more than triple the rate of nicotine SA than the adult-onset group during the first two weeks of SA. Then, over the third and fourth weeks of the study, as the male adolescent rats aged into young adulthood, their nicotine SA reduced toward the levels seen in older male rats, which started nicotine SA in adulthood. Both male and female rats increased nicotine SA with adolescent-onset. But, there is a sex difference with higher nicotine SA during adolescence in males and greater persistence of high nicotine SA into adulthood in females. This rat model can be used as an arena to determine the critical neurobehavioral underpinnings for vulnerability of both adolescent males and females to nicotine addiction. |
|
Factors Involved In Regulating the Intake Of Drug And Non-Drug Reinforcers. |
STEVEN I. DWORKIN (University of North Carolina, Wilmington) |
Abstract: The suggestion of similarities in the reinforcing effects of drug and non-drug reinforcers was initially used to justify the extension of research findings from the experimental analysis of non-drug reinforcers to substance abuse research. Undeniably behavioral studies evaluating the reinforcing effects of psychoactive drugs demonstrated and extended the similarities between these two broad classes of maintaining events. Moreover, current neurobiological mechanisms suggested to be involved in drug abuse are similar to those suggested to be involved in the reinforcing effects of non-drug reinforcers. This presentation will review evolutionary, behavioral and neurochemical theories of reinforcement related to food regulation and drug intake and present some of the similarities and differences between different drug and non-drug reinforcers that are involved in the regulation of intake. |
|
The Role of Nicotine and Non-Nicotine Factors in the Regulation of Cigarette Smoking Behavior. |
JED E. ROSE (Duke University Medical Center) |
Abstract: Cigarette smokers exhibit a fairly consistent regulation of smoke intake, and this behavior has been widely thought to reflect self-regulation of nicotine levels. However, recent studies suggest that non-nicotine factors, including sensory cues accompanying smoke inhalation, play a large role in regulating smoking behavior. Studies will be described that dissociate nicotine and non-nicotine influences, using methods entailing intravenous nicotine administration and presentation of denicotinized cigarettes. In these studies, the effects of non-nicotine components in limiting smoke intake were found to be significantly greater than the direct effects of nicotine, suggesting that conditioned cues may play a prominent role in the regulation of smoking behavior as well as tobacco dependence. These results also suggest novel lines of therapeutic development for smoking cessation treatment. |
|
|
|
|
International Paper - 2006 ABA Tutorial: Relational Frame Theory |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
10:00 AM–10:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom I |
Area: TPC |
Chair: Marianne L. Jackson (University of Nevada, Reno) |
CE Instructor: Dermot Barnes-Holmes, Ph.D. |
|
International Paper - 2006 ABA Tutorial: Relational Frame Theory |
Abstract: Relational Frame Theory (RFT) is a modern behavior-analytic approach to the study of human language and cognition. The tutorial will focus on the main concepts of RFT and how they are currently being used to develop conceptual and empirical analyses of areas such as symbolic meaning, analogical reasoning, rule-governance, and implicit attitudes. The first part of the tutorial will involve defining and explaining the core concepts of RFT, focusing in particular on the operant nature of the theory. The second part of the tutorial will explore recent examples of basic research in RFT, and how the results emerging from this research may be seen as challenging some established views within behavior analysis. The third and final part will consider possible lines of future research in RFT. |
|
DERMOT BARNES-HOLMES (National University of Ireland, Maynooth) |
|
Dr. Dermot Barnes-Holmes is foundation Professor and Chair of the Department of Psychology at the National University of Ireland, Maynooth. He studied under Professor Julian Leslie and Dr. Michael Keenan at the University of Ulster before taking up a teaching position at University College, Cork, where he stayed for 10 years before accepting his current post. Dr. Barnes-Holmes has published over 180 scientific articles, book chapters, and books, and he was recently ranked as the most prolific author in the world in the Experimental Analysis of Human Behavior during the period 1980 to 1999 (Dymond, 2002). He has served on, or is currently serving on, the editorial boards of the following journals: Experimental Analysis of Human Behavior Bulletin; Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior; Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis; The Behavior Analyst; The European Journal of Behavior Analysis; The European Journal of Psychology; The International Journal of Psychology and Psychological Therapy (Associate Editor); and The Psychological Record. Dr. Barnes-Holmes has graduated 19 doctoral students and in the past four years has been involved in attracting over 250,000 dollars in competitive funding for basic research in Relational Frame Theory. He sat on the Health Research Board (a Ministerial appointment) during 2002-2005 and was elected to the Council of the Psychological Society of Ireland for 2004-2007. |
|
|
|
|
|
Achieving Independence: New Solutions That Help Students Surmount Traditional Barriers to Independent Demonstration of Skills |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Elizabeth Martineau (Nashoba Learning Group) |
CE Instructor: Elizabeth Martineau, Other |
Abstract: Overcoming fine and gross motor deficits, analyzing the smallest components of target skills, and developing interventions that lead to the demonstration of independent skills are some of the greatest challenges in teaching students with autism. New solutions are needed to assist students in crossing these barriers. Fine and gross motor deficits are obstacles to skill development in traditional behavioral programming. At times, it has been determined that a student does not have a target skill in his or her repertoire, when closer investigation may yield that motor impairments are simply preventing the demonstration of the skill in the given context. Additionally, when students are unsuccessful in following typical curriculum progressions, a closer analysis of component skills should be completed to ensure proper prerequisite instruction and individual adaptation of the curriculum hierarchy. When it has been prematurely determined that a student is unable to acquire a specific skill, that students advancement may be limited. Furthermore, students are often limited by their ability to demonstrate skills independently. If students are able to perform skills accurately without the presence of an instructor, limitations to inclusion and success in a variety settings are lessened. Utilizing remote monitoring is an effective method to acquire independence in vocational, self-help and leisure skills. |
|
Adapting ABA Curricula to Accommodate Gross and Fine Motor Limitations. |
JESSICA SLATON (Nashoba Learning Group, Simmons College), Elizabeth Martineau (Nashoba Learning Group, Simmons College), Maureen J. Lacerte (Nashoba Learning Group, Simmons College) |
Abstract: Curricula designed using an ABA format is generally quite specific in its format, presentation and criteria. They are based on sound conceptual frameworks and are relayed to other professionals using solid technological language. This allows others to generalize these strategies without loss of effectiveness. There may be a tendency, however, to limit adaptations because of concerns about generality and effectiveness. This case presentation demonstrates how professionals can make appropriate changes without altering the core properties of the programming. Two students currently receiving intense programming based on the principles of Applied Behavior Analysis present with a myriad of fine and gross motor limitations. Their success using the prescribed curricula was limited. Adaptions such as limiting field size, altering position of materials, shifting from expressive identification to receptive ( less of a motor response), training specific motor responses before responding must occur, training with laser as a guide and picture memory are some of the adaptations that have allowed their successful access to the curricula. Demonstration of skill and continued advancement are the end products of such adaptations. Assessing a student’s motor capabilities should be a prerequisite when working with such students, allowing those students to access otherwise very effective curricula. |
|
Delayed Imitation to Increase Visual Memory as a Prerequisite to Following Two Step Directions. |
MAUREEN J. LACERTE (Nashoba Learning Group, Simmons College) |
Abstract: Typical curriculum progressions/advancements may require further investigation and analysis of task prerequisites in order to increase efficacy. When progress is slow and curriculum adaptations have not impacted that trajectory a component analysis may illuminate which skills are necessary in order for the learner to experience success. This study presents a learner whose progress acquiring the ability to follow two step imitation was limited, despite his solid skill level acquired in one step motor imitation and many curriculum adaptations, including video modeling, verbal prompting, and graduated guidance techniques. A component analysis of the task revealed prerequisites that included visual memory, a skill this student had not demonstrated as yet. A program was designed to train delayed motor imitation with delays initially set at 1 second and gradually increased to 5 seconds in length. Upon successful acquisition of motor imitation with a 5 second delay inserted, this student was then able to demonstrate a two step motor imitation with reasonable accuracy. In sum, our assumptions about a curriculum hierarchy may limit our abilities to successfully teach a student if we do not challenge these by carefully analyzing those skills we are addressing. |
|
Independent Schedule Training as a Toileting Program. |
ROBYN E. STEWART (Nashoba Learning Group, Simmons College), Maureen J. Lacerte (Nashoba Learning Group, Simmons College) |
Abstract: Toilet training, a seemingly difficult skill for many children to acquire, is generally taught with one of two end goals in mind; schedule trained or independent use of the toilet. Independent use of the toilet requires that a student, without prompting, either request to use the bathroom or access it independently, and complete all of the required steps. A task analysis may include all of the following: undress if necessary, sit appropriately, urinate or defecate without assistance, wipe appropriately, flush the toilet, redress if necessary, and wash thoroughly. For many learners the acquisition of independence is a very lengthy process. In response to this, an adaptation to a schedule training program (successfully implemented and acquired) is to train for independence within this program. Using a task analysis, specific to the learner, signals (such as timers) and graduated guidance as initial prompting procedures, a student at Nashoba Learning Group, was successfully trained to use the toilet independently, without adult assistance, on a schedule throughout the course of his school day. In addition, generalization to the home environment can be trained using the same techniques with an initial time investment from caretakers that eventually dissipates. |
|
Using Remote Monitoring to Develop Independence in Task Completion. |
ELIZABETH MARTINEAU (Nashoba Learning Group, Simmons College) |
Abstract: One of the greatest challenges in educating children with autism is increasing levels of independence in completing tasks and activities. Yearly goals often include that a particular student will complete a target task independently, however in this context, the term “independent” is often defined as the student being able to complete the task correctly, without assistance from an adult. It does not mean that the student is able to complete the task while the instructor is across the room, in another room, or completely out of sight. Skills become significantly more functional if they can be demonstrated at a truly independent level, meaning the task of stuffing envelopes can be completed while the student is alone in an office, or that an entire activity schedule can be completed while the student is in a separate room of the house. Remote monitoring allows instructors to maintain supervision of the student, while remaining out of sight. Performance is consistently monitored and supervision systematically faded. Utilizing remote monitoring in conjunction with systematic fading of supervision and reinforcement was effective in teaching 2 school-age students with autism to complete vocational tasks, self-help routines, and activity schedules at a truly independent level. |
|
|
|
|
Analyses of Behavior Analytic Approaches to Teaching |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children) |
CE Instructor: Jason C. Bourret, M.S. |
Abstract: The presentations in this symposium describe analyses of common teaching methods. The first presentation describes a study in which the experimenters examined the effects of video modeling as a supplement to a least-to-most intrusive prompting method in establishing behavior chains. In the second presentation, the experimenters describe a study in which they evaluated the effectiveness of, and preference for, three teaching strategies that are commonly implemented in early childhood classrooms. In the third presentation, a study is described in which the experimenters used a concurrent-chains procedure to evaluate the effectiveness of and preference for three teaching methods. In the fourth presentation, a human-operant study is described in which the experimenters investigated variables controlling teachers placement of stimuli in a discrete-trial format. |
|
Combining Video Modeling and Least-to-Most Intrusive Prompting for Establishing Behavior Chains. |
NATALIE MURZYNSKI (New England Center for Children), Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: In the present study, video modeling in addition to least-to-most prompting was compared to least-to-most alone in teaching daily-living skills in the form of behavior chains. Two boys with the diagnosis of autism (ages 8 and 9) participated. A parallel-treatments design with replication was used to examine the effects of combining video modeling with a least-to-most prompting strategy in establishing daily-living skills task analyzed into behavior chains. The results of the present study showed that, in all cases, the participants acquired the task taught with video modeling plus least-to-most prompting in fewer trials than with least-to-most prompting alone. |
|
An Evaluation of the Effectiveness and Social Validity of Three Practices in Early Childhood Education. |
NICOLE HEAL (University of Kansas), Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kansas), Stacy A. Layer (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Although it is generally agreed that learning occurs through children’s interactions with their environments, the manner in which the teacher mediates this learning varies across early childhood classrooms. In this study, we used a multielement design to evaluate the effectiveness of 3 commonly implemented teaching strategies that varied in teacher directedness. Strategy I consisted of a brief exposure to the target relations (Spanish names of colors and animals), followed by a child-led play period in which praise was provided for correct responses, but teacher prompts were not issued. Strategy II was similar except that teacher prompts to vocalize relations and error correction (model and practice) were arranged. Strategy III contained the same procedures as II except that a brief period of teacher –led trials was arranged (timed prompts, tokens for correct responding, back-up activity reinforcers). In addition, a concurrent chains arrangement was used to measure the children’s preferences for the strategies. Interobserver agreement was collected on over 30% of sessions and mean agreement was 90% or higher for all measures. Results indicated that Strategy III was the most effective; however, children’s preferences varied between Strategies I and III. Implications for the design of early educational environments are discussed. |
|
An Evaluation of the Effectiveness and Preference for Three Teaching Tactics which Vary in Initial Task Difficulty. |
STACY A. LAYER (University of Kanasas), Emma Hernandez (University of Kanasas), Gregory P. Hanley (University of Kanasas), Kathryn Welten (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Abstract: Although providing care and safety for young children have been primary roles of preschool teachers, many teach a variety of academic skills. We used a concurrent chains procedure in the current study to evaluate the effectiveness of and preference for three teaching contexts (i.e., errorless, moderate, trial-and-error) with 8 preschool children. The relative efficacy was determined by comparing levels of correct responding during terminal links (where the children experienced the contexts) while preference was determined by observing relative response rates in the initial links (where children chose the context.) Interobserver agreement was collected for a minimum of 30% of sessions and mean agreement was 90% or higher for all measures. The teaching contexts differed in initial task difficulty along two dimensions involving the pre-response prompting and the consequences for incorrect responding. Initially, the errorless context resulted in near zero errors, the moderate context resulted in moderate number of errors, and the trial-and-error teaching tactic resulted in the most number of errors. Results indicate that correct responding was highest in the trial-and-error context for four of the six children and preference for the contexts varied across participants. |
|
Analog of Teachers' Tendencies to Reinforce Side Preferences. |
JORGE RAFAEL REYES (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Elizabeth S. Athens (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Discrete trial training methods are commonly used to train basic skills in individuals with developmental disabilities. In some cases, the participant may have a side preference and pick whatever stimulus happens to be in a particular location. The current study utilized a human operant preparation involving automated “student” responses (“students” were computerized representations) to investigate the effects of side preferences on “teacher’s” placement of stimuli in a discrete trial format (“teachers” were college undergraduates). Study 1 investigated teacher’s placement of the targeted stimulus in response to various strengths of side preferences. Study 2 investigated the effects of having student performance criteria and feedback on the placement of stimuli. Study 3 investigated the effects of competing instructions to randomize the stimuli and performance criteria for the student. Results of study 1 and 2 indicated that teachers were likely to place targeted stimuli in the locations where the student chose more often (preferred side). In fact, teacher placement of stimuli closely matched the proportional rate of reinforcement if a student’s “correct” response is considered to be a reinforcer. The results of study 3 showed a decrease in placement of the targeted stimulus on the preferred side. Implications for the use of discrete trial training will be discussed. |
|
|
|
|
Current Research on Preference Assessment |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom IV |
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute) |
Discussant: Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center, Munroe-Meyer Institute) |
CE Instructor: Louis P. Hagopian, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Research on and the development of new preference assessment procedures has advanced rapidly over the past decade. In this symposium, presenters will describe research examining procedures designed to identify preferred activities and stimuli of individuals with developmental disabilities. The first presenter will describe research comparing an engagement-based and an approach-based multiple stimulus preference assessment procedure. Next, research examining how stimulus access time can affect outcomes of a multiple stimulus preference assessment will be presented. The third presenter will discuss research examining the use of picture stimuli and videotaped presentation of the selected activity. The Discussant will offer commentary on these studies and the larger body of research on preference assessment. |
|
A Comparison of Approach and Duration Stimulus Preference Assessment Procedures. |
TIFFANY KODAK (Marcus Autism Center), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center, Munroe-Meyer Institute), Mike Kelly (Marcus Autism Center), Catherine Trapani (Marcus Autism Center), April N. Kisamore (Marcus Autism Center) |
Abstract: Previous research has evaluated a variety of methods to identify stimuli that may function as reinforcers with individuals with developmental disabilities (Fisher et al., 1992). A multiple stimulus with replacement (MSW) preference assessment was developed to reduce the amount of time required to identify a rank order of preference for items (Windsor et al., 1994). Another method of rapidly identifying preference for stimuli involves a free operant (FO) procedure (Roane et al., 1998). Participants were provided with 5 minutes of free access to stimuli. Despite the variety of preference assessment procedures, it remains unclear whether one type of preference assessment procedure (i.e., approach or duration) will more accurately identify stimuli that will function as reinforcers. The present investigation compared the results of two preference assessment procedures, an MSW and a variation of the FO assessment. In the FO assessment, participants could interact a stimulus as long as they remained in the portion of the room allocated to the particular stimulus. Subsequent reinforcer assessments evaluated the item identified as most preferred in each preference assessment procedure. Results indicated that the two assessment procedures identified different stimuli as most highly preferred. The reinforcer assessment indentified which stimulus was the most effective reinforcer. |
|
Further Evaluation of Factors Affecting Preference Assessment Outcomes. |
JODY M. STEINHILBER (New England Center for Children), Cammarie Johnson (New England Center for Children), Lisa Tereshko (New England Center for Children), Julius Warindu (New England Center for Children) |
Abstract: Preference given selection- and duration-based measures was evaluated with 2 different types of MSWO preference assessments. In one MSWO condition (short), access to selected items was available for a brief duration (15 s); in the other MSWO condition (long), access to selected items was available for up to 15 min. Seven sessions of each condition were conducted using a multi-element design for 5 participants diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder and/or mental retardation. Assessment results identified a different high preference item in long (LHP) and short conditions (SHP) for 3 of 5 participants when rank order was determined by duration measures in the long condition, and 1 of 5 participants when selection measures were compared in the 2 assessment formats. Interobserver agreement data were collected in at least 25% of sessions and agreement was consistently above 90%. Results are discussed in terms of stimulus parameters that may affect preference and possible clinical implications and applications. |
|
Evaluation of a Video-Based Procedure for Conducting Preference Assessments. |
PAMELA L. NEIDERT (University of Florida), Brian A. Iwata (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Results of previous research on the assessment of preference indicate that clear preferences often do not emerge unless differential consequences (i.e., access to activity) are arranged for selection responses. Thus, preference assessments typically involve presentation of the actual stimuli of interest (food or leisure items). This practice may be difficult or time consuming, however, when assessing preference for certain types of events (e.g., going to the movies), and the purpose of this study was to examine the viability of an alternative arrangement that might improve the efficiency of assessment. We determined whether differential preference can be observed when stimulus (picture) selection resulted in access to watching a videotaped segment of the selected activity rather than access to the actual activity. Participants included individuals with developmental disabilities for whom a preference assessment was needed. Results indicated that preferences sometimes emerged under the video condition and that the duration of the video assessment was much shorter than the duration of the assessment in which access to the actual activity was provided. |
|
|
|
|
Evaluating the Impact of Training Providers in ABA and Positive Behavior Support |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Regency VI |
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Jennifer R. Zarcone (University of Rochester Medical Center) |
CE Instructor: Jennifer R. Zarcone, Ph.D. |
Abstract: This presentation will include information about statewide training program in applied behavior analysis and positive behavior support. Trainees are professionals who serve children and adults with disabilities and who work in related human service fields (e.g., foster care, mental health) and reimbursement for services is provided through Medicaid. The focus of training is on defining and collecting data on problem behavior, conducting functional assessment, and developing of positive behavior support plans. Additional training on emotional and mental health issues as they relate to problem behavior are also provided. In this symposium, program evaluation data will presented on the effectiveness of the training using a variety of measures as well as the outcome of the training on the behavior of the consumers identified for intervention. In addition, the impact of systems change on individual agencies, local service delivery, and state-wide strategic action planning will also be discussed. |
|
The Fidelity of Positive Behavior Support Plans. |
NANETTE L. PERRIN (Early Childhood Autism Program, Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Rachel L. Freeman (University of Kansas), Constance Tieghi (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: Each professional in the training program submitted one complete case study with follow-up data and two additional case studies as part of the requirement to complete the training course. A 37 item fidelity checklist based on Horner et al. (2000) was used to score behavior support plans. Frequency distributions for the first two training cohorts show increases in the overall scores on the fidelity measure from the first to the second training year (cohort 1: 62% to 95%; N = 9, Mean = 75.44, SD = 10.84; cohort 2: 74% to 97%, N = 12, Mean = 88.33, SD = 7.44). Professionals were also asked to submit behavior plans before taking the yearlong training course. In addition, professionals were asked to obtain PBS plans that were completed for the case study children before the professional became involved. These pre-testing measures were used to evaluate the fidelity of the plans that were turned in to instructors. To date, 47 PBS plans were evaluated across two cohorts of trainees. The average percent scores for PBS plans turned in by trainees as an example of previous team participation in PBS planning was 46% (N=12) compared to an average percentage of 83% after training. |
|
The Impact of Training in ABA and PBS on Child Behavior on Contextual Fit and Quality of Life. |
RACHEL L. FREEMAN (University of Kansas), Amanda Tyrell (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Constance Tieghi (University of Kansas), Pat Kimbrough (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: For individuals participating in the statewide training program, all of their positive behavior support plans were scored using an impact measure that evaluated the changes in problem behavior and replacement behaviors, the degree to which the interventions developed were linked to the function of the problem behavior, and the degree to which the plans reported evidence in changes in quality of life, both for the target child and the individuals supporting the child. Trainees in the two cohorts provided data measuring problem and/or adaptive behavior for their case study. The average score for the plans targeting problem behavior was 4.3 on a scale of 1 (no improvement) to 5 (significant improvement) across training groups and behaviors. The average score for the link between the function and intervention selected across training groups (N=14 trainees) and across behaviors (N=38) was 4.1 on a scale of 1 (some elements addressed) to 5 (all elements were addressed). Additional data on quality of life measures and for the third cohort of trainees will also be presented. |
|
Outcome of Training on Child Behavior. |
AMANDA TYRELL (Community Living Opportunities, Inc.), Rachel L. Freeman (University of Kansas), Nanette L. Perrin (Early Childhood Autism Program, Community Living Opportunities, Inc.) |
Abstract: Results from two case studies will be provided describing the functional assessment data collected, the hypothesis statement of function based on the assessment developed, the interventions developed by the child’s team, and the outcome data on the child’s problem behavior. Data were collected using an AB experimental design across settings. This data will be presented in an AB design with outcome data for a two young children with autism spectrum disorders in both school and community settings. Measures on the frequency of problem behavior and adaptive behavior before and after the intervention indicated a significant reduction in problem behavior for each child. Specifically, for Brant, there was a 52% reduction from baseline in noncompliance, an 82% reduction from baseline in property destruction, and 93% reduction from baseline in tantrums based on the intervention developed by the trainee. In addition, the parents of both children scored the intervention a mean of 6 on a 6 point scale for contextual fit for both children and a mean of 4.75 and 4.85 on a quality of life survey. Data from additional case studies will also be presented to demonstrate the direct impact of the training on the individual behavior of the consumers being served by the KIPBS trainees. |
|
The Impact of Training in ABA and PBS on State and Local Agency Planning. |
JENNIFER R. ZARCONE (University of Rochester Medical Center), Rachel L. Freeman (University of Kansas), Pat Kimbrough (University of Kansas), Constance Tieghi (University of Kansas) |
Abstract: The fidelity and impact measures described in this symposium provide data to identify weaknesses and improve overall training outcomes. Trainees are then expected to have an impact within their own organization by donating a minimum of 12 hours a year implementing a systems change program either at the local or state level. At this time, Cohort 1 graduates have reported 206 hours and cohort 2 graduate have reported 244 hours of systems change efforts including mentoring other KIPBS students (cohort 1=60 hours; cohort 2=115 hours), providing PBS awareness presentations across the state (cohort 1=52 hours; cohort 2=20 hours), mentoring professionals within one’s organization (cohort 1=22 hours; cohort=42 hours), inservice training related to PBS (cohort 1=14 hours; cohort 2=39 hours), organization-wide systems change (cohort 1=58 hours; cohort 2=25 hours). These systems change efforts are occurring in 18 counties across Kansas and statewide PBS planning meetings have just started occurring to begin as a way to encourage interagency collaboration and action planning. In addition, the impact of the KIPBS website statistics have led to a complete revision of the site. As a result, the number of visitors to the site has grown from 69 in August 2002 to 2,204 in September 2005. |
|
|
|
|
Practical Applications of Token Systems, Visual Schedules, Behavior Plans, and ABA Consultation- Practical Issues |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
10:30 AM–11:50 AM |
Chicago A-F |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Melissa J. Andretta (Andretta Behavior Analysts) |
CE Instructor: Melissa J. Andretta, M.S. |
Abstract: This symposium includes presentations that focus on the practical applications of using the science of behavior for the educational needs of students with autism. Practical issues and suggestions for an ABA Consultant will focus on issues that an ABA consultant may face when proving those services. This presentation is applicable to individuals who provide ABA consultation services, as well as owners of companies that provide ABA consultation services. Practical applications and examples of: token-based motivational systems will focus on using token systems to increase academic skills, to increase appropriate social behavior, and to increase habilitative responses (academically, behaviorally, and socially). Practical applications and examples of behavior plans/contracts will focus on developing and implementing behavior plans/behavior contracts, based on the results of the functional analysis. Practical applications and examples of visual schedules will focus on various visual activity schedules used to promote independence, social interactions, & communication skills, as an instructional tool, and to replace inappropriate behaviors with habilitative responses. A comparison (on the target behaviors) will be made between the use of an individualized motivation system and a motivation system used in conjunction with an activity schedule. For each data-based presentation, data systems will be discussed in terms of analyzing the function of the inappropriate behavior, creating data sheets, visually representing data, and assessing the ongoing success of the activity schedule. Examples of specific token systems, behavior plans, and activity schedules, as well as visual representations of the corresponding data, will be shown during the presentation. |
|
Practical Issues for an ABA Consultant working in School-Based and Home-Based Educational Programs. |
MELISSA J. ANDRETTA (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Allison Cellura (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Jennifer Folbert (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Kristina Piper (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Cindy Mulstay (Andretta Behavior Analysts) |
Abstract: This presentation will focus on practical issues that an ABA consultant may face when proving services to children with autism. While there will be reference to specific interventions, this presentation is designed to illustrate components, and concerns, that can be applied by a consultant who is a behavior analyst. This presentation will cover topics that are applicable to individuals who provide ABA consultation services, privately, as well as topics that are relevant to owners of companies that provide ABA consultation services. Specific examples of the application of behavior analysis to consultation services will be discussed, and visual representations of any materials or data will be provided. |
|
Practical Applications and Examples of Token-based Motivational Systems used by Children with Autism. |
JENNIFER FOLBERT (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Melissa J. Andretta (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Allison Cellura (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Kristina Piper (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Cindy Mulstay (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Sandy Eggeling (Andretta Behavior Analysts) |
Abstract: This presentation will focus on practical applications of using token systems with children with autism, to increase academic skills, to increase appropriate social behavior, and to increase the occurrence of habilitative responses (academically, behaviorally, and socially). Data systems will be discussed in terms of creating data sheets, visually representing data, and using that data to determine if changes in the token system is necessary, (on a continuous basis). Examples of specific token boards used with each student, as well as visual representations of the corresponding data for each student, will be shown during the presentation. |
|
Practical Applications and Examples of Behavior Intervention Plans, used by Children with Autism. |
MELISSA J. ANDRETTA (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Allison Cellura (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Jennifer Folbert (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Kristina Piper (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Cindy Mulstay (Andretta Behavior Analysts) |
Abstract: This presentation will focus on practical applications of developing and implementing behavior intervention plans/behavior contracts. Methods for determining the function of target behavior will be discussed, and examples will be provided as necessary. There will be a focus on how to develop a behavior plan based on the results of the functional analysis. Data systems will be discussed in terms of: analyzing the function of the inappropriate behavior, creating data sheets, visually representing data, and using that data to determine if changes in the token system is necessary, on a continuous basis. Examples of specific behavior plans used with each student, as well as visual representations of the corresponding data for each student, will be shown during the presentation. |
|
Practical Applications and Examples of Using Visual Activity Schedules by Children with Autism. |
JENNIFER FOLBERT (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Melissa J. Andretta (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Allison Cellura (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Kristina Piper (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Cindy Mulstay (Andretta Behavior Analysts), Sandy Eggeling (Andretta Behavior Analysts) |
Abstract: The presentation will focus on practical applications of visual activity schedules used by children with autism, to promote independence, social interactions, communication skills, as an instructional tool, and to decrease inappropriate behaviors and replace them with habilitative responses. Methods to create an initial schedule, for students on various levels (a reader, a pre-reader, a writer, etc.), as well as for different purposes (a play schedule vs. an instructional schedule, vs. an academic schedule, etc.) will be discussed, and examples of such schedules will be presented. Data systems will be discussed in terms of the effectiveness of each activity schedule. Data are analyzed to determine if changes in the visual schedule is necessary, on a continuous basis. A comparison will be made between the use of an individualized motivation system and a motivation system used in conjunction with an activity schedule (on the target behaviors/responses). Examples of specific visual schedules used with each student, as well as visual representations of the corresponding data for each student, will be presented during the discussion at the paper session. |
|
|
|
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Professional Development Series: Introduction to Stimulus Relations |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom I |
Area: EAB |
Chair: Christy A. Alligood (West Virginia University) |
CE Instructor: Murray Sidman, Ph.D. |
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: Professional Development Series: Introduction to Stimulus Relations |
Abstract: An introductory tutorial on equivalence relations and behavior. Procedural fundamentals and background. |
|
MURRAY SIDMAN (N/a) |
|
Dr. Murray Sidman started at Columbia University in 1940. After World War II military service, he returned to complete his AB, and went on to a Ph.D in 1952. His principal advisors, Fred S. Keller and W. N. Schoenfeld, had strong assists from Ralph Hefferline. |
|
|
|
|
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: The Six Boxes Model: Performance Management in a Plain English Context |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
11:00 AM–11:50 AM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: OBM |
Chair: Timothy D. Ludwig (Appalachian State University) |
CE Instructor: Carl V. Binder, Ph.D. |
|
2006 ABA Tutorial: The Six Boxes Model: Performance Management in a Plain English Context |
Abstract: The Six Boxes Model is a plain English derivative of Thomas F. Gilberts Behavior Engineering Model (BEM). Easier to comprehend and communicate to clients than the BEM, this framework provides a container for all the factors that influence behavior in a work environment. It also serves executives, managers, and performance improvement professionals as a simple but powerful tool for improving many management and performance development functions, including: organizational alignment, needs analysis, performance design, training support, implementation planning for new systems/programs/strategies, management development, and individual or group performance problem-solving. This tutorial introduces the model and provides an overview of each of its cells and the interdependencies among them with the plain English vocabulary that one might use with our non-technical clients and colleagues. The presentation will outline some key applications for this model and point to bodies of research and application from both behavioral and non-behavioral sources that can be encompassed and better understood in the context of The Six Boxes. Finally, the session will touch on our more recent applications of the model as a tool for enabling performance thinking across functions and levels in organizations to facilitate organizational agility and management effectiveness. |
|
CARL V. BINDER (Binder Riha Associates) |
|
Dr. Carl Binder began his career as a graduate student with B.F. Skinner at Harvard, subsequently serving as Associate Director at B.H. Barrett’s Behavior Prosthesis Laboratory from 1973 to 1982. He has spent over 25 years helping to train teachers in educational agencies and accelerate performance in sales, marketing, customer service, and operations at Global 2000 and public sector organizations. Founder of three consulting firms, he is currently Senior Partner at Binder Riha Associates in Santa Rosa, CA. He has developed and commercialized the FluencyBuildingTM learning and coaching methodology, the Product Knowledge ArchitectureTM for sales and marketing effectiveness, and Six Boxes™ Performance Management. A widely published author in performance management, sales and marketing effectiveness, instructional design, educational policy, performance measurement, and related fields, he has won awards from the International Society for Performance Improvement (ISPI) and from Division 25 of the American Psychological Association for his pragmatic, research-based contributions. Download many of his publications at http://www.binder-riha.com/publications.htm and find out more about The Six Boxes model at http://www.SixBoxes.com |
|
|
|
|
|
Some of My Best Friends are Synapses: How Brain Science Can Inform Behavioral Intervention |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
12:00 PM–12:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom II |
Area: AUT; Domain: Theory |
CE Instructor: Travis Thompson, Ph.D. |
Chair: Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University) |
TRAVIS THOMPSON (School of Medicine, University of Minnesota) |
Dr. Travis Thompson is a professor of pediatrics, in the School of Medicine at the University of Minnesota. He earned his Ph.D. in psychology at the University of Minnesota; and completed his post-doctoral work at the University of Maryland and at Cambridge University, UK. He was previously Director of the John F. Kennedy Center, Vanderbilt University and Smith Professor of Psychiatry, University of Kansas Medical Center. Thompson was co-developer with C. R. Schuster of the drug self-administration model for screening potentially addictive drugs. He developed one of the early large-scale behavioral intervention programs for people with developmental disabilities. His applied and basic research includes experimental and applied behavior analysis, behavioral pharmacology, genetics and most recently brain imaging. Served as advisor/co-advisor of 47 doctorates in psychology, pharmacology, and special education. Awards: APA Div. 25 Don Hake Award (1990), the Research Award, Amer. Assoc. for Mental Retardation (1995), Distinguished Research Award, The Arc of the United States (1996), the Academy of Mental Retardation, Career Scientist Award (1998) and the American Psychological Association Div. 33 Edgar A. Doll Award (2002). Past president of the Behavioral Pharmacology Society, APA Divisions 28 (Psychopharmacology) and 33 (Mental Retardation and Developmental Disabilities). Author of 217 journal articles and chapters and author/editor of 25 books. |
Abstract: Skinner's earliest work was influenced by Harvard physiologist L.J. Henderson and by C.S. Sherrington's reflex arc. While attracted to physiology's experimental method, Skinner rejected hypothetical constructs referring to immeasurable brain and genetic events. He later noted that the skin is not an important barrier suggesting variables within a behavioral analysis may reside beneath the skin. Nonetheless, Skinner's antipathy toward reductionistic explanation led later behavior analysts to ignore the legitimate role neurobiological events can play as variables within the analysis of behavior. Objectively measurable neurochemical and neurophysiological events can serve as discriminative and reinforcing stimuli as well as functioning as establishing operations. Understanding developmental brain dysfunction can shed light on the reasons individuals with specific disabilities behave as they do and suggest behavioral intervention strategies. Developmental neuroplasticity affords the opportunity to promote synapse formation in brain structures lacking sufficient connectivity, preventing further neuronal loss through cell pruning. Behavioral assessment tools (e.g. ABLLS) can be used in conjunction with knowledge of which structures play a role in specific cognitive and behavioral functions to inform intervention strategies. The role of genes mediating neurochemical abnormalities associated with specific disabilities (e.g. autism, Prader Willi syndrome) will illustrate the relation between genes, neurochemistry and behavior analysis. |
|
|
|
|
Basic Research Models of Clinical Disorders and Clinical Treatments |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
12:00 PM–1:20 PM |
Manila |
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research |
Chair: Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida) |
CE Instructor: Timothy R. Vollmer, Ph.D. |
Abstract: In this series of presentations, basic research models that relate directly to clinical disorders and clinical treatments are described. In the first paper, Michael H. May will report on a study showing that access to aggression functions as reinforcement in mice. Schedule control characteristic of common reinforcement schedules were obtained. In the second paper, Maria H. Couppis will examine the hypothesis that mesocorticolimbic dopamine modulates the reinforcing properties of aggression in mice. In a third paper, Kimberly Sloman, using a rat operant model, compares three reinforcement schedules commonly used as behavioral treatments for severe behavior disorders. The schedules include differential reinforcement of other behavior, fixed time, and momentary differential reinforcement. In the fourth paper, Andrew Samaha, also using a rat model, will present data showing the effects of various reinforcement contingency values on lever pressing. In addition, he will present a method for extending the research to humans. |
|
Schedule Analyses of Aggression as a Positive Reinforcer. |
MICHAEL MAY (Vanderbilt University), Maria H. Couppis (Vanderbilt University), Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University) |
Abstract: Violent behaviors, such as aggression, appear in most phyla and seem to serve an adaptive function. However, the appearance of these behaviors in human beings can be associated with a range of detrimental societal outcomes. For people with developmental disabilities, the occurrence of aggression is associated with placement in more restrictive residential and educational settings and a diminished quality of life. Although a great deal of preclinical research has been done on the neurobiology of aggression, little is known about the operant characteristics of these behaviors and the neurobiology that might underlie their occurrence. It is plausible that a better understanding of possible reward mechanisms related to aggression may lead to improved behavioral and/or pharmacological treatments. An important first step in pursuit of this goal is to isolate aggression as an operant response that can be studied in its own right. In this presentation, we present data on aggression as a positive reinforcer for an arbitrary response (i.e., nose poking) in mice. The experiments used Male Swiss-Webster mice in the resident-intruder paradigm. Initially, mice were taught to nose poke as an operant response to earn liquid. Once stable patterns of responding were established, the liquid was withdrawn as a consequence and a novel intruder mouse was introduced when the response contingency was met. We obtained response patterns characteristic of fixed-ratio, fixed-interval, and DRL reinforcement schedules suggesting that access to aggression functioned as a positive reinforcer. Tests using a progressive-ratio reinforcement schedule showed a “break point” significantly lower than for liquid reinforcement, suggesting that access to aggression was a lesser valence stimulus than liquid. Our findings provide a potential model system and experimental paradigm for analyzing the neurobiology of aggression within the context of its stimulus properties as a positive reinforcer. |
|
Role of the Nucleus Accumbens in the Positively Reinforcing Effects of Aggression. |
MARIA H. COUPPIS (Vanderbilt University), Michael May (Vanderbilt University), Craig H. Kennedy (Vanderbilt University) |
Abstract: Behavioral research suggests that aggression serves as a positive reinforcer. However, the brain mechanisms underlying aggression as a reinforcer remain to be determined. This study examined the hypothesis that mesocorticolimbic dopamine in the nucleus accumbens (NAc) modulates the reinforcing properties of aggression. ‘Resident’ male mice were trained to perform a nose-poke task on a VR-5 schedule for the opportunity to aggress toward an ‘intruder’ mouse. After obtaining a stable baseline nose-poke rate, in vivo micro-infusion of 3 different doses of dopamine receptor (DR) 1 and DR2 antagonists, SCH-23390 and Sulpiride, were administered into the NAc. Sulpiride reduced responding at all three doses and did not affect movement at the low and medium doses. SCH-23390 lowered responding at medium and high but was accompanied by reduced movement. These data suggest that mesocorticolimbic dopamine does modulate aggression as a reinforcer though pharmacological manipulation in humans may be limited by motor side effects. |
|
A Laboratory Comparison of Differential Reinforcement of Other Behavior (DRO), Noncontingent Reinforcement (NCR), and Momentary DRO. |
KIMBERLY SLOMAN (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Andrew Samaha (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) and noncontingent reinforcement (NCR) are commonly used treatments to decrease aberrant behavior. Some previous research has reported problems with these treatments including the occurrence of extinction bursts (DRO), adventitious reinforcement (NCR), and difficulty with implementation (DRO). During momentary DRO, a reinforcer is delivered if responding is absent in the last portion of an interval. Thus, momentary DRO may prevent adventitious reinforcement and may also minimize the occurrence of extinction bursts while maintaining the "ease of implementation" associate with NCR. The purpose of the present experiment was to evaluate DRO, NCR, and momentary DRO in a laboratory using rats. The treatments were evaluated within subject using multielement and reversal designs. Dependent measures included rate of responding, highest response point, average of first and last five points of the condition, and rate of reinforcement. Preliminary findings suggest that all of the treatments were effective in reducing response rates. However, overall response rates and highest response point were somewhat lower in the momentary DRO condition. Implications for implementation of momentary DRO in applied settings will be discussed. |
|
Animal and Human-Operant Models of Common Behavioral Treatments. |
ANDREW SAMAHA (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida), Kimberly Sloman (University of Florida) |
Abstract: Using rat and human operant preparations, contingency values of various strength were arranged by altering the probability of a reinforcer given a response and the probability of a reinforcer given no response. A positive contingency (random-ratio like) was programmed by arranging a higher probability of a reinforcer following periods with responses (lever press for rats, computer key pressing with a target for humans) than following periods without a response. Negative (DRO like) contingencies followed the opposite pattern. In general, responding maintained under positive contingencies and decreased under negative contingencies. However, the effects of positive and negative contingency conditions depended on the strength of the contingency in the prior condition. These results have implications for applied behavior analysis in terms of arranging contingencies in skill acquisition (positive contingencies following a history of neutral or negative contingencies) and behavior reduction (negative contingencies in differential reinforcement of other behavior following a long history of positive contingencies for problem behavior). |
|
|
|
|
Health, Sport, & Fitness: Innovations in Applied Behavior Analysis |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
12:00 PM–1:20 PM |
Spring |
Area: PRA; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Michael A. Kirkpatrick (Wesley College) |
CE Instructor: Michael A. Kirkpatrick, Ph.D. |
Abstract: While the health, sport, and fitness fields are historically dominated by theoretical orientations derived from medicine and traditional educational practices, behavior analysts are driving empirical innovation. We report on four very distinct and potentially burgeoning areas: (a) empirically-derived, individually tailored exercise programs for chronic pain/fibromyalgia, (b) parent-supported weight reduction in down syndrome, (c) the effects of controlling contingencies on healthy eating, exercise and fitness behaviors, and (d) behavior following instructions to perform sport-related visual imagery. Despite broad differences in the content areas under study, these investigations together function to extend the application of behavior analysis into new domains in health, sport, and fitness. |
|
Effects of Contrived, Extrinsic, and Controlling Contingencies on the Maintenance, Enjoyment, and Interest in Healthy Eating, Exercise and Fitness Behaviors. |
STEPHEN RAY FLORA (Youngstown State University) |
Abstract: Many fitness programs are successful in getting participants physically fit. However, after the program, most successful participants return to their pre-program fitness level or become even less fit. An untested, but theoretically possible reason for this is that contrived/controlling contingencies of the fitness program “undermine” the natural, “intrinsic,” reinforcers for becoming more physically fit. To test this possibility, participants entered a fitness program designed to maximize external/contrived/controlling contingencies for engaging in fitness behaviors. Specifically, following baseline measures, participants pinpointed exercise, diet, and lifestyle behaviors targeted for change. The behavior rates were graphed, publicly posted, and commitment statements and behavioral contracts were signed. Subjects earned money for themselves and charities for meeting behavior goals. Money went to disliked organizations for failure. Effects of the program on fitness, enjoyment and “intrinsic interest” in fitness behaviors were measured. |
|
Parent-Supported Weight Reduction for Children with Intellectual/Developmental Disabilities. |
RICHARD K. FLEMING (University of Massachusetts Medical School, E.K. Shriver Center), Carol Curtin (University of Massachusetts Medical School, E.K. Shriver Center), Linda Bandini (University of Massachusetts Medical School, E.K. Shriver Center), James Gleason (University of Massachusetts Medical School, E.K. Shriver Center), Elizabeth Jordan (Boston University) |
Abstract: The prevalence of childhood obesity has more than doubled in the last 20 years, with 10-15% of all children now meeting these criteria. Research on weight-loss programs for the general pediatric population is underway, but little is being done for children with intellectual and developmental disabilities (I/DD). This paper will describe a behavior analytic parent-supported weight reduction (PSWR) program for adolescents with I/DD. This research is supported by grants from the Deborah Munroe Noonan Memorial Fund and the John Alden Trust Foundation. In addition to receiving individualized diet and activity prescriptions, and a standard nutrition/activity educational program, participants (parent-child dyads) are taught to apply behavioral procedures: monitoring, stimulus (environmental) control, goal-setting, contracting, reinforcement and feedback. Data will be presented on: 1) pre- and post- Body Mass Index (BMIz) scores; 2) pre- and post- accelerometer readings; 3) pre- and post- nutrition and activity knowledge; 4) integrity of participants’ use of behavioral procedures; 5) participant satisfaction; and 6) participant self-recorded food intake and activity. Results will be discussed with respect to the potential effectiveness of behavioral procedures for weight loss in I/DD, and the team’s plans for a large randomized controlled trial (RCT). |
|
Empirically-derived, Individually Tailored Exercise Programs for Chronic Pain/Fibromyalgia. |
ROBERT M. STEIN (Lancaster, Pennsylvania) |
Abstract: Fibromyalgia is a poorly understood chronic pain syndrome that may involve some form of “somatosensory amplification” in which tactile stimulation and movement result in reports of pain exceeding what would otherwise be expected. Physical exercise programs are nearly universally recommended for chronic pain and fibromyalgia, but exercise can be a punishing experience with a low probability of maintenance. The current work sought to develop individualized exercise programs for individuals with chronic pain and fibromyalgia by focusing on several factors: 1) Movements that participants could engage in without pain, 2) Analysis of pain 1-3 days following exercise, and 3) Didactic instruction on the importance of movement in the management of chronic pain. A functional pain scale was developed that focused more on what participants could accomplish rather than a simple numeric scale. Data are presented demonstrating individualized development of exercise programs based on task performance and pain experience 1-3 days following exercise. |
|
Indirect Measures of Putative Covert Behavior following Instructions to Perform Sport-related Visual Imagery. |
AARON D. LESSER (Wesley College), Michael A. Kirkpatrick (Wesley College) |
Abstract: Imagery is widely regarded as an effective performance enhancement technique for athletes. Imaginal procedures for overcoming fear or trauma are also supported by a large and growing literature. However, most researchers and clinicians view "images" as either mental events or brain states, not as covert behavior. We propose imagery be conceptualized as subtle, covert behavior dependent upon an establishing history and an occasioning stimulus. Without attempting to control for existing visual learning histories, we instructed college students to "vividly imagine a standing basketball shot" under three different conditions. Both group and single-subject, alternating treatments designs were implemented. Participants used a stopwatch to time their imagined shots and completed questionnaires about their observations. Brief video clips showing a long or short distance basketball shot were used as stimuli to influence responding. Results suggest that the role of learning history in covert behavior is underestimated. Acquisition functions over multiple trials support the view that although not intersubjectively verifiable, behavior following imagery instructions is acquired through conditioning mechanisms. |
|
|
|
|
Precision Teaching and Social Skills Instruction for Learners with Autism |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
12:00 PM–1:20 PM |
Courtland |
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery |
Chair: Alison L. Moors (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Discussant: Shahla S. Ala'i-Rosales (University of North Texas) |
CE Instructor: Alison L. Moors, M.A. |
Abstract: Teaching children with autism the skills necessary for effective social interaction has been a hallmark of quality behavior analytic programming for decades. Often, students need to learn these skills in a highly structured teaching arrangement first before attempting to apply the skills in a generalized social environment. For tracking and analyzing progress with social skills, data collection techniques vary logistically depending on the environment. This symposium will highlight the use of Precision Teaching methodologies and procedures as an underlying tool for successful data collection practices both within group and individual learning sessions. |
|
Using Fluency Based Instruction to Teach Social Skills in a Small Group Setting. |
KRISTA ZAMBOLIN (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Heidi Calverley (University of British Columbia & Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Shelley McInnis (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Abstract: This paper will highlight a methodology for teaching social skills to a small group of 12 and 13 year old boys. This methodology incorporates techniques from fluency based instruction, video modeling, video feedback, role play, direct instruction and a variety of reinforcement strategies. Data and video clips will be presented to highlight the effectiveness of the programming. |
|
Increasing Independent Play through the Use of Activity Schedules and Precision Teaching in a Young Child with Autism. |
HEIDI CALVERLEY (University of British Columbia & Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kelly J. Ferris (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Abstract: Characteristics of Autism are often described in terms of the noticeable deficits in appropriate play. This paper will detail the steps taken to increase the independent play in a young child with autism through the use of activity schedules and Precision Teaching. Data will be provided documenting the acquisition of appropriate independent play tasks and the transition of those tasks to an activity schedule. Video will also be provided demonstrating the steps within the process. |
|
Decreasing Socially Incompatible Behavior that Competes with Social Responding. |
ALISON L. MOORS (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting), Kelly J. Ferris (Fabrizio/Moors Consulting) |
Abstract: Children with autism not only have marked deficits in social interaction skills, but they also may have self stimulatory/stereotypy needs which often impede their ability to contact socially reinforcing contingencies. This paper will demonstrate the use of the Standard Celeration Chart for highlighting the progress of social interaction skills and decrease in self stimulatory behaviors for a 10 year old child with severe autism and paralysis who uses an augmentative communication device. |
|
|
|
|
Fluent Responding in Staff and Students: A Predictor of Outcome |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
12:30 PM–1:50 PM |
Regency V |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Kara Muirhead (HMEA) |
Discussant: Kara Muirhead (HMEA) |
CE Instructor: Kara Muirhead, None |
Abstract: Binder (1996) discusses the outcomes of fluency including, retention, endurance, application and performance standards. Fluency is an often overlooked stage in learning. Most training for staff and teaching programs for children focus on accuracy only methods. When a skill is fluent, it becomes second nature, increasing the probability for retention, endurance and application. Performance standards are individualized in order to promote these outcomes. The studies in this symposium, individualize strategies in order to attain fluent responding in staff and students. The monitoring of staff implementation could have a direct effect on child outcomes. Performance feedback and video modeling are two strategies that can be applied in order to increase treatment integrity in the absence of an on site consultant. Comparisons between its use within analogue vs. in vivo settings will be discussed. Binder (1996) discusses the outcomes of fluency including, retention, endurance, application and performance standards. Fluency is an often overlooked stage in learning. Most training for staff and teaching programs for children focus on accuracy only methods. When a skill is fluent, it becomes second nature, increasing the probability for retention, endurance and application. Performance standards are individualized in order to promote these outcomes. The studies in this symposium, individualize strategies in order to attain fluent responding in staff and students. The monitoring of staff implementation of programming when a consultant is not on site is a challenge. Improper treatment implementation could have a direct effect on child outcomes. Personalized systems of instruction and video modeling are two strategies that can be applied in order to increase treatment integrity in the absence of an on site consultant. Performance feedback is a more direct method of increasing performance. All of these strategies have been shown effective in increasing fluent responding in staff and students. |
|
Effects of Treatment Integrity on Child Outcomes in Discrete Trial Programs: A Replication and Extension. |
KARA MUIRHEAD (HMEA), Sandra M. Beaton-Small (HMEA), Stacey Considine (HMEA) |
Abstract: Researchers (Sarkoff & Sturmey, 2004) have recently begun to evaluate the treatment integrity of discrete trial teaching provided by direct care staff in home-based settings with children with autism. An effective and efficient monitoring system that can be utilized by supervisors of these programs is necessary due to the many other responsibilities that they have within a home visit (e.g. meeting with parents or making program changes). The present researchers previously evaluated the efficacy of a seven-step written and verbal feedback package on the implementation of discrete trial programs for children with autism in their homes that could be implemented by program supervisors. The feedback package was effective in improving staff performance, however, a correlation with marked child improvement was not observed. Therefore, the purpose of the present paper is to first, replicate the effects of the feedback package using a modified data collection system with newly hired direct care staff and second, to extend the previous research by evaluating child outcomes as they are related to staff fluency. A multiple baseline across discrete trial programs will be used with all staff-child dyads. Data will be collected on staff accuracy and fluency of program implementation and child response accuracy.KEYWORDS: Discrete trial teaching, autism, home-based, fluency, treatment integrity, staff training |
|
Assuring the Fluency of Paraprofessional Teaching Skills in Home Based Services. |
JANICE R. BOLTON (HMEA), Stefanie A. Salome (HMEA), Michele D. Mayer (HMEA) |
Abstract: Research indicates that intensive behavioral treatment programs are a promising intervention for children with autism. These treatment programs are characterized by the provision of concentrated individual instruction within each treatment session so that the child receives as many learning opportunities as possible. Frequently, these programs rely upon paraprofessional staff to provide direct one to one instruction to the child under the oversight of a supervising clinician. As many of these paraprofessionals have not received formal education in the implementation of behavioral treatment and, as supervising clinicians contact may be limited, it is vital that the paraprofessionals are effectively trained. To assure that the paraprofessional is able to provide the intensity of instruction required, it is important that training packages address both accuracy and fluency of teaching. This study uses a multiple baseline across subjects to evaluate the effectiveness of a brief staff training aimed at teaching fluent implementation of discrete trial teaching. A training package using a practice to fluency aim, along with specific performance feedback, was implemented in an analogue setting and found to successfully generalize to the treatment setting. |
|
Investigating the Effectiveness of Video Modeling and Performance Feedback to Train Staff to Fluency. |
STACEY CONSIDINE (HMEA), Laurie Richardson (HMEA), Stefanie A. Salome (HMEA), Kara Muirhead (HMEA) |
Abstract: Staff training is a critical concern when services for children with autism are implemented in a home-based setting. The use of both antecedent (demonstration) and consequent (feedback and checklists) conditions are important in increasing and maintaining staff skills (Harschik et al, 1989). Performance feedback has also shown to maintain staff skills (Iwata, 1982; Parsons & Reid, 1995). Many studies have shown that trained staff can implement behavioral programming for children in various settings with a high degree of treatment integrity. Accuracy of implementation does not necessarily facilitate fluency of implementation. When learners achieve certain frequencies of accurate performance they retain and remain on task or endure for periods of time. Binder, Haughton, and Van Eyk (1995) noted that endurance, the ability to continuously perform skills over increasing durations, is a by-product of fluency. The purpose of this study is to first examine the effects of video modeling and feedback in increasing staff fluency and second to examine the relationship between staff fluency and their ability to maintain high levels of responding within a session. A multiple baseline across subjects design will be used and data will be collected on staff accuracy and fluency of program implementation as well as generalization probes across settingsKeywords: fluency, endurance, staff training, video modeling, performance feedback. |
|
|
|
|
The Cutting Edge of Behavioral Treatment and Education of Young Children with Autism |
Tuesday, May 30, 2006 |
12:30 PM–1:50 PM |
Centennial Ballroom III |
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research |
Chair: Barbara A. Metzger (Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools) |
Discussant: Barbara A. Metzger (Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools) |
CE Instructor: Barbara A. Metzger, Ph.D. |
Abstract: Behavior Analysts have been extremely successful in teaching a wide variety of skills to young children with autism including language, academic, imitation and self-help. Especially important to the long-term success of a child with autism is the ability to develop functional communication and play skills. This symposium presents three innovative approaches to improving communication and play skills to children with autism. The first presentation presents a shaping methodology to teach a non-verbal child to use expressive communication. The second presentation addresses making play an essential component of an ABA program. It looks at how to teach new play skills and expand social play while at the same time keeping play fun. While the first two presentations are from the perspective of home-based programs, the third presentation takes ABA into the classroom. Successful replication of the key features of a home-based program into a group setting will increase the accessibility of ABA. |
|
From Nothing to Words: A Shaping Procedure to Teach Verbal Skills. |
VIRGINIA CAROLINE MINICOZZI (Western North Carolina Behavioral Education, Services and Treatment) |
Abstract: This presentation will discuss how verbal behavior was shaped for a 2 year old with Autism who had no verbal skills initially. Tools used to determine what to teach and when to teach skills will be discussed. |
|
Play: It’s Not Just Another Program. |
ANGELA L. POLETTI (Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools), Sabrina Mong (Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools), Louise B. Southern (Winston-Salem/Forsyth County Schools) |
Abstract: Autism is characterized by major deficits in play skills. We have developed an approach to teaching play which emphasizes the function, rather than the structure, of play. We will discuss the various aspects of play including: why we play; the hierarchy of play; kinds of play; assessing motivation during play; expanding play; incorporating language in play; and playing with peers. We will be presenting video footage of assorted types of play and showcasing individual students at varying levels of social play ranging from non-social to reciprocal social and beginning pretend play. We will also be sharing some of the benefits play has provided in the lives of young children with autism in home-based therapy programs. |
|
Making ABA Work in the Classroom. |
LIZA LINDENFELD (Johnston County Schools) |
Abstract: The methodologies and curriculum commonly used in home-based early intervention programs were modified to be applied in a self-contained autism classroom with five students with mild to severe autism. Instruction was modified to meet the individual needs of each child. Goals were met using large group and small group instruction as well as using one-to-one instruction. One-to-one instruction was carried out during the day with the teacher and the classroom assistant. Play and communication skills for all children were focused on throughout the day in the classroom and during recess. Behavior management, a large part of making ABA work in a classroom setting, will also be discussed. Several methods of behavior management were used to ensure success for the students and to teach the students appropriate social skills in the classroom and on the playground. Video will be shown of the students during large group, small group and one to one instruction from the beginning, middle, and end of the school year. |
|
|